Yamaha RX-V1500 El manual del propietario
- Categoría
- Receptor
- Tipo
- El manual del propietario
Este manual también es adecuado para
YAMAHA ELECTRONICS CORPORATION, USA
6660 ORANGETHORPE AVE., BUENA PARK, CALIF. 90620, U.S.A.
YAMAHA CANADA MUSIC LTD.
135 MILNER AVE., SCARBOROUGH, ONTARIO M1S 3R1, CANADA
YAMAHA ELECTRONIK EUROPA G.m.b.H.
SIEMENSSTR. 22-34, 25462 RELLINGEN BEI HAMBURG, F.R. OF GERMANY
YAMAHA ELECTRONIQUE FRANCE S.A.
RUE AMBROISE CROIZAT BP70 CROISSY-BEAUBOURG 77312 MARNE-LA-VALLEE CEDEX02, FRANCE
YAMAHA ELECTRONICS (UK) LTD.
YAMAHA HOUSE, 200 RICKMANSWORTH ROAD WATFORD, HERTS WD18 7GQ, ENGLAND
YAMAHA SCANDINAVIA A.B.
J A WETTERGRENS GATA 1, BOX 30053, 400 43 VÄSTRA FRÖLUNDA, SWEDEN
YAMAHA MUSIC AUSTRALIA PTY, LTD.
17-33 MARKET ST., SOUTH MELBOURNE, 3205 VIC., AUSTRALIA
©
2004 All rights reserved.
Printed in Malaysia WD64170
RX-V1500
AV Receiver
OWNER'S MANUAL
U
PHILCO 0062
PHILIPS 0062, 0108, 0645,
1108, 1208
PHONOLA 0108
PILOT 0064
PIONEER 0069, 0094, 0108
POLK AUDIO 0108
PROFITRONIC 0267
PROLINE 0027
PROSCAN 0087, 1087
PROTEC 0099
PULSAR 0066
PYE 0108
QUASAR 0062, 1062
QUELLE 0108
RCA 0062, 0069, 0087,
0267, 0834, 1062,
1087
RADIOSHACK 0027
RADIOLA 0108
RADIX 0064
RANDEX 0064
REALISTIC 0027, 0062, 0064,
0074, 0075, 0131
REOC 0375
REPLAYTV 0641, 0643
REX 0068
ROADSTAR 0064, 0099, 0267,
0305
RUNCO 0066
SBR 0108
SEG 0267
SEI 0108
STS 0069
SABA 0068, 0347
SALORA 0070
SAMPO 0064, 0075
SAMSUNG 0072, 0267, 0459
SANKY 0066, 0075
SANSUI 0027, 0068, 0094,
1506
SANYO 0074, 0131, 0267
SAVILLE 0379
SCHAUB LORENZ 0027, 0068,
0131
SCHNEIDER 0027, 0099, 0108
SCOTT 0070, 0072, 0211
SEARS 0027, 0062, 0064,
0069, 0074, 0131,
1264
SELECO 0068
SEMP 0072
SHARP 0075, 0834
SHINTOM 0099, 0131
SIEMENS 0064, 0108, 0131
SILVA 0064
SINGER 0072, 0099
SINUDYNE 0108
SONIC BLUE 0641, 0643
SONTEC 0064
SONY 0027, 0059, 0060,
0062, 0663, 1259
SUNKAI 0375
SUNSTAR 0027
SUNTRONIC 0027
SYLVANIA 0027, 0062, 0108,
0070, 1808
SYMPHONIC 0027
TMK 0267
TANDY 0027, 0131
TASHIKO 0027, 0064
TATUNG 0027, 0068, 0072,
0094, 0108
TEAC 0027, 0068, 0305,
0334, 0669
TECHNICS 0062, 0253
TECO 0062, 0064, 0068,
0075
TEKNIKA 0027, 0062, 0064
TELEAVIA 0068
TELEFUNKEN 0068, 0347
TENOSAL 0099
TENSAI 0027
THOMAS 0027
THOMSON 0068, 0087, 0094,
0347
THORN 0068, 0131
TIVO 0645, 0663
TOSHIBA 0068, 0070, 0072,
0094, 0108, 0872
TOTEVISION 0064, 0267
UHER 0267
UNITECH 0267
UNIVERSUM 0027, 0064, 0108,
0267
VECTOR 0072
VICTOR 0068, 0094
VIDEO CONCEPTS 0072
VIDEOMAGIC 0064
VIDEOSONIC 0267
VILLAIN 0027
WARDS 0027, 0062, 0069,
0074, 0075, 0087,
0099, 0108, 0267
WHITE WESTINGHOUSE
0099
XR-1000 0027, 0062, 0099
YAMAHA 0068
YAMISHI 0099
YOKAN 0099
YOKO 0267
ZENITH 0027, 0060, 0066,
1506
IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
i
• Explanation of Graphical Symbols
The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol, within an
equilateral triangle, is intended to alert you to the
presence of uninsulated “dangerous voltage” within
the product’s enclosure that may be of sufficient
magnitude to constitute a risk of electric shock to
persons.
The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle
is intended to alert you to the presence of important
operating and maintenance (servicing) instructions in
the literature accompanying the appliance.
1 Read Instructions – All the safety and operating instructions
should be read before the product is operated.
2 Retain Instructions – The safety and operating instructions
should be retained for future reference.
3 Heed Warnings – All warnings on the product and in the
operating instructions should be adhered to.
4 Follow Instructions – All operating and use instructions
should be followed.
5 Cleaning – Unplug this product from the wall outlet before
cleaning. Do not use liquid cleaners or aerosol cleaners. Use
a clean, dry cloth for cleaning.
6 Attachments – Do not use attachments not recommended by
the product manufacturer as they may cause hazards.
7 Water and Moisture – Do not use this product near water –
for example, near a bath tub, wash bowl, kitchen sink, or
laundry tub; in a wet basement; or near a swimming pool;
and the like.
8 Accessories – Do not place this product on an unstable cart,
stand, tripod, bracket, or table. The product may fall,
causing serious injury to a child or adult, and serious
damage to the product. Use only with a cart, stand, tripod,
bracket, or table recommended by the manufacturer, or sold
with the product. Any mounting of the product should
follow the manufacturer’s instructions, and should use a
mounting accessory recommended by the manufacturer.
9 A product and cart combination should be moved with care.
Quick stops, excessive force, and uneven
surfaces may cause the product and cart
combination to overturn.
10 Ventilation – Slots and openings in the cabinet are provided
for ventilation and to ensure reliable operation of the
product and to protect it from overheating, and these
openings must not be blocked or covered. The openings
should never be blocked by placing the product on a bed,
sofa, rug, or other similar surface. This product should not
be placed in a built-in installation such as a bookcase or rack
unless proper ventilation is provided or the manufacturer’s
instructions have been adhered to.
11 Power Sources – This product should be operated only from
the type of power source indicated on the marking label. If
you are not sure of the type of power supply to your home,
consult your product dealer or local power company. For
products intended to operate from battery power, or other
sources, refer to the operating instructions.
12 Grounding or Polarization – This product may be equipped
with a polarized alternating current line plug (a plug having
one blade wider than the other). This plug will fit into the
power outlet only one way. This is a safety feature. If you
are unable to insert the plug fully into the outlet, try
reversing the plug. If the plug should still fail to fit, contact
your electrician to replace your obsolete outlet. Do not
defeat the safety purpose of the polarized plug.
13 Power-Cord Protection – Power-supply cords should be
routed so that they are not likely to be walked on or pinched
by items placed upon or against them, paying particular
attention to cords at plugs, convenience receptacles, and the
point where they exit from the product.
14 Lightning – For added protection for this product during a
lightning storm, or when it is left unattended and unused for
long periods of time, unplug it from the wall outlet and
disconnect the antenna or cable system. This will prevent
damage to the product due to lightning and power-line
surges.
15 Power Lines – An outside antenna system should not be
located in the vicinity of overhead power lines or other
electric light or power circuits, or where it can fall into such
power lines or circuits. When installing an outside antenna
system, extreme care should be taken to keep from touching
such power lines or circuits as contact with them might be
fatal.
16 Overloading – Do not overload wall outlets, extension
cords, or integral convenience receptacles as this can result
in a risk of fire or electric shock.
17 Object and Liquid Entry – Never push objects of any kind
into this product through openings as they may touch
dangerous voltage points or short-out parts that could result
in a fire or electric shock. Never spill liquid of any kind on
the product.
18 Servicing – Do not attempt to service this product yourself
as opening or removing covers may expose you to
dangerous voltage or other hazards. Refer all servicing to
qualified service personnel.
19 Damage Requiring Service – Unplug this product from the
wall outlet and refer servicing to qualified service personnel
under the following conditions:
a) When the power-supply cord or plug is damaged,
b) If liquid has been spilled, or objects have fallen into the
product,
c) If the product has been exposed to rain or water,
IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
CAUTION
CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF
ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE
COVER (OR BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE
PARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO
QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL.
RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK
DO NOT OPEN
IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
ii
EXAMPLE OF ANTENNA GROUNDING
MAST
GROUND
CLAMP
ANTENNA
LEAD IN
WIRE
ANTENNA
DISCHARGE UNIT
(NEC SECTION 810–20)
GROUNDING CONDUCTORS
(NEC SECTION 810–21)
GROUND CLAMPS
POWER SERVICE GROUNDING
ELECTRODE SYSTEM
(NEC ART 250. PART H)
ELECTRIC
SERVICE
EQUIPMENT
NEC – NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE
d) If the product does not operate normally by following
the operating instructions. Adjust only those controls
that are covered by the operating instructions as an
improper adjustment of other controls may result in
damage and will often require extensive work by a
qualified technician to restore the product to its normal
operation,
e) If the product has been dropped or damaged in any
way, and
f) When the product exhibits a distinct change in perfor-
mance - this indicates a need for service.
20 Replacement Parts – When replacement parts are required,
be sure the service technician has used replacement parts
specified by the manufacturer or have the same
characteristics as the original part. Unauthorized
substitutions may result in fire, electric shock, or other
hazards.
21 Safety Check – Upon completion of any service or repairs to
this product, ask the service technician to perform safety
checks to determine that the product is in proper operating
condition.
22 Wall or Ceiling Mounting – The unit should be mounted
to a wall or ceiling only as recommended by the
manufacturer.
23 Heat – The product should be situated away from heat
sources such as radiators, heat registers, stoves, or other
products (including amplifiers) that produce heat.
24 Outdoor Antenna Grounding – If an outside antenna or
cable system is connected to the product, be sure the antenna
or cable system is grounded so as to provide some
protection against voltage surges and built-up static charges.
Article 810 of the National Electrical Code, ANSI/NFPA 70,
provides information with regard to proper grounding of the
mast and supporting structure, grounding of the lead-in wire
to an antenna discharge unit, size of grounding conductors,
location of antenna discharge unit, connection to grounding
electrodes, and requirements for the grounding electrode.
Note to CATV system installer:
This reminder is provided to call the CATV system
installer’s attention to Article 820-40 of the NEC that
provides guidelines for proper grounding and, in
particular, specifies that the cable ground shall be
connected to the grounding system of the building, as
close to the point of cable entry as practical.
FCC INFORMATION (for US customers)
1 IMPORTANT NOTICE: DO NOT MODIFY THIS
UNIT!
This product, when installed as indicated in the
instructions contained in this manual, meets FCC
requirements. Modifications not expressly approved by
Yamaha may void your authority, granted by the FCC, to
use the product.
2 IMPORTANT: When connecting this product to
accessories and/or another product use only high quality
shielded cables. Cable/s supplied with this product MUST
be used. Follow all installation instructions. Failure to
follow instructions could void your FCC authorization to
use this product in the USA.
3 NOTE: This product has been tested and found to comply
with the requirements listed in FCC Regulations, Part 15
for Class “B” digital devices. Compliance with these
requirements provides a reasonable level of assurance that
your use of this product in a residential environment will
not result in harmful interference with other electronic
devices.
This equipment generates/uses radio frequencies and, if
not installed and used according to the instructions found
in the users manual, may cause interference harmful to the
operation of other electronic devices.
Compliance with FCC regulations does not guarantee that
interference will not occur in all installations. If this
product is found to be the source of interference, which
can be determined by turning the unit “OFF” and “ON”,
please try to eliminate the problem by using one of the
following measures:
Relocate either this product or the device that is being
affected by the interference.
Utilize power outlets that are on different branch (circuit
breaker or fuse) circuits or install AC line filter/s.
In the case of radio or TV interference, relocate/reorient
the antenna. If the antenna lead-in is 300 ohm ribbon lead,
change the lead-in to coaxial type cable.
If these corrective measures do not produce satisfactory
results, please contact the local retailer authorized to
distribute this type of product. If you can not locate the
appropriate retailer, please contact Yamaha Electronics
Corp., U.S.A. 6660 Orangethorpe Ave, Buena Park, CA
90620.
The above statements apply ONLY to those products
distributed by Yamaha Corporation of America or its
subsidiaries.
CAUTION: READ THIS BEFORE OPERATING YOUR UNIT.
iii
1 To assure the finest performance, please read this manual
carefully. Keep it in a safe place for future reference.
2 Install this sound system in a well ventilated, cool, dry, clean
place — away from direct sunlight, heat sources, vibration,
dust, moisture, and/or cold. Allow ventilation space of at least
30 cm on the top, 20 cm on the left and right, and 20 cm on
the back of this unit.
3 Locate this unit away from other electrical appliances, motors,
or transformers to avoid humming sounds.
4 Do not expose this unit to sudden temperature changes from
cold to hot, and do not locate this unit in an environment with
high humidity (i.e. a room with a humidifier) to prevent
condensation inside this unit, which may cause an electrical
shock, fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury.
5 Avoid installing this unit where foreign object may fall onto
this unit and/or this unit may be exposed to liquid dripping or
splashing. On the top of this unit, do not place:
– Other components, as they may cause damage and/or
discoloration on the surface of this unit.
– Burning objects (i.e. candles), as they may cause fire,
damage to this unit, and/or personal injury.
– Containers with liquid in them, as they may fall and liquid
may cause electrical shock to the user and/or damage to
this unit.
6 Do not cover this unit with a newspaper, tablecloth, curtain,
etc. in order not to obstruct heat radiation. If the temperature
inside this unit rises, it may cause fire, damage to this unit,
and/or personal injury.
7 Do not plug in this unit to a wall outlet until all connections
are complete.
8 Do not operate this unit upside-down. It may overheat,
possibly causing damage.
9 Do not use force on switches, knobs and/or cords.
10 When disconnecting the power cord from the wall outlet,
grasp the plug; do not pull the cord.
11 Do not clean this unit with chemical solvents; this might
damage the finish. Use a clean, dry cloth.
12 Only voltage specified on this unit must be used. Using this
unit with a higher voltage than specified is dangerous and may
cause fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury.
YAMAHA will not be held responsible for any damage
resulting from use of this unit with a voltage other than
specified.
13 To prevent damage by lightning, disconnect the power cord
from the wall outlet during an electrical storm.
14 Do not attempt to modify or fix this unit. Contact qualified
YAMAHA service personnel when any service is needed. The
cabinet should never be opened for any reasons.
15 When not planning to use this unit for long periods of time
(i.e. vacation), disconnect the AC power plug from the wall
outlet.
16 Be sure to read the “TROUBLESHOOTING” section on
common operating errors before concluding that this unit is
faulty.
17 Before moving this unit, press STANDBY/ON to set this unit
in the standby mode, and disconnect the AC power plug from
the wall outlet.
18 VOLTAGE SELECTOR (Asia and General models only)
The VOLTAGE SELECTOR on the rear panel of this unit
must be set for your local main voltage BEFORE plugging
into the AC main supply. Voltages are:
General model............. AC 110/120/220/230-240 V, 50/60 Hz
Asia model ..................................AC 220/230-240V, 50/60 Hz
CAUTION: READ THIS BEFORE OPERATING YOUR UNIT.
WARNING
TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC
SHOCK, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS UNIT TO RAIN
OR MOISTURE.
This unit is not disconnected from the AC power
source as long as it is connected to the wall outlet, even
if this unit itself is turned off. This state is called the
standby mode. In this state, this unit is designed to
consume a very small quantity of power.
FOR CANADIAN CUSTOMERS
To prevent electric shock, match wide blade of plug to
wide slot and fully insert.
This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian
ICES-003.
IMPORTANT
Please record the serial number of this unit in the space
below.
MODEL:
Serial No.:
The serial number is located on the rear of the unit.
Retain this Owner’s Manual in a safe place for future
reference.
1
English
PREPARATIONINTRODUCTION
BASIC
OPERATION
ADVANCED
OPERATION
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
SOUND FIELD
PROGRAMS
FEATURES............................................................. 2
GETTING STARTED............................................ 3
Supplied accessories .................................................. 3
Installing batteries in the remote control ................... 3
CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS ......................... 4
Front panel ................................................................. 4
Remote control........................................................... 6
Using the remote control ........................................... 8
Front panel display .................................................... 9
Rear panel ................................................................ 11
SPEAKER SETUP ............................................... 12
Speaker placement ................................................... 12
Speaker connections ................................................ 13
CONNECTIONS .................................................. 17
Before connecting components................................ 17
Connecting video components................................. 18
Connecting audio components................................. 21
Connecting the antennas.......................................... 23
Connecting the power supply cord .......................... 24
Speaker impedance setting ...................................... 25
Turning on the power............................................... 25
AUTO SETUP....................................................... 26
Introduction.............................................................. 26
Optimizer microphone setup.................................... 26
Starting the setup ..................................................... 27
BASIC SETUP ...................................................... 31
Using BASIC MENU .............................................. 31
PLAYBACK.......................................................... 33
Basic operations....................................................... 33
Selecting sound field programs ............................... 34
Additional operations............................................... 35
Selecting input modes.............................................. 40
TUNING ................................................................ 41
Automatic and manual tuning.................................. 41
Presetting stations .................................................... 42
Selecting preset stations........................................... 44
Exchanging preset stations ...................................... 44
RECORDING ....................................................... 45
SOUND FIELD PROGRAM
DESCRIPTIONS...............................................46
For movie/video sources.......................................... 46
For music sources .................................................... 49
ADVANCED OPERATIONS ..............................50
Selecting the OSD mode.......................................... 50
Using the sleep timer ............................................... 50
Manually adjusting speaker levels........................... 51
Using the test tone ................................................... 52
SET MENU ............................................................53
Using SET MENU................................................... 54
Using SOUND MENU ............................................ 55
Using INPUT MENU .............................................. 60
Using OPTION MENU ........................................... 62
REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES ...................65
Control area ............................................................. 65
Setting remote control codes ................................... 66
Programming codes from other remote controls
(Learn) ................................................................. 68
Changing source names in the display window....... 70
Using the Macro feature .......................................... 71
Clearing function sets .............................................. 73
Clearing individual functions .................................. 74
Controlling each component.................................... 76
ZONE 2/ZONE 3
(U.S.A., CANADA, U.K., EUROPE AND
AUSTRALIA MODELS ONLY) .....................77
Zone 2/Zone 3 connections...................................... 77
Remote controlling Zone 2/Zone 3.......................... 78
EDITING SOUND FIELD PARAMETERS ......80
What is a sound field? ............................................. 80
Changing parameter settings ................................... 80
SOUND FIELD PARAMETER
DESCRIPTIONS...............................................82
TROUBLESHOOTING .......................................86
GLOSSARY...........................................................91
Audio formats .......................................................... 91
Sound field programs............................................... 92
Audio information ................................................... 93
Video signal information ......................................... 94
SPECIFICATIONS...............................................95
CONTENTS
INTRODUCTION
PREPARATION
BASIC OPERATION
SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS
ADVANCED OPERATION
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION
FEATURES
2
Built-in 7-channel power amplifier
◆ Minimum RMS output power
(0.04% THD, 20 Hz – 20 kHz, 8 Ω)
Front: 120 W + 120 W
Center: 120 W
Surround: 120 W + 120 W
Surround Back: 120 W + 120 W
Sound field features
◆ Proprietary YAMAHA technology for the creation of
sound fields
◆ THX Select
◆ Dolby Digital/Dolby Digital EX decoder
◆ DTS/DTS-ES Matrix 6.1, Discrete 6.1, DTS
Neo:6 decoder, DTS 96/24
◆ Dolby Pro Logic/Dolby Pro Logic II/Dolby Pro Logic
IIx Decoder
◆ Virtual CINEMA DSP
◆ SILENT CINEMA
™
Sophisticated AM/FM tuner
◆ 40-station random access preset tuning
◆ Automatic preset tuning
◆ Preset station shifting capability (preset editing)
◆ RDS: Radio Data System receiving capability (U.K.
and Europe models only)
Other features
◆ YPAO: YAMAHA Parametric Room Acoustic
Optimizer for automatic speaker setup
◆ 192-kHz/24-bit D/A converter
◆ SET MENU to optimize this unit for your audio/video
system
◆ 6 or 8-channel additional input jacks for discrete multi
channel input
◆ On-screen display function helpful in controlling this
unit
◆ PURE DIRECT for pure fidelity sound with analog and
PCM sources
◆ S-video signal input/output capability
◆ Component video input/output capability
◆ Video signal conversion (composite video ↔
S-video → component video) capability for monitor
out
◆ Optical and coaxial digital audio signal jacks
◆ Sleep timer
◆ Cinema and music night listening mode
◆ Remote control with preset remote control codes and
learning/macro capability
◆ Zone 2/Zone 3 custom installation facility
(U.S.A., Canada, U.K., Europe and Australia models
only)
• y indicates a tip for your operation.
• Some operations can be performed by using either the buttons on the main unit or on the remote control. In cases when the button
names differ between the main unit and the remote control, the button name on the remote control is given in parentheses.
• This manual is printed prior to production. Design and specifications are subject to change in part as a result of improvements, etc. In
case of differences between the manual and product, the product has priority.
Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories.
“Dolby”, “Pro Logic”, “Surround EX”, and the double-D symbol
are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.
“SILENT CINEMA” is a trademark of YAMAHA
CORPORATION.
“DTS”, “DTS-ES”, “Neo:6” and “DTS 96/24” are trademarks of
Digital Theater Systems, Inc.
THX and the THX logo are registered trademarks of THX Ltd.
Surround EX is a jointly developed technology of THX and
Dolby Laboratories, Inc. and is a trademark of Dolby
Laboratories, Inc. All rights reserved. Used under authorization.
We Want You Listening For A Lifetime
YAMAHA and the Electronic Industries Association’s Consumer Electronics Group want you to get the most out of your
equipment by playing it at a safe level. One that lets the sound come through loud and clear without annoying blaring or
distortion – and, most importantly, without affecting your sensitive hearing. Since hearing damage from loud sounds is
often undetectable until it is too late, YAMAHA and the Electronic Industries Association’s Consumer Electronics Group
recommend you to avoid prolonged exposure from excessive volume levels.
FEATURES
GETTING STARTED
3
INTRODUCTION
Please check that you received all of the following parts.
1 Press the part and slide the battery
compartment cover off.
2 Insert the four supplied batteries (AAA, R03,
UM-4) according to the polarity markings on
the inside of the battery compartment.
3 Slide the cover back until it snaps into place.
Notes on batteries
• Change all of the batteries if you notice conditions such as the
operation range of the remote control decreases, the indicator
does not flash, or its light or display window become dim.
• Do not use old batteries together with new ones.
• Do not use different types of batteries (such as alkaline and
manganese batteries) together. Read the packaging carefully as
these different types of batteries may have the same shape and
color.
• If the batteries have leaked, dispose of them immediately. Avoid
touching the leaked material or letting it come into contact with
clothing, etc. Clean the battery compartment thoroughly before
installing new batteries.
• Do not throw away batteries with general house waste; dispose
of them correctly in accordance with your local regulations.
GETTING STARTED
Supplied accessories
CLEAR
LEARN
RE–NAME
SET MENU
MENU
FREQ/RDS EON MODE PTY SEEK START
REC
DISC SKIP
EFFECT
TEST
RETURN
ON SCREEN
DISPLAY
STRAIGHT
NIGHT
AUDIO
PURE DIRECT
ENTER
LEVEL
TITLE
A/B/C/D/E
SELECT
DTV DVR/VCR2VCR 1 DVD
V
-
AUX
CBL/SAT MD/TAPE
CD-R
PHONO TUNER CD
MULTI CH IN
THX STANDARD EXTD. SUR
ENTERTAIN
MUSIC TV THTR MOVIE
STEREO HALL JAZZ
ROCK
VOL
+
–
3421
90
+10
ENT.
5678
POWER POWER POWER
SYSTEM
STANDBY
AVTV
SLEEP
INPUT MODE
A
B
CH
+
–
TV VOL
TV MUTE TV INPUT
MUTE
+
–
AMP
SOURCE
TV
MACROONOFF
Remote control
Batteries (4)
(AAA, R03, UM-4)
Indoor FM antenna
(U.S.A., Canada, China,
Korea, Asia and General
models)
AM loop antenna
Optimizer microphone
75-ohm/300-ohm
antenna adapter
(U.K. model only)
Speaker terminal wrench
Power Cord
(U.S.A., Canada, U.K., Europe, Australia,
China and Korea models)
(U.K., Europe and
Australia models)
Installing batteries in the remote
control
1
3
2
If the remote control is without batteries for more than
2 minutes, or if exhausted batteries remain in the
remote control, the contents of the memory may be
cleared. When the memory is cleared, insert new
batteries, set up the remote control code and program
any acquired functions that may have been cleared.
CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS
4
1 STANDBY/ON
Turns on this unit or sets it to the standby mode. When
you turn on this unit, you will hear a click and there will
be a 6 to 7-second delay before this unit can reproduce
sound.
In standby mode, this unit consumes a small amount of power in
order to receive infrared-signals from the remote control.
2 INPUT selector
Selects the input source you want to listen to or watch.
3 PURE DIRECT
Turns on or off the PURE DIRECT mode. Lights up when
turned on (see page 37).
4 Front panel display
Shows information about the operational status of this
unit.
5 PRESET/TUNING EDIT
Switches the function of PRESET/TUNING l / h
between selecting preset station numbers and tuning.
6 FM/AM
Switches the reception band between FM and AM.
7 MEMORY (MAN’L/AUTO FM)
Stores a station in the memory. Hold down this button for
more than 3 seconds to start automatic preset tuning.
8 TUNING MODE (AUTO/MAN’L MONO)
Switches the tuning mode between automatic (AUTO
indicator on) and manual (AUTO indicator off).
9 Remote control sensor
Receives signals from the remote control.
0 VOLUME
Controls the output level of all audio channels.
This does not affect the REC OUT level.
A SPEAKERS A/B
Turn on or off the set of front speakers connected to the A
and/or B terminals on the rear panel each time the
corresponding button is pressed.
CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS
Front panel
A
SPEAKERS
MULTI CH
B
INPUT MODE
PURE DIRECT
INPUT
A/B/C/D/E
FM/AM
EDIT
SILENT CINEMA S VIDEO VIDEO L
VIDEO AUX
AUDIO R OPTICAL
MEMORY
PHONES
MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO
PRESET/
TUNING
PRESET/
TUNING
TUNING
MODE
OPTIMIZER
MIC
TONE CONTROL STRAIGHT
EFFECT
VOLUME
PROGRAM
INPUT
STANDBY
/ON
TUNER
YPAO
1 24 0
ABC DEFGH K
JI
MNOL
3
EON PTY SEEK
MODE START
RDS MODE
/FREQ
67 85
9
(U.S.A. model)
(U.K. and Europe models only)
Note
CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS
5
English
INTRODUCTION
B MULTI CH INPUT
Selects the source connected to the MULTI CH INPUT
jacks. When selected, the MULTI CH INPUT source takes
priority over the source selected with INPUT (or the input
selector buttons on the remote control).
C INPUT MODE
Sets the priority (AUTO, DTS, ANALOG) for the type of
signals received when one component is connected to two
or more of this unit’s input jacks (see page 40).
D OPTIMIZER MIC jack
Use to connect and input audio signals from the supplied
microphone for use with the AUTO SETUP function (see
page 26).
E A/B/C/D/E
Selects one of the 5 preset station groups (A to E).
F PRESET/TUNING l / h
Selects preset station number 1 through 8 when a colon (:)
is displayed next to the band indication in the front panel
display.
Selects the tuning frequency when the colon (:) is not
displayed.
G PHONES (SILENT CINEMA) jack
Outputs audio signals for listening with headphones.
When you connect headphones, no signals are output to
the PRE OUT jacks or to the speakers.
All Dolby Digital and DTS audio signals are mixed down
to the left and right headphone channels.
H VIDEO AUX jacks
Input audio and video signals from an external source such
as a game console. To reproduce source signals from these
jacks, select V-AUX as the input source.
I TONE CONTROL
Use to adjust the bass/treble balance for the front left/right
and center channels (see page 35).
J PROGRAM
Use to select sound field programs or adjust bass/treble
balance (in conjunction with TONE CONTROL).
K STRAIGHT/EFFECT
Switches the sound fields off or on. When STRAIGHT is
selected, input signals (2-channel or multi-channel) are
output directly from their respective speakers without
effect processing.
■ U.K. and Europe models only
L RDS MODE/FREQ
Press this button when the unit is receiving an RDS station
to cycle the display mode between the PS mode, PTY
mode, RT mode, CT mode (if the station offers those RDS
data services) and/or the frequency display mode.
M EON
Press this button to select a radio program type (NEWS,
INFO, AFFAIRS, SPORT) to tune in automatically.
N PTY SEEK MODE
Press this button to set the unit to the PTY SEEK mode.
O PTY SEEK START
Press this button to begin searching for a station after the
desired program type has been selected in the PTY SEEK
mode.
■ Opening and closing the front panel
door
When you want to use the controls behind the front panel
door, open the door by gently pressing on the lower part of
the panel. Keep the door closed when not using these
controls.
To open, press gently on the lower part of the panel.
CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS
6
This section describes the function of each control on the
remote control used to control this unit. To operate other
components, see “REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES” on
page 65.
1 Infrared window
Outputs infrared control signals. Aim this window at the
component you want to operate.
2 Transmission indicator
Flashes while the remote control is sending signals.
3 Input selector buttons
Select the input source and change the control area.
4 Display window
Shows the name of the selected source component that
you can control.
5 PRESET +/–
Selects preset station numbers when this unit is in tuner
mode.
6 A/B/C/D/E
Selects preset groups when this unit is in tuner mode.
7 LEVEL
Selects the speaker channel to be adjusted and sets the
level.
8 Cursor buttons k / n / l / h / ENTER
Use to select and adjust DSP program parameters or SET
MENU items.
9 TEST
Outputs the test tone to adjust the speaker levels.
0 Sound field program/Numeric buttons
Use to select sound field programs or input numbers.
Use numbers 1 through 8 to select preset stations when
this unit is in tuner mode.
A MACRO ON/OFF
Turns the macro function on and off.
B MACRO
Use to program a series of operations for control by a
single button (see page 71).
C STANDBY
Sets this unit in the standby mode.
D SYSTEM POWER
Turns on the power of this unit.
E INPUT MODE
Sets the priority (AUTO, DTS, ANALOG) for the type of
signals received when one component is connected to two
or more of this unit’s input jacks (see page 40).
F SLEEP
Sets the sleep timer.
G MULTI CH IN
Selects MULTI CH INPUT when using an external
decoder (etc.).
Remote control
CLEAR
LEARN
RE–NAME
SET MENU
MENU
FREQ/RDS EON MODE PTY SEEK START
REC
DISC SKIP
EFFECT
TEST
RETURN
ON SCREEN
DISPLAY
STRAIGHT
NIGHT
AUDIO
PURE DIRECT
ENTER
LEVEL
TITLE
A/B/C/D/E
PRESET
SELECT
DTV DVR/VCR2VCR 1 DVD
V
-
AUX
CBL/SAT MD/TAPE
CD-R
PHONO TUNER CD
MULTI CH IN
THX STANDARD EXTD. SUR
ENTERTAIN
MUSIC TV THTR
MOVIE
STEREO HALL JAZZ
ROCK
VOL
+
–
3421
90
+10
ENT.
5678
POWER POWER POWER
SYSTEM
STANDBY
AVTV
SLEEP
INPUT MODE
A
B
CH
+
–
TV VOL
TV MUTE TV INPUT
MUTE
+
–
AMP
SOURCE
TV
MACROONOFF
C
D
E
G
K
L
M
N
O
P
J
H
Q
R
S
t
F
8
9
7
0
2
1
4
I
6
5
3
U
A
B
CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS
7
English
INTRODUCTION
H SELECT k/n
Selects another component that you can control
independently of the input component selected with the
input selector buttons.
I VOL +/–
Increases or decreases the volume level.
J AMP/SOURCE/TV
Selects the component you want to control with the
remote control.
AMP: Set to this position to operate this unit.
SOURCE: Set to this position to operate the component
selected with an input selector button.
TV: Set to this position to operate the television.
To set the remote control codes for components, see
page 66.
K MUTE
Mutes the sound. Press again to restore the audio output to
the previous volume level.
L PURE DIRECT
Turns on or off PURE DIRECT mode (see page 37).
M SET MENU
Selects the SET MENU mode.
N NIGHT
Turns on or off the night listening modes (see page 38).
O ON SCREEN
Selects the display mode of the on-screen display (OSD)
this unit sends to your monitor.
P STRAIGHT/EFFECT
Switches the sound fields off or on. When STRAIGHT is
selected, input signals (2-channel or multi-channel) are
output directly from their respective speakers without
effect processing.
Q EXTD. SUR
Switches between 5.1 or 6.1/7.1 channel playback of
multi-channel software.
R RE-NAME
Used to change the input source name in the display
window (see page 70).
S CLEAR
Used to clear functions acquired when using the learn and
rename features, or setting remote control codes (see
page 73).
T LEARN
Used to set up the remote control code or program
functions from other remote controls (see pages 66 and
68).
■ U.K. and Europe models only
U RDS tuning buttons
(Available when this unit is in tuner mode)
FREQ/RDS
Press this button when the unit is receiving an RDS station
to cycle the display between the PS mode, PTY mode, RT
mode, CT mode (if the station offers those RDS data
services) and/or the frequency display.
EON
Press this button to select a radio program type (NEWS,
INFO, AFFAIRS, SPORT) to tune in automatically.
PTY SEEK MODE
Press this button to set the unit to the PTY SEEK mode.
PTY SEEK START
Press this button to begin searching for a station after the
desired program type has been selected in the PTY SEEK
mode.
CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS
8
The remote control transmits a directional infrared beam.
Be sure to aim the remote control directly at the remote
control sensor on the main unit during operation.
■ Handling the remote control
• Do not spill water or other liquids on the remote
control.
• Do not drop the remote control.
• Do not leave or store the remote control in the
following types of conditions:
– high humidity such as near a bath
– high temperature such as near a heater or stove
– extremely low temperature
– dusty places
Using the remote control
A
SPEAKERS
MULTI CH
B
INPUT MODE
INPUT
A/B/C/D/E
FM/AM
EDIT
PHONES S VIDEO VIDEO L
VIDEO AUX
AUDIO R OPTICAL
MEMORY
SILENT
MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO
PRESET/
TUNING
PRESET
/TUNING
TUNING
MODE
MIC
TONE CONTROL STRAIGHT
EFFECT
VOLUME
PROGRAM
INPUT
STANDBY
/ON
TUNER
PURE DIRECT
YPAO
30 30
Approximately 6 m (20 ft)
CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS
9
English
INTRODUCTION
1 Decoder indicators
When any of this unit’s decoders function, the respective
indicator lights up.
2 Sound field indicators
Light to indicate the active DSP sound fields.
3 NIGHT indicator
Lights up when you select night listening mode.
4 Input source indicators
A cursor lights to show the current input source.
5 CINEMA DSP indicator
Lights up when you select a CINEMA DSP sound field
program.
6 YPAO indicator
Lights up during the auto setup procedure and when the
auto setup speaker settings are used without any
modifications.
7 AUTO indicator
Lights up when this unit is in the automatic tuning mode.
8 STEREO indicator
Lights up when this unit is receiving a stereo signal for an
FM stereo broadcast while the AUTO indicator is lit.
9 VOLUME level indicator
Indicates the volume level.
0 THX indicator
Lights up when a THX program is selected.
A PCM indicator
Lights up when this unit is reproducing PCM (pulse code
modulation) digital audio signals.
B SLEEP indicator
Lights up while the sleep timer is on.
C VIRTUAL indicator
Lights up when Virtual CINEMA DSP is active (see
page 39).
D Headphones indicator
Lights up when headphones are connected.
E SP A B indicators
Light up according to the set of front speakers selected.
Both indicators light up when both sets of speakers are
selected, or when bi-wiring.
F SILENT CINEMA indicator
Lights up when headphones are connected and a sound
field program is selected (see page 35).
G Multi-information display
Shows the current sound field program name and other
information when adjusting or changing settings.
H HiFi DSP indicator
Lights up when you select a HiFi DSP sound field
program.
I MEMORY indicator
Blinks to show a station can be stored.
J TUNED indicator
Lights up when this unit is tuned into a station.
K MUTE indicator
Blinks while the MUTE function is on.
Front panel display
V–AUX
DVR/VCR2
VCR 1
CBL/SAT
DTV DVD
MD/TAPE
CD–R CD TUNER
PHONO
96
24
NIGHT
VIRTUAL
ZONE2
ZONE3
ZONE4
SLEEP
YPAO
HiFi DSP
STEREO
TUNED
EON
AUTO
MEMORY
MUTE
VOLUME
DIGITAL
PL
MATRIX
DISCRETE
PCM
THX
PL
EX
SILENT
CINEMA
A B
SP
LFE
ft
mS
dB
96/24
LL C R
SL SB SR
PL x
PS PTY RT CT
PTY
HOLD
dB
AFGHK
135678
BE
2
C
9
DIJ
PQ
LM
4
NO0
(U.S.A., Canada, U.K., Europe and
Australia models only)
(U.K. and Europe models only)
Presence DSP sound field
Listening position
Left surround
DSP sound field
Right surround
DSP sound field
Surround back DSP sound field
CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS
10
L 96/24 indicator
Lights up when a DTS 96/24 signal is input to this unit.
M LFE indicator
Lights up when the input signal contains an LFE signal.
N Input channel indicators
Indicate the channel components of current digital input
signal.
O Presence and surround back speaker
indicators
Indicate the connection of presence and/or surround back
speakers when using the SPEAKERS setting (page 32) or
SP LEVEL setting (page 57).
P ZONE 2/ZONE 3 indicators
(U.S.A., Canada, U.K., Europe and Australia
models only)
Light up when Zone 2 or Zone 3 power is on.
Q RDS indicators
(U.K. and Europe models only)
The name(s) of the RDS data offered by the currently
received RDS station light(s) up.
EON lights up when an RDS station that offers the EON
data service is being received.
PTY HOLD lights up while searching for stations in the
PTY SEEK mode.
CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS
11
English
INTRODUCTION
1 DIGITAL OUTPUT jacks
See page 21 for details.
2 Audio component jacks
See page 21 for connection information.
3 Video component jacks
See pages 18 and 20 for connection information.
4 RS-232C terminal
(U.S.A., Canada, U.K., Europe and Australia
models only)
This is a control expansion terminal for commercial use.
Consult your dealer for details.
5 REMOTE IN/OUT jacks
(U.S.A., Canada, U.K., Europe and Australia
models only)
See page 77 for connection information.
6 CONTROL OUT jack
(U.S.A., Canada, U.K., Europe and Australia
models only)
See page 77 for connection information.
7 AC OUTLET(S)
Use to supply power to your other A/V components (see
page 24).
8 AC INLET (U.S.A., Canada, U.K., Europe,
Australia, China and Korea models only)
Use this inlet to plug in the supplied power cable (see
page 24).
9 DIGITAL INPUT jacks
See pages 18, 20 and 21 for details.
0 MULTI CH INPUT jacks
See page 19 for connection information.
A ZONE 2/ZONE 3 OUTPUT jacks
(U.S.A., Canada, U.K., Europe and Australia
models only)
See page 77 for connection information.
B Antenna terminals
See page 23 for connection information.
C PRE OUT jacks
See page 22 for connection information.
D Speaker terminals
See page 13 for connection information.
E PRESENCE/ZONE 2 speaker terminals
(U.S.A., Canada, U.K., Europe and Australia
models)
PRESENCE speaker terminals
(other models)
See page 14 for connection information.
< Asia and General models only >
FREQUENCY STEP switch
See page 23.
VOLTAGE SELECTOR
See page 24.
Rear panel
AC OUTLETS
AC OUTLETS
GND
SPEAKERS
FRONT
SURROUND
FRONT
CENTER
PRE OUT
SUB
WOOFER
SURROUND BACK
/PRESENCE
SURROUND
SURROUND BACK
CENTER
R
R
R
L
R
L
R
L
L
R
R
L
L
L
CENTER
SUB
WOOFER
MONITOR OUT
MULTI CH INPUT OUTPUT
AUDIO AUDIO VIDEO
S VIDEO
DVD
DTV
CBL
/SAT
VIDEO
R
L
R
L
IN
(
PLAY
)
IN
(
PLAY
)
OUT
(
REC
)
OUT
(
REC
)
CD-R
MD/TAPE
CD
PHONO
IN
OUT
OUT
ZONE 2
ZONE 3
DVR/
VCR 2
VCR 1
CD-R
IN
FRONT (6CH)/SB (8CH)
SURROUND
TUNER
AM
ANT
GND
FM ANT
75Ω
UNBAL.
COMPONENT VIDEO
P
R
DVD
MONITOR OUT
DTV
P
B
Y
DIGITAL OUTPUT
DIGITAL INPUT
OPTICAL
MD
/
TAP E
CD-R
DVD
DTV
CBL/SAT
CD
CD
DVD
DVR/
VCR 2
COAXIAL
+
–
+
–
+
–
+
+
––
–
+
+
+
+
+
–
–
–
–
A
B
PRESENCE/ZONE 2
CONTROL OUTREMOTE
IN OUT
+12V 15mA MAX.
SINGLE
RS-232C
AC OUTLETS
12 3 54678
EDCBA09
(U.S.A. model)
SPEAKER SETUP
12
For best results, place the speakers as illustrated below.
.
y
The illustrations show the standard speaker setting recommended
by the ITU-R (see page 93). You can use it to enjoy CINEMA
DSP, multi-channel audio sources, and THX.
Front speakers (FR and FL)
The front speakers are used for the main source sound plus
effect sounds. Place these speakers an equal distance from
the ideal listening position. The distance of each speaker
from each side of the video monitor should be the same.
Center speaker (C)
The center speaker is for the center channel sounds
(dialog, vocals, etc.). If for some reason it is not practical
to use a center speaker, you can do without it. Best results,
however, are obtained with the full system. Align the front
face of the center speaker with the front face of your video
monitor. Place the speaker centrally between the front
speakers and as close to the monitor as possible, such as
directly over or under it.
Surround speakers (SR and SL)
The surround speakers are used for effect and surround
sounds. Place these speakers behind your listening
position, facing slightly inwards, about 1.8 m (6 ft) above
the floor.
Surround back speakers (SBR and SBL)
The surround back speakers supplement the surround
speakers and provide for more realistic front-to-back
transitions. Place these speakers directly behind the
listening position and at the same height as the surround
speakers. They should be positioned at least 30 cm (12 in)
apart. Ideally, they should be positioned at the same width
as the front speakers.
Subwoofer
The use of a subwoofer, such as the YAMAHA Active
Servo Processing Subwoofer System, is effective not only
for reinforcing bass frequencies from any or all channels,
but also for high fidelity reproduction of the LFE (low-
frequency effect) channel included in Dolby Digital and
DTS software. The position of the subwoofer is not so
critical, because low bass sounds are not highly
directional. But it is better to place the subwoofer near the
front speakers. Turn it slightly toward the center of the
room to reduce wall reflections.
Presence speakers (PR and PL)
Presence speakers supplement the sound from the front
speakers with extra ambient effects produced by CINEMA
DSP (see page 46). These effects include sounds that
filmmakers intend to locate a little farther back behind the
screen in order to create more theater-like ambience. Place
these speakers at the front of the room about 0.5 - 1 m
(1 - 3 ft) outside the front speakers, facing slightly
inwards, and about 1.8 m (6 ft) above the floor.
Surround back and presence speakers do not output sound
simultaneously. You can set to prioritize either set of speakers in
SOUND MENU (see page 60).
SPEAKER SETUP
Speaker placement
More than 30 cm (12 in)
60˚
30˚
PL
PR
SBR
SBL
FL
FR
C
SL
SR
SR
80˚
SL
1.8 m (6 ft)
1.8 m (6 ft)
Note
13
SPEAKER SETUP
PREPARATION
■ Di-pole speaker layout
Either di-pole or direct radiating speaker types can be used
for THX surround. If you choose di-pole speakers, please
place the surround and surround back speakers according
to the speaker layout below.
Be sure to connect the left channel (L), right channel (R),
“+” (red) and “–” (black) properly. If the connections are
faulty, no sound will be heard from the speakers, and if the
polarity of the speaker connections is incorrect, the sound
will be unnatural and lack bass.
• If you will use 6 ohm speakers, be sure to set
this unit’s speaker impedance setting to 6
ohms before using (see page 25).
• Before connecting the speakers, make sure that the
power of this unit is off.
• Do not let the bare speaker wires touch each other or do
not let them touch any metal part of this unit. This
could damage this unit and/or speakers.
• Use magnetically shielded speakers. If this type of
speakers still creates the interference with the monitor,
place the speakers away from the monitor.
A speaker cord is actually a pair of insulated cables
running side by side. One cable is colored or shaped
differently, perhaps with a stripe, groove or ridges.
Connect the striped (grooved, etc.) cable to the “+” (red)
terminals on this unit and your speaker. Connect the plain
cable to the “–” (black) terminals.
1 Remove approximately 10 mm (3/8 in) of
insulation from each of the speaker cables.
2 Twist the exposed wires of the cable together
to prevent short circuits.
3 Loosen the knob.
The supplied speaker terminal wrench is useful for
loosening or tightening knobs.
4 Insert one bare wire into the hole in the side
of each terminal.
FL
SR
SL
FR
C
SBR
SBL
30˚ 30˚
: Di-pole speaker
: Direction of di-pole speaker
Speaker connections
CAUTION
10 mm (3/8 in)
1
2
14
SPEAKER SETUP
5 Tighten the knob to secure the wire.
■ Connecting to PRESENCE/ZONE 2 or
PRESENCE speaker terminals
1 Open the tab.
2 Insert one bare wire into the hole of each
terminal.
3 Return the tab to secure the wire.
■ Banana plug connections
(With the exception of U.K., Europe and Asia models)
First, tighten the knob and then insert the banana plug
connector into the end of the corresponding terminal.
y
You can also use banana plugs with the PRESENCE/ZONE 2 and
PRESENCE speaker terminals. Open the tab, then insert one
banana plug connector into the hole of each terminal. Do not
attempt to close the tabs after connecting the banana plugs.
Red: positive (+)
Black: negative (–)
5
4
3
Speaker terminal wrench
2
1
3
Banana plug
(With the exception of U.K., Europe
and Asia models)
15
SPEAKER SETUP
PREPARATION
RC-232C
SPEAKERS
FRONT
CENTER
PRE OUT
SUB
WOOFER
SURROUND
SURROUND BACK
R
R
L
R
R
L
L
L
+
–
+
–
+
–
+
+
––
–
+
+
+
+
+
–
–
–
–
PRESENCE/ZONE 2
SINGLE
231
7 8 6
5
10
9
4
Subwoofer with
built-in amplifier
Center
speaker
Front speakers (A)
Surround back speakers
LeftRight
Left
Right LeftRight
Surround speakers
Front
speakers
(B)
1
2
3
4
5
6
9
10
8
7
Speaker layout
(U.S.A. model)
LeftRight
Presence speakers
• You can connect both surround back and presence speakers to this unit, but they do not output sound simultaneously.You can set
to prioritize either set of speakers in SOUND MENU (see page 60).
• The surround back speakers output the surround back channel included in Dolby Digital EX and DTS-ES software and only
operate when the Dolby Digital EX, DTS-ES or Dolby Pro Logic IIx decoder is turned on.
• The presence speakers output ambient effects created by the DSP sound fields. They do not output sound when other sound fields
are selected.
16
SPEAKER SETUP
■ FRONT terminals
Connect one or two speaker systems to these terminals. If
you use only one speaker system, connect it to either the
FRONT A or B terminals.
The Canada model cannot output to two separate speaker systems
simultaneously.
Bi-wired connection
The unit also allows you to make bi-wired connections to
one speaker system. Use two pairs of speaker cables for
each speaker (one pair for the woofer and one pair for the
tweeter/mid-range). To use the bi-wired connections, press
SPEAKERS A and SPEAKERS B on the front panel so
that both SP A and B light up in the front panel display.
■ CENTER terminals
Connect a center speaker to these terminals.
■ SURROUND terminals
Connect surround speakers to these terminals.
■ SUBWOOFER jack
Connect a subwoofer with a built-in amplifier, such as the
YAMAHA Active Servo Processing Subwoofer System,
to this jack.
■ SURROUND BACK terminals
Connect surround back speakers to these terminals. If you
only connect one surround back speaker, connect it to the
left (L) terminals.
■ PRESENCE terminals
Connect presence speakers to these terminals.
(U.S.A., Canada, U.K., Europe and Australia models only)
You can also use these terminals to connect Zone 2 speakers (see
page 64).
Note
Bi-wired connection
FRONT
R
L
+
–
+
–
+
+
–
–
A
B
This unit
Note
CONNECTIONS
17
PREPARATION
Do not connect this unit or other components to the mains
power until all connections between components are
complete.
■ Cable indications
■ Analog jacks
You can input analog signals from audio components by
connecting audio pin cables to the analog jacks on this
unit. Connect red plugs to the right jacks and white plugs
to the left jacks.
■ Digital jacks
This unit has digital jacks for direct transmission of digital
signals through either coaxial or fiber optic cables. You
can use the digital jacks to input PCM, Dolby Digital and
DTS bitstreams. When you connect components to both
the COAXIAL and OPTICAL jacks, priority is given to
the input signals from the COAXIAL jack. All digital
input jacks are compatible with 96-kHz sampling digital
signals.
This unit handles digital and analog signals independently. Thus
audio signals input to the analog jacks are only output to the
analog OUT (REC) jacks. Likewise audio signals input to the
digital (OPTICAL or COAXIAL) jacks are only output to the
DIGITAL OUTPUT jacks.
Dust protection cap
Pull out the cap from the optical jack before you connect
the fiber optic cable. Do not discard the cap. When you are
not using the optical jack, be sure to put the cap back in
place. This cap protects the jack from dust.
■ Video jacks
This unit has three types of video jacks. Connection
depends on the availability of input jacks on your monitor.
The signals input through the S VIDEO jacks on this unit
are automatically converted for output through the VIDEO
jacks. When V CONV. is set to “ON” (see page 63),
signals input through the VIDEO jacks can be output
through the S VIDEO and COMPONENT VIDEO jacks.
Likewise, signals input through the S VIDEO jacks can
also be output through the COMPONENT VIDEO jacks.
VIDEO jack
For conventional composite video signals.
S VIDEO jack
For S-video signals, separated into luminance (Y) and
color (C) video signals to achieve high-quality color
reproduction.
COMPONENT VIDEO jacks
For component signals, separated into luminance (Y) and
color difference (P
B, PR) to provide the best quality in
picture reproduction.
When signals are input through both the S VIDEO and VIDEO
jacks, signals input through the S VIDEO jack have priority.
CONNECTIONS
Before connecting components
Note
CAUTION
S
V
O
V
V
V
L
R
C
left analog cables
right analog cables
optical cables
coaxial cables
video cables
S-video cables
For analog signals
For digital signals
For video signals
Note
VIDEO
S VIDEO
COMPONENT VIDEO
P
R
P
B
Y
S VIDEO
VIDEO
COMPONENT
VIDEO
Signal flow inside this unit
Only when V CONV. is set to ON
(see page 63)
Output
(MONITOR OUT)
Input
18
CONNECTIONS
■ Connections for DVD playback
Connecting video components
GND
M
SUR
SUB
WOO
CENTER
SUB
WOOFER
MONITOR OUT
MULCH CH INPUT OUTPUT
AUDIO AUDIO VIDEO
S VIDEO
DVD
VIDEO
R
L
R
L
IN
(
PLAY
)
IN
(
PLAY
)
OUT
(
REC
)
OUT
(
REC
)
CD-R
MD/TAPE
CD
PHONO
ZONE 2
ZONE 3
MAIN/SURROUND BACK
SURROUND
TUNER
75Ω
UNBAL.
AM
ANT
GND
FM ANT
COMPONENT VIDEO
P
R
DVD
MONITOR OUT
P
B
Y
DIGITAL OUTPUT
DIGITAL INPUT
OPTICAL
MD
/
TAPE
CD-R
DVD
CBL/SAT
CD
CD
DVD
DTV
COAXIAL
LR
C
O
DVD player
Video
monitor
(U.S.A. model)
Optical out Video out
Audio out
Video in
Coaxial out
19
CONNECTIONS
PREPARATION
■ Connecting to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks
This unit is equipped with 6 additional input jacks (left and right FRONT, CENTER, left and right SURROUND and
SUBWOOFER) for discrete multi-channel input from a multi-format player, external decoder, sound processor or pre-
amplifier.
If you set MULTI CH INPUT 6ch/8ch to “8ch” (see page 62), you can use input jacks assigned as MULTI CH INPUT
FRONT (page 62) together with the MULTI CH INPUT jacks to input 8 channels.
Connect the output jacks on your multi-format player or external decoder to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks. Be sure to
match the left and right outputs to the left and right input jacks for the front and surround channels.
• When you select MULTI CH INPUT as the input source, this unit automatically turns off the digital sound field processor, and you
cannot select sound field programs.
• This unit does not redirect signals input to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks to accommodate for missing speakers. We recommend that
you connect at least a 5.1-channel speaker system before using this feature.
• When headphones are used, only front L/R channels are output.
Notes
CENTER
SUB
WOOFER
MULTI CH INPUT
AUDIO AUDIO
DVD
DTV
CBL
/SAT
R
L
R
L
IN
(
PLAY
)
IN
(
PLAY
)
CD-R
MD/TAPE
CD
IN
DVR/
VCR 2
VCR 1
IN
FRONT(6CH)/SB(8CH)
SURROUND
LRLR
L
R
CENTER
SUB
WOOFER
MULTI CH INPUT
FRONT(6CH)/SB(8CH)
SURROUND
LR
LR
Multi-format player/
External decoder
Multi-format player/
External decoder
For 6-channel input For 8-channel input
Front
out
Surround
out
Subwoofer
out
Center
out
Front out
Surround
out
Subwoofer
out
Center
out
Surround
back out
20
CONNECTIONS
■ Connections for other video components
■ VIDEO AUX jacks (on the front panel)
Use these jacks to connect any video source, such as
a game console or camcorder, to this unit.
GND
M
A
SURR
SUB
WOO
F
CENTER
SUB
WOOFER
MULCH CH INPUT OUTPUT
AUDIO AUDIO VIDEO
S VIDEO
CBL
/SAT
VIDEO
R
L
R
L
IN
(
PLAY
)
IN
(
PLAY
)
OUT
(
REC
)
OUT
(
REC
)
CD-R
MD/TAPE
CD
PHONO
IN
OUT
OUT
ZONE 2
ZONE 3
DVR/
VCR 2
VCR 1
CD-R
IN
MAIN/SURROUND BACK
SURROUND
TUNER
75Ω
UNBAL.
AM
ANT
GND
FM ANT
COMPONENT VIDEO
P
R
DTV
P
B
Y
DIGITAL OUTPUT
DIGITAL INPUT
OPTICAL
MD
/
TAPE
CD-R
CD-R
DVD
CBL/SAT
CD
CD
DVD
DVR/
VCR2
COAXIAL
O
LR
LR LR
C
Cable TV or
satellite tuner
(U.S.A. model)
DVD recorder
or VCR
Audio out
Video out
Optical out
Audio out Video out
Video in
Audio in
Connect a YAMAHA
CD recorder that
outputs OSD signals.
Coaxial out
S VIDEO VIDEO
L AUDIO R OPTICAL
VIDEO AUX
O
V
S
L
R
Game
console or
video camera
Video out
S-video out
Audio out L
Audio out R
Optical out
21
CONNECTIONS
PREPARATION
■ Connections for audio components
■ Connecting a turntable
PHONO jacks are for connecting a turntable with an MM
or high-output MC cartridge. If you have a turntable with
a low-output MC cartridge, use an in-line boosting
transformer or MC-head amplifier when connecting to
these jacks.
y
Connect your turntable to the GND terminal to reduce noise in
the signal. However, you may hear less noise without the
connection to the GND terminal for some record players.
Connecting audio components
GND
CENTER
SUB
WOOFER
MULCH CH INPUT OUTPUT
AUDIO AUDIO
R
L
R
L
IN
(
PLAY
)
IN
(
PLAY
)
OUT
(
REC
)
OUT
(
REC
)
CD-R
MD/TAPE
CD
PHONO
ZONE 2
ZONE 3
DIGITAL OUTPUT
DIGITAL INPUT
OPTICAL
MD
/
TAPE
CD-R
DVD
CBL/SAT
CD
CD
DVD
DTV
COAXIAL
SURROUND
MAIN/SURROUND BACK
L
R
L
R
L
R
O
O
LR LR
O
L
R
C
CD player
MD recorder or
tape deck
(U.S.A. model)
CD recorder
*
Turntable
Optical out
Coaxial out
Audio out
Audio inAudio out
Optical in
Optical in
Audio in
Audio out
Audio out
GND
*
Some CD recorders can
be connected to the
VIDEO CD-R jacks
(see page 20).
22
CONNECTIONS
■ Connecting to an external amplifier
If you want to increase the power output to the speakers,
or want to use another amplifier, connect an external
amplifier to the PRE OUT jacks as follows.
• When audio pin plugs are connected to the PRE OUT jacks for
output to an external amplifier, it is not necessary to use the
corresponding SPEAKERS terminals. Set the volume of the
external amplifier connected to this unit to the maximum.
• The signal output through the FRONT PRE OUT and CENTER
PRE OUT jacks are affected by the TONE CONTROL settings.
• If SPEAKERS A is turned off and SP B is set to ZONE B (see
page 64), signals will only be output from the FRONT PRE
OUT jacks.
1 FRONT PRE OUT jacks
Front channel line output jacks.
2 SURROUND PRE OUT jacks
Surround channel line output jacks.
3 SUBWOOFER PRE OUT jack
Connect a subwoofer with built-in amplifier, such as the
YAMAHA Active Servo Processing Subwoofer System,
to this jack.
4 SURROUND BACK/PRESENCE PRE OUT
jacks
Surround back or presence channel line output jacks.
5 CENTER PRE OUT jack
Center channel line output jack.
• Each PRE OUT jack outputs the same channel signal as the
corresponding speaker terminals. However, when both surround
back and presence speakers are setup in this unit, the signals
output from SURROUND BACK/PRESENCE PRE OUT jacks
may not correspond to the correct speakers.
• Adjust the volume level of the subwoofer with the control on
the subwoofer. It is also possible to adjust the volume level by
using the remote control (see “Manually adjusting speaker
levels” on page 51).
• Some signals may not be output from the SUBWOOFER PRE
OUT jack depending on the SPEAKER SET (see page 55) and
LFE/BASS OUT (see page 56) settings.
Notes
Notes
FRONT
SURROUND
PRE OUT
SUB
WOOFER
SURROUND BACK
/PRESENCE
CENTER
R
R
L
L
R
L
1
2
3
4
5
23
CONNECTIONS
PREPARATION
Both AM and FM indoor antennas are included with this
unit. In general, these antennas should provide sufficient
signal strength. Connect each antenna correctly to the
designated terminals.
■ Connecting the AM loop antenna
1 Set up the AM loop antenna, then connect it
to the terminals on this unit.
2 Press and hold the tab to insert the AM loop
antenna lead wires into the AM ANT and GND
terminals.
3 Orient the AM loop antenna for the best
reception.
• The AM loop antenna should be placed away from this unit.
• The AM loop antenna should always be connected, even if an
outdoor AM antenna is connected to this unit.
• A property installed outdoor antenna provides clearer reception
than an indoor one. If you experience poor reception quality, an
outdoor antenna may improve the quality. Consult the nearest
authorized YAMAHA dealer or service center about outdoor
antennas.
■ 75-ohm/300-ohm antenna adapter
(U.K. model only)
1 Open the cover of the
included 75-ohm/300-ohm
antenna adapter.
2 Cut the external sleeve
of the 75-ohm coaxial
cable and prepare it for
connection.
3 Cut the lead wire and
remove it.
4 Insert the cable
wire into the slot,
and clamp it with
pliers.
5 Snap the cover
into place.
■ FREQUENCY STEP switch
(Asia and General models only)
Because the interstation frequency
spacing differs in different areas, set
the FREQUENCY STEP switch
(locating on the rear panel) according
to the frequency spacing in your area.
• North, Central and South America: 100 kHz/10 kHz
• Other areas: 50 kHz/9 kHz
Before setting this switch, disconnect this unit’s AC power
cord from the wall outlet.
Connecting the antennas
MAI
N
SURR
O
SUB
WOOF
E
TUNER
AM
ANT
GND
FM ANT
75Ω
UNBAL.
COMPONENT VIDEO
P
R
V
D
O
NITOR OUT
T
V
P
B
Y
AM loop antenna
(included)
Ground (GND terminal)
For maximum safety and minimum interference,
connect the antenna
GND terminal to a good earth
ground. A good earth ground is a metal stake driven
into moist earth.
Indoor FM antenna
(included)
Notes
11 (7/16)
8 (5/16)
6 (1/14)
Unit:
mm (in)
Lead wire
Clamp
Clamp
Insert wire
into slot
100kHz/10kHz
FREQUENCY
STEP
50kHz/9kHz
FM AM
24
CONNECTIONS
■ Connecting the AC power cord
(U.S.A., Canada, U.K., Europe, Australia,
China and Korea models)
Plug the power cord into the AC inlet after all other
connections are complete, then plug the power cord to an
AC wall outlet.
Do not use other AC power cords. Use the one provided.
Use of other power cords may result in fire hazard or
electrical shock.
(Other models)
Plug the power cord into an AC wall outlet.
■ AC OUTLET(S) (SWITCHED)
U.K. and Australia models.............................. 1 OUTLET
Korea model .............................................................. None
Other models.................................................. 2 OUTLETS
Use these outlets to connect the power cords from your
other components to this unit. Power to the AC
OUTLET(S) is controlled by this unit’s STANDBY/ON
(or SYSTEM POWER and STANDBY). These outlets
will supply power to any connected component whenever
this unit is turned on. The maximum power (total power
consumption of components) that can be connected to the
AC OUTLET(S) is:
Asia and General models .......................................... 50 W
Other models ........................................................... 100 W
■ VOLTAGE SELECTOR
(Asia and General models only)
The VOLTAGE SELECTOR on the rear panel of this unit
must be set for your local main voltage BEFORE plugging
into the AC main supply.
Voltages are:
General model........AC 110/120/220/230-240 V, 50/60 Hz
Asia model............................AC 220/230-240V, 50/60 Hz
■ Memory back-up
The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data from
being lost even if this unit is in the standby mode.
However if the power cord is disconnected from the AC
wall outlet, or the power supply is cut for more than one
week, the stored data will be lost.
Connecting the power supply cord
AC OUTLETS
(U.S.A. model)
2
VOLTAGE
SELECTOR
VOLTAGE SELECTOR
(General model)
CAUTION
25
CONNECTIONS
PREPARATION
If you are using 6 ohm speakers, set the impedance to
6 ohms as follows before turning on the power.
Be sure this unit is in the standby mode.
1 On the front panel, while holding down
SPEAKERS A, press STANDBY/ON.
“SP IMP.SET” appears in the front panel display for a
few seconds, then “Minimum 8ohms” appears.
2 Press SPEAKERS A or SPEAKERS B to
select the impedance of your speakers.
You can select either 6 ohms or 8 ohms.
3 Press STANDBY/ON to exit the setting.
This unit will be set to the standby mode.
y
You can also use SP IMP.SET (see page 63) to set the speaker
impedance.
When all connections are complete, turn on the power of
this unit.
1 Press STANDBY/ON (SYSTEM POWER on the
remote control) to turn on the power of this
unit.
2 Turn on the video monitor connected to this
unit.
Press STANDBY/ON again (STANDBY on the remote control)
to enter the standby mode.
Speaker impedance setting
CAUTION
SPEAKERS
A
STANDBY
/ON
SP IMP.SET
Minimum 8ohms
Turning on the power
Note
VOLUME
VIDEO AUXSILENT
SPEAKERS
INPUT
MULTI CH
INPUT
INPUT MODE
PRESET
/
TUNING
PHONES
A/B/C/D/E
S VIDEO
MEMORY
FM/AM
EDIT
PRESET
/TUNING
MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO
TUNING
MODE
VIDEO AUDIO OPTICALLR
STANDBY
/
ON
A B
OPTIMIZER
MIC
TONE CONTROL
PROGRAM
STRAIGHT
EFFECT
TUNER
PURE DIRECT
YPAO
1
SELECT
DTV DVR/VCR2VCR 1 DVD
V
-
AUX
CBL/SAT MD/TAPE
CD-R
PHONO TUNER CD
MULTI CH IN
+
POWER POWER POWER
SYSTEM
STANDBY
AVTV
SLEEP
INPUT MODE
A
B
++
AMP
1
(U.S.A. model)
STANDBY
/ON
POWER
SYSTEM
or
Front panel
Remote control
AUTO SETUP
26
This receiver employs YAMAHA Parametric Room
Acoustic Optimizer (YPAO) technology which lets you
avoid troublesome listening-based speaker setup and
achieves highly accurate sound adjustments. The supplied
optimizer microphone collects and analyzes the sound
your speakers produce in your actual listening
environment.
y
The basic setup feature (page 31) is useful if you want to set up
your system quickly and with minimal effort. However, we
recommend that you come back and perform auto setup later to
take advantage of YPAO and enjoy even higher fidelity.
• Please be advised that it is normal for loud test tones to be
output during the auto setup procedure.
• If auto setup stops and error messages appear on the screen,
follow the troubleshooting on page 29.
YPAO performs the following checks and makes
appropriate adjustments to give you the best possible
sound from your system.
WIRING
Checks which speakers are connected and the polarity of
each speaker.
DISTANCE
Checks the distance of each speaker from the listening
position and adjusts the timing of each channel.
SIZE
Checks the speaker’s frequency response and sets the
appropriate low frequency crossover for each channel.
EQUALIZING
Adjusts frequency and levels of each channel’s parametric
equalizer to reduce coloration across the channels and
create a cohesive sound field. This is particularly
important if you use different brands or sizes of speakers
for some channels or have a room with unique sonic
characteristics.
YPAO equalizing calibration incorporates three
parameters (frequency, level and Q factor) for each of the
seven bands in its parametric equalizer to provide highly
precise automatic adjustment of frequency characteristics.
LEVEL
Checks and adjusts the sound level (volume) of each
speaker.
1 Connect the supplied optimizer microphone
to the OPTIMIZER MIC jack on the front
panel.
• After you have completed the auto setup procedure, be
sure to disconnect the optimizer microphone.
• The optimizer microphone is sensitive to heat.
–Keep it away from direct sunlight.
–Do not place it on top of this unit.
2 Place the optimizer microphone on a flat
level surface with the omni-directional
microphone head upward, at your normal
listening position.
If possible, use a tripod (etc.) to affix the optimizer
mic at the same height as your ears would be when
you are seated in your listening position.
AUTO SETUP
Introduction
Notes
Optimizer microphone setup
Notes
VIDEO AUXSILENT
PRESET
/
TUNING
PHONES
A/B/C/D/E
S VIDEO
MEMORY
FM/AM
EDIT
PRESET
/TUNING
MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO
TUNING
MODE
VIDEO AUDIO OPTICALL R
OPTIMIZER
MIC
TUNER
YPAO
(U.S.A. model)
Optimizer microphone position
27
AUTO SETUP
PREPARATION
For best results, make sure the room is as quiet as possible
during the auto setup procedure (YPAO). If there is too
much ambient noise, the results may not be satisfactory.
y
If your subwoofer can adjust the output volume and the crossover
frequency, set the volume to about half way (or slightly less) and
set the crossover frequency to the maximum.
1 Switch on this unit and video monitor.
Make sure the OSD is displayed (see page 50).
2 Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to AMP, then press
SET MENU to enter the SET MENU.
3 Press k / n to select AUTO SETUP, then
press h once to enter the main menu.
4 Press k / n repeatedly to select WIRING,
DISTANCE, SIZE, EQUALIZING or LEVEL.
5 When WIRING, DISTANCE, SIZE or LEVEL is
selected, press l / h to select:
CHECK
To automatically check and adjust the selected
item.
SKIP To skip the selected item and perform no
adjustments
.
When using THX speakers, set SIZE to SKIP and make sure
that “SMALL” or “SMLx2” is selected in SPEAKER SET
(page 55) and that 80Hz (THX) is selected in CROSS
OVER (page 57).
When EQUALIZING is selected, press l / h
to select:
FRONT To adjust the frequency response of
each speaker in accordance with the
sound of your front speakers.
Recommended if your front speakers
are of much higher quality than your
other speakers.
FLAT To average the frequency response of
all speakers. Recommended if all of
your speakers are of similar quality.
LOW To average the frequency response of
all speakers, giving priority to the
accuracy of bass frequencies.
MID To average the frequency response of
all speakers, giving priority to the
accuracy of mid-range frequencies.
HIGH To average the frequency response of
all speakers, giving priority to the
accuracy of high frequencies.
SKIP To skip the selected item and perform
no adjustments.
6 Press n to select SETUP, then press l / h to
select:
AUTO To automatically perform the entire
auto setup procedure.
STEP To pause for confirmation between
each check in the auto setup procedure.
RELOAD To restore the last auto setup setting.
Starting the setup
CROSSOVER/
HIGH CUT
MIN
MAX
Subwoofer
VOLUME
MIN
MAX
SET MENU
MENU
AMP
SOURCE
TV
then
ENTER
ENTER
SET MENU
. ;AUTO SETUP
;MANUAL SETUP
: Up/Down
p
/
p
: Enter
</>
Note
1
AUTO:MENU
.WIRING;;;;;CHECK
DISTANCE;;;CHECK
SIZE;;;;;;;CHECK
EQUALIZING;;FLAT
LEVEL;;;;;;CHECK
SETUP;;;;;;;AUTO
START PUSH
: Up/Down
p
/
p
: Select
</>
>
28
AUTO SETUP
7 Press n to select START PUSH i, then press
h.
Loud test tones will be output from each speaker and
WAIT appears during the auto setup procedure.
If “E-10:OTHER ERROR” appears during testing, restart the
procedure from step 3.
If you selected “AUTO” in step 6
The RESULT display appears for a few seconds after each
check, then settings of the next item will start. The
RESULT:EXIT display appears after all items are set.
y
You can display each result by pressing k once and pressing h
repeatedly before exiting. Pressing n returns to the
RESULT:EXIT display.
8 To apply the changes, press l / h to select
SET, then press n to exit.
To cancel the auto setup procedure, press
l / h to select CANCEL, then press n to exit.
If you selected “STEP” in step 6
The RESULT display appears after each check.
8 Press l / h to display RESULT:EXIT, then
press l / h to select:
NEXT
Then press n to proceed and check the next item.
EXIT Then press n to exit the auto setup.
y
• Press k / n repeatedly to move between each display.
• If you are not satisfied with the result or want to manually
adjust each setup parameter, use the manual setup parameters
(see page 55).
• If you change speakers, speaker positions, or the layout of your
listening environment, perform AUTO SETUP again to re-
calibrate your system.
• In the DISTANCE results, the distance displayed may be longer
than the actual distance depending on the characteristics of your
subwoofer.
• In the EQUALIZING results, different values may be set for the
same band to provide finer adjustments.
If you selected “RELOAD” in step 6
The RESULT:EXIT display appears.
y
You can display each result by pressing k once and pressing h
repeatedly before exiting. Pressing n returns to the
RESULT:EXIT display.
8 Press l / h to select “SET”, then press n to
exit.
Note
/ : Up/Down
p
p
</> : Back/Next
RESULT:WIRING
FRONT L;;;;;;;OK
/ : Up/Down
p
p
EQ;;;;;FRONT L
63Hz;;;-2.0dB
125Hz;;;-5.0dB
500Hz;;;;;;0dB
630Hz;;;;;;0dB
1.0kHz;;;;;;0dB
3.15kHz;;;+3.0dB
10.0kHz;;;+1.0dB
RESULT:EQUALIZI.
/ : Up/Down
p
p
</> : Back/Next
. FRONT L;;;;3.20m
CENTER;;;;;3.30m
FRONT R;;;;2.90m
PRES L;;;;;1.70m
PRES R;;;;;1.50m
RESULT:DISTANCE1
/ : Up/Down
p
p
</> : Back/Next
. FRONT L;;;+5.0dB
CENTER;;;;-4.5dB
FRONT R;;;+5.5dB
PRESENCE;;-3.0dB
RESULT:LEVEL 1
/ : Up/Down
p
p
</> : Back/Next
FRONT L;;;;;;LRG
RESULT:SIZE 1
Notes
29
AUTO SETUP
PREPARATION
■ Troubleshooting for auto setup procedure
Before auto setup
During auto setup
Press l / h to display the detailed information about individual errors. Select “RETRY” to try auto setup procedure
again.
Error message Cause Remedy
Connect MIC!
Optimizer microphone is not connected. • Connect the supplied optimizer microphone to the
OPTIMIZER MIC jack on the front panel.
Unplug HP!
Headphones are connected. • Unplug the headphones.
Error message Cause Remedy
E-1:NO FRONT SP
Front L/R channel signal(s) is (are) not
detected.
• Select the front speakers with SPEAKER A or B.
• Check the front L/R speaker connections.
E-2:NO SURR.SP
A surround channel signal is not detected. • Check the surround speaker connections.
E-3:NO PRES. SP
A presence channel signal is not detected. • Check the presence speaker connections.
E-4:SBR->SBL
Only right surround back channel signal is
detected.
• Connect the surround back speaker to the LEFT
SURROUND BACK SPEAKERS terminal if you
only have one surround back speaker.
E-5:NOISY
Background noise is too loud. • Try auto setup procedure in a quiet environment.
• Turn off noisy electric equipment like air conditioners
(etc.) or move them away from the optimizer
microphone.
E-6:CHECK SURR.
Surround back speaker(s) is (are) connected,
though surround L/R speakers are not.
• Connect surround speakers when you use (a)
surround back speaker(s).
E-7:NO MIC
The optimizer microphone was unplugged
during the auto setup procedure.
• Connect the supplied optimizer microphone to
OPTIMIZER MIC jack on the front panel.
E-8:NO SIGNAL
The optimizer microphone does not detect test
tones.
• Check the microphone setting.
• Check the speaker connections and placement.
E-9:USER CANCEL
The auto setup procedure was cancelled due to
user activity.
• Perform the auto setup procedure again.
E-10:OTHER ERROR
An internal error occurred. • Perform the auto setup procedure again.
30
AUTO SETUP
After auto setup
Press l / h to display the detailed information about individual warnings.
• If the ERROR or WARNING screens appears, check the cause of the problem, then perform the auto setup procedure again.
• If warning W-1, W-4 or W-5 appears, corrections are made, but they may not be optimal.
• If warning W-2 or W-3 appears, no corrections are made.
• If error E-10 occurs repeatedly, please contact a qualified YAMAHA service center.
Warning message Cause Remedy
W-1:OUT OF PHASE
Speaker polarity is not correct. This message
may appear depending on the speakers even
when the speakers are connected correctly.
• Check the speaker connections for proper polarity
(+ or –).
W-2:OVER 24m
(80ft)
The distance between the speaker and the
listening position is over 24 m (80 ft).
• Bring the speaker closer to the listening position.
W-3:LEVEL ERROR
The difference of volume level among speakers
is excessive. (No level correction is made.)
• Readjust the speaker installation so that all speakers
are set in locations with similar conditions.
• Check the speaker connections.
• Use speakers of similar quality.
• Adjust the output volume of the subwoofer.
W-4:SWFR PHASE
The phase polarity of the subwoofer is not
correct.
• Select the opposite phase on the subwoofer if the
subwoofer has a phase switch.
W-5:VOL ERROR
The result may not be correct because the
volume was changed during the auto setup
procedure.
• Perform the auto setup procedure again. Do not
change the volume during the auto setup procedure.
BASIC SETUP
31
PREPARATION
The basic system parameters are set automatically when
you run auto setup (page 26). Basic setup is useful if you
want to quickly setup your speakers or to manually adjust
some of the items set in auto setup.
y
If you wish to configure the unit manually using more precise
adjustments, use the detailed parameters in SOUND MENU
(page 55) instead of BASIC MENU.
Altering any parameters in BASIC MENU will reset all
parameters in SOUND MENU.
1 Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to AMP, then press
SET MENU to enter the SET MENU.
2 Press k / n repeatedly to select MANUAL
SETUP, then press l / h to enter the
selected category.
If k is pressed when AUTO SETUP is selected, or if
n is pressed when MANUAL SETUP is selected,
SET MENU will be closed. Press SET MENU to
open SET MENU again.
3 Press l / h to enter BASIC MENU.
4 When ROOM is selected, press l / h to
change the setting.
Select the size of the room you have installed your
speakers in. Roughly speaking, the room sizes are
defined as follows:
[U.S.A. and Canada models]
S (small) 16 x 13 ft, 200 ft
2
(4.8 x 4.0 m, 20 m
2
)
M (medium) 20 x 16 ft, 300 ft
2
(6.3 x 5.0 m, 30 m
2
)
L (large) 26 x 19 ft, 450 ft
2
(7.9 x 5.8 m, 45 m
2
)
[Other models]
S (small) 3.6 x 2.8 m, 10 m
2
M (medium) 4.8 x 4.0 m, 20 m
2
L (large) 6.3 x 5.0 m, 30 m
2
5 Press n to select SWFR, then press l / h to
select:
YES
If you have a subwoofer in your system.
NONE If you do not have a subwoofer in your system.
6 Press n to select PRESENCE, then press
l / h to select:
YES
If you have presence speakers in your system.
NONE If you do not have presence speakers in your
system.
BASIC SETUP
Note
Using BASIC MENU
SET MENU
MENU
EFFECT
TEST
RETURN
ON SCREEN
DISPLAY
STRAIGHT
NIGHT
AUDIO
PURE DIRECT
ENTER
LEVEL
TITLE
A/B/C/D/E
SELECT
VOL
+
–
CH
+
–
TV VOL
TV MUTE TV INPUT
MUTE
+
–
AMP
SOURCE
TV
2-9
1
SET MENU
MENU
AMP
SOURCE
TV
then
SET MENU
;AUTO SETUP
. ;MANUAL SETUP
: Up/Down
p
/
p
: Enter
</>
ENTER
then
ENTER
1
BASIC MENU 1/2
.ROOM: S[ML
SWFR:[YESNONE
PRESENCE;;;;NONE
SPEAKERS;;;;7spk
32
BASIC SETUP
7 Press n to select SPEAKERS, then press
l / h to select the number of speakers
connected to the unit.
The choices vary as follows depending on the
PRESENCE setting:
*
Surround back and presence speakers do not output sound
simultaneously. You can set to prioritize either set of speakers
in SOUND MENU (see page 60).
8 After you have finished the settings, press n,
then press l / h to select:
SET To apply the changes.
CANCEL To cancel the setup.
If you select “SET”, you will hear a test tone from
each speaker.
9 Press n to select CHECK OK?, then press
l / h to select:
YES
To exit the setup if the test tones were
satisfactory.
NO To adjust each speaker level (see page 57).
Choices
PRESENCE setting
YES
NONE
2
——
Front L/R
3
——
Front L/R,
Center
4
Presence L/R,
Front L/R
Front L/R,
Surround L/R
5
Presence L/R,
Front L/R,
Center
Front L/R,
Center,
Surround L/R
6
Presence L/R,
Front L/R,
Surround L/R
Front L/R,
Center,
Surround L/R,
Surround back
7
Presence L/R,
Front L/R,
Center,
Surround L/R
Front L/R,
Center,
Surround L/R,
Surround back
L/R
8
Presence L/R,
Front L/R,
Center,
Surround L/R,
Surround back
*
——
9
Presence L/R,
Front L/R,
Center,
Surround L/R,
Surround back
L/R
*
——
LL C R
SL SB SR
LL CR
SL SB SR
LL R
LL C R
SL SB SR
LL RC
LL C R
SL SB
SB
SR
LL R
SL SR
LL C R
SL SB SR
LL C R
SL SR
LL C R
SL SB SR
LL C R
SL SB SR
LL C R
SL SB SR
.[SET CANCEL
ROOM SIZE=MEDIUM
1 BASIC MENU 2/2
Memory back-up
The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data
from being lost even if this unit is in the standby mode.
However, if the power cord is disconnected from the
AC outlet, or the power supply is cut for more than one
week, the stored data will be lost. If so, adjust the
items again.
. CHECK OK?;;;;YES
1 BASIC MENU 2/2
-+
. FR
C
SL
B)SPEAKER
LEVEL
(when “NO” is selected)
PLAYBACK
33
BASIC
OPERATION
1 Press STANDBY/ON (SYSTEM POWER on the
remote control) to turn on the power.
2 Turn on the video monitor connected to this
unit.
3 Press SPEAKERS A or B on the front panel.
Each press turns the respective speakers on or off.
When bi-wiring, select both A and B.
4 Select the input source.
Use INPUT (or press one of the input selector buttons
on the remote control) to select the input you desire.
The current input source name and input mode appear
in the front panel display and video monitor for a few
seconds.
5 Start playback or select a broadcast station
on the source component.
Refer to the operation instructions for the component.
6 Adjust the volume to the desired output level.
PLAYBACK
Basic operations
VOLUME
VIDEO AUXSILENT
SPEAKERS
INPUT
MULTI CH
INPUT
INPUT MODE
PRESET
/
TUNING
PHONES
A/B/C/D/E
S VIDEO
MEMORY
FM/AM
EDIT
PRESET
/TUNING
MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO
TUNING
MODE
VIDEO AUDIO OPTICALLR
STANDBY
/
ON
A B
MIC
TONE CONTROL
PROGRAM
STRAIGHT
EFFECT
TUNER
PURE DIRECT
YPAO
1 4
73
6
SET MENU
MENU
PURE DIRECT
LEVEL
TITLE
A/B/C/D/E
SELECT
DTV DVR/VCR2VCR 1 DVD
V
-
AUX
CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R
PHONO TUNER CD
MULTI CH IN
VOL
+
–
POWER POWER POWER
SYSTEM
STANDBY
AVTV
SLEEP
INPUT MODE
A
B
CH
+
–
TV VOL
TV MUTE TV INPUT
MUTE
+
–
AMP
SOURCE
TV
CLEAR
LEARN
RE–NAME
SET MENU
MENU
FREQ/RDS EON MODE PTY SEEK START
REC
DISC SKIP
EFFECT
TEST
RETURN
ON SCREEN
DISPLAY
STRAIGHT
NIGHT
AUDI O
PURE DIRECT
ENTER
LEVEL
TITLE
THX STANDARD EXTD. SUR
ENTERTAIN
MUSIC TV THTR MOVIE
STEREO HALL JAZZ
ROCK
3421
90
+10
ENT.
5678
TV MUTE TV INPUT
MUTE
MACROONOFF
1
7
4
6
7
(U.S.A. model)
STANDBY
/ON
POWER
SYSTEM
Front panel Remote control
or
SPEAKERS
AB
DTV DVR/VCR2VCR 1 DVD
V
-
AUX
CBL/SAT MD/TAPE
CD-R
PHONO TUNER CD
MULTI CH IN
INPUT
Front panel Remote control
or
DVD AUTO
V–AUX
DVR/VCR2
VCR 1
CBL/SAT
DTV DVD
MD/TAPE
CD–R CD TUNER
PHONO
VOLUME
A
SP
LL R
dB
Selected input source
Input mode
VOLUME
VOL
+
–
or
Remote control
Front panel
34
PLAYBACK
7 Select a sound field program if desired.
Use PROGRAM (or set AMP/SOURCE/TV to AMP,
then press one of the sound field program buttons
repeatedly) to select a sound field program. See
page 46 for details about sound field programs.
When this unit detects Dolby Digital signals, the following
display appears for a few seconds. This shows how the signal
level is being corrected to become –27 dB (THX
recommendation).
■ Front panel operation
Rotate PROGRAM to select the desired program.
The name of the selected program appears in the front
panel display and video monitor.
Note
PROGRAM
THX STANDARD EXTD. SUR
ENTERTAIN
MUSIC TY THTR
MOVIE
STEREO HALL JAZZ
ROCK
3421
90
+10
ENT.
5678
AMP
SOURCE
TV
Remote control
Front panel
or
DialNorm;;+4dB
Selecting sound field programs
VOLUME
VIDEO AUXSILENT
SPEAKERS
INPUT
MULTI CH
INPUT
INPUT M MODE
PRESET
/
TUNING
PHONES
A/B/C/D/E
S VIDEO
MEMORY
FM/AM
EDIT
PRESET
/TUNING
MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO
TUNING
MODE
VIDEO AUDIO OPTICALLR
STANDBY
/
ON
A B
MIC
TONE CONTROL
PROGRAM
STRAIGHT
EFFECT
TUNER
PURE DIRECT
YPAO
PROGRAM
(U.S.A. model)
V–AUX
DVR/VCR2
VCR 1
CBL/SAT
DTV DVD
MD/TAPE
CD–R CD TUNER
PHONO
HiFi DSP
VOLUME
A
SP
LL R
dB
JAZZ CLUB
Program name
PROGRAM
35
PLAYBACK
BASIC
OPERATION
■ Remote control operation
Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to AMP, then press one of
the sound field program buttons repeatedly to
select the desired program.
The name of the selected program appears in the front
panel display and video monitor.
y
Choose a sound field program based on your listening preference,
and not on the name of the program.
• When you select an input source, this unit automatically selects
the last sound field program used with that source.
• Sound field programs cannot be selected when the MULTI CH
INPUT is selected.
■ To adjust the tone
You can adjust the bass/treble
balance for the front left/right and
center channels.
Press TONE CONTROL
repeatedly on the front panel to
select TREBLE or BASS.
Select TREBLE, then rotate
PROGRAM to the right or left to
increase or decrease the high-
frequency response.
Select BASS, then rotate PROGRAM to the right or left to
increase or decrease the low-frequency response.
To cancel the tone control, press TONE CONTROL
repeatedly to select BYPASS.
• If you increase or decrease the high-frequency or the low-
frequency sound to an extreme level, the tonal quality of the
surround speakers may not match that of the front left/right and
center speakers.
• TONE CONTROL is not effective when THX (page 46) or
PURE DIRECT (page 37) is selected, or when MULTI CH
INPUT is selected.
• TONE CONTROL is not effective for headphones. Use HP
TONE CTRL to adjust bass/treble balance for the headphones
(page 59).
■ To mute the sound
Press MUTE on the remote control.
The MUTE indicator flashes in the
front panel display.
To resume the audio output, press
MUTE again. (or press VOL –/+). The MUTE indicator
disappears from the display.
y
You can adjust the muting level (see page 59).
■ To listen with headphones
(“SILENT CINEMA”)
“SILENT CINEMA” allows you to enjoy multi-channel
music or movie sound, including Dolby Digital and DTS
surround, through ordinary headphones. “SILENT
CINEMA” activates automatically whenever you connect
headphones to the PHONES jack while listening to
CINEMA DSP or HiFi DSP sound field programs. When
activated, the “SILENT CINEMA” indicator lights up in
the front panel display.
• This unit will not be set to “SILENT CINEMA” when MULTI
CH INPUT is selected as the input source.
• “SILENT CINEMA” is not effective when PURE DIRECT or a
2ch stereo program is selected, or in STRAIGHT mode.
Notes
SET MENU
MENU
EFFECT
TEST
RETURN
ON SCREEN
DISPLAY
STRAIGHT
NIGHT
AUDIO
PURE DIRECT
ENTER
LEVEL
TITLE
A/B/C/D/E
THX STANDARD EXTD. SUR
ENTERTAIN
MUSIC TV THTR MOVIE
STEREO HALL JAZZ
ROCK
VOL
+
–
3421
90
+10
ENT.
5678
CH
+
–
TV VOL
TV MUTE TV INPUT
MUTE
+
–
AMP
SOURCE
TV
Sound field
program
buttons
AMP/SOURCE/TV
V–AUX
DVR/VCR2
VCR 1
CBL/SAT
DTV DVD
MD/TAPE
CD–R CD TUNER
PHONO
HiFi DSP
VOLUME
A
SP
LL R
dB
JAZZ CLUB
AMP
SOURCE
TV
Program name
THX STANDARD EXTD. SUR
ENTERTAIN
MUSIC TV THTR
MOVIE
STEREO HALL JAZZ
ROCK
3421
90
+10
ENT.
5678
Additional operations
Notes
Notes
TONE CONTROL
PROGRAM
MUTE
36
PLAYBACK
■ Selecting the MULTI CH INPUT
Press MULTI CH INPUT so that “MULTI CH INPUT”
appears in the front panel display and video monitor.
When “MULTI CH INPUT” is shown in the front panel display
and/or the video monitor, no other source can be played. To select
another input source with INPUT (one of the input selector
buttons), press MULTI CH INPUT to turn off “MULTI CH
INPUT” from the front panel display and the video monitor.
■ Enjoying multi-channel software in
6.1/7.1 channel surround
If you connected one or two surround back speakers, use
this feature to enjoy 6.1/7.1-channel playback for multi-
channel sources using the Dolby Pro Logic IIx, Dolby
Digital EX or DTS-ES decoders.
Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to AMP, then press EXTD.
SUR on the remote control to switch between 5.1-
and 6.1/7.1 channel playback.
To select a decoder, press l / h repeatedly
when PLIIxMovie (etc.) is displayed.
AUTO (AUTO)
When a signal (flag) that can be recognized by the unit is
input, the unit selects the optimum decoder for playing
back the signal in 6.1/7.1 channels.
If the unit cannot recognize the flag or no flag is present in
the input signal, it cannot automatically be played in 6.1/
7.1 channels.
Decoders (select with l / h)
You can select from the following modes depending on the
format of the software you are playing.
PLIIxMovie
For playing back Dolby Digital or DTS signals in 7.1
channels using the Pro Logic IIx movie decoder.
PLIIxMusic
For playing back Dolby Digital or DTS signals in 6.1/7.1
channels using the Pro Logic IIx music decoder.
EX/ES
For playing back Dolby Digital signals in 6.1/7.1 channels
using the Dolby Digital EX decoder.
DTS signals are played back in 6.1/7.1 channels using the
DTS-ES decoder.
EX
For playing back Dolby Digital or DTS signals in 6.1/7.1
channels using the Dolby Digital EX decoder.
OFF (OFF)
For playing back Dolby Digital or DTS signals in 5.1
channels.
y
When SURR B L/R SP is set to “LRGx1” or “SMLx1” (see
page 56), the surround back channel will output from the left
SURROUND BACK speaker terminals.
• Some 6.1-channel compatible discs do not have a signal (flag)
which this unit can automatically detect. When playing these
kinds of discs with 6.1-channel, select decoders (PLIIxMovie,
PLIIx Music, EX/ES or EX) manually.
• 6.1-channel playback is not possible even if EXTD. SUR is
pressed in the following cases:
– When SURR L/R SP or SURR B L/R SP is set to “NONE”
(see page 56).
– When the source connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jack is
being played.
– When the source being played does not contain surround L/R
channel signals.
– When a Dolby Digital KARAOKE source is being played.
– When 2ch Stereo or PURE DIRECT is selected.
• When the power of this unit is turned off, the input mode will be
reset to AUTO.
• When the DTS-ES decoder is applied to DTS 96/24 signals, this
unit decodes the DTS 96/24 signals using DTS-ES Matrix
decoder.
• The Pro Logic IIx decoder is not available when SURR B L/R
SP is set to “NONE” (see page 56).
• “PLIIxMovie” cannot be selected when SURR B L/R SP is set
to “LRGx1” or “SMLx1” (see page 56).
Note
MULTI CH
INPUT
MULTI CH IN
Front panel Remote control
or
EXTD. SUR
ENT.
Notes
37
PLAYBACK
BASIC
OPERATION
■ Enjoying 2-channel software in surround
Signals input from 2-channel sources can also be played
back on multiple channels.
Press STANDARD on the remote control to select
the decoder.
You can select from the following modes depending on the
type of software you are playing and your personal
preference.
PRO LOGIC SUR. STANDARD
Standard processing for Dolby Surround sources.
PRO LOGIC SUR. ENHANCED
CINEMA DSP enhanced processing for Dolby Surround
sources
PRO LOGIC IIx Movie
*
Dolby Pro Logic II/IIx processing for movie software.
PRO LOGIC IIx Music
*
Dolby Pro Logic II/IIx processing for music software.
PRO LOGIC IIx Game
*
Dolby Pro Logic II/IIx processing for game software.
DTS Neo:6 Cinema
DTS processing for movie software.
DTS Neo:6 Music
DTS processing for music software.
*
Use the PLII/PLIIx parameter to select the Pro Logic II or
Pro Logic IIx decoders (see page 85).
The Pro Logic IIx decoder is not available when SURR B L/R SP
is set to “NONE” (see page 56).
■ Listening to high fidelity stereo sound
with PURE DIRECT
PURE DIRECT bypasses this unit’s decoders and DSP
processors as well as shuts down the video circuitry,
allowing you to enjoy the highest possible sound fidelity
from analog and PCM sources.
Press PURE DIRECT to activate pure direct.
The button lights up and the front panel display
automatically goes out.
y
The front panel display switches on momentarily when an
operation is performed.
To cancel, press PURE DIRECT again.
The indicator around the front panel button goes out and
the previous settings are restored.
• To avoid unexpected noise, do not play DTS-encoded CDs in
this mode.
• When a multi-channel signal (Dolby Digital or DTS) is input,
this unit automatically switches to the corresponding analog
input. (When DTS is selected as an input mode, no sound will
be heard.)
• No sound will be output from the subwoofer.
• TONE CONTROL (page 35) and SET MENU (page 53)
settings are not effective.
• The following operations are not possible during PURE
DIRECT operation:
– switching the sound field program
– displaying the OSD
– adjusting SET MENU parameters
– all video functions (video conversion etc.)
• PURE DIRECT is automatically cancelled whenever this unit is
set to the standby mode.
Note
STANDARD
0
Notes
PURE DIRECT
PURE DIRECT
Front panel Remote control
or
38
PLAYBACK
■ Listening to high fidelity stereo sound
with Direct Stereo
Direct Stereo bypasses this unit’s decoders and DSP
processors, allowing you to enjoy high fidelity sound from
2-channel PCM and analog sources.
y
This operation is recommended for use when high fidelity stereo
sound is desired with playback of a video source. Otherwise,
PURE DIRECT is recommended for the highest possible sound
fidelity (see page 37).
Rotate PROGRAM (or press STEREO repeatedly)
to select DIRECT STEREO.
The front panel display automatically dims.
• To avoid unexpected noise, do not play DTS-encoded CDs in
this mode.
• When multi-channel signals (Dolby Digital and DTS) are input,
this unit automatically selects an analog signal input. (When
DTS is selected as an input mode, no sound will be heard.)
• No sound will be output from the subwoofer.
• TONE CONTROL (page 35) and SET MENU (page 53)
settings are not effective.
■ Night listening modes
The night listening modes are designed to improve
listenability at lower volumes or at night. Choose either
NIGHT:CINEMA or NIGHT:MUSIC depending on the
type of material you are playing.
Press NIGHT on the remote control repeatedly to
select cinema or music.
When night listening is selected, the NIGHT indicator in
the front panel display lights up.
• Select NIGHT:CINEMA when watching films to
reduce the dynamic range of film soundtracks and
make dialog easier to hear at lower volumes.
• Select NIGHT:MUSIC when listening to music sources
to preserve ease-of-listening for all sounds.
• Select OFF if you do not want to use this function.
Press l / h to adjust the effect level while
NIGHT:CINEMA or NIGHT:MUSIC is displayed.
This adjusts the level of compression.
• Select “MIN” for minimum compression.
• Select “MID” for standard compression.
• Select “MAX” for maximum compression.
y
NIGHT:CINEMA and NIGHT:MUSIC adjustments are stored
independently.
• You cannot use the night listening modes with PURE DIRECT,
MULTI CH INPUT, or when headphones are connected (even
though the NIGHT indicator lights up when PURE DIRECT is
selected).
• The night listening modes may vary in effectiveness depending
on the input source and surround sound settings you use.
Notes
Direct Stereo
Front panel
or
PROGRAM
Remote control
THX STANDARD EXTD. SUR
ENTERTAIN
MUSIC TV THTR
MOVIE
STEREO HALL JAZZ
ROCK
3421
90
+10
ENT.
5678
Notes
Remote control
NIGHT
AUDIO
ENTER
Remote control
Effect.Lvl:MID
39
PLAYBACK
BASIC
OPERATION
■ Downmixing to 2 channels
You can enjoy 2-channel stereo playback from multi-
channel sources.
Rotate PROGRAM (or press STEREO on the
remote control) to select 2ch Stereo.
You can use a subwoofer with this program when “SWFR” or
“BOTH” is selected in LFE/BASS OUT.
■ Listening to unprocessed input signals
In STRAIGHT mode, two channel stereo sources are
output from only the front left and right speakers. Multi-
channel sources are decoded straight into the appropriate
channels without any additional effect processing.
Press STRAIGHT/EFFECT to select STRAIGHT.
Press STRAIGHT/EFFECT again so that “STRAIGHT”
disappears from the display when you want to turn the
sound effect back on.
■ Virtual CINEMA DSP
Virtual CINEMA DSP allows you to enjoy the CINEMA
DSP programs without surround speakers. It creates
virtual speakers to reproduce a natural sound field.
If you set SURR L/R SP to “NONE”, Virtual CINEMA
DSP activates automatically whenever you select a
CINEMA DSP sound field program.
Virtual CINEMA DSP will not activate, even when SURR L/R
SP is set to “NONE” (see page 56) in the following cases:
– When MULTI CH INPUT is selected as the input source.
– When headphones are connected to the PHONES jack.
■ Playing video sources in the
background
You can combine images from a video source with sound
from an audio source. For example, you can enjoy
listening to classical music while having beautiful scenery
from the video source on the video monitor.
Use the input selector buttons to select a video
source, then select an audio source.
If you want to enjoy an audio source connected to the MULTI CH
INPUT jacks together with a video source, first select the video
source and then press MULTI CH INPUT.
Note
Note
2ch Stereo
THX STANDARD EXTD. SUR
ENTERTAIN
MUSIC TV THTR
MOVIE
STEREO HALL JAZZ
ROCK
3421
90
+10
ENT.
5678
Front panel
or
PROGRAM
Remote control
STRAIGHT
EFFECT
EFFECT
STRAIGHT
Front panel Remote control
or
Note
TUNERPHONO
V
-
AUX
DTV DVR/VCR2VCR 1 DVD
CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R
CD
MULTI CH IN
Audio sources
Video sources
40
PLAYBACK
This unit comes with a variety of input jacks. Do the
following to select the type of input signal you want to
use.
1 Select the input source.
2 Press INPUT MODE to select an input mode.
In most cases, use AUTO.
AUTO Automatically selects input signals in
the following order:
1) Digital signals
*
2) Analog signals
DTS Selects only digital signals encoded in
DTS. If no DTS signals are input, no
sound is output.
ANALOG Selects only analog signals. If no
analog signals are input, no sound is
output.
*
If this unit detects a Dolby Digital or DTS signal, the
decoder automatically switches to the appropriate sound
field program.
y
• You can adjust the default input mode this unit selects when the
power is turned on (see page 61).
• DTS mode is recommended for playback of a CD or LD
encoded in DTS.
If the digital output data of the player has been processed in any
way, you may not be able to perform DTS decoding even if you
make a digital connection between this unit and the player.
■ Displaying information about the input
source
You can display the type, format and sampling frequency
of the current input signal.
1 Select the input source.
2 Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to AMP, then press
STRAIGHT/EFFECT so that “STRAIGHT”
appears in the display.
3 Press k / n to display the following
information about the input signal.
(Format) Signal format display. When the unit
cannot detect a digital signal it
automatically switches to analog input.
in Number of source channels in the input
signal. For example, a multi-channel
soundtrack with 3 front channels, 2
surround channels and LFE, is
displayed as “3/2/LFE”.
fs Sampling frequency. When the unit is
unable to detect the sampling
frequency “Unknown” appears.
rate Bit rate. When the unit is unable to
detect the bit rate “Unknown” appears.
flg Flag data encoded with DTS or Dolby
Digital signals that cue this unit to
automatically switch decoders.
The display shows “3/2/LFE” even when you play DTS-ES
Discrete 6.1 sources that include 3 surround channels.
Selecting input modes
Note
INPUT
DTV DVR/VCR2VCR 1 DVD
V
-
AUX
CBL/SAT MD/TAPE
CD-R
PHONO TUNER CD
MULTI CH IN
or
Front panel Remote control
INPUT MODE
DVD AUTO
V–AUX
DVR/VCR2
VCR 1
CBL/SAT
DTV DVD
MD/TAPE
CD–R CD TUNER
PHONO
VOLUME
A
SP
LL R
dB
TRANSMIT
PHONO TUNER CD
MULTI CH IN
POWER POWER POWER
SYSTEM
STANDBY
AVTV
SLEEP
INPUT MODE
A
B
Front panel Remote control
or
Input mode
Note
DTV DVR/VCR2VCR 1 DVD
V
-
AUX
CBL/SAT MD/TAPE
CD-R
PHONO TUNER CD
MULTI CH IN
EFFECT
STRAIGHT
AMP
SOURCE
TV
then
ENTER
TUNING
41
BASIC
OPERATION
There are 2 tuning methods; automatic and manual.
Automatic tuning is effective when station signals are
strong and there is no interference.
■ Automatic tuning
1 Rotate INPUT to select TUNER as the input
source.
2 Press FM/AM to select the reception band.
“FM” or “AM” appears in the front panel display.
3 Press TUNING MODE (AUTO/MAN’L MONO)
so that the AUTO indicator lights up in the
front panel display.
If a colon (:) appears in the front panel display, this
unit is in PRESET mode and tuning is not possible.
Press PRESET/TUNING (EDIT) to turn it off.
4 Press PRESET/TUNING l / h once to begin
automatic tuning.
Press h to tune into a higher frequency, or press l
to tune into a lower frequency.
When tuned into a station, the TUNED indicator
lights up and the frequency of the received station is
shown in the front panel display.
■ Manual tuning
If the signal from the station you want to select is weak,
you must tune into it manually. Manually tuning into an
FM station will automatically change the reception mode
to monaural to increase the signal quality.
1 Select TUNER and the reception band
following steps 1 and 2 as described in
“Automatic tuning”.
2 Press TUNING MODE (AUTO/MAN’L MONO)
so that the AUTO indicator disappears from
the front panel display.
If a colon (:) appears in the front panel display, this
unit is in PRESET mode and tuning is not possible.
Press PRESET/TUNING (EDIT) to turn it off.
3 Press PRESET/TUNING l / h to tune into
the desired station manually.
Hold down the button to
continue searching.
TUNING
Automatic and manual tuning
VOLUME
VIDEO AUXSILENT
SPEAKERS
INPUT
MULTI CH
INPUT
INPUT MODE
PRESET
/
TUNING
PHONES
A/B/C/D/E
S VIDEO
MEMORY
FM/AM
EDIT
PRESET
/TUNING
MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO
TUNING
MODE
VIDEO AUDIO OPTICALLR
STANDBY
/
ON
A B
MIC
TONE CONTROL
PROGRAM
STRAIGHT
EFFECT
TUNER
PURE DIRECT
YPAO
1
3324
(U.S.A. model)
INPUT
Front panel
FM/AM
or
TUNING
MODE
AUTO/MAN'L MONO
AUTO
Lights up
PRESET
/
TUNING
EDIT
A~~AM~1440 kHz
VCR 1
CBL/SAT
DTV DVD
MD/TAPE
CD–R CD T
U
AUTO
A
SP
PRESET/
TUNING
A~~AM~1530 kHz
VCR 1
CBL/SAT
DTV DVD
MD/TAPE
CD–R CD T
U
TUNE
D
AUTO
A
SP
TUNING
MODE
AUTO/MAN'L MONO
AUTO
Disappears
PRESET
/
TUNING
EDIT
A~~AM~1440 kHz
VCR 1
CBL/SAT
DTV DVD
MD/TAPE
CD–R CD T
U
A
SP
PRESET/
TUNING
42
TUNING
■ Automatically presetting FM stations
You can use the automatic preset tuning feature to store
FM stations. This function enables this unit to
automatically tune into FM stations with strong signals,
and to store up to 40 (8 stations in 5 groups, A1 through
E8) of those stations in order. You can then recall any
preset station easily by selecting the preset station number.
1 Press FM/AM to select the FM band.
2 Press TUNING MODE (AUTO/MAN’L MONO)
so that the AUTO indicator lights up in the
front panel display.
3 Press and hold MEMORY (MAN’L/AUTO FM)
for more than 3 seconds.
The preset number, the MEMORY and AUTO
indicators flash. After about 5 seconds, automatic
presetting starts from the frequency currently
displayed and proceeds toward the higher
frequencies.
When automatic preset tuning is completed, the front
panel display shows the frequency of the last preset
station.
• Any stored station data existing under a preset number is
cleared when you store a new station under that preset number.
• If the number of the received stations does not reach 40 (E8),
automatic preset tuning has automatically stopped after
searching all stations.
• Only FM stations with sufficient signal strength are stored
automatically by automatic preset tuning. If the station you
want to store is weak in signal strength, tune into it manually
and store it by following the procedure in “Manually presetting
stations”.
Automatic preset tuning options
You can select the preset number from which this unit will
store FM stations and/or begin tuning toward lower
frequencies.
After pressing MEMORY in step 3:
1 Press A/B/C/D/E, then PRESET/TUNING l / h to
select the preset number under which the first station
will be stored. Automatic preset tuning will stop when
stations have all been stored up to E8.
2 Press PRESET/TUNING (EDIT) to turn off the colon
(:) and then press PRESET/TUNING l to begin
tuning toward lower frequencies.
Presetting stations
VOLUME
VIDEO AUXSILENT
SPEAKERS
INPUT
MULTI CH
INPUT
INPUT MODE
PRESET
/
TUNING
PHONES
A/B/C/D/E
S VIDEO
MEMORY
FM/AM
EDIT
PRESET
/TUNING
MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO
TUNING
MODE
VIDEO AUDIO OPTICALLR
STANDBY
/
ON
A B
MIC
TONE CONTROL
PROGRAM
STRAIGHT
EFFECT
TUNER
PURE DIRECT
YPAO
321
(U.S.A. model)
FM/AM
TUNING
MODE
AUTO/MAN'L MONO
AUTO
Lights up
MEMORY
MAN'L/AUTO FM
A1:FM 87.5 MHz
V–AUX
DVR/VCR2
VCR 1
CBL/SAT
DTV DVD
MD/TAPE
CD–R CD TUNER
PHONO
AUTO
MEMORY
VOLUME
A
SP
LL R
dB
Notes
Memory back-up
The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data
from being lost even if this unit is set in the standby
mode, the power cord is disconnected from the AC
outlet, or the power supply is temporarily cut due to
power failure. However, if the power is cut for more
than one week, the preset stations may be cleared. If
so, store the stations again by using the presetting
station methods.
43
TUNING
BASIC
OPERATION
■ Manually presetting stations
You can also store up to 40 FM or AM stations (8 stations
in 5 groups, A1 through E8) manually.
1 Tune into a station.
See page 41 for tuning instructions.
When tuned into a station, the front panel display
shows the frequency of the station received.
2 Press MEMORY (MAN’L/AUTO FM).
The MEMORY indicator flashes for about 5 seconds.
3 Press A/B/C/D/E repeatedly to select a preset
station group (A through E) while the
MEMORY indicator is flashing.
The group letter appears. Check that the colon (:)
appears in the front panel display.
4 Press PRESET/TUNING l / h to select a
preset station number (1 through 8) while the
MEMORY indicator is flashing.
Press h to select a higher preset station number.
Press l to select a lower preset station number.
5 Press MEMORY (MAN’L/AUTO FM) on the
front panel while the MEMORY indicator is
flashing.
The station band and
frequency appear in the front
panel display with the preset
group and number you have
selected.
6 Repeat steps 1 through 5 to store other
stations.
• Any stored station data existing under a preset number is
cleared when you store a new station under that preset number.
• The reception mode (stereo or monaural) is stored along with
the station frequency.
VOLUME
VIDEO AUXSILENT
SPEAKERS
INPUT
MULTI CH
INPUT
INPUT MODE
PRESET
/
TUNING
PHONES
A/B/C/D/E
S VIDEO
MEMORY
FM/AM
EDIT
PRESET
/TUNING
MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO
TUNING
MODE
VIDEO AUDIO OPTICALLR
STANDBY
/
ON
A B
MIC
TONE CONTROL
PROGRAM
STRAIGHT
EFFECT
TUNER
PURE DIRECT
YPAO
3 2,5
4
(U.S.A. model)
A :AM 630 kHz
V–AUX
DVR/VCR2
VCR 1
CBL/SAT
DTV DVD
MD/TAPE
CD–R CD TUNER
PHONO
TUNED
VOLUME
A
SP
LL R
dB
MEMORY
MAN'L/AUTO FM
MEMORY
Flashes
A/B/C/D/E
C :AM 630 kHz
V–AUX
DVR/VCR2
VCR 1
CBL/SAT
DTV DVD
MD/TAPE
CD–R CD TUNER
PHONO
TUNED
MEMORY
VOLUME
A
SP
LL R
dB
Notes
PRESET/
TUNING
C3:AM 630 kHz
V–AUX
DVR/VCR2
VCR 1
CBL/SAT
DTV DVD
MD/TAPE
CD–R CD TUNER
PHONO
TUNED
MEMORY
VOLUME
A
SP
LL R
dB
MEMORY
MAN'L/AUTO FM
C3:AM 630 kHz
V–AUX
DVR/VCR2
VCR 1
CBL/SAT
DTV DVD
MD/TAPE
CD–R CD TUNER
PHONO
TUNED
VOLUME
A
SP
LL R
dB
Shows the displayed station has been stored as C3.
44
TUNING
You can tune any desired station simply by selecting the
preset station number under which it was stored.
When performing this operation with the remote
control, first press TUNER to set the remote to
tuner mode.
1 Press A/B/C/D/E to select the preset station
group.
The preset group letter appears in the front panel
display and changes each time you press the button.
2 Press PRESET/TUNING l / h (PRESET +/–
on the remote control) to select a preset
station number (1 through 8).
The preset group and number appear in the front
panel display along with the station band, frequency
and the TUNED indicator lights up.
You can exchange the assignment of two preset stations
with each other. The example below describes the
procedure for exchanging preset station “E1” with “A5”.
1 Select preset station “E1” using
A/B/C/D/E and PRESET/TUNING l / h.
See “Selecting preset stations”.
2 Press and hold PRESET/TUNING (EDIT) for
more than 3 seconds.
“E1” and the MEMORY indicator flash in the front
panel display.
3 Select preset station “A5” by using
A/B/C/D/E and PRESET/TUNING l / h.
“A5” and the MEMORY indicator flash in the front
panel display.
4 Press PRESET/TUNING (EDIT) again.
The stations stored at the two preset assignments are
exchanged.
Selecting preset stations
VOLUME
VIDEO AUXSILENT
SPEAKERS
INPUT
MULTI CH
INPUT
INPUT MODE
PRESET
/
TUNING
PHONES
A/B/C/D/E
S VIDEO
MEMORY
FM/AM
EDIT
PRESET
/TUNING
MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO
TUNING
MODE
VIDEO AUDIO OPTICALLR
STANDBY
/
ON
A B
MIC
TONE CONTROL
PROGRAM
STRAIGHT
EFFECT
TUNER
PURE DIRECT
YPAO
1
2
A/B/C/D/E
VOL
+
–
CH
+
–
TV VOL
TV MUTE TV INPUT
MUTE
+
–
AMP
SOURCE
TV
1
2
(U.S.A. model)
A/B/C/D/E
A/B/C/D/E
TV INPUT
or
Front panel Remote control
PRESET/
TUNING
CH
+
–
PRESET
VCR 1
CBL/SAT
DTV DVD
MD/TAPE
CD–R CD TUNE
R
TUNED
A
SP
E1:FM 87.5 MHz
or
Front panel
Remote control
Exchanging preset stations
VOLUME
VIDEO AUXSILENT
SPEAKERS
INPUT
MULTI CH
INPUT
INPUT MODE
PRESET
/
TUNING
PHONES
A/B/C/D/E
S VIDEO
MEMORY
FM/AM
EDIT
PRESET
/TUNING
MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO
TUNING
MODE
VIDEO AUDIO OPTICALLR
STANDBY
/
ON
A B
MIC
TONE CONTROL
PROGRAM
STRAIGHT
EFFECT
TUNER
PURE DIRECT
YPAO
1,3
1,3
2,4
(U.S.A. model)
PRESET
/
TUNING
EDIT
C
R2
VCR 1
CBL/SAT
DTV DVD
MD/TAPE
CD–R CD TUNER
TUNED
MEMORY
A
SP
E1:FM 87.5 MHz
A5:FM 90.6 MHz
V–AUX
DVR/VCR2
VCR 1
CBL/SAT
DTV DVD
MD/TAPE
CD–R CD TUNER
PHONO
TUNED
MEMORY
VOLUME
A
SP
LL R
dB
PRESET
/
TUNING
EDIT
V–AUX
DVR/VCR2
VCR 1
CBL/SAT
DTV DVD
MD/TAPE
CD–R CD TUNER
PHONO
TUNED
VOLUME
A
SP
LL R
dB
EDIT E1-A5
RECORDING
45
BASIC
OPERATION
Recording adjustments and other operations are
performed from the recording components. Refer to the
operation instructions for those components.
1 Turn on the power of this unit and all
connected components.
2 Select the source component you want to
record from.
3 Start playback (or select a broadcast station)
on the source component.
4 Start recording on the recording component.
y
Always do a test recording before you start an actual recording.
• When this unit is set in the standby mode, you cannot record
between other components connected to this unit.
• The setting of TONE CONTROL, VOLUME, SPEAKER
LEVEL (page 57) and programs does not affect recorded
material.
• A source connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks of this unit
cannot be recorded.
• S-video and composite video signals pass independently
through this unit’s video circuits. Therefore, when recording or
dubbing video signals, if your video source component is
connected to provide only an S-video (or only a composite
video) signal, you can record only an S-video (or only a
composite video) signal to your VCR.
• Digital signals input to the DIGITAL INPUT jacks are not
output to the analog AUDIO OUT (L/R) jacks for recording.
Likewise, analog signals input to the AUDIO IN (L/R) jacks are
not output to the DIGITAL OUTPUT jack. Therefore, if your
source component is connected to provide only digital (or
analog) signals, you can only record digital (or analog) signals.
• A given input source is not output on the same REC OUT
channel. (For example, the signal input from VCR 1 IN is not
output on VCR 1 OUT.)
• Check the copyright laws in your country to record from
records, CDs, radio, etc. Recording of copyrighted material may
infringe copyright laws.
■ Special considerations when recording
DTS software
The DTS signal is a digital bitstream. Attempting to
digitally record the DTS bitstream will result in noise
being recorded. Therefore, if you want to use this unit to
record sources that have DTS signals recorded on them,
the following considerations and adjustments need to be
made.
For DVDs and CDs encoded with DTS, when your player
is compatible with the DTS format, follow its operation
instruction to make a setting so that the analog signal will
be output from the player.
RECORDING
VOLUME
VIDEO AUXSILENT
SPEAKERS
INPUT
MULTI CH
INPUT
INPUT MODE
PRESET
/
TUNING
PHONES
A/B/C/D/E
S VIDEO
MEMORY
FM/AM
EDIT
PRESET
/TUNING
MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO
TUNING
MODE
VIDEO AUDIO OPTICALLR
STANDBY
/
ON
A B
MIC
TONE CONTROL
PROGRAM
STRAIGHT
EFFECT
EON PTY SEEK
MODE START
RDS MODE
/FREQ
TUNER
PURE DIRECT
YPAO
21
DTV DVR/VCR2VCR 1 DVD
V
-
AUX
CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R
PHONO TUNER CD
MULTI CH IN
POWER POWER POWER
SYSTEM
STANDBY
AVTV
SLEEP
INPUT MODE
A
B
1
2
(U.S.A. model)
INPUT
DTV DVR/VCR2VCR 1 DVD
V
-
AUX
CBL/SAT MD/TAPE
CD-R
PHONO TUNER CD
MULTI CH IN
or
Front panel Remote control
Notes
If you playback a video source that uses scrambled or
encoded signals to prevent it from being dubbed, the
picture itself may be disturbed due to those signals.
SOUND FIELD PROGRAM DESCRIPTIONS
46
This unit is equipped with a variety of precise digital decoders that allow you to enjoy multi-channel playback from
almost any sound source (stereo or multi-channel). This unit is also equipped with a YAMAHA digital sound field
processing (DSP) chip containing several sound field programs which you can use to enhance your playback experience.
Most of these sound field programs are precise digital recreations of actual acoustic environments found in famous
concert halls, music venues, and movie theaters.
y
The YAMAHA CINEMA DSP modes are compatible with all Dolby Digital, DTS, and Dolby Surround sources. Set the input mode to
AUTO (see page 40) to enable this unit to automatically switch to the appropriate digital decoder according to the input signal.
• This unit’s DSP sound field programs are recreations of real-world acoustic environments made from precise measurements taken in
actual halls, etc. Thus you may notice variations in the strength of the reflections coming from the front, back, left and right.
• Feel free to choose a sound field program based on your listening preference, and not purely on the name of the program itself.
You can select from the following sound fields when playing movie or video sources. The sound fields marked “MULTI”
can be used with multi-channel sources, like DVD, digital TV, etc. Those marked “2-CH” can be used with 2-channel
(stereo) sources like TV programs, video tapes, etc.
SOUND FIELD PROGRAM DESCRIPTIONS
Notes
For movie/video sources
Program Features Sources
STEREO:
2ch Stereo
Downmixes multi-channel sources to 2 (left and right) channels or plays back 2-channel
sources as is.
MULTI
2-CH
MUSIC VIDEO
This program lends an enthusiastic atmosphere to the sound, giving you the feeling that you
are at an actual jazz or rock concert.
ENTERTAINMENT:
Game
This program adds a deep and spatial feeling to video game sounds.
TV THEATER:
Mono Movie
This program is provided for reproducing monaural video sources (such as old movies). The
program produces the optimum reverberation to create sound depth using only the presence
sound field.
TV THEATER:
Variety/Sports
Though the presence sound field is relatively narrow, the surround sound field employs the
sound environment of a large concert hall. This effect enhances the experience of watching
various TV programs such as news, variety shows, music programs or sports programs.
MOVIE THEATER:
Spectacle
CINEMA DSP processing. This program creates the extremely wide sound field of a 70-mm
movie theater. It precisely reproduces the source sound in detail, making both the video and the
sound field incredibly real. This is ideal for any kind of video source encoded with Dolby
Surround, Dolby Digital or DTS (especially large-scale movie productions).
MOVIE THEATER:
Sci-Fi
CINEMA DSP processing. This program clearly reproduces dialog and sound effects in the
latest sound form for science fiction films, thus creating a broad and expansive cinematic space
amid silence. You can enjoy science fiction films in a virtual-space sound field that includes
Dolby Surround, Dolby Digital and DTS-encoded software employing the most advanced
techniques.
MOVIE THEATER:
Adventure
CINEMA DSP processing. This program is ideal for precisely reproducing the sound design of
the newest 70-mm and multi-channel soundtrack films. The sound field is made to be similar to
that of the newest movie theaters, so the reverberations of the sound field itself are restrained
as much as possible.
MOVIE THEATER:
General
CINEMA DSP processing. This program is for reproducing sounds from 70-mm and multi-
channel soundtrack films, and is characterized by soft and extensive sound field. The presence
sound field is relatively narrow. It spatially spreads all around and toward the screen,
restraining the echo effect of conversations without losing clarity.
THX:
THX Cinema
THX processing for any multi-channel source. 2-channel sources are decoded by the PRO
LOGIC, PRO LOGIC II, PRO LOGIC IIx or DTS Neo: 6 decoder before THX processing.
47
SOUND FIELD PROGRAM DESCRIPTIONS
SOUND FIELD
PROGRAMS
THX:
THX Surr. EX
THX processing for Dolby Digital and Dolby Digital EX sources. This program is available
only when surround back L/R speakers are connected to this unit and when the input source
contains surround back channel signals.
MULTI
THX:
dts ES + THX
THX processing for DTS-ES sources.
DOLBY DIGITAL:
SUR. STANDARD
Standard 5.1 channel processing for Dolby Digital sources.
DOLBY DIGITAL:
SUR. ENHANCED
CINEMA DSP enhanced processing for Dolby Digital sources.
q D+PLIIxMovie:
SUR. STANDARD
Standard 7.1 channel processing for Dolby Digital sources.
q D+PLIIxMovie:
SUR. ENHANCED
CINEMA DSP enhanced 7.1 channel processing for Dolby Digital sources.
DOLBY D EX:
SUR. STANDARD
Standard 6.1 channel processing for Dolby Digital sources.
DOLBY D EX:
SUR. ENHANCED
CINEMA DSP enhanced 6.1 channel processing (Dolby Digital EX) for Dolby Digital
sources.
DTS:
SUR. STANDARD
Standard 5.1 channel processing for DTS sources.
DTS:
SUR. ENHANCED
CINEMA DSP enhanced processing for DTS and 96kHz/24-bit DTS sources.
DTS 96/24:
SUR. STANDARD
Standard 5.1 channel processing for 96kHz/24-bit DTS sources.
DTS+PLIIx Movie:
SUR. STANDARD
Standard 7.1 channel processing (Dolby Pro Logic IIx) for DTS sources.
DTS+PLIIx Movie:
SUR. ENHANCED
CINEMA DSP enhanced 7.1 channel processing (Dolby Pro Logic IIx) for DTS sources.
DTS+DOLBY EX:
SUR. STANDARD
Standard 6.1 channel processing (Dolby Digital EX) for DTS sources.
DTS+DOLBY EX:
SUR. ENHANCED
CINEMA DSP enhanced 6.1 channel processing (Dolby Digital EX) for DTS sources.
DTS ES Mtrx6.1:
SUR. STANDARD
Standard 6.1 channel processing (DTS-ES Matrix) for DTS sources.
DTS ES Mtrx6.1:
SUR. ENHANCED
CINEMA DSP enhanced processing (DTS-ES Matrix) for DTS and 96kHz/24-bit DTS
sources.
DTS ES Disc6.1:
SUR. STANDARD
Standard 6.1 channel processing (DTS-ES Discrete) for DTS sources.
DTS ES Disc6.1:
SUR. ENHANCED
CINEMA DSP enhanced processing (DTS-ES Discrete) for DTS sources.
DTS 96/24 ES:
SUR. STANDARD
Standard 6.1 channel processing (DTS-ES Matrix) for 96kHz/24-bit DTS sources.
Program Features Sources
48
SOUND FIELD PROGRAM DESCRIPTIONS
*
You can select either Pro Logic IIx or
Pro Logic II
processing using the
PLII/PLIIx
parameter on page 85.
PRO LOGIC:
SUR. STANDARD
Standard processing for Dolby Surround sources.
2-CH
PRO LOGIC:
SUR. ENHANCED
CINEMA DSP enhanced precessing for Dolby Surround sources.
PRO LOGIC IIx:
PLIIx Movie
Dolby Pro Logic IIx processing for movie software.
*
PRO LOGIC II:
PLII Movie
Dolby Pro Logic II processing for movie software.
*
PRO LOGIC IIx:
PLIIx Game
Dolby Pro Logic IIx processing for game software.
*
PRO LOGIC II:
PLII Game
Dolby Pro Logic II processing for game software.
*
DTS:
Neo:6 Cinema
DTS processing for movie software.
Program Features Sources
49
SOUND FIELD PROGRAM DESCRIPTIONS
SOUND FIELD
PROGRAMS
You can select from the following sound fields when playing music sources, like CD, FM/AM broadcasting, tapes, etc.
*
You can select either Pro Logic IIx or
Pro Logic II
processing using the
PLII/PLIIx
parameter on page 85.
For music sources
Program Features Sources
CONCERT HALL
HiFi DSP processing. A classic shoe-box type concert hall with approximately 1700 seats.
Pillars and ornate carvings create extremely complex reflections which produce a very full,
rich sound.
MULTI
2-CH
JAZZ CLUB
HiFi DSP processing. This is the sound field at stage front in “The Bottom Line”, a famous
New York jazz club. The floor can seat 300 people to the left and right in a sound field offering
a real and vibrant sound.
ROCK CONCERT
HiFi DSP processing. The ideal program for lively, dynamic rock music. The data for this
program was recorded at LA’s “hottest” rock venue. The listener’s virtual seat is at the center-
left of the hall.
ENTERTAINMENT:
Disco
HiFi DSP processing. This program recreates the acoustic environment of a lively disco in the
heart of a big city. The sound is dense and highly concentrated. It is also characterized by a
high-energy, “immediate” sound.
q D+PLIIxMusic:
SUR. STANDARD
Standard Dolby Digital and Dolby Pro Logic IIx processing for music sources.
MULTI
q D+PLIIxMusic:
SUR. ENHANCED
DSP enhanced Dolby Digital and Dolby Pro Logic IIx processing for music sources.
DTS+PLIIx Music:
SUR. STANDARD
Standard DTS and Dolby Pro Logic IIx processing for music sources.
DTS+PLIIx Music:
SUR. ENHANCED
DSP enhanced DTS and Dolby Pro Logic IIx processing for music sources.
STEREO:
2ch Stereo
2 (left and right) channel playback.
2-CH
STEREO:
Direct Stereo
Use to output stereo sources to only the front left and right speakers without any processing.
STEREO:
7ch Stereo
Use to increase the output stereo sources (in stereo) from all speakers. This provides a larger
sound field and is ideal for background music at parties, etc.
PRO LOGIC IIx:
PLIIx Music
Dolby Pro Logic IIx processing for music software.
*
PRO LOGIC II:
PLII Music
Dolby Pro Logic II processing for music software.
*
DTS:
Neo:6 Music
DTS processing for music software.
ADVANCED OPERATIONS
50
You can display this unit’s operating information on a
video monitor. If you display the SET MENU and sound
field program parameter settings on a monitor, it is much
easier to see the available options and parameters than it is
by reading this information in the front panel display.
1 Turn on the video monitor connected to this
unit.
2 Press ON SCREEN repeatedly to change the
OSD mode.
The OSD mode changes in the
following order: full display, short
display, and display off.
Full display
Always shows the sound field program parameter
settings as well as the contents of the front panel
display.
Short display
Briefly shows the contents of the front panel display
at the bottom of the screen each time you operate this
unit.
Display off
Only operations performed using ON SCREEN are
displayed. The OSD is displayed when using SET
MENU or the test tone feature, even if the OSD mode
is set to “Display off”.
• The OSD signal is not output to the REC OUT jack, and will
not be recorded.
• When the component video signals are input, short display is
not output to the COMPONENT VIDEO MONITOR OUT
jacks.
• You can set the OSD to turn on (gray background) or off when a
video source is not being reproduced (or the source component
is turned off) by using DISPLAY SET (see page 62).
Use this feature to automatically set this unit in the
standby mode after a certain amount of time. The sleep
timer is useful when you are going to sleep while this unit
is playing or recording a source. The sleep timer also
automatically turns off any external components
connected to the AC OUTLET(S).
■ Setting the sleep timer
1 Select a source and start playback on the
source component.
2 Press SLEEP repeatedly to
set the amount of time.
Each time you press SLEEP, the front
panel display changes as shown
below. The SLEEP indicator flashes
while switching the amount of time for
the sleep timer.
The SLEEP indicator lights up in the front panel
display, and the display returns to the selected sound
field program.
ADVANCED OPERATIONS
Selecting the OSD mode
Notes
ON SCREEN
DISPLAY
P08
Sci-Fi
.DSPLEVEL;;;;0dB
P.INITDLY;;16ms
P.ROOMSIZE;;1.0
S.INITDLY;;20ms
S.ROOMSIZE;;1.0
P08MOVIE THEATER
Sci-Fi
Full display Short display
Using the sleep timer
TRANSMIT
SELECT
DTV DVR/VCR2VCR 1 DVD
V
-
AUX
CBL/SAT MD/TAPE
CD-R
PHONO TUNER CD
MULTI CH IN
POWER POWER POWER
SYSTEM
STANDBY
AVTV
SLEEP
INPUT MODE
A
B
2
SLEEP
SLEEP 120 min. SLEEP 90 min.
SLEEP 60 min.SLEEP 30 min.SLEEP OFF
SLEEP 120min
V–AUX
DVR/VCR2
VCR 1
CBL/SAT
DTV DVD
MD/TAPE
CD–R CD TUNER
PHONO
SLEEP
VOLUME
A
SP
LL R
dB
CONCERT HALL
V–AUX
DVR/VCR2
VCR 1
CBL/SAT
DTV DVD
MD/TAPE
CD–R CD TUNER
PHONO
SLEEP
VOLUME
A
SP
LL R
dB
51
ADVANCED OPERATIONS
ADVANCED
OPERATION
■ Canceling the sleep timer
Press SLEEP repeatedly until “SLEEP OFF” appears in
the front panel display.
After a few seconds, “SLEEP OFF” disappears, and the
SLEEP indicator goes off.
y
The sleep timer setting can also be canceled by pressing
STANDBY on the remote control (or STANDBY/ON on the front
panel) to set this unit to the standby mode.
You can adjust the output level of each speaker while
listening to a music source. This is also possible when
playing sources through the MULTI CH INPUT jacks.
Please note that this operation will override the level
adjustments made in “AUTO SETUP” (page 26),
“Speaker level” (page 57) and “Using the test tone”
(page 52).
1 Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to AMP.
2 Press LEVEL repeatedly to select the
speaker you want to adjust.
FRONT L Front left speaker level
CENTER Center speaker level
FRONT R Front right speaker level
SUR.R Surround right speaker level
SUR.B.R Surround back right speaker level
SUR.B.L Surround back left speaker level
SUR.L Surround left speaker level
SWFR Subwoofer level
PRES Presence speaker level
y
Once you press LEVEL, you can also select the speaker by
pressing k / n.
3 Press l / h to adjust the speaker output
level.
The control range is from +10 dB to –10 dB.
SLEEP
Manually adjusting speaker levels
SET MENU
MENU
EFFECT
TEST
RETURN
ON SCREEN
DISPLAY
STRAIGHT
NIGHT
AUDIO
PURE DIRECT
ENTER
LEVEL
TITLE
A/B/C/D/E
VOL
+
–
CH
+
–
TV VOL
TV MUTE TV INPUT
MUTE
+
–
AMP
SOURCE
TV
1
2
3
52
ADVANCED OPERATIONS
You can use the test tone feature to manually balance your
speaker levels. Please note that this operation will override
the level adjustments made in “AUTO SETUP” (page 26),
“Speaker level” (page 57) and “Manually adjusting
speaker levels” (page 51). Use the test tone to set speaker
levels so that the volume from each speaker is identical
when heard from your listening position.
You cannot activate the test tone if headphones are connected to
the PHONES jack. Remove the headphones from the PHONES
jack.
1 Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to AMP.
2 Press TEST.
The unit outputs a test tone.
3 Press k / n repeatedly to select the speaker
you want to adjust.
TEST LEFT Front left speaker
TEST CENTER Center speaker
TEST RIGHT Front right speaker
TEST SUR. R Surround right speaker
TEST SUR. B. R Surround back right speaker
TEST SUR. B. L Surround back left speaker
TEST SUR. L Surround left speaker
TEST SUBWOOFER Subwoofer
4 Press l / h to adjust speaker volumes.
5 Press TEST when you have completed your
adjustment.
If PRESENCE SP in SPEAKER SET is set to “YES”
(see page 56), proceed to step 6 to adjust the presence
speaker volumes.
If PRESENCE SP in SPEAKER SET is set to
“NONE”, the test tone stops.
6 Press k / n repeatedly to select the
speaker(s) you want to output the test tone.
TEST FRONT Front speakers
TEST PRESENCE Presence speakers
TEST PRES L Presence left speaker
TEST PRES R Presence right speaker
7 Press l / h to adjust the presence speaker
volumes.
8 Press TEST when you have completed your
adjustment.
The test tone stops.
y
• If you use a handheld SPL meter, hold at arms length and point
upwards so that the meter is in the listening position. With the
meter set to the 70 dB scale and to C SLOW, calibrate each
speaker to 75 dB.
• Before outputting the test tone, we recommend that you set the
output volume to 0 dB.
Using the test tone
Note
SET MENU
MENU
EFFECT
TEST
RETURN
ON SCREEN
DISPLAY
STRAIGHT
NIGHT
AUDIO
PURE DIRECT
ENTER
LEVEL
TITLE
A/B/C/D/E
VOL
+
–
CH
+
–
TV VOL
TV MUTE TV INPUT
MUTE
+
–
AMP
SOURCE
TV
1
3,6
2,5,8
4,7
SET MENU
53
ADVANCED
OPERATION
You can use the following parameters in SET MENU to adjust a variety of system settings and customize the way this
unit operates. Change the initial settings (indicated in bold under each parameter) to reflect the needs of your listening
environment.
■ AUTO SETUP
Use to specify which speaker parameters auto setup will adjust, and to activate the auto setup procedure (see page 26).
■ MANUAL SETUP
Use to manually adjust speaker and system settings.
BASIC MENU
Use to quickly setup basic system parameters (see page 31).
SOUND MENU
Use to manually adjust any speaker setting, alter the quality and tone of the sound output by the system or compensate for
video signal processing delays when using LCD monitors or projectors.
y
Most of the parameters described in SOUND MENU are set automatically when you run auto setup (see page 26). You can use SOUND
MENU to make further adjustments, but we recommend running auto setup first.
INPUT MENU
Use to reassign digital input/outputs, select the input mode, rename your inputs, or specify external input settings.
SET MENU
Item Features Page
A)SPEAKER SET
Selects the size of each speaker, the speakers for low-frequency signal output, and the cross over
frequency.
55
B)SPEAKER LEVEL
Adjusts the output level of each speaker.
57
C)SP DISTANCE
Adjusts the delay time of each speaker.
57
D)GRAPHIC EQ
Adjusts the tonal quality of each speaker.
58
E)LFE LEVEL
Adjusts the output level of the LFE channel for Dolby Digital or DTS signals.
58
F)DYNAMIC RANGE
Adjusts the dynamic range for Dolby Digital or DTS signals.
58
G)LOW FRQ. TEST
Matches the subwoofer level with the level of the other speakers.
59
H)HP TONE CTRL
Adjusts the tonal balance of the headphones.
59
I)AUDIO SET
Customizes overall audio settings of this unit.
59
J)PR/SBch SELECT
Selects priority to either surround back or presence speakers when both sets of speakers are
connected to this unit.
60
Item Features Page
A)I/O ASSIGNMENT
Assigns jacks according to the component to be used.
60
B)INPUT MODE
Selects the initial input mode of the source.
61
C)INPUT RENAME
Changes the name of the inputs.
61
D)MULTI CH INPUT
Sets the direction of the signals input into the center, subwoofer and surround channels for the
source component connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks.
62
54
SET MENU
OPTION MENU
Use to adjust the optional system settings.
*
(U.S.A., Canada, U.K., Europe and Australia models only)
Use the remote control to access and adjust each
parameter.
y
You can change SET MENU parameters while the unit is
reproducing sound.
You cannot change some SET MENU parameters while the unit
is in either cinema or music night listening mode.
1 Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to AMP, then press
SET MENU to enter the SET MENU.
2 Press k / n to select AUTO SETUP or
MANUAL SETUP, then press l / h to enter
the selected category.
If k is pressed when AUTO SETUP is selected, or if n is
pressed when MANUAL SETUP is selected, SET MENU
will be closed. Press SET MENU to open SET MENU
again.
3 Press k / n repeatedly to select a menu,
then press l / h to enter the menu item.
Repeat this operation to navigate to and enter the
setup mode of the item you want to adjust.
Item Features Page
A)DISPLAY SET
Adjusts the settings of the OSD and the front panel display and converts video signals.
62
B)MEMORY GUARD
Locks sound field program parameters and other SET MENU settings.
63
C)PARAM. INI
Initializes the parameters of a group of sound field programs.
63
D)SP IMP. SET
Selects the impedance of your speakers.
63
E)ZONE SET
Specifies the location of the speakers connected to the SPEAKERS B terminals.
64
F)ZONE2 SET
*
Selects the Zone 2 mode.
64
G)ZONE3 SET
*
Selects the Zone 3 mode.
64
Using SET MENU
Note
SET MENU
MENU
EFFECT
TEST
RETURN
ON SCREEN
DISPLAY
STRAIGHT
NIGHT
AUDIO
PURE DIRECT
ENTER
LEVEL
TITLE
A/B/C/D/E
THX SURROUND SUR. BACK
ENTERTAIN
MUSIC TV THTR MOVIE
STEREO HALL JAZZ
ROCK
VOL
+
–
3421
90
+10
ENT.
5678
CH
+
–
TV VOL
TV MUTE TV INPUT
MUTE
+
–
AMP
SOURCE
TV
1
2,3,5
5
2,3,4
Note
SET MENU
MENU
AMP
SOURCE
TV
then
SET MENU
. ;AUTO SETUP
;MANUAL SETUP
: Up/Down
p
/
p
: Enter
</>
ENTER
ENTER
then
55
SET MENU
ADVANCED
OPERATION
4 Press l / h repeatedly to change the setting
of the item you want to adjust.
5 To exit, press k / n repeatedly until the menu
disappears or just press one of the sound
field program group buttons.
Use to manually adjust any speaker setting or compensate
for video signal processing delays when using LCD
monitors or projectors. Most of the SOUND parameters
are set automatically when you run auto setup (see
page 26).
■ Speaker set A)SPEAKER SET
Use to manually adjust any speaker setting.
y
If you are not satisfied with the bass sounds from your speakers,
you can change these settings according to your preference.
Set any THX speakers to SMALL (SML).
Center speaker CENTER SP
Choices: NONE, SML, LRG
• Select “NONE” if you do not have a center speaker.
The unit directs all of the center channel signal to the
front left and right speakers.
• Select “SML” if you have a small center speaker. The
unit directs the low-frequency signals of the center
channel to the speakers selected in LFE/BASS OUT.
• Select “LRG” if you have a large center speaker. The
unit directs the entire range of the center channel signal
to the center speaker.
Front speakers FRONT SP
Choices: SMALL, LARGE
• Select “SMALL” if you have small front speakers. The
unit directs the low-frequency signals of the front
channel to the speakers selected in LFE/BASS OUT.
• Select “LARGE” if you have large front speakers. The
unit directs the entire range of the front left and right
channel signals to the front left and right speakers.
Memory back-up
The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data
from being lost even if this unit is in the standby mode.
However, if the power cord is disconnected from the
AC outlet, or the power supply is cut for more than one
week, the stored data will be lost. If so, adjust the
items again.
or
ENTER
THX STANDARD EXTD. SUR
ENTERTAIN
MUSIC TY THTR
MOVIE
STEREO HALL JAZZ
ROCK
3421
90
+10
ENT.
5678
Using SOUND MENU
Note
. A)SPEAKERSET
B)SPEAKERLEVEL
C)SPDISTANCE
D)GRAPHICEQ
: Up/Down
p
/
p
: Enter
</>
2 SOUND
MENU 1/3
NONE [SML LRG
CENTER SP
[SMALL LARGE
FRONT SP
56
SET MENU
Surround left/right speakers SURR L/R SP
Choices: NONE, SML, LRG
• Select “NONE” if you do not have surround speakers.
This will set the unit to the Virtual CINEMA DSP
mode (see page 39) and automatically set the surround
back speaker setting (SURR B L/R SP) to “NONE”.
• Select “SML” if you have small surround left and right
speakers. The low-frequency signals of the surround
channel are directed to the speakers selected in LFE/
BASS OUT.
• Select “LRG” if you have large surround left and right
speakers or if a rear subwoofer is connected to the
surround speakers. The entire range of the surround
channel signal is directed to the surround left and right
speakers.
Surround back speakers SURR B L/R SP
Choices: LRGx2, LRGx1, SMLx2, SMLx1, NONE
• Select “LRGx2” if you have 2 large surround back
speakers. The unit directs the entire range of the
surround back channel signal to the surround back
speakers.
• Select “LRGx1” if you have a large surround back
speaker. The unit directs the entire range of the
surround back channel signal to the left surround back
speaker.
• Select “SMLx2” if you have 2 small surround back
speakers. The low-frequency signals of the surround
back channels are directed to the speakers selected in
LFE/BASS OUT.
• Select “SMLx1” if you have a small surround back
speaker. The low-frequency signals of the surround
back channel are directed to the speakers selected in
LFE/BASS OUT, and the rest of the frequency signals
are directed to the left surround back speaker.
• Select “NONE” if you do not have a surround back
speaker. The unit directs all of the surround back
channel signal to the surround left and right speakers.
If you select “LRGx1” or “SMLx1”, connect the speaker to the
left SURROUND BACK speaker terminals.
Presence speakers PRESENCE SP
Choices: NONE, YES
• Select “YES” if you have presence speakers.
• Select “NONE” if you do not have presence speakers.
LFE/bass out LFE/BASS OUT
Low-frequency (bass) signals can be directed to the
subwoofer and/or the front left and right speakers
according to the characteristics of your system. This
setting also determines the routing of the LFE (low-
frequency effect) signals found in Dolby Digital or DTS
sources.
Choices: SWFR (subwoofer), FRNT, BOTH
THX recommendation: SWFR
• Select “SWFR” if you connect a subwoofer. LFE and
low-frequency signals from other channels are directed
to the subwoofer according to the speaker settings.
• Select “FRNT” if you do not use a subwoofer. LFE and
low frequency signals from other channels are directed
to the front speakers according to the speaker settings
(even if you have previously set front speakers to
SML).
• Select “BOTH” if you connect a subwoofer and you
want to output low-frequency signals from front
channels to both the front speakers and subwoofer.
LFE and low-frequency signals from other channels
are also directed to the subwoofer according to the
speaker settings. Use this function to reinforce low-
frequency signals using the subwoofer when playing
back sources such as CDs.
Note
NONE [SML LRG
SURR L/R SP
SMLx1 [SMLx2
SURR B L/R SP
[NONE YES
PRESENCE SP
[SWFR FRNT BOTH
LFE/BASS OUT
57
SET MENU
ADVANCED
OPERATION
Cross over CROSS OVER
Use this feature to select a cross-over (cut-off) frequency
for all low-frequency signals. All frequencies below the
selected frequency will be sent to the subwoofer.
Choices: 40Hz, 60Hz, 80Hz (THX), 90Hz, 100Hz,
110Hz, 120Hz, 160Hz, 200Hz
THX recommendation: “80Hz”
■ Speaker level B)SPEAKER LEVEL
Use these settings to manually balance the speaker levels
between the front left (or surround left) speaker and each
speaker selected in SPEAKER SET (page 55).
Choices: –10.0 dB to +10.0 dB
• FR adjusts the balance of the front left and front right
speakers.
• C adjusts the balance of the front left and center
speakers.
• SL adjusts the balance of the front left and surround
left speakers.
• SBL
*
adjusts the balance of the surround left and
surround back left speakers.
• SBR
*
adjusts the balance of the surround left and
surround back right speakers.
• SR adjusts the balance of the surround left and
surround right speakers.
• SWFR adjusts the balance of the front left speaker and
subwoofer.
• PRES adjusts the balance of the front and presence
speakers.
*
SB will be displayed if you selected only one surround back
speaker in SURR B L/R SP (page 56).
y
If you use a handheld SPL meter, hold at arms length and point
upwards so that the meter is in the listening position. With the
meter set to the 70 dB scale and to C SLOW, calibrate each
speaker to 75 dB.
■ Speaker distance C)SP DISTANCE
Use this feature to manually input the distance of each
speaker and adjust the delay applied to respective channel.
Ideally, each speaker should be the same distance from the
main listening position. However, this is not possible in
most home situations. Thus, a certain amount of delay
must be applied to the sound from each speaker so that all
sounds arrive at the listening position at the same time.
Unit UNIT
Choices: meters (m), feet (ft)
Initial setting:
U.S.A. and Canada models: feet (ft)
Other models: meters (m)
• Select “meters” to input speaker distances in meters.
• Select “feet” to input speaker distances in feet.
Speaker distances
Choices: 0.3 to 24.00 m (1 to 80 ft)
• FRONT L adjusts the distance of the front left speaker.
Initial setting: 3.0 m (10.0 ft)
• FRONT R adjusts the distance of the front right
speaker. Initial setting: 3.0 m (10.0 ft)
• CENTER adjusts the distance of the center speaker.
Initial setting: 3.0 m (10.0 ft)
• SURR L adjusts the distance of the surround left
speaker. Initial setting: 3.0 m (10.0 ft)
• SURR R adjusts the distance of the surround right
speaker. Initial setting: 3.0 m (10.0 ft)
• SB L
*
adjusts the distance of the surround back left
speaker. Initial setting: 2.10 m (7.0 ft)
• SB R
*
adjusts the distance of the surround back right
speaker. Initial setting: 2.10 m (7.0 ft)
• SWFR adjusts the distance of the subwoofer. Initial
setting: 3.0 m (10.0 ft)
• PRES L adjusts the distance of the presence left
speaker. Initial setting: 3.0 m (10.0 ft)
• PRES R adjusts the distance of the presence right
speaker. Initial setting: 3.0 m (10.0 ft)
*
“SURR B” will be displayed if you selected only one surround
back speaker in SURR B L/R SP (page 56).
FREQ;;;80Hz(THX)
CROSS OVER
-+
. FR
C
SL
B)SPEAKER
LEVEL
. UNIT;;;;;;meters
FRONTL;;;;3.00m
FRONTR;;;;3.00m
CENTER;;;;;3.00m
: Up/Down
p
/
p
: Adjust
</>
C)SP
DISTANCE
58
SET MENU
■ Graphic equalizer D)GRAPHIC EQ
Use this feature to select parametric (PEQ) or graphic
equalizer (GEQ).
Equalizer select EQ SELECT
Choices: PEQ, GEQ
• Select “PEQ” to use the equalizer adjusted in auto
setup.
• Select “GEQ” to adjust the built-in 7-band graphic
equalizer (see “Equalizer” below).
Equalizer
Use to match the tonal quality of the center, surround L/R
and surround back L/R speakers with that of the front L/R
speakers.
Choices: –6 to +6 (dB)
You can adjust 7 frequency bands: 63Hz, 160Hz, 400Hz,
1kHz, 2.5kHz, 6.3kHz, 16kHz
■ Low-frequency effect level E)LFE LEVEL
Use to adjust the output level of the LFE (low-frequency
effect) channel according to the capacity of your
subwoofer or headphones. The LFE channel carries low-
frequency special effects which are only added to certain
scenes. This setting is effective only when this unit
decodes Dolby Digital or DTS signals.
Choices: –20 to 0 (dB)
Speaker SPEAKER
Select to adjust the speaker LFE level.
Headphone HEADPHONE
Select to adjust the headphone LFE level.
Depending on the settings of LFE LEVEL, some signals may not
be output from the SUBWOOFER PRE OUT jack.
■ Dynamic range F)DYNAMIC RANGE
Use to select the amount of dynamic range compression to
be applied to your speakers or headphones. This setting is
effective only when the unit is decoding Dolby Digital and
DTS signals.
Choices: MIN (minimum), STD (standard),
MAX (maximum)
Speaker SP
Select to adjust the speaker compression.
Headphone HP
Select to adjust the headphone compression.
• Select “MIN” if you regularly listen at low volume
levels.
• Select “STD” for general use.
• Select “MAX” to preserve the greatest amount of
dynamic range.
Note
. EQ SELECT....PEQ
/ : Up/Down
p
p
</> : Select
D) GRAPHIC EQ
. CHANNEL;;FRONT L
-+
63Hz 0dB
160Hz 0dB
400Hz 0dB
1kHz 0dB
2.5kHz 0dB
6.3kHz 0dB
16kHz 0dB
D)GRAPHIC
EQ
. SPEAKER;;;;;;0dB
HEADPHONE;;;;0dB
/ : Up/Down
p
p
</> : Adjust
E)LFE
LEVEL
. SP: MIN STD[MAX
HP: MIN STD[MAX
/ : Up/Down
p
p
</> : Select
F)DYNAMIC RANGE
59
SET MENU
ADVANCED
OPERATION
■ Low frequency test G)LOW FRQ. TEST
Use this feature to adjust the output level of the subwoofer
so it matches your other speakers.
1 Press l / h to set TEST TONE to ON, and
adjust the volume with VOL –/+ so you can
hear the tone.
Do not turn up the volume too high. If no test tone is
heard, turn down the volume, set this unit in the
standby mode and make sure all the necessary
connections are correct.
The tone generator produces a narrow-band noise
centered on a specified frequency by the band pass
filter, as well as a wide-band noise.
2 Press n to go to OUTPUT and press l / h to
select the speaker you want to compare with
the subwoofer.
Choices: FRONT L/R, FRONT L, CENTER,
FRONT R, SUR.R, SBR
*
, SBL
*
, SUR.L, SWFR,
PRESENCE
* “SB” will be displayed if you selected only one surround
back speaker in SURR B L/R SP (page 56).
3 Press n to go to FRQ and press l / h to
select the frequency you want to use.
Choices: 35 to 250 (Hz), WIDE
Initial: 88 Hz
4 Adjust the volume of the subwoofer with the
controls on the subwoofer so it matches that
of the speaker you are comparing it to.
y
You can use the test tone not only for adjusting the subwoofer
level, but also for checking the low-frequency characteristics of
your listening room. Low-frequency sounds are especially
affected by the listener’s position, speaker placement, subwoofer
polarity and other conditions.
■ Headphone tone control H)HP TONE CTRL
Use to adjust the amount of bass and treble output to your
headphones.
Choices: –6 to +6 (dB)
• Use BASS to adjust the headphone bass level.
• Use TRBL to adjust the headphone treble level.
■ Audio set I)AUDIO SET
Use to customize this unit’s overall audio settings.
Mute MUTE
Use to adjust how much the mute function reduces the
output volume.
Choices: MUTE, –20 dB
• Select “MUTE” to completely halt all output of sound.
• Select “–20 dB” to reduce the current volume by 20
dB.
Audio Delay AUDIO DELAY
Use to delay the sound output and synchronize it with the
video image. This may be necessary when using certain
LCD monitors or projectors.
Choices: 0 to 240 (ms)
Dialog lift DIALG.LIFT
Use to turn on/off the DIALG.LIFT parameter (see
page 85). This parameter adjusts the height of the front
and center channel sounds (dialog, vocals, etc.) by
assigning some of the front and center channel elements to
the presence speakers.
Choices: ON, OFF
• Select “ON” to turn on DIALG.LIFT effect.
• Select “OFF” to turn off DIALG.LIFT effect.
DIALG.LIFT appears only when PRESENCE is set to “YES”
(see page 31).
. TEST TONE;;;;OFF
OUTPUT;FRONT L/R
FRQ;;;;;;;;;88Hz
G)LOW FRQ.TEST
Note
. BASS
TRBL
-+
0dB
/ : Up/Down
</> : Adjust
H)HP TONE
CTRL
/ : Exit
p
p
</> : Select
. AUDIO MUTE;;MUTE
AUDIO DELAY;;0ms
DIALG.LIFT;;;OFF
I)AUDIO SET
60
SET MENU
■ Presence/surround back channel select
J)PR/SBch SELECT
Surround back and presence speakers do not output sound
simultaneously. You can select to prioritize either speaker
set when playing sources that contain surround back
channel signals using CINEMA DSP sound field
programs.
Choices: PRch, SBch
• Select “PRch” to use presence speakers even when
surround back channel signals are input. The signals
for the surround back channel will be output from
surround speakers.
• Select “SBch” to use surround back speakers when a
surround back channel signal is detected in a CINEMA
DSP program. Presence channel signals will be output
from front speakers.
Use to reassign digital input/outputs, select the input mode
or rename your inputs.
■ Input/output assignment
A)I/O ASSIGNMENT
You can assign jacks according to the component to be
used if this unit’s initial settings do not correspond to your
needs. Change the following parameters to reassign the
respective jacks and effectively connect more components.
Once the inputs have been reassigned, you can select the
corresponding component by using INPUT on the front
panel or the input selector buttons on the remote control.
The default settings are displayed with parentheses on the OSD.
CMPNT-V IN for COMPONENT VIDEO INPUT
jacks [A] and [B]
Choices: DVD, V-AUX, DVR/VCR 2, VCR 1, CBL/SAT,
DTV, CD-R
OPTICAL OUT for OPTICAL OUTPUT jacks (1)
and (2)
Choices: MD/TAPE, CD-R, CD, PHONO, V-AUX,
DVR/VCR 2, VCR 1, CBL/SAT, DTV, DVD
/ : Exit
p
p
</> : Select
PRch [SBch
J)PR/SBch SELECT
Using INPUT MENU
Note
. A)I/OASSIGNMENT
B)INPUTMODE
C)INPUTRENAME
D)MULTI CH INPUT
: Up/Down
p
/
p
: Enter
</>
3 INPUT
MENU
. [A];;;;; DVD
( DVD )
[B];;;;; DTV
(DTV)
CMPNT-V
INPUT
. (1);;;;;MD/TAPE
(MD/TAPE )
(2);;;;; CD-R
(CD-R)
OPTICAL
OUT
61
SET MENU
ADVANCED
OPERATION
OPTICAL IN for OPTICAL INPUT jacks (3), (4), (5)
and (6)
Choices: CD, PHONO, DVR/VCR 2, VCR 1, CBL/SAT,
DTV, DVD, MD/TAPE, CD-R
COAXIAL IN for COAXIAL INPUT jacks (7), (8) and
(9)
Choices: CD, PHONO, V-AUX, DVR/VCR 2, VCR 1,
CBL/SAT, DTV, DVD, MD/TAPE, CD-R
• You cannot select a specific item more than once for the same
type of jack.
• When you connect a component to both the COAXIAL and
OPTICAL jacks, priority is given to the input signals from the
COAXIAL jack.
■ Input mode B)INPUT MODE
Use this feature to designate the input mode for sources
connected to the DIGITAL INPUT jacks when you turn on
this unit (see page 40 for details about the input mode).
Choices: AUTO, LAST
• Select “AUTO” to allow this unit to automatically
detect the type of input signal and select the
appropriate input mode.
• Select “LAST” to set this unit to automatically select
the last input mode used for that source.
The last setting for the EXTD. SUR button will not be recalled,
even when “LAST” is selected.
■ Input rename C)INPUT RENAME
Use this feature to change the name of the inputs on the
OSD and front panel display.
1 Press an input selector button to select the
input you want to change the name of.
2 Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to AMP.
3 Press l / h to place the _ (under-bar) under
the space or the character you want to edit.
4 Press k / n to select the character you want
to use and l / h to move to the next one.
• You can use up to 8 characters for each input.
•Press n to change the character in the following
order, or press k to go in the reverse order:
A to Z, space, 0 to 9, space, a to z, space, #, *, +,
etc.
5 Repeat steps 1 through 4 to rename each
input.
6 Press h repeatedly to exit from INPUT
RENAME.
Notes
Note
. (3);;;;; CD
(CD)
(4);;;;; DVD
(DVD )
(5);;;;; DTV
(DTV )
OPTICAL
IN
. (7);;;;; CD
(CD)
(8);;;;; DVD
(DVD )
(9);;;;;DVR/VCR2
(DVR/VCR2)
COAXIAL
IN
/ : Exit
p
p
</> : Select
[AUTO LAST
B)INPUT MODE
</> : Position
p
p
/ : Character
DVD -> DVD
C)INPUT RENAME
62
SET MENU
■ Multi Channel Input D)MULTI CH INPUT
Use this feature to set the direction of the signals input
into the center, subwoofer and surround channels when a
source component is connected to the MULTI CH INPUT
jacks. If you are inputting 8-channel signals from an
external decoder, use this feature to select jacks for the
additional front signals.
6ch/8ch
This setting is used to select the number of channels input
from an external decoder.
Choices: 6ch
, 8ch
If ZONE2 AMP (page 64) is set to “ON”, no sound is output
from the surround back speakers even if you select “8ch”. In this
case select “6ch” and set the output setting of the external decoder
to 6 channels.
FRNT
If you selected “8ch”, you can select analog audio jacks to
which front signals from an external decoder will be input.
Choices: DVD, DTV, CBL/SAT, VCR 1, DVR/VCR 2,
MD/TAPE, CD-R, CD, V-AUX
CENTER
Use to select where the signals input to the CENTER jack
will be output.
Choices: CENTER, FRONT
• Select “CENTER” to output the signals from the center
speaker.
• Select “FRONT” to output the signals from the front
left and right speakers.
SWFR
Use to select where the signals input to the
SUBWOOFER jack will be output.
Choices: SWFR, FRONT
• Select “SWFR” to output the signals from the
subwoofer.
• Select “FRONT” to output the signals from the front
left and right speakers.
SL/SR
Use to select where the signals input to the SURROUND
jacks will be output.
Choices: SL/SR, FRONT
• Select “SL/SR” to output the signals from the surround
speakers.
• Select “FRONT” to output the signals from the front
left and right speakers.
■ Display set A)DISPLAY SET
Dimmer DIMMER
Use to adjust the brightness of the front panel display.
Choices: –4 to 0
OSD shift OSD SHIFT
Use to adjust the vertical position of the OSD.
Choices: +5 (downward) to –5 (upward)
•Press h to lower the position of the OSD.
•Press l to raise the position of the OSD.
Gray back GRAY BACK
Selecting “AUTO” for the on-screen display setting
displays a gray background when there’s no video signal
input.
If “OFF” is selected, information can only be displayed on
the screen when a video signal is being input
.
Choices: AUTO, OFF
If GRAY BACK is set to “OFF”, information cannot be displayed
when only component signals are being input.
Note
.[6CH 8CH
(FRNT/SB-> FRNT)
CENTER ->CENTER
SWFR -> SWFR
SL/SR -> SL/SR
( --- -> SB )
</> : Select
/ : Up/Down
D)MULTI CH INPUT
p
p
Using OPTION MENU
Note
. A)DISPLAYSET
B)MEMORYGUARD
C)PARAM.INI
D)SP IMP. SET
: Up/Down
p
/
p
: Enter
</>
4
OPTION
MENU1/2
/ : Up/Down
p
p
</> : Select
. DIMMER;;;;;;;;;0
OSD SHIFT;;;;;;0
GRAY BACK;;;AUTO
V CONV.;;;;;;;ON
CMPNT OSD;;;;;ON
A)DISPLAY SET
63
SET MENU
ADVANCED
OPERATION
Video conversion V CONV.
Use this feature to turn on/off conversion of composite
(VIDEO) signals to both S-video and component signals.
This allows you to output converted video signals from the
S VIDEO or COMPONENT VIDEO jacks when no
S-video or component signals are input. This feature also
converts S-video signals to component signals when no
component signals are input.
Choices: ON, OFF
• Select “OFF” not to convert any signals.
• Select “ON” to convert composite signals to S-video
and component signals, and to convert S-video signals
to component signals.
• Converted video signals are only output to the MONITOR OUT
jacks. When recording you must make the same type of video
connections (composite or S-video) between each component.
• When converting composite video or S-video signals from a
VCR to component video signals, the picture quality may suffer
depending on your VCR.
Component OSD CMPNT OSD
Use this feature to turn on/off OSD output to the
COMPONENT VIDEO MONITOR OUT jacks when
using SET MENU, the test tone or the parameter
functions.
Choices: ON, OFF
• Select “ON” to output the OSD signals from
COMPONENT VIDEO MONITOR OUT jacks.
• Select “OFF” if you do not want to output the OSD
signals from COMPONENT VIDEO MONITOR OUT
jacks.
SET MENU functions even when “OFF” is selected.
■ Memory guard B)MEMORY GUARD
Use this feature to prevent accidental changes to DSP
program parameter values and other system settings.
Choices: OFF, ON
Select “ON” to protect:
• DSP program parameters
• All SET MENU items
• All speaker levels
• The on-screen display (OSD) mode
When MEMORY GUARD is set to “ON”, you cannot use the test
tone or select any other SET MENU items.
■ Parameter initialization C)PARAM. INI
Use this feature to initialize the parameters for each sound
field
program within a sound field program group. When
you initialize a sound field program group, all of the
parameter values within that group revert to their initial
settings.
Press the corresponding numeric button for the sound
field
program that you want to initialize.
An asterisk (*) next to a program number means that the
parameter values have been changed from their initial
settings.
• You cannot automatically revert to the previous parameter
settings once you initialize a
sound field program group.
• You cannot separately initialize individual
sound field
programs.
• You cannot initialize any program groups when MEMORY
GUARD is set to ON.
■ Speaker impedance setting
D)SP IMP.SET
Use to select the impedance of your speakers.
Choices: 6ohms, 8ohms
Notes
Note
Note
/ : Exit
p
p
</> : Select
[OFF ON
B)MEMORY GUARD
Notes
123*4
*5678
9*0
C)PARAM. INI
/ : Exit
p
p
</> : Select
Minimum 8ohms
D)SP IMP.SET
64
SET MENU
■ Zone set E)ZONE SET
Speakers B SP B
Use to specify the location of speakers connected the
SPEAKERS B terminals.
Choices: MAIN, ZONE B
• Select “MAIN” to turn on/off SPEAKERS A and B
when the speakers connected to the SPEAKERS B
terminals are set in the main room.
• Select “ZONE B” if the speakers connected to the
SPEAKERS B terminals are set in another room. If
SPEAKERS A is turned OFF and SPEAKERS B is
turned ON, all the speakers including the subwoofer in
the main room are muted and the unit outputs sound
from SPEAKERS B only.
• If you select “ZONE B” and connect headphones to the
PHONES jack on the unit, the sound is output from both
headphones and SPEAKERS B.
• When a DSP program is selected, the unit automatically enters
the Virtual CINEMA DSP mode.
■ Zone 2 set F)ZONE2 SET
(U.S.A., Canada, U.K., Europe and Australia models
only)
Output volume OUTPUT VOL
Use to select how the volume control will operate with
regard to the ZONE 2 OUTPUT jacks.
Choices: VAR., FIX
• Select “VAR.” to adjust the ZONE 2 OUTPUT volume
simultaneously with VOL –/+ on the remote control.
• Select “FIX” to fix the ZONE 2 OUTPUT volume
level to a standard line level.
Zone 2 amplifier ZONE2 AMP
Use to select how the ZONE 2 speakers will be amplified.
Choices: ON, OFF
• Select “OFF” if you do not use Zone 2 speakers or if
you connect your Zone 2 speakers through an external
amplifier connected to this unit’s ZONE 2 OUTPUT
jacks.
• Select “ON” to use this unit’s internal amplifier if you
connect your Zone 2 speakers directly to this unit’s
PRESENCE/ZONE 2 speaker terminals.
■ Zone 3 set G)ZONE3 SET
(U.S.A., Canada, U.K., Europe and Australia models
only)
Output volume OUTPUT VOL
Use to select how the volume control will operate with
regard to the ZONE 3 OUT jacks.
Choices: VAR., FIX
• Select “VAR.” to adjust the ZONE 3 OUT volume
simultaneously with VOL –/+ on the remote control.
• Select “FIX” to fix the ZONE 3 OUT volume level to a
standard line level.
Notes
/ : Exit
p
p
</> : Main
SP B;;;;;;MAIN
E)ZONE SET
/ : Up/Down
p
p
</> : Select
OUTPUT VOL;;VAR.
ZONE2 AMP....OFF
F)ZONE2 SET
/ : Exit
p
p
</> : Select
OUTPUT VOL;;VAR.
G)ZONE3 SET
REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES
65
English
ADVANCED
OPERATION
In addition to controlling this unit, the remote control can also operate other audio and video components made by
YAMAHA and other manufacturers. To control these other components, you must set up the remote control with the
appropriate remote control codes. This remote control also has a Learn feature which allows the remote to acquire
functions from other remote controls equipped with an infrared remote control transmitter.
■ Controlling this unit
The shaded areas below can be used to control this unit
after setting AMP/SOURCE/TV to AMP to activate the
AMP mode.
■ Controlling other components
The shaded areas below can be used to control other
components. Each button has a different function
depending on the selected components. Select the
component you want to control by pressing an input
selector button or SELECT k/n. The name of the selected
component appears in the display window.
REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES
Control area
CLEAR
LEARN
RE–NAME
SET MENU
MENU
FREQ/RDS EON MODE PTY SEEK START
REC
DISC SKIP
EFFECT
TEST
RETURN
ON SCREEN
DISPLAY
STRAIGHT
NIGHT
AUDIO
PURE DIRECT
ENTER
LEVEL
TITLE
A/B/C/D/E
SELECT
DTV DVR/VCR2VCR 1 DVD
V
-
AUX
CBL/SAT MD/TAPE
CD-R
PHONO TUNER CD
MULTI CH IN
THX STANDARD EXTD. SUR
ENTERTAIN
MUSIC TV THTR
MOVIE
STEREO HALL JAZZ
ROCK
VOL
+
–
3421
90
+10
ENT.
5678
POWER POWER POWER
SYSTEM
STANDBY
AVTV
SLEEP
INPUT MODE
A
B
CH
+
–
TV VOL
TV MUTE TV INPUT
MUTE
+
–
AMP
SOURCE
TV
MACROONOFF
PRESET
The buttons inside
the dotted lines
control this unit in
any mode
(SYSTEM
POWER,
STANDBY,
SLEEP, INPUT
MODE, VOLUME
+/–, MUTE, PURE
DIRECT and
STRAIGHT/
EFFECT).
AMP/SOURCE/
TV
Set to AMP to
operate this unit.
Set to SOURCE
to operate the
component
selected with an
input selector
button.
Set to TV to
operate the
television.
Display
window
CLEAR
LEARN
RE–NAME
SET MENU
MENU
FREQ/RDS EON MODE PTY SEEK START
REC
DISC SKIP
EFFECT
CHP/INDEX
TEST
RETURN
ON SCREEN
DISPLAY
STRAIGHT
NIGHT
AUDIO
PURE DIRECT
ENTER
LEVEL
TITLE
A/B/C/D/E
SELECT
DTV DVR/VCR2VCR 1 DVD
V
-
AUX
CBL/SAT MD/TAPE
CD-R
PHONO TUNER CD
MULTI CH IN
THX SURROUND SUR. BACK
ENTERTAIN
MUSIC TV THTR
MOVIE
STEREO HALL JAZZ
ROCK
VOL
+
–
3421
90
+10
ENT.
5678
POWER POWER POWER
SYSTEM
STANDBY
AVTV
SLEEP
INPUT MODE
A
B
CH
+
–
TV VOL
TV MUTE TV INPUT
MUTE
+
–
AMP
SOURCE
TV
MACROONOFF
PRESET
SET MENU
MENU
FREQ/RDS EON MODE PTY SEEK START
REC
DISC SKIP
CHP/INDEX
TEST
RETURN
ON SCREEN
DISPLAY
NIGHT
AUDIO
ENTER
LEVEL
TITLE
A/B/C/D/E
THX SURROUND SUR. BACK
ENTERTAIN
MUSIC TV THTR MOVIE
STEREO HALL JAZZ
ROCK
3421
90
+10
ENT.
5678
POWER POWER
AVTV
CH
+
–
TV VOL
TV MUTE TV INPUT
+
–
PRESET
SET MENU
MENU
FREQ/RDS EON MODE PTY SEEK START
REC
DISC SKIP
TEST
RETURN
ON SCREEN
DISPLAY
NIGHT
AUDIO
ENTER
LEVEL
TITLE
A/B/C/D/E
THX STANDARD EXTD. SUR
ENTERTAIN
MUSIC TV THTR MOVIE
STEREO HALL JAZZ
ROCK
3421
90
+10
ENT.
5678
POWER POWER
AVTV
CH
+
–
TV VOL
TV MUTE TV INPUT
+
–
PRESET
Component
control area
You can control up to 14
different components by
setting appropriate remote
control codes (see
page 76).
A/B buttons and the input
selector buttons switch the
function of the component
control area below.
*
Use the A/B buttons to
control other components
regardless of whether they
are connected to this unit.
Factory setting:
A...LD player
B...Tape deck
SELECT k/n switches
control to another
component without
changing the input source
on this unit.
Display
window
66
REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES
■ Controlling optional components
(OPTN area)
OPTN is an additional component control area that can be
programmed with remote control functions independently
from any input source. This area is useful for
programming commands that are to be used only as a part
of a macro function or for components that do not have a
valid remote control code.
To select the OPTN control area, press n repeatedly until
OPTN appears in the display window.
• You cannot set a remote control code for this area. See page 68
to program buttons operated within this component control
area.
• The OPTN area cannot be used when AMP1Z or NO is selected
in the amplifier library (see page 67).
You can control other components by setting the
appropriate remote control codes. Codes can be set up for
each input area.
The following table shows the default component
(Library: component category) and the remote control
code for each input area.
Remote Control Code Default Settings
*
Additional YAMAHA codes available are given in parentheses.
You may not be able to operate your YAMAHA component even
if a YAMAHA remote control code is preset as listed above. In
this case, try setting another YAMAHA remote control code.
1 Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to SOURCE.
Notes
Setting remote control codes
Input area
Library
(Component
category)
Default YAMAHA
code
*
A LD 2200
B TAPE 2700, (2701)
PHONO TV –
TUNER TUNER
2600, (0203, 1203,
1358, 2601)
CD CD 2300, (2301)
MULTI CH
INPUT
DVD
2102, (0517, 0566,
0572, 2100, 2101)
V-AUX VCR –
CBL/SAT CABLE –
MD/TAPE MD 2500, (2501, 2502)
CD-R CD-R 2400
DTV TV –
VCR 1 VCR –
DVR/VCR2 DVR 2807
DVD DVD
2102, (0517, 0566,
0572, 2100, 2101)
Note
AMP
SOURCE
TV
67
REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES
ADVANCED
OPERATION
2 Press an input selector button to select the
source component you want to set up.
3 Press and hold LEARN for about 3 seconds
using a ballpoint pen or similar object.
The library name (ex. “L:DVD”) and the selected
component name (ex. “DVD”) appear alternately in
the display window.
y
If you want to setup for another component, press the input
selector button or SELECT k/n to select the component.
• Be sure to press and hold LEARN for at least 3 seconds,
otherwise the learning process will start.
• If you do not complete each of the following steps within
30 seconds, the setting mode will be automatically
canceled. In this case, press LEARN again.
If you want to change a library (component
category), press l / h. You can set a
different type of component.
Library choices: L:DVD, L:DVR, L:LD, L:CD,
L:CDR, L:MD, L:TAP (tape), L:TUN (tuner),
L:AMP
*
, L:TV, L:CAB (cable), L:SAT (satellite),
L:VCR
*
The amplifier library (L:AMP) code is preset to “AMP1”
(2000) in order to operate this unit. However, you can
switch by entering one of the following five codes if
necessary.
4 Press ENTER.
The four-digit code set for the selected component
appears in the display window.
“0000” appears in the display window if no code has been
set.
5 Press the numeric buttons to enter the four-
digit remote control code for the component
you want to use.
For a complete list of available remote control codes,
refer to “LIST OF REMOTE CONTROL CODES” at
the end of this manual.
6 Press ENTER to set the number.
“OK” appears in the display window if setting was
successful.
“NG” appears in the display window if the setting
was unsuccessful. In this case, start over from step 3.
y
If you continuously want to set up another code for another
component, press the input selector button or SELECT k/n
to select the component, then repeat steps 4 through 6.
7 Press LEARN again to exit from the setup
mode.
Notes
Function
Code
AMP1
To operate this unit.
2000
AMP1Z
To operate
ZONE 2 or ZONE 3
features. (U.S.A., Canada, U.K.,
Europe and Australia models
only)
2001
NO
To operate other manufacturers’
receivers / amplifiers using this
unit’s remote control
2004
DTV DVR/VCR2VCR 1 DVD
V
-
AUX
CBL/SAT MD/TAPE
CD-R
PHONO TUNER CD
MULTI CH IN
SLEEP
INPUT MODE
A
B
LEARN
Note
THX STANDARD EXTD. SUR
ENTERTAIN
MUSIC TY THTR
MOVIE
STEREO HALL JAZZ
ROCK
3421
90
+10
ENT.
5678
LEARN
68
REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES
8 Press one of the buttons shaded below to
see if you can control your component. If you
can, the remote control code is correct.
y
If the manufacturer of your component has more than one
code, try each of them until you find the correct one.
• “ERROR” appears in the display window if you press a button
not indicated in the respective step, or when you press more
than one button simultaneously.
• The supplied remote control does not contain all possible codes
for commercially available audio and video components
(including YAMAHA components). If operation is not possible
with any of the remote control codes, program the new remote
control function using the Learn feature (see “Programming
codes from other remote controls (Learn)”) or use the remote
control supplied with the component.
• Function programmed using the learn feature take priority over
remote control code functions.
Use the Learn feature if you want to program functions
not included in the basic operations covered by remote
control codes, or an appropriate remote control code is not
available. You can program any of the buttons available in
the component control area (see page 65). The buttons can
be programmed independently for each component.
This remote control transmits infrared beams. If the other remote
control also uses infrared beams, this remote control can learn
most of its functions. However, you may not be able to program
some special signals or extremely long transmissions. (Refer to
the operating instructions for the other remote control.)
1 Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to SOURCE.
2 Press an input selector button to select a
source component.
3 Place this remote control about 5 to 10 cm
(2 to 4 in) apart from the other remote control
on a flat surface so that their infrared
transmitters are aimed at each other.
Notes
CLEAR
LEARN
RE–NAME
FREQ/RDS EON MODE PTY SEEK START
REC
DISC SKIP
THX STANDARD EXTD. SUR
90
+10
ENT.
MACROONOFF
TRANSMIT
DTV DVR/VCR2VCR 1 DVD
V
-
AUX
CBL/SAT MD/TAPE
CD-R
PHONO TUNER CD
MULTI CH IN
POWER POWER POWER
SYSTEM
STANDBY
AVTV
SLEEP
INPUT MODE
A
B
Programming codes from other
remote controls (Learn)
Note
AMP
SOURCE
TV
DTV DVR/VCR2VCR 1 DVD
V
-
AUX
CBL/SAT MD/TAPE
CD-R
PHONO TUNER CD
MULTI CH IN
SLEEP
INPUT MODE
A
B
TRANSMIT
SELECT
DTV DVR/VCR2VCR 1 DVD
V
-
AUX
CBL/SAT MD/TAPE
CD-R
PHONO TUNER CD
MULTI CH IN
POWER POWER POWER
SYSTEM
STANDBY
AVTV
SLEEP
INPUT MODE
A
B
5 to 10 cm (2 to 4 in)
69
REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES
ADVANCED
OPERATION
4 Press LEARN using a ballpoint pen or similar
object.
“LEARN” and the selected component name (ex.
“DVD”) appear alternately in the display window.
• Do not press and hold LEARN. If you hold it down for
more than 3 seconds, the remote enters the remote control
code setting mode.
• If you do not complete each of the following steps within
30 seconds, the learning mode will be automatically
canceled. In this case, press LEARN again.
5 Press the button for which you want to
program the new function.
“LEARN” appears in the display window.
6 Press and hold the button you want to
program on the other remote control until
“OK” appears in the display window.
“NG” appears in the display window if learning was
unsuccessful. In this case, start over from step 5.
y
• If you want to program another function, repeat steps 5
and 6.
• If you continuously want to program another function for
another component, press the input selector button or
SELECT k/n to select the component, then repeat steps 3
through 6.
7 Press LEARN again to exit the learning
mode.
• “ERROR” appears in the display window if you press a button
not indicated in the respective step, or when you press more
than one button simultaneously.
• This remote control can learn approximately 200 functions.
However, depending on the signals learned, “FULL” may
appear in the display before you program 200 functions. In this
case, clear unnecessary programmed functions to make room
for further learning.
• Learning may not be possible in the following cases:
– When the batteries in the remote control for this unit or other
components are weak.
– When the distance between the two remote controls is too
great or too small.
– When the remote control infrared windows are not facing each
other at the appropriate angle.
– When the remote control is exposed to direct sunlight.
– When the function to be programmed is continuous or
uncommon.
Notes
LEARN
TRANSMIT
SET MENU
MENU
TEST
RETURN
ON SCREEN
DISPLAY
STRAIGHT
NIGHT
AUDIO
PURE DIRECT
ENTER
LEVEL
TITLE
A/B/C/D/E
SELECT
DTV DVR/VCR2VCR 1 DVD
V
-
AUX
CBL/SAT MD/TAPE
CD-R
PHONO TUNER CD
MULTI CH IN
VOL
+
–
POWER POWER POWER
SYSTEM
STANDBY
AVTV
SLEEP
INPUT MODE
A
B
CH
+
–
TV VOL
TV MUTE TV INPUT
MUTE
+
–
AMP
SOURCE
TV
PRESET
TRANSMIT
SELECT
DTV DVR/VCR2VCR 1 DVD
V
-
AUX
CBL/SAT MD/TAPE
CD-R
PHONO TUNER CD
MULTI CH IN
POWER POWER POWER
SYSTEM
STANDBY
AVTV
SLEEP
INPUT MODE
A
B
Notes
LEARN
70
REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES
You can change the name that appears in the display
window on the remote control if you want to use a
different name than the factory preset. This is useful when
you have set the input selector to control a different
component.
1 Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to AMP or SOURCE.
2 Press an input selector button to select the
source component you want to rename.
The selected component name appears in the display
window.
3 Press RE-NAME using a ballpoint pen or
similar object.
If you do not complete each of the following steps within 30
seconds, the renaming mode will be automatically canceled.
In this case, press RE-NAME again.
4 Press k / n to select and enter a character.
Pressing n changes the character as follows: A to Z,
1 to 9, 0, + (plus), – (hyphen), ; (semicolon), / (slash),
and space.
(Pressing k changes the characters in reverse order.)
5 Press l / h to move the cursor to the next
position.
6 Press ENTER to set the new name.
“OK” appears in the display window if renaming was
successful.
“NG” appears in the display window if renaming was
unsuccessful. In this case, start over from step 4.
y
If you continuously want to rename another component,
press the input selector button or SELECT k/n to select the
component, then repeat steps 4 through 6.
7 Press RE-NAME again to exit the renaming
mode.
“ERROR” appears in the display window if you press a button not
indicated in the respective step, or when you press more than one
button simultaneously.
Changing source names in the
display window
Note
AMP
SOURCE
TV
DTV DVR/VCR2VCR 1 DVD
V
-
AUX
CBL/SAT MD/TAPE
CD-R
PHONO TUNER CD
MULTI CH IN
SLEEP
INPUT MODE
A
B
RE-NAME
ENTER
Note
ENTER
RE-NAME
71
REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES
ADVANCED
OPERATION
The Macro feature makes it possible to perform a series of operations with the press of a single button. For example,
when you want to play a CD, normally you would turn on the components, select the CD input, and press the play button
to start playback. The Macro feature lets you perform all of these operations simply by pressing the CD macro button.
The buttons listed as macro buttons below are factory set with macro programs. You can also program your own macros
(see page 72).
*1
You can turn on some components (including YAMAHA components) connected to this unit by connecting them to the AC
OUTLET(S) on the rear panel of this unit. (Power control may not be synchronized with this unit depending on the component. For
details, refer to the operating instructions for the connected component.)
*2
Playback can be started for any YAMAHA remote control-compatible MD recorder, CD player, CD recorder, DVD player, or DVD
recorder. When using macros to operate other components, you will need to program the play button on the control area of that
component (see page 68) or set a remote control code (see page 66).
*3
When TUNER is selected as the input source, this unit plays the last station received before the unit was set in the standby mode.
Using the Macro feature
Macro buttons First Second Third
—
—
—
—
——
—
——
—
(
*
1)
—
—
(CD area) (
*
2)
—
—
—
(MD/TAPE area) (
*
2)
(CD-R area) (
*
2)
—
(VCR 1 area) (
*
2)
(DVR/VCR 2 area) (
*
2)
(DVD area) (
*
2)
CD
POWER
SYSTEM
CD
(CD area)
Press a macro button To automatically transmit these signals in order
STANDBY
STANDBY
POWER
SYSTEM
POWER
SYSTEM
A
B
PHONO
POWER
SYSTEM
PHONO
TUNER
TUNER
(*3)
CD
CD
MULTI CH IN MULTI CH IN
V
-
AUX
V
-
AUX
CBL/SAT
CBL/SAT
MD/TAPE
MD/TAPE
CD-R
CD-R
DTV
DTV
VCR 1
VCR 1
DVR/VCR2
DVR/VCR2
DVD
DVD
72
REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES
■ Macro operations
1 Set MACRO ON/OFF to ON.
2 Press a macro button.
• When you have finished using the Macro feature, set MACRO
ON/OFF to OFF.
• While the remote is carrying out a Macro program, it will not
accept any other button’s function until the macro operation is
complete (the transmission indicator stops flashing).
• Continue to aim the remote control at the component the macro
is operating until the macro operation is complete.
■ Programming macro operations
You can program your own macros and use the macro
feature to transmit several remote control commands in
sequence at the press of a button. Be sure to set up remote
control codes or perform learning operations before
programming the macro. We do not recommend
programming continuous operations such as volume
control in a macro.
• The default macro is not cleared when a new macro is
programmed for a button. The default macro can be used again
when the programmed macro is cleared.
• It is not possible to add a new signal (macro step) to the default
macro. Programming a macro changes all macro contents.
1 Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to AMP or SOURCE.
2 Press MACRO using a ballpoint pen or
similar object.
“MCR ?” appears in the display window.
If you do not complete each of the following steps within 30
seconds, the macro programming mode will be
automatically canceled. In this case, press MACRO again.
3 Press the macro button you want to use to
operate the macro.
The macro button name (ex. “M:DVD”) and the
selected component name (ex. “DVD”) appear
alternately in the display window.
“AGAIN” appears in the display window if you press a
button other than a macro button.
Notes
CLEAR
LEARN
RE–NAME
FREQ/RDS EON MODE PTY SEEK START
REC
DISC SKIP
MACROONOFF
TRANSMIT
DTV DVR/VCR2VCR 1 DVD
V
-
AUX
CBL/SAT MD/TAPE
CD-R
PHONO TUNER CD
MULTI CH IN
POWER POWER POWER
SYSTEM
STANDBY
AVTV
SLEEP
INPUT MODE
A
B
MACROMACRO ON/OFF
Macro buttons
Notes
Note
Note
AMP
SOURCE
TV
MACRO
DTV DVR/VCR2VCR 1 DVD
V
-
AUX
CBL/SAT MD/TAPE
CD-R
PHONO TUNER CD
MULTI CH IN
SLEEP
INPUT MODE
A
B
73
REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES
ADVANCED
OPERATION
4 Press the buttons for the functions you want
to include in the macro operation in
sequence.
You can set up to 10 steps (10 functions). After you
have set 10 steps, “FULL” appears and the remote
control automatically exits the macro mode.
To change the selected source component, press SELECT k/n.
Pressing the input selector buttons will program a macro step,
whereas SELECT k/n only changes the selected component
and corresponding component control area.
5 Press MACRO again when the operation
sequence you want to program is complete.
“ERROR” appears in the display window if you press a
button not indicated in the respective step, or if you press
more than one button simultaneously.
You can clear all changes made in each function set, such
as learned functions, renamed source names and setup
remote control codes.
1 Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to AMP or SOURCE.
2 Press CLEAR by using a ballpoint pen or
similar object.
“CLEAR” appears in the display window.
If you do not complete each of the following steps within 30
seconds, the clearing mode will be automatically canceled.
In this case, press CLEAR again.
3 Press k / n to select the clear mode.
L:DVD (L: name of a component)
Clears all learned functions in the respective
component control area. Press an input selector
button to select the component.
L:AMP Clears all learned functions for this unit’s control
area.
L:ALL Clears all learned functions.
M:ALL Clears all programmed macros
RNAME Clears all renamed source names.
FCTRY Clears all remote functions and returns the remote
to the factory settings.
4 Press and hold CLEAR again for about 3
seconds.
“WAIT” appears in the display window. If clearing
was successful, “C:OK” appears in the display
window.
y
Once you have cleared a learned function for a button, the
button reverts to the factory setting (or to the manufacturer
setting, if you have set remote control codes).
“L:ALL” and “FCTRY” may take about 30 seconds to
complete.
Note
Note
Memory back-up
If the remote control is without batteries for more than
2 minutes, or if exhausted batteries remain in the
remote control, the contents of the memory may be
cleared. If the memory is cleared, insert new batteries,
set up the remote control code(s) and program any
acquired functions that may have been cleared.
DTV DVR/VCR2VCR 1 DVD
V
-
AUX
CBL/SAT MD/TAPE
CD-R
PHONO TUNER CD
MULTI CH IN
POWER POWER POWER
SYSTEM
STANDBY
AVTV
SLEEP
INPUT MODE
A
B
CLEAR
LEARN
RE–NAME
FREQ/RDS EON MODE PTY SEEK START
REC
DISC SKIP
MACROONOFF
1
2
3
MCR 1: DVD
Indicates the
number of macro
steps entered
Flashes alternately so you can
set the next step
MCR 2: AV POWER
MCR 3: h
Clearing function sets
Note
Note
AMP
SOURCE
TV
CLEAR
CLEAR
74
REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES
5 Press CLEAR to exit from the clearing mode.
• “C:NG” appears in the display window if clearing was
unsuccessful. In this case, start over from step 3.
• “ERROR” appears in the display window if you press a button
not indicated in the respective step, or if you press more than
one button simultaneously.
■ Clearing a learned function
You can clear the function learned for a certain button in
each control area.
1 Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to SOURCE.
2 Press an input selector button to select the
source component containing the function
you want to clear.
The selected component name appears in the display
window.
3 Press LEARN using a ballpoint pen or similar
object.
“LEARN” and the selected component name (ex.
“DVD”) appear alternately in the display window.
• Do not press and hold LEARN. If you hold it down for
more than 3 seconds, the remote control enters the remote
control code setting mode.
• If you do not complete each of the following steps within
30 seconds, the learning mode will be automatically
canceled. In this case, press LEARN again.
Notes
CLEAR
Clearing individual functions
Notes
AMP
SOURCE
TV
DTV DVR/VCR2VCR 1 DVD
V
-
AUX
CBL/SAT MD/TAPE
CD-R
PHONO TUNER CD
MULTI CH IN
SLEEP
INPUT MODE
A
B
LEARN
75
REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES
ADVANCED
OPERATION
4 Press and hold CLEAR using a ballpoint pen
or similar object, then press the button you
want to clear for about 3 seconds.
“C:OK” appears in the display window if clearing
was successful.
y
• If you continuously want to clear another function, repeat
step 4.
• Once you clear a learned function, the button reverts to the
factory setting (or to the manufacturer setting if you have
set remote control codes).
5 Press CLEAR to exit the clearing mode.
The remote control returns to the learning mode.
6 Press LEARN again to exit.
• “C:NG” appears in the display window if clearing was
unsuccessful. In this case, start over from step 4.
• “ERROR” appears in the display window if you press a button
not indicated in the respective step, or if you press more than
one button simultaneously.
■ Clearing a macro function
You can clear the function programmed for a certain
macro button.
1 Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to AMP or SOURCE.
2 Press MACRO using a ballpoint pen or
similar object.
“MCR ?” appears in the display window.
If you do not complete each of the following steps within 30
seconds, the macro programming mode will be
automatically canceled. In this case, press MACRO again.
3 Press and hold CLEAR using a ballpoint pen
or similar object, then press the macro
button you want to clear for about 3 seconds.
“C:OK” appears in the display window if clearing
was successful.
y
• If you continuously want to clear another function, repeat
step 3.
• Once you clear a programmed function, the button reverts
to the factory setting (or to the manufacturer setting if you
have set remote control codes).
4 Press CLEAR to exit the clearing mode.
The remote control returns to the macro
programming mode.
5 Press MACRO again to exit.
• “C:NG” appears in the display window if clearing was
unsuccessful. In this case, start over from step 3.
• “ERROR” appears in the display window if you press a button
not indicated in the respective step, or if you press more than
one button simultaneously.
Notes
CLEAR
LEARN
RE–NAME
REC
DISC SKIP
MACROONOFF
DTV DVR/VCR2VCR 1 DVD
Note
Notes
AMP
SOURCE
TV
MACRO
CLEAR
LEARN
RE–NAME
REC
DISC SKIP
MACROONOFF
DTV DVR/VCR2VCR 1 DVD
76
REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES
Once you set the appropriate remote control codes, you can use
this remote to control your other components. Note that some
buttons may not correctly operate the selected component. Use
the input selector buttons to select the component you want to
operate. The remote control automatically switches to the
appropriate control mode for that component.
*1
This button functions only when the original remote control of the component has a POWER button.
*2
These buttons can operate your TV without switching the input if the remote control code is set in DTV or PHONO. When the remote control
code for your TV is set up in both the DTV and PHONO areas, priority is given to the signal in the DTV area.
*3
These buttons can operate your VCR without switching the input to VCR 1 if the remote control code is set in VCR 1.
*4
These buttons function for U.K. and Europe models only.
Controlling each component
DVD player/
DVD recorder
VCR
Cable TV/
Satellite tuner
TV LD player CD player
MD recorder/
CD recorder
Tape deck Tuner
1 AV P OWER
Power
*1
Power
*1
Power
*1
VCR power
*3
Power
*1
Power
*1
Power
*1
Power
*1
Power
*1
2 TV POWER
TV power
*2
TV power
*2
TV power
*2
Power
*1
TV power
*2
TV power
*2
TV power
*2
TV power
*2
TV power
*2
3 TV VOL +
TV volume +
*2
TV volume +
*2
TV volume +
*2
Volume +
TV volume +
*2
TV volume +
*2
TV volume +
*2
TV volume +
*2
TV volume +
*2
TV VOL –
TV volume –
*2
TV volume –
*2
TV volume –
*2
Volume –
TV volume –
*2
TV volume –
*2
TV volume –
*2
TV volume –
*2
TV volume –
*2
CH +
TV channel +
*2
Channel +
Channel + Channel +
TV channel +
*2
TV channel +
*2
TV channel +
*2
TV channel +
*2
PRESET +
CH –
TV channel –
*2
Channel –
Channel – Channel –
TV channel –
*2
TV channel –
*2
TV channel –
*2
TV channel –
*2
PRESET –
TV INPUT/
A/B/C/D/E
TV input
*2
TV input
*2
TV input
*2
Input
TV input
*2
TV input
*2
TV input
*2
Direction A/B
A/B/C/D/E
TV MUTE
TV mute
*2
TV mute
*2
TV mute
*2
Mute
TV mute
*2
TV mute
*2
TV mute
*2
TV mute
*2
TV mute
*2
4 TITLE
Title Title Title Title
5 MENU
Menu Menu Menu
6 ENTER
Menu enter Menu select Menu select
k Menu up Menu up Menu up
n Menu down Menu down Menu down
l Menu left Menu left Menu left
h Menu right Menu right Menu right
7 RETURN
Return Return Return Return
8 1-9, 0, +10
Numeric buttons Numeric buttons Numeric buttons Numeric buttons Numeric buttons Numeric buttons Numeric buttons
Preset stations (1-8)
9 ll
Search
backward
Search
backward
VCR search
backward
*3
VCR search
backward
*3
Search
backward
Search
backward
Search
backward
Search
backward
FREQ
*4
hh Search forward Search forward
VCR search
backward
*3
VCR search
backward
*3
Search forward Search forward Search forward Search forward
EON
*4
b Skip backward
Chapter/Skip
backward
Skip backward Skip backward Direction back
PTY MODE
*4
a Skip forward
Chapter/Skip
forward
Skip forward Skip forward
Direction
forward
PTY START
*4
REC/
DISC SKIP
Disc skip (player)
Rec (recorder)
Rec
VCR rec
*3
VCR rec
*3
Disc skip Rec Rec
s Stop Stop
VCR stop
*3
VCR stop
*3
Stop Stop Stop Stop
e Pause Pause
VCR pause
*3
VCR pause
*3
Pause Pause Pause Pause
h Play Play
VCR play
*3
VCR play
*3
Play Play Play Play
0 AUDIO
Audio Audio
A DISPLAY
Display Display Display Display Display Display
B ENTER
Title/Index Enter Enter/recall
Enter/
numeric button
Chapter/Time Index Index
TRANSMIT
SET MENU
TEST
RETURN
ON SCREEN
DISPLAY
STRAIGHT
NIGHT
AUDI O
PURE DIRECT
ENTER
LEVEL
TITLE
A/B/C/D/E
SELECT
DTV DVR/VCR2VCR 1 DVD
V
-
AUX
CBL/SAT MD/TAPE
CD-R
PHONO TUNER CD
MULTI CH IN
VOL
+
–
POWER POWER POWER
SYSTEM
STANDBY
AVTV
SLEEP
INPUT MODE
A
B
CH
+
–
TV VOL
TV MUTE TV INPUT
MUTE
+
–
AMP
SOURCE
TV
MENU
PRESET
1
2
3
5
4
CLEAR
LEARN
RE–NAME
SET MENU
FREQ/RDS EON MODE PTY SEEK START
REC
DISC SKIP
EFFECT
TEST
RETURN
ON SCREEN
DISPLAY
STRAIGHT
NIGHT
AUDI O
PURE DIRECT
ENTER
LEVEL
TITLE
A/B/C/D/E
THX STANDARD EXTD. SUR
ENTERTAIN
MUSIC TV THTR MOVIE
STEREO HALL JAZZ
ROCK
VOL
–
3421
90
+10
ENT.
5678
CH
–
TV VOL
TV MUTE TV INPUT
MUTE
–
SOURCE
TV
MACROONOFF
MENU
0
A
B
6
7
8
9
ZONE 2/ZONE 3 (U.S.A., CANADA, U.K., EUROPE AND AUSTRALIA MODELS ONLY)
77
English
ADVANCED
OPERATION
This unit allows you to configure a multi-room audio system. The Zone 2 and Zone 3 features enable you to set this unit
to reproduce separate input sources in the main room, second room (Zone 2) and third room (Zone 3). You can control
this unit from the second or third room using the supplied remote control.
You need the following additional equipment to use the multi-room functions of this unit:
• An infrared signal receiver in the second and/or third room.
• An infrared emitter in the main room. This emitter transmits the infrared signals from the remote control in the second
and/or third room to the main room (to a CD player or DVD player, for example).
• An amplifier and speakers for the second and/or third room.
y
• Since there are many possible ways to connect and use this unit in a multi-room configuration, we recommend that you consult with
your nearest authorized YAMAHA dealer or service center for the Zone 2/Zone 3 connections that best meet your requirements.
• Some YAMAHA models are able to connect directly to the CONTROL OUT jack on this unit. If you own these products, you may not
need to use an infrared emitter. Up to six YAMAHA components can be connected as shown.
■ System configuration and connection example
Using external amplifiers
To use an external amplifier in Zone 2, set ZONE2 AMP to “OFF” in SET MENU.
• When not using the main room, turn down the volume of this unit in the main room. Adjust the Zone 2/Zone 3 volume by using the
amplifier in the second/third room.
• To avoid unexpected noise, DO NOT USE the Zone 2/Zone 3 feature with CDs encoded in DTS.
ZONE 2/ZONE 3
(U.S.A., CANADA, U.K., EUROPE AND AUSTRALIA MODELS ONLY)
Only analog signals are sent to the second and third rooms. Any source you want to listen to in the second or third
room must be connected using the analog (AUDIO L/R) input jacks on this unit.
Zone 2/Zone 3 connections
Notes
OUT
IN
OUT
IN
CONTROL OUT
This unit
REMOTE OUT
AUDIO IN
MONITOR OUT
SP OUT
ZONE 2 REMOTE IN
ZONE 2 AUDIO OUT
ZONE 3 AUDIO OUT
ZONE 3 REMOTE IN
MAIN
ZONE 3
ZONE 2
Infrared emitter
CD player
(or other component)
Amplifier
Remote control
Infrared signal
receiver
Amplifier
Remote control
Infrared signal
receiver
Second room Third roomMain room
SYSTEM
This unit
78
ZONE 2/ZONE 3 (U.S.A., CANADA, U.K., EUROPE AND AUSTRALIA MODELS ONLY)
Using this unit’s internal amplifier
To use this unit’s internal amplifier, set ZONE2 AMP to ON in SET MENU (see page 64).
The supplied remote control can be used to control
Zone 2/Zone 3. You can even select the input source and
control components located in the main room directly
from the second/third room regardless of the listening
condition in the main room.
■ To enable Zone mode on the remote
control
You will be able to switch the remote control mode from
one room to another, and use the input selector,
STANDBY, SYSTEM POWER, MUTE and VOLUME +/
– to control the selected room.
1 Repeat steps 1 through 3 of the procedure in
“Setting remote control codes” on page 66.
2 Press l / h to select “L:AMP”.
3 Press ENTER.
“2000” appears in the display window.
4 Enter the code number “2001”.
5 Press ENTER to set the number.
“OK” appears in the display window if setting was
successful.
6 Press LEARN to complete the Zone setup.
The remote control will be able to operate this unit
from Zone 2 or Zone 3.
■ To control Zone 2/Zone 3
1 Press SELECT k repeatedly to display
“ZONE 2” or “ZONE 3” in the display window.
2 Press SYSTEM POWER to turn Zone 2 or
Zone 3 power on.
3 Press an input selector button to select the
input source you want to listen to in the
second/third room.
The display window shows “2: name of selected
input” or “3: name of selected input” if the remote
control is in the Zone 2/Zone 3 mode.
Signals input to V-AUX and PHONO jacks cannot be sent to
Zone 2/Zone 3.
R
L
+
–
PRESENCE/ ZONE 2
Second room
This unit
Remote controlling Zone 2/Zone 3
ENTER
LEARN
Note
SELECT
or
DTV DVR/VCR2VCR 1 DVD
V
-
AUX
CBL/SAT MD/TAPE
CD-R
PHONO TUNER CD
MULTI CH IN
SLEEP
INPUT MODE
A
B
01EN06_Advns_RXV1500U.fm Page 78 Wednesday, March 9, 2005 7:20 PM
79
ZONE 2/ZONE 3 (U.S.A., CANADA, U.K., EUROPE AND AUSTRALIA MODELS ONLY)
ADVANCED
OPERATION
4 You can control the unit from Zone 2 or Zone
3 by using the input selector, STANDBY,
SYSTEM POWER, MUTE and VOLUME +/–
buttons.
*
VOLUME +/– can be used only when OUTPUT VOL is
set to VAR. in SET MENU (see page 64).
5 Press SELECT k/n to exit from the Zone 2/
Zone 3 mode.
• The source in Zone 2 and the source available for recording are
always the same.
• “ZONE2” or “ZONE3” will appear in the display window only
when k is pressed, and “SYSTM” only when n is pressed.
■ Turning this unit to either on or standby
SYSTEM POWER and STANDBY work differently
depending on the selected mode that appears on the
display window.
• When normal, Zone 2 or Zone 3 mode is selected, you
can turn the main unit, Zone 2 or Zone 3 to on/standby
individually.
• When System mode is selected, or when “AMP1” is
selected as the amplifier library (L:AMP) code, you
can turn the main unit, Zone 2 and Zone 3 to on/
standby simultaneously.
*
“MAIN” appears for a few seconds when SYSTEM POWER
or STANDBY is pressed.
■ Special considerations for DTS software
The DTS signal is a digital bitstream. If you attempt to
send the DTS signal to the second/third room you will
only hear digital noise (that may damage your speakers).
Thus, the following considerations and adjustments need
to be made when playing DTS encoded discs.
For DVDs encoded with DTS
Only 2 channel analog audio signals may be sent to the
second/third room.
Use the disc menu to set the DVD player’s mixed 2-
channel left and right audio outputs to the PCM or Dolby
Digital soundtrack.
For CDs encoded in DTS
To avoid unexpected noise, DO NOT USE the Zone 2/
Zone 3 feature with CDs encoded in DTS.
Notes
DTV DVR/VCR2VCR 1 DVD
V
-
AUX
CBL/SAT MD/TAPE
CD-R
PHONO TUNER CD
MULTI CH IN
POWER POWER POWER
SYSTEM
STANDBY
AVTV
SLEEP
INPUT MODE
A
B
SET MENU
MENU
PURE DIRECT
LEVEL
TITLE
A/B/C/D/E
SELECT
VOL
+
–
CH
+
–
TV VOL
TV MUTE TV INPUT
MUTE
+
–
AMP
SOURCE
TV
*
LCD display
SYSTEM POWER/
STANDBY
Normal mode
*
Name of component
Turns the main unit
on/standby
Zone 2 mode
“ZONE2” or “2:name
of component”
Turns Zone 2 to on/
standby
Zone 3 mode
“ZONE3” or “3:name
of component”
Turns Zone 3 to on/
standby
System mode
“SYSTM”
Turns everything (the
main unit, Zone 2,
Zone 3) on/standby
EDITING SOUND FIELD PARAMETERS
80
A significant factor that creates the rich, full tones of a live
instrument are the multiple reflections from the walls of
the room. In addition to making the sound “live”, these
reflections enable us to tell where the player is situated,
and the size and shape of the room in which we are sitting.
■ Elements of a sound field
In any environment, in addition to the direct sound coming
straight to our ears from the player’s instrument, there are
two distinct types of sound reflections that combine to
make up the sound field:
Early reflections
Reflected sounds reach our ears extremely rapidly (50 ms
– 100 ms after the direct sound), after reflecting from one
surface only — for example, from the ceiling or a wall.
Early reflections help add clarity to the direct sound.
Reverberations
These are caused by reflections from more than one
surface — walls, ceiling, the back of the room — so
numerous that they merge together to form a continuous
sonic “afterglow”. They are non-directional, and lessen
the clarity of the direct sound.
Direct sound, early reflections and subsequent
reverberation taken together help us to determine the
subjective size and shape of the room, and it is this
information that the digital sound field processor
reproduces in order to create sound fields.
If you could create the appropriate early reflections and
subsequent reverberations in your listening room, you
would be able to create your own listening environment.
The acoustics in your room could be changed to those of a
concert hall, a dance floor, or virtually any size room at
all. This ability to create sound fields at will is exactly
what YAMAHA has done with the digital sound field
processor.
You can enjoy good quality sound with the factory preset
parameters. Although you do not have to change the initial
settings, you can change some of the parameters to better
suit the input source or your listening room.
1 Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to AMP.
2 Turn on the video monitor and press ON
SCREEN repeatedly to select the full display
mode.
3 Select the sound field program you want to
adjust.
EDITING SOUND FIELD PARAMETERS
What is a sound field? Changing parameter settings
CLEAR
LEARN
RE–NAME
SET MENU
MENU
FREQ/RDS EON MODE PTY SEEK START
REC
DISC SKIP
EFFECT
TEST
RETURN
ON SCREEN
DISPLAY
STRAIGHT
NIGHT
AUDI O
PURE DIRECT
ENTER
LEVEL
TITLE
THX STANDARD EXTD. SUR
ENTERTAIN
MUSIC TV THTR MOVIE
STEREO HALL JAZZ
ROCK
3421
90
+10
ENT.
5678
TV MUTE TV INPUT
MUTE
MACROONOFF
A/B/C/D/E
SELECT
DTV DVR/VCR2VCR 1 DVD
V
-
AUX
CBL/SAT MD/TAPE
CD-R
PHONO TUNER CD
MULTI CH IN
VOL
+
–
POWER POWER POWER
SYSTEM
STANDBY
AVTV
SLEEP
INPUT MODE
A
B
CH
+
–
TV VOL
+
–
AMP
SOURCE
TV
2
4,5
3
1
AMP
SOURCE
TV
ON SCREEN
DISPLAY
THX STANDARD EXTD. SUR
ENTERTAIN
MUSIC TV THTR
MOVIE
STEREO HALL JAZZ
ROCK
3421
90
+10
ENT.
5678
P04 ROCK CONCERT
ROOM SIZE;;;;1.0
LIVENESS;;;;;;;5
REV.TIME;;;;1.6s
REV.DELAY;;120ms
DSP LEVEL;;;;0dB
INIT.DLY;;;;15ms
>
Program No. Program name
Parameters Parameter values
Cursor
81
EDITING SOUND FIELD PARAMETERS
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
4 Press k / n to select the
parameters.
5 Press l / h to change
the parameter value.
When you set a parameter to a
value other than the factory
preset, an asterisk mark (*)
appears by the parameter name
on the video monitor.
6 Repeat steps 3 through 5 as necessary to
change other program parameters.
• The available parameters may be displayed on more than one
OSD page for some of the programs. To scroll through pages,
press k / n.
• You cannot change parameter values when MEMORY GUARD
is set to “ON”. If you want to change the parameter values, set
MEMORY GUARD to “OFF” (see page 63).
■ Resetting parameters to the factory
values
To reset a certain parameter
Select the parameter you want to reset, then press l / h
repeatedly until the asterisk mark (*) next to the parameter
name disappears from the video monitor.
To reset all parameters
Use PARAM.INI (see page 63).
Notes
Memory back-up
The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data
from being lost even if this unit is set in the standby
mode, the power cord is disconnected from the AC
outlet, or the power supply is temporarily cut due to
power failure. However, if the power is cut for more
than one week, the parameter values will return to the
factory settings. If this happens, edit the parameter
value again.
ENTER
ENTER
SOUND FIELD PARAMETER DESCRIPTIONS
82
You can adjust the values of certain digital sound field parameters so the sound fields are recreated accurately in your
listening room. Not all of the following parameters are found in every program.
■ DSP LEVEL
Function: This parameter adjusts the level of all the DSP effect sounds within a narrow range.
Description: Depending on the acoustics of you listening room, you may want to increase or decrease the DSP effect
level relative to the level of the direct sound.
Control range: –6 dB – +3 dB
■ INIT. DLY/P. INIT. DLY (Initial delay)
Function: This parameter changes the apparent distance the sound source is from the reflection face by adjusting
the delay between the direct sound and the first reflection heard by the listener.
Description: The smaller the value, the closer the reflection face seems to the sound source. The larger the value, the
farther it seems. For a small room, set to a small value. For a large room, set to a large value.
Control range: 1
– 99 msec
■ ROOM SIZE/P. ROOM SIZE (Room size)
Function: This parameter adjusts the apparent size of the surround sound field. The larger the value, the larger the
surround sound field becomes.
Description: As the sound is repeatedly reflected around a room, the larger the hall is, the longer the time between
the original reflected sound and the subsequent reflections. By controlling the time between the
reflected sounds, you can change the apparent size of the virtual venue. Changing this parameter from
one to two, doubles the apparent length of the room.
Control range: 0.1 – 2.0
SOUND FIELD PARAMETER DESCRIPTIONS
Source Sound
Early
Reflections
Time Time Time
INIT. DLY
INIT. DLY INIT. DLY
Sound Source
Reflection Face
Level
Small value = 1 ms Large value = 99 ms
Level
Level
Level
Level
Level
Time
Time
Time
Source Sound
Early
Reflections
Small value = 0.1
Large value = 2.0
Sound Source
83
SOUND FIELD PARAMETER DESCRIPTIONS
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
■ LIVENESS
Function: This parameter adjusts the reflectivity of the virtual walls in the hall by changing the rate at which the
early reflections decay.
Description: The early reflections of a source sound decay much faster in a room with acoustically absorbent wall
surfaces than in one which has highly reflective surfaces. A room with acoustically absorbent surfaces
is referred to as “dead”, while a room with highly reflective surfaces is referred to as “live”. The
LIVENESS parameter lets you adjust the early reflection decay rate, and thus the “liveness” of the
room.
Control range: 0 – 10
■ S. INIT. DLY (Surround initial delay)
Function: This parameter adjusts the delay between the direct sound and the first reflection on the surround side of
the sound field. You can only adjust this parameter when at least two front channels and two surround
channels are used.
Control Range: 1 – 49 msec
■ S. ROOM SIZE (Surround room size)
Function: This parameter adjusts the apparent size of the surround sound field.
Control Range: 0.1 – 2.0
■ S. LIVENESS (Surround liveness)
Function: This parameter adjusts the apparent reflectivity of the virtual walls in the surround sound field.
Control Range: 0 – 10
■ SB INI. DLY (Surround back initial delay)
Function: This parameter adjusts the delay between the direct sound and the first reflection in the surround back
sound field.
Control Range: 1 – 49 msec
■ SB ROOM SIZE (Surround back room size)
Function: This parameter adjusts the apparent size of the surround back sound field.
Control Range: 0.1 – 2.0
■ SB LIVENESS (Surround back liveness)
Function: This parameter adjusts the apparent reflectivity of the virtual wall in the surround back sound field.
Control Range: 0 – 10
Source Sound
Level
Level
Level
Dead
Live
Time
Time Time
Small Reflected
Sound
Large Reflected
Sound
Small value = 0
Large value = 10
84
SOUND FIELD PARAMETER DESCRIPTIONS
■ REV.TIME (Reverberation time)
Function: This parameter adjusts the amount of time it takes for the dense, subsequent reverberation sound to
decay by 60 dB (at 1 kHz). This changes the apparent size of the acoustic environment over an
extremely wide range.
Description: The longer the reverberation time, the more “live” the listening room environment seems. The shorter
the reverberation time, the more “dead” the listening room environment seems.
Control Range: 1.0 – 5.0 sec
■ REV.DELAY (Reverberation delay)
Function: This parameter adjusts the time difference between the beginning of the direct sound and the beginning
of the reverberation sound.
Description: The larger the value, the later the reverberation sound begins. A later reverberation sound makes you
feel like you are in a larger acoustic environment.
Control Range: 0 – 250 msec
■ REV. LEVEL (Reverberation level)
Function: This parameter adjusts the volume of the reverberation sound.
Description: The larger the value, the stronger the reverberation becomes.
Control Range: 0 – 100%
Reverberation
Reverberation
60 dB 60 dB 60 dB
Source Sound
REV.TIME
REV.TIME
REV.TIME
Sound Source
Short
Reverberation
Long
Reverberation
Small value = 1.0 s Large value = 5.0 s
Early Reflections
(dB)
60 dB
Level
Source Sound
Reverberation
REV.TIMEREV.DELAY
Time
Source Sound
Level
REV. LEVEL
Time
85
SOUND FIELD PARAMETER DESCRIPTIONS
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
■ DIALG.LIFT (Dialog lift)
Function: This parameter adjusts the height of the front and center channel sounds by assigning some of the front
and center channel elements to the presence speakers.
Description: The larger the parameter, the higher the position of the front and center channel sound.
Choices: 0/1/2/3/4/5, initial setting is 3.
For 7ch Stereo
Function: These parameters adjust the volume level for each channel in 7-channel stereo mode.
Control Range: 0 – 100%
■ CT LEVEL (Center level)
■ SL LEVEL (Surround left level)
■ SR LEVEL (Surround right level)
■ SB LEVEL (Surround back level)
■ PL LEVEL (Presence left level)
■ PR LEVEL (Presence right level)
For PRO LOGIC IIx Music and PRO LOGIC II Music
■ PANORAMA
Function: Extends the front stereo image to include the surround speakers for a wraparound effect.
Choices: OFF/ON, initial setting is OFF.
■ DIMENSION
Function: Gradually adjusts the sound field either towards the front or towards the rear.
Control range: –3 (towards the rear) to +3 (towards the front), initial setting is STD (standard).
■ CENTER WIDTH
Function: Adjusts the center image from all three front speakers to varying degrees. A larger value adjusts the
center image towards the front left and right speakers.
Control range: 0 (center channel sound is output only from center speaker) to 7 (center channel sound is output only
from front left and right speakers), initial setting is 3.
For PRO LOGIC IIx Music, Movie and Game
■ PLII/PLIIx (Pro Logic II/Pro Logic IIx)
Function: Switches the type of Pro Logic decoding to be used. PLII decoding creates 5.1-channel sound from 2-
channel sources. PLIIx decoding creates 6.1/7.1-channel sound from 2-channel sources.
Choices: PLII, PLIIx
For DTS Neo:6 Music
■ C. IMAGE (Center image)
Function: This parameter adjusts the center image from all three front speakers to varying degrees.
Control range: 0 – 1.0
For THX Cinema
■ DEC (2ch Decoder Select)
Function: Selects the decoder used to playback 2-channel sources using THX Cinema.
Choices: PRO LOGIC / PLII Movie / Neo:6 Cinema
TROUBLESHOOTING
86
Refer to the chart below when this unit does not function properly. If the problem you are experiencing is not listed below
or if the instruction below does not help, set this unit to the standby mode, disconnect the power cord, and contact the
nearest authorized YAMAHA dealer or service center.
■ General
TROUBLESHOOTING
Problem Cause Remedy
Refer to
page
This unit fails to turn
on when STANDBY/
ON (or SYSTEM
POWER) is pressed,
or enters in the
standby mode soon
after the power has
been turned on.
The power cord is not connected or the
plug is not completely inserted.
Connect the power cord firmly.
—
The impedance setting is incorrect. Set the impedance to match your speakers.
25
The protection circuitry has been
activated.
Make sure all speaker wire connections on this unit
and on all speakers are secure and that the wire for
each connection does not touch anything other than
its respective connection.
13–16
This unit has been exposed to a strong
external electric shock (such as lightning
and strong static electricity).
Set this unit in the standby mode, disconnect the
power cord, plug it back in after 30 seconds, then use
it normally.
—
On-screen display
does not appear.
The setting for the on-screen display is set
to “DISPLAY OFF”.
Select the full or short display mode.
50
GRAY BACK in the SET MENU is set to
“OFF”, and no video signal is currently
being received.
Set GRAY BACK to “AUTO” to always show the
OSD.
62
No sound Incorrect input or output cable
connections.
Connect the cables properly. If the problem persists,
the cables may be defective.
18–21
The optimizer microphone is connected. Disconnect the optimizer microphone.
—
The input mode is set to “DTS” or
“ANALOG”.
Set the input mode to “AUTO”.
40
No appropriate input source has been
selected.
Select an appropriate input source with INPUT,
MULTI CH INPUT or the input selector buttons.
33
Speaker connections are not secure. Secure the connections.
13
The front speakers to be used have not
been selected properly.
Select the front speakers with SPEAKERS A and/or
B.
33
The volume is turned down. Turn up the volume.
—
The sound is muted. Press MUTE or any operation buttons of this unit to
cancel a mute and adjust the volume.
35
The input mode is set to “ANALOG”
while playing a source encoded with a
DTS signal.
Set the input mode to “AUTO” or “DTS”.
40
The signals this unit cannot reproduce are
being received from a source component
e.g.: a CD-ROM.
Play a source whose signals this unit can reproduce.
—
No picture The output and input for the picture are
connected to different types of video
jacks.
Turn on the video conversion function.
63
87
TROUBLESHOOTING
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
Problem Cause Remedy
Refer to
page
The sound suddenly
goes off.
The protection circuitry has been activated
because of a short circuit, etc.
Check that the impedance selector setting is correct.
25
Check the speaker wires are not touching each other
and then turn this unit back on.
—
The sleep timer has turned the unit off. Turn on the power, and play the source again.
—
The sound is muted. Press MUTE to cancel a mute.
35
Only the speaker on
one side can be
heard.
Incorrect cable connections. Connect the cables properly. If the problem persists,
the cables may be defective.
13
Incorrect balance settings in the SET
MENU.
Adjust the SPEAKER LEVEL settings.
57
Only the center
speaker outputs
substantial sound.
When playing a monaural source with a
CINEMA DSP program, the source signal
is directed to the center channel, and the
front and surround speakers output effect
sounds.
No sound from the
effect speakers.
The sound field programs are turned off. Press STRAIGHT/EFFECT to turn them on.
39
You are using a source or program
combination that does not output sound
from all channels.
Try another sound field program.
34
No sound from the
center speaker.
The output level of the center speaker is
set to minimum.
Raise the level of the center speaker.
57
CENTER SP in the SET MENU is set to
“NONE”.
Select the appropriate setting for the center speaker.
55
One of the HiFi DSP programs (except for
7ch Stereo) has been selected.
Try another sound field program.
34
No sound from the
surround speakers.
The output level of the surround speakers
is set to minimum.
Raise the output level of the surround speakers.
57
SURR L/R SP in the SET MENU is set to
“NONE”.
Select the appropriate setting for the surround left and
right speakers.
56
A monaural or stereo source is being
played with STRAIGHT.
Press STRAIGHT/EFFECT to turn on the sound
fields.
—
No sound from the
surround back
speakers.
Presence speakers are selected. Select surround back speakers in PR/SBch SELECT.
60
SURR L/R SP in the SET MENU is set to
“NONE”.
If the surround left and right speakers are set to
“NONE”, surround back speakers are automatically
set to “NONE”. Select the appropriate setting for the
surround left and right speakers.
56
SURR B L/R SP in the SET MENU is set
to “NONE”.
Select “SMLx1”, “SMLx2”, “LRGx1” or “LRGx2”.
56
No sound from the
subwoofer.
LFE/BASS OUT in the SET MENU is set
to “FRNT” when a Dolby Digital or DTS
signal is being played.
Select “SWFR” or “BOTH”.
56
LFE/BASS OUT in the SET MENU is set
to “SWFR” or “FRNT” when a 2-channel
source is being played.
Select “BOTH”.
56
The source does not contain low bass
signals.
88
TROUBLESHOOTING
Problem Cause Remedy
Refer to
page
Dolby Digital or DTS
sources cannot be
played. (Dolby Digital
or DTS indicator in
the front panel
display does not light
up.)
The connected component is not set to
output Dolby Digital or DTS digital
signals.
Make an appropriate setting following the operations
instructions for your component.
—
The input mode is set to “ANALOG”. Set the input mode to “AUTO” or “DTS”.
40
A “humming” sound
can be heard.
Incorrect cable connections. Firmly connect the audio plugs. If the problem
persists, the cables may be defective.
—
No connection from the turntable to the
GND terminal.
Connect the grounding cord of your turnable to the
GND terminal of this unit.
21
The volume level is
low while playing a
record.
The record is being played on a turntable
with an MC cartridge.
The turntable should be connected to this unit through
an MC-head amplifier.
21
The volume level
cannot be increased,
or the sound is
distorted.
The component connected to the OUT
(REC) jacks of this unit is turned off.
Turn on the power to the component.
—
The sound effect
cannot be recorded.
It is not possible to record the sound effect
with a recording component.
A source cannot be
recorded by a digital
recording component
connected to this
DIGITAL OUTPUT
jack.
The source component is not connected to
this unit’s DIGITAL INPUT jacks.
Connect the source component to the DIGITAL
INPUT jacks.
18–21
Some components cannot record Dolby
Digital or DTS sources.
A source cannot be
recorded by an
analog component
connected to the
AUDIO OUT jacks.
The source component is not connected to
this unit’s analog AUDIO IN jacks.
Connect the source component to the analog AUDIO
IN jacks.
18–21
The sound field
parameters and some
other settings on this
unit cannot be
changed.
MEMORY GUARD in the SET MENU is
set to “ON”.
Select “OFF”.
63
This unit does not
operate properly.
The internal microcomputer has been
frozen by an external electric shock (such
as lightning or excessive static electricity)
or by a power supply with low voltage.
Disconnect the AC power cord from the outlet and
then plug it in again after about 30 seconds.
—
“CHECK SP WIRES”
appears in the front
panel display.
Speaker cables are short circuited. Make sure all speaker cables are connected correctly.
13
89
TROUBLESHOOTING
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
■ Tuner
Problem Cause Remedy
Refer to
page
There is noise
interference from
digital or radio-
frequency equipment,
or this unit.
This unit is too close to the digital or
radio-frequency equipment.
Move this unit further away from such equipment.
—
The picture is
disturbed.
The video source uses scrambled or
encoded signals to prevent dubbing.
There is noise when
the OSD is displayed.
The OSD may be disturbed when
displaying OSD through component video
connections.
Select OFF in CMPNT OSD.
63
This unit suddenly
turns into the standby
mode.
The internal temperature becomes too
high and the overheat protection circuitry
has been activated.
Wait for about 1 hour until this unit cools down and
then turn it back on.
—
Problem Cause Remedy
Refer to
page
FM
FM stereo reception is
noisy.
The characteristics of FM stereo
broadcasts may cause this problem
when the transmitter is too far away or
the antenna input is poor.
Check the antenna connections.
Try using a high-quality directional FM
antenna.
23
Use the manual tuning method.
41
There is distortion, and
clear reception cannot
be obtained even with a
good FM antenna.
There is multipath interference. Adjust the antenna position to eliminate
multipath interference.
—
The desired station
cannot be tuned in with
the automatic tuning
method.
The signal is too weak. Use a high-quality directional FM antenna.
23
Use the manual tuning method.
41
Previously preset
stations can no longer
be tuned in.
This unit has been disconnected for a
long period.
Preset the stations again.
42
AM
The desired station
cannot be tuned in with
the automatic tuning
method.
The signal is weak or the antenna
connections are loose.
Tighten the AM loop antenna connections
and orient it for best reception.
—
Use the manual tuning method.
41
There are continuous
crackling and hissing
noises.
Noises result from lightning,
fluorescent lamps, motors,
thermostats and other electrical
equipment.
Use an outdoor antenna and a ground wire.
This will help somewhat, but it is difficult to
eliminate all noise.
—
There are buzzing and
whining noises.
A TV set is being used nearby. Move this unit away from the TV.
—
90
TROUBLESHOOTING
■ Remote control
Problem Cause Remedy
Refer to
page
The remote control
does not work nor
function properly.
Wrong distance or angle. The remote control will function within a maximum
range of 6 m (20 ft) and no more than 30 degrees off-
axis from the front panel.
8
Direct sunlight or lighting (from an
inverter type of fluorescent lamp, etc.) is
striking the remote control sensor of this
unit.
Reposition this unit.
—
The batteries are weak. Replace all batteries.
3
AMP/SOURCE/TV is set incorrectly Set AMP/SOURCE/TV correctly.
When operating this unit, set it to the AMP position.
When operating the component selected by the input
selector button, set it to the SOURCE position.
When operating the TV set in the DTV or PHONO
area, set it to the TV position.
—
The remote control code was not correctly
set.
Set the remote control code correctly.
66
Try setting another code of the same manufacturer.
66
Even if the remote control code is
correctly set, there are some models that
do not respond to the remote control.
Program the necessary functions independently into
the programmable buttons using the Learn feature.
68
The remote control
does not “learn” new
functions.
The batteries of this remote control and/or
the other remote control are too weak.
Replace the batteries.
3
The distance between the two remote
controls is too much or too little.
Place the remote controls at the proper distance.
68
The signal coding or modulation of the
other remote control is not compatible
with this remote control.
Learning is not possible.
—
Memory capacity is full. Delete other unnecessary functions to make room for
the new functions.
73
GLOSSARY
91
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
■ Dolby Digital
Dolby Digital is a digital surround sound system that gives
you completely independent multi-channel audio. It
provides 5 full-range audio channels; 3 front channels
(left, center, and right), and 2 surround stereo channels.
An additional channel especially for bass effects, called
LFE (low frequency effect) is also provided giving the
system a total of 5.1-channels (LFE is counted as a 0.1
channel). By using 2-channel stereo for the surround
speakers, more accurate moving sound effects and
surround sound environment are possible than with Dolby
Surround. The wide dynamic range (maximum to
minimum volume) reproduced by the 5 full-range
channels and the precise sound orientation generated
using digital sound processing provide listeners with a
previously unheard of excitement and realism.
■ Dolby Digital EX
Dolby Digital EX creates 6 full-bandwidth output
channels from 5.1-channel sources. This is done by using
a matrix decoder that derives 3 surround channels from the
2 in the original recording. For best results, Dolby Digital
EX should be used with movie sound tracks recorded with
Dolby Digital Surround EX. With this additional channel,
you can experience more dynamic and realistic moving
sound especially with scenes that have “flyover” and “fly-
around” effects.
■ Dolby Pro Logic II
Dolby Pro Logic II is an improved technique used to
decode vast numbers of existing Dolby Surround software.
This new technology enables a 5-channel playback with 2
front left and right channels, 1 center channel, and 2
surround left and right channels (instead of only 1
surround channel for conventional Pro Logic technology).
Music and Game modes are also available for 2-channel
sources in addition to the Movie mode.
■ Dolby Pro Logic IIx
Dolby Pro Logic IIx is a new technology enabling 6.1 or
7.1 multi-channel playback from 2-channel or multi-
channel sources. There is a Music mode for music, a
Movie mode for movies and a Game mode for games.
■ Dolby Surround
Dolby Surround uses a 4 channel analog recording system
to reproduce realistic and dynamic sound effects: 2 front
left and right channels (stereo), a center channel for dialog
(monaural), and a surround channel for special sound
effects (monaural). The surround channel reproduces
sound within a narrow frequency range.
Dolby Surround is widely used with nearly all video tapes
and laser discs, and in many TV and cable broadcasts as
well. The Dolby Pro Logic decoder built into this unit
employs a digital signal processing system that
automatically stabilizes the volume on each channel to
enhance moving sound effects and directionality.
■ DTS 96/24
DTS 96/24 offers an unprecedented level of audio quality
for multi-channel sound on DVD-Video, and is fully
backward-compatible with all DTS decoders. “96” refers
to a 96 kHz sampling rate (compared to the typical 48 kHz
sampling rate). “24” refers to 24-bit word length. DTS 96/
24 offers sound quality transparent to the original 96/24
master, and 96/24 5.1-channel sound with full-quality full-
motion video for music programs and motion picture
soundtracks on DVD-video.
■ DTS (Digital Theater Systems)
Digital Surround
DTS digital surround was developed to replace the analog
soundtracks of movies with a 6-channel digital sound
track, and is now rapidly gaining popularity in movie
theaters around the world. Digital Theater Systems Inc.
has developed a home theater system so that you can enjoy
the depth of sound and natural spatial representation of
DTS digital surround in your home. This system produces
practically distortion-free 6-channel sound (technically,
left, right and center channels, 2 surround channels, plus
an LFE 0.1 channel as a subwoofer, for a total of 5.1-
channels). This unit incorporates a DTS-ES decoder that
enables 6.1- channel reproduction by adding a surround
back channel to the existing 5.1-channel format.
■ Neo:6
Neo:6 decodes conventional 2-channel sources for 6
channel playback by. It enables playback with the full-
range channels with higher separation comparable to
digital discrete signal playback. Two modes are available;
“Music mode” for playing music sources and “Cinema
mode” for movies.
GLOSSARY
Audio formats
92
GLOSSARY
■ PCM (Linear PCM)
Linear PCM is a signal format under which an analog
audio signal is digitized, recorded and transmitted without
using any compression. This is used as a method of
recording CDs and DVD audio. The PCM system uses a
technique for sampling the size of the analog signal per
very small unit of time. Standing for “pulse code
modulation”, the analog signal is encoded as pulses and
then modulated for recording.
■ CINEMA DSP
Since the Dolby Surround and DTS systems were
originally designed for use in movie theaters, their effect
is best felt in a theater having many speakers and designed
for acoustic effects. Since home conditions, such as room
size, wall material, number of speakers, and so on, can
differ so widely, it’s inevitable that there are differences in
the sound heard. Based on a wealth of actually measured
data, YAMAHA CINEMA DSP uses YAMAHA original
sound field technology to combine Dolby Pro Logic,
Dolby Digital and DTS systems to provide the visual and
audio experience of a movie theater in the listening room
of your own home.
■ SILENT CINEMA
YAMAHA has developed a natural, realistic sound effect
DSP algorithm for headphones.
Parameters for headphones have been set for each sound
field so that accurate representations of all the sound field
programs can be enjoyed on headphones.
■ Virtual CINEMA DSP
YAMAHA has developed a Virtual CINEMA DSP
algorithm that allows you to enjoy DSP sound field
surround effects without any surround speakers by using
virtual surround speakers.
It is even possible to enjoy Virtual CINEMA DSP using a
minimal two-speaker system that does not include a center
speaker.
Sound field programs
93
GLOSSARY
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
■ ITU-R
ITU-R is the radio communication sector of the ITU
(International Telecommunication Union). ITU-R
recommends a standard speaker placement which is used
in many critical listening rooms, such as mastering
studios.
■ LFE 0.1 channel
This channel is for the reproduction of low bass signals.
The frequency range for this channel is 20 Hz to 120 Hz.
This channel is counted as 0.1 because it only enforces a
low frequency range compared to the full-range
reproduced by the other 5/6 channels in Dolby Digital or
DTS 5.1/6.1-channel systems.
■ Sampling frequency and number of
quantized bits
When digitizing an analog audio signal, the number of
times the signal is sampled per second is called the
sampling frequency, while the degree of fineness when
converting the sound level into a numeric value is called
the number of quantized bits.
The range of rates that can be played back is determined
based on the sampling rate, while the dynamic range
representing the sound level difference is determined by
the number of quantized bits. In principle, the higher the
sampling frequency, the wider the range of frequencies
that can be played back, and the higher the number of
quantized bits, the more finely the sound level can be
reproduced.
■ THX Cinema processing
THX is an exclusive set of standards and technologies
established by the world-renowned film production
company, Lucasfilm Ltd. THX grew from George Lucas’
personal desire to make your experience of the film
soundtrack, in both movie theatres and in your home
theatre, as faithful as possible to what the director
intended.
Movie soundtracks are mixed in special movie theatres
called dubbing stages and are designed to be played back
in movie theatres with similar equipment and conditions.
This same soundtrack is then transferred directly onto
Laserdisc, VHS tape, DVD, etc., and is not changed for
playback in a small home theatre environment.
THX engineers developed patented technologies to
accurately translate the sound from the movie theatre
environment into the home, correcting the tonal and
spatial errors that occur. On this product, when the THX
indicator is on, THX features are automatically added in
Cinema modes (e.g. THX Cinema, THX Surround EX).
Adaptive decorrelation
In a movie theatre, a large number of surround speakers
help create an enveloping surround sound experience, but
in a home theatre there are usually only two speakers. This
can make the surround speakers sound like headphones
that lack spaciousness and envelopment. The surround
sounds will also collapse into the closest speaker as you
move away from the middle seating position. Adaptive
decorrelation slightly changes one surround channel's time
and phase relationship with respect to the other surround
channel. This expands the listening position and creates –
with only two speakers – the same spacious surround
experience as in a movie theatre.
Re-equalization
The tonal balance of a film soundtrack will be excessively
bright and harsh when played back over audio equipment
in the home because film soundtracks were designed to be
played back in large movie theatres using very different
professional equipment. Re-equalization restores the
correct tonal balance for watching a movie soundtrack in a
small home environment.
Timbre matching
The human ear changes our perception of sound
depending on the direction from which it is coming. In a
movie theatre, there is an array of surround speakers so
that the surround information is all around you. In a home
theatre, you use only two speakers located to the side of
your head. The timbre matching feature filters the
information going to the surround speakers so that they
more closely match the tonal characteristics of the sound
coming from the front speakers. This ensures seamless
panning between the front and surround speakers.
Audio information
94
GLOSSARY
■ THX Select
Before any home theatre component can be THX Select
certified, it must incorporate pass a rigorous series of
quality and performance tests. Only then can a product
feature the THX Select logo, which is your guarantee that
the Home Theatre products you purchase will give you
superb performance for many years to come. THX Select
requirements cover every aspect of the product including
power amplifier and pre-amplifier performance and
operation, and hundreds of other parameters in both the
digital and analog domain.
■ THX Surround EX
THX Surround EX - Dolby Digital Surround EX is a joint
development of Dolby Laboratories and the THX Ltd.
In a movie theater, film soundtracks that have been
encoded with Dolby Digital Surround EX technology are
able to reproduce an extra channel which has been added
during the mixing of the program. This channel, called
Surround Back, places sounds behind the listener in
addition to the currently available front left, front center,
front right, surround right, surround left and subwoofer
channels. This additional channel provides the opportunity
for more detailed imaging behind the listener and brings
more depth, spacious ambience and sound localization
than ever before.
Movies that were created using the Dolby Digital
Surround EX technology, when released into the home
consumer market may exhibit wording to that effect on the
packaging. A list of movies created using this technology
can be found on the Dolby web site at www.dolby.com. A
list of available DVD software titles encoded with this
technology can be found at www.thx.com.
Only receiver and controller products bearing the THX
Surround EX logo, when in the THX Surround EX mode,
faithfully reproduce this new technology in the home.
This product may also engage the THX Surround EX
mode during the playback of 5.1 channel material that is
not Dolby Digital Surround EX encoded. In such cases the
information delivered to the Surround Back channel will
be program dependent and may or may not be pleasing
depending on the particular soundtrack and the tastes of
the individual listener.
■ Component video signal
With the component video signal system, the video signal
is separated into the Y signal for the luminance and the PB
and P
R signals for the chrominance. Color can be
reproduced more faithfully with this system because each
of these signals is independent. The component signal is
also called the “color difference signal” because the
luminance signal is subtracted from the color signal.
A monitor with component input jacks is required in order
to use the component signal for output.
■ Composite video signal
With the composite video signal system, the video signal
is composed of three basic elements of a video picture;
color, brightness and synchronization data. A composite
video jack on a video component transmits these three
elements combined.
■ S-video signal
With the S-video signal system, the video signal normally
transmitted using a pin cable is separated and transmitted
as the Y signal for the luminance and the C signal for the
chrominance through the S-video cable. Using the S
VIDEO jack eliminates video signal transmission loss and
allows recording and playback of even more beautiful
images.
Video signal information
SPECIFICATIONS
95
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
AUDIO SECTION
• Minimum RMS Output Power for Front, Center, Surround,
Surround back
20 Hz to 20 kHz, 0.04% THD, 8 Ω ..................................... 120 W
• Maximum Power (EIAJ)
[Australia, China, Korea, Asia and General models]
1 kHz, 10% THD, 8 Ω ..........................................................170 W
• Dynamic Power (IHF)
[U.S.A., Canada, China, Australia, Asia, Korea and General
models]
8/6/4/2 Ω .........................................................155/195/250/330 W
• DIN Standard Output Power [U.K. and Europe models]
1 kHz, 0.7% THD, 4 Ω .........................................................170 W
• IEC Output Power [U.K. and Europe models]
1 kHz, 0.04% THD, 8 Ω .......................................................125 W
• Damping Factor (IHF)
20 Hz to 20 kHz, 8 Ω................................................... 140 or more
• Frequency Response
CD to Front L/R ..................................... 10 Hz to 100 kHz, –3 dB
• Total Harmonic Distortion
PHONO to REC OUT (20 Hz to 20 kHz, 1 V) .................. 0.02%
CD, etc. to Front L/R (20 Hz to 20 kHz, 60 W, 8 Ω) .......... 0.04%
• Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF-A Network)
PHONO (5 mV) to Front L/R
[U.K., Europe and Australia models] ....................................81 dB
[Other models].......................................................................86 dB
CD (250 mV) to Front L/R, Effect Off................................ 100 dB
• Residual Noise (IHF-A Network)
Front L/R ............................................................... 150 µV or less
• Channel Separation (1 kHz/10 kHz)
PHONO (terminated) to Front L/R ........................... 60 dB/55 dB
CD (5.1 kΩ terminated) to Front L/R ....................... 60 dB/45 dB
• Tone Control (Front L/R)
BASS Boost/Cut ....................................................... ±6 dB/50 Hz
BASS Turnover Frequency..................................................350 Hz
TREBLE Boost/Cut ................................................ ±6 dB/20 kHz
TREBLE Turnover Frequency........................................... 3.5 kHz
• Phones Output .......................................................... 150 mV/100 Ω
• Input Sensitivity/Input Impedance
PHONO .................................................................. 3.5 mV/47 kΩ
CD, etc. ................................................................. 200 mV/47 kΩ
MULTI CH INPUT ............................................... 200 mV/47 kΩ
• Output Level/Output Impedance
REC OUT ............................................................. 200 mV/1.2 kΩ
PRE OUT ................................................................... 1.0 V/500 Ω
SUBWOOFER ........................................................... 2.0 V/500 Ω
ZONE 2 OUTPUT
[U.S.A., Canada, U.K., Europe
and Australia models]............................................. 1.0 V/1.2 kΩ
ZONE 3 OUTPUT
[U.S.A., Canada, U.K., Europe
and Australia models]............................................. 1.0 V/1.2 kΩ
VIDEO SECTION
• Video Signal Type ............................................................PAL/NTSC
• Signal to Noise Ratio .............................................................. 60 dB
• Frequency Response (MONITOR OUT)
Composite, S-video................................... 5 Hz to 10 MHz, –3 dB
Component ............................................... 5 Hz to 60 MHz, –3 dB
FM SECTION
• Tuning Range
[U.S.A. and Canada models] ........................... 87.5 to 107.9 MHz
[Asia and General models] ........ 87.5/87.50 to 108.0/108.00 MHz
[Other models] ............................................ 87.50 to 108.00 MHz
• Usable Sensitivity (IHF)........................................ 1.0 µV (11.2 dBf)
• Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF)
Mono/Stereo .............................................................. 76 dB/70 dB
• Harmonic Distortion (1 kHz)
Mono/Stereo ................................................................ 0.2%/0.3%
• Stereo Separation (1 kHz) ....................................................... 42 dB
• Frequency Response ........................... 20 Hz to 15 kHz +0.5, –2 dB
AM SECTION
• Tuning Range
[U.S.A. and Canada models] .............................. 530 to 1710 kHz
[Asia and General models] ................. 530/531 to 1710/1611 kHz
[Other models] ................................................... 531 to 1611 kHz
• Usable Sensitivity ............................................................. 300 µV/m
GENERAL
• Power Supply
[U.S.A. and Canada models] .............................. AC 120 V/60 Hz
[Australia model] ............................................... AC 240 V/50 Hz
[China model] ..................................................... AC 220 V/50 Hz
[Korea model] .................................................... AC 220 V/60 Hz
[U.K. and Europe models] ................................. AC 230 V/50 Hz
[General model] ............... AC 110/120/220/230-240 V, 50/60 Hz
[Asia model] ................................... AC 220/230-240 V, 50/60 Hz
• Power Consumption
[U.S.A. and Canada models] ................................. 500 W/630 VA
[Other models] ................................................................... 500 W
• Standby Power Consumption
[Asia and General models] (AC 240 V/50 Hz) ......... 0.8 W or less
[Other models] ......................................................... 0.5 W or less
•AC Outlets
[U.S.A. and Canada models]..... 2 (Total 100 W/0.8 A maximum)
[U.K. and Australia models] .............. 1 (Total 100 W maximum)
[China and Europe models] ................ 2 (Total 100 W maximum)
[Asia and General models] ................... 2 (Total 50 W maximum)
• Dimensions (W x H x D) .............................. 435 x 171 x 433.5 mm
(17-1/8” x 6-3/4” x 17-1/16”)
• Weight .................................................................. 15.5 kg (34.2 lbs)
SPECIFICATIONS
i
LIST OF REMOTE CONTROL CODES
AMPLIFIER
AMSTRAD 0105
ARCAM 0296
AUDIOLAB 0296
CARVER 0296
GE 0105
GENEXXA 0422
GRUNDIG 0296
HARMAN/KARDON
0919
JVC 0358
LEFT COAST 0919
LINN 0296
MAGNAVOX 0296
MARANTZ 0296, 0919
MICROMEGA 0296
MYRYAD 0296
OPTIMUS 0422
PANASONIC 0335
PHILIPS 0296, 0919
PIONEER 0040
POLK AUDIO 0296, 0919
REALISTIC 0422
REVOX 0296
SONY 0247
SOUNDESIGN 0105
TECHNICS 0335
THORENS 0296
VICTOR 0358
WARDS 0040, 0105
YAMAHA 0381
CABLE
ABC 0030, 0035
AMERICAST 0926
BELL SOUTH 0926
BIRMINGHAM CABLE
COMMUNICATIONS
0303
BRITISH TELECOM 0030
CABLE & WIRELESS
1095
DAERYUNG 0035, 0504, 0904,
1904
DIRECTOR 0503
FILMNET 0470
GENERAL INSTRUMENT
0030, 0303, 0503,
0837,
GOLDSTAR 0171
HAMLIN 0036, 0300
JERROLD 0030, 0303, 0503,
0837
LG 0171
MNET 0470
MEMOREX 0027
MOTOROLA 0303, 0503, 0837,
1133
NTL 1095
NOOS 0844
ONO 1095
PVP STEREO VISUAL MATRIX
0030
PACE 0264, 1087, 1095
PANASONIC 0027, 0035, 0134
PARAGON 0027
PHILIPS 0332, 0344
PIONEER 0171, 0560, 0904,
1904
PULSAR 0027
QUASAR 0027
REGAL 0300, 0306
RUNCO 0027
SAGEM 0844
SAMSUNG 0027, 0171
SCIENTIFIC ATLANTA
0035, 0504, 0904,
1904
SONY 1033
STARCOM 0030
SUPERCABLE 0303
TS 0030
TELE+1 0470
TELEWEST 1095
TORX 0030
TOSHIBA 0027
TRANS PX 0303
UNITED CABLE 0030
ZENITH 0027, 0552, 0926
CD PLAYER
AIWA 0184
ARCAM 0184
AUDIO RESEARCH 0184
AUDIO TON 0184
AUDIOLAB 0184
AUDIOMECA 0184
CAIRN 0184
CALIFORNIA AUDIO LABS
0056
CARVER 0184, 0206
CYRUS 0184
DKK 0027
DMX ELECTRONICS
0184
DENON 0900
DYNAMIC BASS 0206
EMERSON 0332
FISHER 0206
GENEXXA 0059, 0332
GOODMANS 0332
GRUNDIG 0184
HARMAN/KARDON
0184, 0200
HITACHI 0059
JVC 0099
KENWOOD 0055, 0064
KRELL 0184
LXI 0332
LINN 0184
MCS 0056
MAGNAVOX 0184, 0332
MARANTZ 0056, 0184
MATSUI 0184
MEMOREX 0332
MERIDIAN 0184
MICROMEGA 0184
MIRO 0027
MISSION 0184
MYRYAD 0184
NAD 0027
NSM 0184
NAIM 0184
OPTIMUS 0027, 0059, 0064,
0206, 0332
PANASONIC 0056
PHILIPS 0184
PIONEER 0059, 0332
POLK AUDIO 0184
PROTON 0184
QED 0184
QUAD 0184
QUASAR 0056
RCA 0059, 0206, 0332
REALISTIC 0206
REVOX 0184
ROTEL 0184
SAE 0184
SANSUI 0184, 0332
SANYO 0206
SCOTT 0332
SEARS 0332
SHARP 0064
SIMAUDIO 0184
SONIC FRONTIERS 0184
SONY 0027
SYMPHONIC 0332
TAG MCLAREN 0184
TANDY 0059
TECHNICS 0056
THORENS 0184
THULE 0184
UNIVERSUM 0184
VICTOR 0099
WARDS 0184
YAMAHA 2300, 2301
CD RECORDER
KENWOOD 0653
MARANTZ 0653
PHILIPS 0653
YAMAHA 2400
DVD PLAYER
ACOUSTIC SOLUTIONS
0757
ALBA 0744
AMSTRAD 0740
APEX DIGITAL 0699, 0744,
0782, 0821, 0823,
0857, 1127
BLAUPINKT 0744
BLUE PARADE 0598
BUSH 0740
CENTREX 0699
CLATRONIC 0815
CYBERHOME 0741
DVD2000 0548
DAEWOO 0811, 0797
DANSAI 0797
DECCA 0797
DENON 0517
DIAMOND 0795
DIGITREX 0699
EMERSON 0618
ENTERPRISE 0618
FISHER 0697
GE 0549, 0744
GO VIDEO 0742
GOLDSTAR 0768
GRADIENTE 0678
GREENHILL 0744
GRUNDIG 0566
HITACHI 0600, 0691
HITEKER 0699
JVC 0585, 0650
KLH 0744
KENWOOD 0517, 0561
KOSS 0678
LG 0768
LIMIT 0795
MAGNAVOX 0530, 0702
MARANTZ 0566
MEMOREX 0858
MICO 0750
MICROSOFT 0549
MINTEK 0744
MITSUBISHI 0548
MUSTEK 0757
NESA 0744
ONKYO 0530
ORITRON 0678
PALSONIC 0699
PANASONIC 0517, 0659, 1389
PHILIPS 0530, 0566, 0673,
0881
PIONEER 0552, 0598, 0658,
0659
POLK AUDIO 0566
PROSCAN 0549
QWESTAR 0678
RCA 0549, 0598, 0744
ROTEL 0650
SM ELECTRONIC 0757
SAMSUNG 0600
SANYO 0697
SHARP 0657
SHERWOOD 0797
SHINSONIC 0560
SLIM ART 0811
SONY 0560, 0891
SYLVANIA 0702
TATUNG 0797
TEAC 0598, 0744
TECHNICS 0517
THETA DIGITAL 0598
THOMSON 0549
TOSHIBA 0530
URBAN CONCEPTS 0530
XBOX 0549
YAMAHA 0517, 0566, 0572,
2100, 2101, 2102
ZENITH 0530, 0618, 0768
ZEUS 0811
DVD RECORDER
PANASONIC 2800, 2801, 2802
PHILIPS 2808
PIONEER 2804, 2805, 2806
TOSHIBA 2803
YAMAHA 2807
LD PLAYER
CARVER 0091
DENON 0086
MARANTZ 0091
MITSUBISHI 0086
NAD 0086
NAGSMI 0086
OPTIMUS 0086
PHILIPS 0091
PIONEER 0086
SALORA 0091
SONY 0228
TELEFUNKEN 0086
YAMAHA 2200
ii
MD RECORDER
KENWOOD 0708
ONKYO 0895
SHARP 0888
SONY 0517
YAMAHA 2500, 2501, 2502
RECEIVER (TUNER)
ADC 0558
AIWA 0185, 1116, 1415,
1432, 1668
ALCO 1417
ANAM 1636
APEX DIGITAL 1284
AUDIOLAB 1216
AUDIOTRONIC 1216
AUDIOVOX 1417
BOSE 1256
CAMBRIDGE SOUNDWORKS
1397
CAPETRONIC 0558
CARVER 1116, 1216
CENTREX 1284
DENON 1387
FERGUSON 0558
FINE ARTS 1216
GRUNDIG 1216
HARMAN/KARDON
0137, 1331
INTEGRA 0162, 1325
JBL 0137, 1333
JVC 0101, 0558, 1401,
1522
KLH 1417, 1439
KENWOOD 1054, 1340
MCS 0066
MAGNAVOX 0558, 1116, 1216,
1296,
MARANTZ 0066, 1116, 1216,
1316
MICROMEGA 1216
MUSICMAGIC 1116
MYRYAD 1216
NAD 0347
NORCENT 1416
ONKYO 0162, 0869, 1325
OPTIMUS 0558, 1050
PANASONIC 0066, 1315, 1545,
1790
PHILIPS 1116, 1216, 1293,
1295, 1296, 1310,
1316
PIONEER 0041, 0558, 1050,
1411
POLK AUDIO 1316
PROSCAN 1281
QUASAR 0066
RCA 0558, 1050, 1281,
1417, 1636,
SABA 0558
SANSUI 1116
SCHNEIDER 0558
SONY 0185, 1085, 1185,
1685, 1785
STEREOPHONICS 1050
SUNFIRE 1340
TEAC 1417
TECHNICS 0066, 1335, 1336,
1545
TELEFUNKEN 0558
THOMSON 1281
THORENS 1216
UHER 0558
VENTURER 1417
VICTOR 0101
WARDS 0041, 0185
YAMAHA 0203, 1203, 1358,
2600, 2601
SATELLITE TUNER
@SAT 1327
ABSAT 0150
ALBA 0482
ALPHASTAR 0799
AMSTRAD 0874
ASTON 0169, 1156
ASTRO 0200
ATSAT 1327
AVALON 0423
BLAUPUNKT 0200
BRITISH SKY BROADCASTING
0874, 1202
CANAL DIGITAL 0880
CANAL SATELLITE 0880
CANAL+ 0880
CHAPARRAL 0243
CITYCOM 1203
CONNEXIONS 0423
CROSSDIGITAL 1136
CYRUS 0227
D-BOX 0750, 1154
DMT 1102
DNT 0227, 0423
DAERYUNG 0423
DAEWOO 1323
DIGENIUS 0326
DIRECTV 0274, 0419, 0593,
0666, 0751, 0776,
0846, 1103, 1136,
1169, 1776, 1883
DISH NETWORK SYSTEM
0802, 1032
DISHPRO 0802, 1032
DISTRATEL 0111
DREAM MULTIMEDIA
1264
ECHOSTAR 0194, 0423, 0637,
0802, 0880, 0898,
1032, 1113
ENGEL 1044
EXPRESSVU 0802
FTE 0890
FINLUX 0482
FRACARRO 0898
FUBA 0423
GE 0593
GOI 0802
GALAXIS 0890, 1138
GENERAL INSTRUMENT
0896
GOLD BOX 0880
GRUNDIG 0200, 0874
HTS 0802
HIRSCHMANN 0200, 0423
HITACHI 0482, 0846
HUGHES NETWORK SYSTEM
0776, 1169, 1776
HUMAX 0890, 1203
INVIDEO 0898
JVC 0802
KATHREIN 0150, 0200, 0227,
0276, 0685, 1248
KREISELMEYER 0200
LABGEAR 1323
LOGIX 1044
LORENZEN 0326
MAGNAVOX 0749, 0751
MANHATTAN 0482, 1044,
1110
MARANTZ 0227
MEDIASAT 0880
MEMOREX 0751
METRONIC 0111
MITSUBISHI 0776
MOTOROLA 0896
MYRYAD 0227
NEXT LEVEL 0896
NOKIA 0482, 0750, 0778,
1154, 1250, 1750
OCTALTV 1032
ORBITECH 1127
PACE 0482, 0874, 1202,
1350
PANASONIC 0274, 0728, 0874,
1347
PANDA 0482
PAYSAT 0751
PHILIPS 0160, 0227, 0482,
0749, 0751, 0776,
0880, 1103, 1169,
1776
PIONEER 0880
PROMAX 0482
PROSCAN 0419, 0593
RCA 0170, 0419, 0593,
0882
RFT 0227
RADIOSHACK 0896
RADIOLA 0227
RADIX 0423
SKY 0874, 0883, 1202
SM ELECTRONIC 1227
SABRE 0482
SAGEM 0847, 1141, 1280
SAMSUNG 1044, 1136, 1303,
1319
SAT CONTROL 1327
SATSTATION 1110
SCHWAIGER 1138
SEEMANN 0423
SIEMENS 0200
SONY 0666, 0874, 1666
STAR CHOICE 0896
STRONG 1327
TPS 0847, 1280
TANTEC 0482
TECHNISAT 1126, 1127
TELESTAR 1127
THOMSON 0482, 0880, 1073,
1318
TOPFIELD 1233
TOSHIBA 0776, 0817, 1776
ULTIMATETV 0419, 0666
UNIDEN 0749, 0751
UNIVERSUM 0200
VENTANA 0227
WISI 0200, 0423, 0482
XSAT 0150
ZEHNDER 1102
ZENITH 0883, 1883
TAPE DECK
AIWA 0056
CARVER 0056
GRUNDIG 0056
HARMAN/KARDON
0056
MAGNAVOX 0056
MARANTZ 0056
MYRYAD 0056
OPTIMUS 0054
PHILIPS 0056
PIONEER 0054
POLK AUDIO 0056
RCA 0054
REVOX 0056
SANSUI 0056
SONY 0270
THORENS 0056
WARDS 0054
YAMAHA 2700,2701
TV
AGB 0543
AOC 0036, 0057, 0087,
0119, 0120, 0135,
0205, 0207, 0478
ASA 0131
AWA 0036
ACURA 0036
ADDISON 0119, 0135, 0680
ADMIRAL 0120, 0190, 0490
ADVENT 0788
AIKO 0119
AKAI 0036, 0057, 0235,
0388, 0543, 0729,
0839
AKURA 0291
ALBA 0036, 0064, 0398,
0695
AMERICA ACTION 0207
AMPRO 0778
AMSTRAD 0036, 0064, 0198,
0398, 0439, 0460,
0543
ANAM 0036, 0207, 0277
ANAM NATIONAL 0277, 0677
ANITECH 0036
APEX DIGITAL 0775, 0792,
0794
AUDIOSONIC 0064, 0136
BANG & OLUFSEN 0592
BASIC 0036
BAUR 0064, 0388, 0539
BAYSONIC 0207
BEAUMARK 0205
BEKO 0397, 0513, 0741,
0742
BELL & HOWELL 0181
BEON 0064
BLAUPUNKT 0222
BLUE SKY 0695, 1064
BONDSTEC 0274
BRADFORD 0207
BRANDT 0136, 0362
BROKSONIC 0263, 0490
BUSH 0036, 0064, 0398,
0401, 0695, 1064
CCE 0064
CGE 0274
CTC 0274
CXC 0207
CANDLE 0057
CARNIVALE 0057
CARVER 0081, 0197
CASCADE 0036
CATHAY 0064
CELEBRITY 0027
CELERA 0792
CENTURION 0064
CHANGHONG 0792
CHING TAI 0036, 0119
CHUN YUN 0027, 0036, 0119,
0207
CHUNG HSIN 0080, 0135, 0207
iii
CIMLINE 0036
CINERAL 0119, 0478
CITIZEN 0057, 0087, 0119
CLARION 0207
CLARIVOX 0064
CLATRONIC 0274, 0397
CONDOR 0347, 0397
CONRAC 0835
CONTEC 0036, 0207
CRAIG 0207
CROSLEY 0081
CROWN 0036, 0064, 0207,
0397, 0445
CURTIS MATHES 0057, 0074,
0081, 0087, 0120,
0172, 0181, 0193,
0478, 0729, 1174,
1374
DAEWOO 0036, 0057, 0064,
0119, 0135, 0181,
0197, 0205, 0207,
0401, 0478, 0650,
0661, 1688
DANSAI 0064
DAYTON 0036
DE GRAAF 0235, 0575
DECCA 0064, 0543
DENON 0172
DIGATRON 0064
DIXI 0036, 0064
DUMONT 0044
DWIN 0747, 0801
ECE 0064
ELBE 0286
ELECTROBAND 0027
ELIN 0064, 0575
ELITE 0347
ELTA 0036
EMERSON 0181, 0205, 0207,
0263, 0388, 0490,
0650
ENVISION 0057,0840
EPSON 0860
ERRES 0064
ETHER 0036, 0057
ETRON 0036
EUROPHON 0543
FERGUSON 0064, 0100, 0136,
0265, 0314, 0362,
0587
FIDELITY 0388
FINLANDIA 0235, 0373
FINLUX 0064, 0131, 0132,
0373, 0543
FIRSTAR 0036, 0263
FIRSTLINE 0036, 0274, 0695
FISHER 0131, 0181, 0235,
0397
FLINT 0482
FORMENTI 0064, 0347
FORTRESS 0120
FRONTECH 0190, 0274, 0291
FUJITSU 0710, 0836
FUNAI 0207, 0198, 0291
FUTURETECH 0207
GE 0057, 0074, 0078,
0119, 0205, 0207,
0478, 0587, 1174,
1374, 1481
GEC 0064, 0543
GATEWAY 1782, 1783
GELOSO 0036
GENEXXA 0190
GIBRALTER 0044, 0057
GOLDSTAR 0057, 0064, 0136,
0181, 0205, 0404
GOODMANS 0064, 0398, 0401,
0661
GOREMJE 0397
GRADIENTE 0080, 0197
GRAETZ 0190, 0388
GRANADA 0064, 0235, 0366,
0543
GRANDIN 0637
GRUNDIG 0064, 0222, 0514,
0583, 0614
GRUNPY 0207
HCM 0036, 0439
HALLMARK 0205
HANKOOK 0057, 0205, 0207
HANSEATIC 0064, 0347, 0388,
0455, 0583
HANTAREX 0543
HARMAN/KARDON 0081
HARVARD 0207
HAVERMY 0120
HELLO KITTY 0478
HINARI 0036, 0064
HISAWA 0482
HITACHI 0036, 0057, 0119,
0132, 0136, 0172,
0190, 0205, 0252,
0383, 0508, 0575,
0605, 1172, 1283
HUA TUN 0036
HUANYU 0401
HYPSON 0064, 0291
ICE 0291, 0398
ITS 0398
ITT 0190, 0388, 0575
IMPERIAL 0274, 0397, 0445
INDIANA 0064
INFINITY 0081
INGELEN 0190
INNO HIT 0543
INNOVA 0064
INTEQ 0044
INTERFUNK 0064, 0190, 0274,
0388, 0539
INTERVISION 0064, 0291,
0404
JBL 0081
JCB 0027
JVC 0080, 0398, 0490,
0680, 0710
JEAN 0036, 0078, 0119,
0183, 0263
JENSEN 0788
KEC 0207
KTV 0057, 0207
KAISUI 0036
KAPSCH 0190
KARCHER 0637
KATHREIN 0583
KENDO 0064
KENWOOD 0057
KNEISSEL 0286, 0462
KOLIN 0080, 0135, 0207
KORPEL 0064
KOYODA 0036
L&S ELECTRONIC 0835
LG 0057, 0064, 0087,
0135, 0205, 0741
LXI 0074, 0081, 0181,
0183, 0205
LEYCO 0064, 0291
LIESENK & TTER 0064
LOEWE 0539
LUXOR 0383, 0388
M ELECTRONIC 0036, 0064,
0131, 0132, 0136,
0190, 0314, 0373,
0401, 0507
MGA 0057, 0177, 0205
MTC 0057, 0087, 0539
MAGNADYNE 0274, 0543
MAGNAFON 0543
MAGNAVOX 0057, 0081, 1281,
1481
MANESTH 0291, 0347
MARANTZ 0057, 0064, 0081,
0583
MARK 0064
MATSUI 0036, 0064, 0235,
0398, 0514, 0543
MATSUSHITA 0277, 0677
MEDIATOR 0064
MEDION 0695, 0835, 1064
MEGATRON 0172, 0205
MEMOREX 0036, 0177, 0181,
0205, 0277, 0490,
1064
METZ 0474
MICROMAXX 0835
MICROSTAR 0835
MIDLAND 0044, 0074, 0078
MINERVA 0514
MINOKA 0439
MITSUBISHI 0057, 0120, 0135,
0177, 0181, 0205,
0207, 0263, 0277,
0539, 0863, 1277
MIVAR 0318,0319, 0543,
0636
MOTOROLA 0120
MULTITECH 0036, 0207
MYRYAD 0583
NAD 0183, 0205, 0388,
0893
NEC 0036, 0057, 0078,
0181, 0183, 0197,
0205, 0482, 0524,
1731
NEI 0064
NTC 0119
NECKERMANN 0064, 0583
NETSAT 0064
NEWAVE 0036, 0119, 0120,
0205
NIKKAI 0064, 0291
NIKKO 0057, 0119, 0205
NOKIA 0388, 0500, 0507,
0575, 0658
NORCENT 0775, 0851
NORDMENDE 0136, 0314,
0587
OCEANIC 0190, 0388
ONWA 0207, 0460
OPTIMUS 0181, 0193, 0277,
0677
OPTONICA 0120
ORION 0064, 0263, 0347,
0490, 0543
OSAKI 0291, 0439
OTTO VERSAND 0064, 0347,
0539, 0583
PALLADIUM 0397, 0445
PANAMA 0291
PANASONIC 0064, 0078, 0081,
0190, 0277, 0677,
1437
PATHE CINEMA 0265, 0347
PAUSA 0036
PENNEY 0057, 0074, 0078,
0087, 0183, 0205,
1374
PERDIO 0347
PHILCO 0057, 0064, 0081,
0172, 0205, 0207,
0274, 0490, 1688
PHILIPS 0027, 0057, 0064,
0078, 0081, 0119,
0135, 0205, 0401,
0583, 0717, 1481
PHONOLA 0064
PILOT 0057
PIONEER 0136, 0190, 0193,
0314, 0706, 0787,
0893
PORTLAND 0119
PRANDONI-PRINCE
0543
PRIMA 0788
PRISM 0078
PROFEX 0036, 0388
PROSCAN 0074
PROTECH 0036, 0064, 0274,
0291, 0445, 0695
PROTON 0036, 0057, 0205
PULSAR 0044
QUASAR 0078, 0277, 0677
QUELLE 0064, 0131, 0388,
0539
R-LINE 0064
RCA 0027, 0057, 0074,
0117, 0119, 0205,
0706, 1074, 1174,
1274, 1374, 1474,
1481, 1574
RFT 0455
RADIOSHACK 0057, 0074,
0181, 0205, 0207
RADIOLA 0064
RADIOMARELLI 0543
REALISTIC 0057, 0181, 0205,
0207
REDIFFUSION 0388
REOC 0741
REVOX 0064
REX 0190, 0286, 0291
ROADSTAR 0036, 0291, 0445
RUNCO 0044, 0057, 0524,
0630
SBR 0064
SEG 0291, 0695
SEI 0543
SKY 0064
SSS 0207
SABA 0136, 0190, 0314,
0362
SACCS 0265
SAGEM 0637
SAISHO 0036, 0291, 0543
SALORA 0190, 0380, 0388,
0575
SAMBERS 0543
SAMPO 0036, 0057, 0119,
0120, 0181, 0198,
0205, 0677, 1782
SAMSUNG 0036, 0057, 0064,
0087, 0117, 0119,
0181, 0205, 0291,
0397, 0583, 0614,
0645, 0729, 0793,
0839, 0841
SANSEI 0478
SANSUI 0490
iv
SANYO 0131, 0181, 0207,
0235, 0366, 0826
SCHAUB LORENZ 0388
SCHNEIDER 0064, 0274, 0398,
0695
SCOTCH 0205
SCOTT 0205, 0207, 0263
SEARS 0074, 0081, 0181,
0183, 0198, 0205
SELECO 0190, 0286
SEMIVOX 0207
SEMP 0183
SHARP 0057, 0120, 0677
SHEN YING 0036, 0119
SHENG CHIA 0036, 0120, 0263
SIAREM 0543
SIEMENS 0064, 0222
SINUDYNE 0543
SKANTIC 0383
SKYGIANT 0207
SKYWORTH 0064
SOLAVOX 0190
SONITRON 0235
SONOKO 0036, 0064
SONOLOR 0190, 0235
SONTEC 0064
SONY 0027, 0677, 0861,
1127, 1532, 1678
SOUNDESIGN 0205, 0207
SOUNDWAVE 0064, 0445
SOWA 0078, 0087, 0119,
0183, 0205
SQUAREVIEW 0198
STANDARD 0036
STARLITE 0207
STERN 0190, 0286
SUPREME 0027
SYLVANIA 0057, 0081, 0198
SYMPHONIC 0198, 0207
SYNCO 0027, 0087, 0119,
0120, 0205, 0478
SYSLINE 0064
T + A 0474
TCM 0835
TMK 0205
TNCI 0044
TVS 0490
TACICO 0036, 0119, 0205
TAI YI 0036
TANDY 0120, 0190
TASHIKO 0119, 0677
TATUNG 0036, 0064, 0078,
0081, 0087, 0181,
0183, 0543
TEAC 0036, 0064, 0291,
0439, 0445, 0482,
0695, 1064
TEC 0274
TECHNEMA 0347
TECHNICS 0078, 0277, 0677
TECHWOOD 0078
TECO 0036, 0078, 0119,
0120, 0205, 0291,
0680
TEKNIKA 0081, 0087, 0119,
0177, 0207
TELEFUNKEN 0136, 0289,
0362, 0652, 0729
TELEMEISTER 0347
TELETECH 0036
TENSAI 0347
TERA 0057
THOMSON 0136, 0314, 0587,
0652, 1474
THORN 0064, 0131, 0388,
0539
TOSHIBA 0087, 0181, 0183,
0535, 0645, 0677,
0859, 1283, 1383,
1683, 1731
TRIUMPH 0543
TUNTEX 0036, 0057, 0119
UHER 0347
UNIVERSUM 0064, 0131, 0132,
0291, 0373, 0397,
0519
VECTOR RESEARCH
0057
VESTEL 0064
VICTOR 0080, 0277, 0677,
0680
VIDEOSAT 0274
VIDIKRON 0081
VIDTECH 0205
VIEWSONIC 1782
VISION 0347
VOXSON 0190
WALTHAM 0383
WARDS 0057, 0081, 0205,
0893
WATSON 0064, 0347
WAYCON 0183
WHITE WESTINGHOUSE
0064, 0347, 0490,
0650
YAMAHA 0057, 0796, 0860,
2900, 2901, 2902
YAPSHE 0277
YOKO 0064, 0291
ZENITH 0044, 0119, 0205,
0490
VCR
ASA 0064, 0108
ADMIRAL 0075
ADVENTURA 0027
AIKO 0305
AIWA 0027, 0064, 0334,
0375, 0379
AKAI 0068, 0342
AKIBA 0099
ALBA 0099, 0305, 0342,
0379
AMERICA ACTION 0305
AMERICAN HIGH 0062
AMSTRAD 0027
ANAM 0064, 0253, 0267,
0305, 0507
ANAM NATIONAL 0253, 1589
ANITECH 0099
ASHA 0267
ASUKA 0064
AUDIOVOX 0064, 0305
BAIRD 0027, 0068, 0131
BASIC LINE 0099, 0305
BEAUMARK 0267
BELL & HOWELL 0131
BLAUPUNKT 0253
BRANDT 0347
BRANDT ELECTRONIC
0068
BROKSONIC 0211, 0375, 1506
BUSH 0099, 0305, 0379
CCE 0099, 0305
CGE 0027
CALIX 0064
CANON 0062
CARVER 0108
CIMLINE 0099
CINERAL 0305
CITIZEN 0064, 0305, 1305
COLT 0099
COMBITECH 0379
CRAIG 0064, 0074, 0099,
0267
CROWN 0099, 0305
CURTIS MATHES 0062, 0068,
0087, 1062
CYBERNEX 0267
CYRUS 0108
DAEWOO 0072, 0131, 0305,
0669, 1305
DANSAI 0099
DE GRAAF 0069
DECCA 0027, 0108
DENON 0069
DUAL 0068
DUMONT 0027, 0108, 0131
DYNATECH 0027
ESC 0267, 0305
ELCATECH 0099
ELECTROHOME 0064
ELECTROPHONIC 0064
EMEREX 0059
EMERSON 0027, 0062, 0064,
0070, 0072, 0211,
0267, 0305, 1305,
1506
FERGUSON 0068, 0347
FIDELITY 0027
FINLANDIA 0108, 0131
FINLUX 0027, 0069, 0108,
0131
FIRSTLINE 0064, 0070, 0072,
0099
FISHER 0074, 0131
FUJI 0060, 0062
FUJITSU 0027, 0072
FUNAI 0027
GE 0062, 0087, 0267,
0834, 1062, 1087
GEC 0108
GARRARD 0027
GENERAL 0072
GO VIDEO 0459
GOLDHAND 0099
GOLDSTAR 0064, 0252, 0507,
1264
GOODMANS 0027, 0064, 0099,
0305
GRADIENTE 0027
GRAETZ 0068, 0131, 0267
GRANADA 0108, 0131
GRANDIN 0027, 0064, 0099
GRUNDIG 0099, 0108, 0253,
0374
HCM 0099
HI-Q 0074
HANSEATIC 0064
HARLEY DAVIDSON
0027
HARMAN/KARDON 0108
HARWOOD 0099
HINARI 0099, 0267, 0379
HITACHI 0027, 0064, 0068,
0069, 0267
HUGHES NETWORK SYSTEMS
0069
HYPSON 0099
ITT 0068, 0131, 0267
ITV 0064, 0305
IMPERIAL 0027
INTERFUNK 0108
JVC 0068, 0072, 0094
JENSEN 0068
KEC 0064, 0305
KLH 0099
KAISUI 0099
KENWOOD 0068, 0094
KODAK 0062, 0064
KOLIN 0068, 0070
KORPEL 0099
LG 0064, 0069, 0072,
0507
LXI 0064
LENCO 0305
LEYCO 0099
LLOYD’S 0027
LOEWE 0064, 0108, 1589
LOGIK 0099, 0267
LUXOR 0070, 0075, 0131
M ELECTRONIC 0027
MEI 0062
MGA 0070, 0267
MGN TECHNOLOGY
0267
MTC 0027, 0267
MAGNASONIC 1305
MAGNAVOX 0027, 0062, 0066,
0108, 1808
MAGNIN 0267
MANESTH 0072, 0099
MARANTZ 0062, 0108
MARTA 0064
MATSUI 0375, 0379
MATSUSHITA 0062
MEDION 0375
MEMOREX 0027, 0062, 0064,
0066, 0074, 0075,
0131, 0267, 0334,
0375, 1264
MEMPHIS 0099
METZ 0064, 0374, 1589
MINOLTA 0069
MITSUBISHI 0068, 0070, 0094,
0108, 0834
MOTOROLA 0062, 0075
MULTITECH 0027, 0099
MURPHY 0027
MYRYAD 0108
NAD 0131
NEC 0062, 0064, 0068,
0075, 0094, 0131
NATIONAL 0253
NECKERMANN 0108
NESCO 0099
NEWAVE 0064
NIKKO 0064
NOBLEX 0267
NOKIA 0068, 0131, 0267
NORDMENDE 0068, 0347
OCEANIC 0027, 0068
OKANO 0342, 0375
OLYMPUS 0062, 0253
OPTIMUS 0064, 0075, 0131,
0459
ORION 0211, 0375, 0379,
1506
OSAKI 0027, 0064, 0099
OTTO VERSAND 0108
PALLADIUM 0064, 0068, 0099
PANASONIC 0062, 0252, 0253,
0643, 1062, 1589
PATHE MARCONI 0068
PENNEY 0062, 0064, 0069,
0267, 1062, 1264
PENTAX 0069
PERDIO 0027
YAMAHA ELECTRONICS CORPORATION, USA
6660 ORANGETHORPE AVE., BUENA PARK, CALIF. 90620, U.S.A.
YAMAHA CANADA MUSIC LTD.
135 MILNER AVE., SCARBOROUGH, ONTARIO M1S 3R1, CANADA
YAMAHA ELECTRONIK EUROPA G.m.b.H.
SIEMENSSTR. 22-34, 25462 RELLINGEN BEI HAMBURG, GERMANY
YAMAHA ELECTRONIQUE FRANCE S.A.
RUE AMBROISE CROIZAT BP70 CROISSY-BEAUBOURG 77312 MARNE-LA-VALLEE CEDEX02, FRANCE
YAMAHA ELECTRONICS (UK) LTD.
YAMAHA HOUSE, 200 RICKMANSWORTH ROAD WATFORD, HERTS WD18 7GQ, ENGLAND
YAMAHA SCANDINAVIA A.B.
J A WETTERGRENS GATA 1, BOX 30053, 400 43 VÄSTRA FRÖLUNDA, SWEDEN
YAMAHA MUSIC AUSTRALIA PTY, LTD.
17-33 MARKET ST., SOUTH MELBOURNE, 3205 VIC., AUSTRALIA
©
2004 All rights reserved.
Printed in Malaysia WD64170-1
RX-V1500
AV Receiver
OWNER'S MANUAL
U
PHILCO 0062
PHILIPS 0062, 0108, 0645,
1108, 1208
PHONOLA 0108
PILOT 0064
PIONEER 0069, 0094, 0108
POLK AUDIO 0108
PROFITRONIC 0267
PROLINE 0027
PROSCAN 0087, 1087
PROTEC 0099
PULSAR 0066
PYE 0108
QUASAR 0062, 1062
QUELLE 0108
RCA 0062, 0069, 0087,
0267, 0834, 1062,
1087
RADIOSHACK 0027
RADIOLA 0108
RADIX 0064
RANDEX 0064
REALISTIC 0027, 0062, 0064,
0074, 0075, 0131
REOC 0375
REPLAYTV 0641, 0643
REX 0068
ROADSTAR 0064, 0099, 0267,
0305
RUNCO 0066
SBR 0108
SEG 0267
SEI 0108
STS 0069
SABA 0068, 0347
SALORA 0070
SAMPO 0064, 0075
SAMSUNG 0072, 0267, 0459
SANKY 0066, 0075
SANSUI 0027, 0068, 0094,
1506
SANYO 0074, 0131, 0267
SAVILLE 0379
SCHAUB LORENZ 0027, 0068,
0131
SCHNEIDER 0027, 0099, 0108
SCOTT 0070, 0072, 0211
SEARS 0027, 0062, 0064,
0069, 0074, 0131,
1264
SELECO 0068
SEMP 0072
SHARP 0075, 0834
SHINTOM 0099, 0131
SIEMENS 0064, 0108, 0131
SILVA 0064
SINGER 0072, 0099
SINUDYNE 0108
SONIC BLUE 0641, 0643
SONTEC 0064
SONY 0027, 0059, 0060,
0062, 0663, 1259
SUNKAI 0375
SUNSTAR 0027
SUNTRONIC 0027
SYLVANIA 0027, 0062, 0108,
0070, 1808
SYMPHONIC 0027
TMK 0267
TANDY 0027, 0131
TASHIKO 0027, 0064
TATUNG 0027, 0068, 0072,
0094, 0108
TEAC 0027, 0068, 0305,
0334, 0669
TECHNICS 0062, 0253
TECO 0062, 0064, 0068,
0075
TEKNIKA 0027, 0062, 0064
TELEAVIA 0068
TELEFUNKEN 0068, 0347
TENOSAL 0099
TENSAI 0027
THOMAS 0027
THOMSON 0068, 0087, 0094,
0347
THORN 0068, 0131
TIVO 0645, 0663
TOSHIBA 0068, 0070, 0072,
0094, 0108, 0872
TOTEVISION 0064, 0267
UHER 0267
UNITECH 0267
UNIVERSUM 0027, 0064, 0108,
0267
VECTOR 0072
VICTOR 0068, 0094
VIDEO CONCEPTS 0072
VIDEOMAGIC 0064
VIDEOSONIC 0267
VILLAIN 0027
WARDS 0027, 0062, 0069,
0074, 0075, 0087,
0099, 0108, 0267
WHITE WESTINGHOUSE
0099
XR-1000 0027, 0062, 0099
YAMAHA 0068
YAMISHI 0099
YOKAN 0099
YOKO 0267
ZENITH 0027, 0060, 0066,
1506
1500_U-cv.fm Page 1 Wednesday, March 9, 2005 3:47 PM
Transcripción de documentos
U PHILCO PHILIPS 0062 0062, 0108, 0645, 1108, 1208 PHONOLA 0108 PILOT 0064 PIONEER 0069, 0094, 0108 POLK AUDIO 0108 PROFITRONIC 0267 PROLINE 0027 PROSCAN 0087, 1087 PROTEC 0099 PULSAR 0066 PYE 0108 QUASAR 0062, 1062 QUELLE 0108 RCA 0062, 0069, 0087, 0267, 0834, 1062, 1087 RADIOSHACK 0027 RADIOLA 0108 RADIX 0064 RANDEX 0064 REALISTIC 0027, 0062, 0064, 0074, 0075, 0131 REOC 0375 REPLAYTV 0641, 0643 REX 0068 ROADSTAR 0064, 0099, 0267, 0305 RUNCO 0066 SBR 0108 SEG 0267 SEI 0108 STS 0069 SABA 0068, 0347 SALORA 0070 SAMPO 0064, 0075 SAMSUNG 0072, 0267, 0459 SANKY 0066, 0075 SANSUI 0027, 0068, 0094, 1506 SANYO 0074, 0131, 0267 SAVILLE 0379 SCHAUB LORENZ 0027, 0068, 0131 SCHNEIDER 0027, 0099, 0108 SCOTT 0070, 0072, 0211 SEARS 0027, 0062, 0064, 0069, 0074, 0131, 1264 SELECO 0068 SEMP 0072 SHARP 0075, 0834 SHINTOM 0099, 0131 SIEMENS 0064, 0108, 0131 SILVA 0064 SINGER 0072, 0099 SINUDYNE 0108 SONIC BLUE 0641, 0643 SONTEC 0064 SONY 0027, 0059, 0060, 0062, 0663, 1259 SUNKAI 0375 SUNSTAR 0027 SUNTRONIC 0027 SYLVANIA 0027, 0062, 0108, 0070, 1808 SYMPHONIC 0027 TMK 0267 TANDY 0027, 0131 TASHIKO 0027, 0064 TATUNG 0027, 0068, 0072, 0094, 0108 TEAC 0027, 0068, 0305, 0334, 0669 TECHNICS 0062, 0253 TECO 0062, 0064, 0068, 0075 TEKNIKA 0027, 0062, 0064 TELEAVIA 0068 TELEFUNKEN 0068, 0347 TENOSAL 0099 TENSAI 0027 THOMAS 0027 THOMSON 0068, 0087, 0094, 0347 THORN 0068, 0131 TIVO 0645, 0663 TOSHIBA 0068, 0070, 0072, 0094, 0108, 0872 TOTEVISION 0064, 0267 UHER 0267 UNITECH 0267 UNIVERSUM 0027, 0064, 0108, 0267 VECTOR 0072 VICTOR 0068, 0094 VIDEO CONCEPTS 0072 VIDEOMAGIC 0064 VIDEOSONIC 0267 VILLAIN 0027 WARDS 0027, 0062, 0069, 0074, 0075, 0087, 0099, 0108, 0267 WHITE WESTINGHOUSE 0099 XR-1000 0027, 0062, 0099 YAMAHA 0068 YAMISHI 0099 YOKAN 0099 YOKO 0267 ZENITH 0027, 0060, 0066, 1506 RX-V1500 AV Receiver © 2004 YAMAHA ELECTRONICS CORPORATION, USA 6660 ORANGETHORPE AVE., BUENA PARK, CALIF. 90620, U.S.A. YAMAHA CANADA MUSIC LTD. 135 MILNER AVE., SCARBOROUGH, ONTARIO M1S 3R1, CANADA YAMAHA ELECTRONIK EUROPA G.m.b.H. SIEMENSSTR. 22-34, 25462 RELLINGEN BEI HAMBURG, F.R. OF GERMANY YAMAHA ELECTRONIQUE FRANCE S.A. RUE AMBROISE CROIZAT BP70 CROISSY-BEAUBOURG 77312 MARNE-LA-VALLEE CEDEX02, FRANCE YAMAHA ELECTRONICS (UK) LTD. YAMAHA HOUSE, 200 RICKMANSWORTH ROAD WATFORD, HERTS WD18 7GQ, ENGLAND YAMAHA SCANDINAVIA A.B. J A WETTERGRENS GATA 1, BOX 30053, 400 43 VÄSTRA FRÖLUNDA, SWEDEN YAMAHA MUSIC AUSTRALIA PTY, LTD. 17-33 MARKET ST., SOUTH MELBOURNE, 3205 VIC., AUSTRALIA All rights reserved. OWNER'S MANUAL Printed in Malaysia WD64170 IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS 10 CAUTION RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK DO NOT OPEN CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL. • Explanation of Graphical Symbols The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol, within an equilateral triangle, is intended to alert you to the presence of uninsulated “dangerous voltage” within the product’s enclosure that may be of sufficient magnitude to constitute a risk of electric shock to persons. The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle is intended to alert you to the presence of important operating and maintenance (servicing) instructions in the literature accompanying the appliance. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 i 11 Read Instructions – All the safety and operating instructions should be read before the product is operated. Retain Instructions – The safety and operating instructions should be retained for future reference. Heed Warnings – All warnings on the product and in the operating instructions should be adhered to. Follow Instructions – All operating and use instructions should be followed. Cleaning – Unplug this product from the wall outlet before cleaning. Do not use liquid cleaners or aerosol cleaners. Use a clean, dry cloth for cleaning. Attachments – Do not use attachments not recommended by the product manufacturer as they may cause hazards. Water and Moisture – Do not use this product near water – for example, near a bath tub, wash bowl, kitchen sink, or laundry tub; in a wet basement; or near a swimming pool; and the like. Accessories – Do not place this product on an unstable cart, stand, tripod, bracket, or table. The product may fall, causing serious injury to a child or adult, and serious damage to the product. Use only with a cart, stand, tripod, bracket, or table recommended by the manufacturer, or sold with the product. Any mounting of the product should follow the manufacturer’s instructions, and should use a mounting accessory recommended by the manufacturer. A product and cart combination should be moved with care. Quick stops, excessive force, and uneven surfaces may cause the product and cart combination to overturn. 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 Ventilation – Slots and openings in the cabinet are provided for ventilation and to ensure reliable operation of the product and to protect it from overheating, and these openings must not be blocked or covered. The openings should never be blocked by placing the product on a bed, sofa, rug, or other similar surface. This product should not be placed in a built-in installation such as a bookcase or rack unless proper ventilation is provided or the manufacturer’s instructions have been adhered to. Power Sources – This product should be operated only from the type of power source indicated on the marking label. If you are not sure of the type of power supply to your home, consult your product dealer or local power company. For products intended to operate from battery power, or other sources, refer to the operating instructions. Grounding or Polarization – This product may be equipped with a polarized alternating current line plug (a plug having one blade wider than the other). This plug will fit into the power outlet only one way. This is a safety feature. If you are unable to insert the plug fully into the outlet, try reversing the plug. If the plug should still fail to fit, contact your electrician to replace your obsolete outlet. Do not defeat the safety purpose of the polarized plug. Power-Cord Protection – Power-supply cords should be routed so that they are not likely to be walked on or pinched by items placed upon or against them, paying particular attention to cords at plugs, convenience receptacles, and the point where they exit from the product. Lightning – For added protection for this product during a lightning storm, or when it is left unattended and unused for long periods of time, unplug it from the wall outlet and disconnect the antenna or cable system. This will prevent damage to the product due to lightning and power-line surges. Power Lines – An outside antenna system should not be located in the vicinity of overhead power lines or other electric light or power circuits, or where it can fall into such power lines or circuits. When installing an outside antenna system, extreme care should be taken to keep from touching such power lines or circuits as contact with them might be fatal. Overloading – Do not overload wall outlets, extension cords, or integral convenience receptacles as this can result in a risk of fire or electric shock. Object and Liquid Entry – Never push objects of any kind into this product through openings as they may touch dangerous voltage points or short-out parts that could result in a fire or electric shock. Never spill liquid of any kind on the product. Servicing – Do not attempt to service this product yourself as opening or removing covers may expose you to dangerous voltage or other hazards. Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel. Damage Requiring Service – Unplug this product from the wall outlet and refer servicing to qualified service personnel under the following conditions: a) When the power-supply cord or plug is damaged, b) If liquid has been spilled, or objects have fallen into the product, c) If the product has been exposed to rain or water, IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS d) 20 21 22 23 If the product does not operate normally by following the operating instructions. Adjust only those controls that are covered by the operating instructions as an improper adjustment of other controls may result in damage and will often require extensive work by a qualified technician to restore the product to its normal operation, e) If the product has been dropped or damaged in any way, and f) When the product exhibits a distinct change in performance - this indicates a need for service. Replacement Parts – When replacement parts are required, be sure the service technician has used replacement parts specified by the manufacturer or have the same characteristics as the original part. Unauthorized substitutions may result in fire, electric shock, or other hazards. Safety Check – Upon completion of any service or repairs to this product, ask the service technician to perform safety checks to determine that the product is in proper operating condition. Wall or Ceiling Mounting – The unit should be mounted to a wall or ceiling only as recommended by the manufacturer. Heat – The product should be situated away from heat sources such as radiators, heat registers, stoves, or other products (including amplifiers) that produce heat. 24 Outdoor Antenna Grounding – If an outside antenna or cable system is connected to the product, be sure the antenna or cable system is grounded so as to provide some protection against voltage surges and built-up static charges. Article 810 of the National Electrical Code, ANSI/NFPA 70, provides information with regard to proper grounding of the mast and supporting structure, grounding of the lead-in wire to an antenna discharge unit, size of grounding conductors, location of antenna discharge unit, connection to grounding electrodes, and requirements for the grounding electrode. EXAMPLE OF ANTENNA GROUNDING MAST ANTENNA LEAD IN WIRE GROUND CLAMP ANTENNA DISCHARGE UNIT (NEC SECTION 810–20) ELECTRIC SERVICE EQUIPMENT GROUNDING CONDUCTORS (NEC SECTION 810–21) GROUND CLAMPS Note to CATV system installer: This reminder is provided to call the CATV system installer’s attention to Article 820-40 of the NEC that provides guidelines for proper grounding and, in particular, specifies that the cable ground shall be connected to the grounding system of the building, as close to the point of cable entry as practical. POWER SERVICE GROUNDING ELECTRODE SYSTEM (NEC ART 250. PART H) NEC – NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE FCC INFORMATION (for US customers) 1 IMPORTANT NOTICE: DO NOT MODIFY THIS UNIT! This product, when installed as indicated in the instructions contained in this manual, meets FCC requirements. Modifications not expressly approved by Yamaha may void your authority, granted by the FCC, to use the product. 2 IMPORTANT: When connecting this product to accessories and/or another product use only high quality shielded cables. Cable/s supplied with this product MUST be used. Follow all installation instructions. Failure to follow instructions could void your FCC authorization to use this product in the USA. 3 NOTE: This product has been tested and found to comply with the requirements listed in FCC Regulations, Part 15 for Class “B” digital devices. Compliance with these requirements provides a reasonable level of assurance that your use of this product in a residential environment will not result in harmful interference with other electronic devices. This equipment generates/uses radio frequencies and, if not installed and used according to the instructions found in the users manual, may cause interference harmful to the operation of other electronic devices. Compliance with FCC regulations does not guarantee that interference will not occur in all installations. If this product is found to be the source of interference, which can be determined by turning the unit “OFF” and “ON”, please try to eliminate the problem by using one of the following measures: Relocate either this product or the device that is being affected by the interference. Utilize power outlets that are on different branch (circuit breaker or fuse) circuits or install AC line filter/s. In the case of radio or TV interference, relocate/reorient the antenna. If the antenna lead-in is 300 ohm ribbon lead, change the lead-in to coaxial type cable. If these corrective measures do not produce satisfactory results, please contact the local retailer authorized to distribute this type of product. If you can not locate the appropriate retailer, please contact Yamaha Electronics Corp., U.S.A. 6660 Orangethorpe Ave, Buena Park, CA 90620. The above statements apply ONLY to those products distributed by Yamaha Corporation of America or its subsidiaries. ii CAUTION: READ THIS BEFORE OPERATING YOUR UNIT. CAUTION: READ THIS BEFORE OPERATING YOUR UNIT. 1 To assure the finest performance, please read this manual carefully. Keep it in a safe place for future reference. 2 Install this sound system in a well ventilated, cool, dry, clean place — away from direct sunlight, heat sources, vibration, dust, moisture, and/or cold. Allow ventilation space of at least 30 cm on the top, 20 cm on the left and right, and 20 cm on the back of this unit. 3 Locate this unit away from other electrical appliances, motors, or transformers to avoid humming sounds. 4 Do not expose this unit to sudden temperature changes from cold to hot, and do not locate this unit in an environment with high humidity (i.e. a room with a humidifier) to prevent condensation inside this unit, which may cause an electrical shock, fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury. 5 Avoid installing this unit where foreign object may fall onto this unit and/or this unit may be exposed to liquid dripping or splashing. On the top of this unit, do not place: – Other components, as they may cause damage and/or discoloration on the surface of this unit. – Burning objects (i.e. candles), as they may cause fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury. – Containers with liquid in them, as they may fall and liquid may cause electrical shock to the user and/or damage to this unit. 6 Do not cover this unit with a newspaper, tablecloth, curtain, etc. in order not to obstruct heat radiation. If the temperature inside this unit rises, it may cause fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury. 7 Do not plug in this unit to a wall outlet until all connections are complete. 8 Do not operate this unit upside-down. It may overheat, possibly causing damage. 9 Do not use force on switches, knobs and/or cords. 10 When disconnecting the power cord from the wall outlet, grasp the plug; do not pull the cord. 11 Do not clean this unit with chemical solvents; this might damage the finish. Use a clean, dry cloth. 12 Only voltage specified on this unit must be used. Using this unit with a higher voltage than specified is dangerous and may cause fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury. YAMAHA will not be held responsible for any damage resulting from use of this unit with a voltage other than specified. 13 To prevent damage by lightning, disconnect the power cord from the wall outlet during an electrical storm. 14 Do not attempt to modify or fix this unit. Contact qualified YAMAHA service personnel when any service is needed. The cabinet should never be opened for any reasons. 15 When not planning to use this unit for long periods of time (i.e. vacation), disconnect the AC power plug from the wall outlet. 16 Be sure to read the “TROUBLESHOOTING” section on common operating errors before concluding that this unit is faulty. 17 Before moving this unit, press STANDBY/ON to set this unit in the standby mode, and disconnect the AC power plug from the wall outlet. iii 18 VOLTAGE SELECTOR (Asia and General models only) The VOLTAGE SELECTOR on the rear panel of this unit must be set for your local main voltage BEFORE plugging into the AC main supply. Voltages are: General model ............. AC 110/120/220/230-240 V, 50/60 Hz Asia model ..................................AC 220/230-240V, 50/60 Hz WARNING TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS UNIT TO RAIN OR MOISTURE. This unit is not disconnected from the AC power source as long as it is connected to the wall outlet, even if this unit itself is turned off. This state is called the standby mode. In this state, this unit is designed to consume a very small quantity of power. FOR CANADIAN CUSTOMERS To prevent electric shock, match wide blade of plug to wide slot and fully insert. This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003. IMPORTANT Please record the serial number of this unit in the space below. MODEL: Serial No.: The serial number is located on the rear of the unit. Retain this Owner’s Manual in a safe place for future reference. CONTENTS INTRODUCTION INTRODUCTION SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS FEATURES............................................................. 2 GETTING STARTED............................................ 3 SOUND FIELD PROGRAM DESCRIPTIONS...............................................46 Supplied accessories .................................................. 3 Installing batteries in the remote control ................... 3 For movie/video sources.......................................... 46 For music sources .................................................... 49 CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS ......................... 4 PREPARATION SPEAKER SETUP ............................................... 12 Speaker placement ................................................... 12 Speaker connections ................................................ 13 Before connecting components................................ 17 Connecting video components................................. 18 Connecting audio components................................. 21 Connecting the antennas .......................................... 23 Connecting the power supply cord .......................... 24 Speaker impedance setting ...................................... 25 Turning on the power............................................... 25 AUTO SETUP....................................................... 26 BASIC SETUP ...................................................... 31 Using BASIC MENU .............................................. 31 Selecting the OSD mode.......................................... 50 Using the sleep timer ............................................... 50 Manually adjusting speaker levels........................... 51 Using the test tone ................................................... 52 SET MENU ............................................................53 Using SET MENU................................................... 54 Using SOUND MENU ............................................ 55 Using INPUT MENU .............................................. 60 Using OPTION MENU ........................................... 62 REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES ...................65 Control area ............................................................. 65 Setting remote control codes ................................... 66 Programming codes from other remote controls (Learn) ................................................................. 68 Changing source names in the display window....... 70 Using the Macro feature .......................................... 71 Clearing function sets .............................................. 73 Clearing individual functions .................................. 74 Controlling each component.................................... 76 SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS Introduction.............................................................. 26 Optimizer microphone setup.................................... 26 Starting the setup ..................................................... 27 ADVANCED OPERATIONS ..............................50 BASIC OPERATION CONNECTIONS .................................................. 17 ADVANCED OPERATION PREPARATION Front panel ................................................................. 4 Remote control........................................................... 6 Using the remote control ........................................... 8 Front panel display .................................................... 9 Rear panel ................................................................ 11 ZONE 2/ZONE 3 (U.S.A., CANADA, U.K., EUROPE AND AUSTRALIA MODELS ONLY) .....................77 Zone 2/Zone 3 connections...................................... 77 Remote controlling Zone 2/Zone 3.......................... 78 BASIC OPERATION PLAYBACK.......................................................... 33 TUNING ................................................................ 41 Automatic and manual tuning.................................. 41 Presetting stations .................................................... 42 Selecting preset stations........................................... 44 Exchanging preset stations ...................................... 44 EDITING SOUND FIELD PARAMETERS ......80 What is a sound field? ............................................. 80 Changing parameter settings ................................... 80 SOUND FIELD PARAMETER DESCRIPTIONS...............................................82 TROUBLESHOOTING .......................................86 GLOSSARY...........................................................91 Audio formats .......................................................... 91 Sound field programs............................................... 92 Audio information ................................................... 93 Video signal information ......................................... 94 ADDITIONAL INFORMATION RECORDING ....................................................... 45 ADDITIONAL INFORMATION ADVANCED OPERATION Basic operations....................................................... 33 Selecting sound field programs ............................... 34 Additional operations............................................... 35 Selecting input modes.............................................. 40 SPECIFICATIONS...............................................95 English 1 FEATURES FEATURES Built-in 7-channel power amplifier Other features ◆ Minimum RMS output power (0.04% THD, 20 Hz – 20 kHz, 8 Ω) Front: 120 W + 120 W Center: 120 W Surround: 120 W + 120 W Surround Back: 120 W + 120 W ◆ YPAO: YAMAHA Parametric Room Acoustic Optimizer for automatic speaker setup ◆ 192-kHz/24-bit D/A converter ◆ SET MENU to optimize this unit for your audio/video system ◆ 6 or 8-channel additional input jacks for discrete multi channel input ◆ On-screen display function helpful in controlling this unit ◆ PURE DIRECT for pure fidelity sound with analog and PCM sources ◆ S-video signal input/output capability ◆ Component video input/output capability ◆ Video signal conversion (composite video ↔ S-video → component video) capability for monitor out ◆ Optical and coaxial digital audio signal jacks ◆ Sleep timer ◆ Cinema and music night listening mode ◆ Remote control with preset remote control codes and learning/macro capability ◆ Zone 2/Zone 3 custom installation facility (U.S.A., Canada, U.K., Europe and Australia models only) Sound field features ◆ Proprietary YAMAHA technology for the creation of sound fields ◆ THX Select ◆ Dolby Digital/Dolby Digital EX decoder ◆ DTS/DTS-ES Matrix 6.1, Discrete 6.1, DTS Neo:6 decoder, DTS 96/24 ◆ Dolby Pro Logic/Dolby Pro Logic II/Dolby Pro Logic IIx Decoder ◆ Virtual CINEMA DSP ◆ SILENT CINEMA™ Sophisticated AM/FM tuner ◆ ◆ ◆ ◆ 40-station random access preset tuning Automatic preset tuning Preset station shifting capability (preset editing) RDS: Radio Data System receiving capability (U.K. and Europe models only) • y indicates a tip for your operation. • Some operations can be performed by using either the buttons on the main unit or on the remote control. In cases when the button names differ between the main unit and the remote control, the button name on the remote control is given in parentheses. • This manual is printed prior to production. Design and specifications are subject to change in part as a result of improvements, etc. In case of differences between the manual and product, the product has priority. Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. “Dolby”, “Pro Logic”, “Surround EX”, and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories. “DTS”, “DTS-ES”, “Neo:6” and “DTS 96/24” are trademarks of Digital Theater Systems, Inc. “SILENT CINEMA” is a trademark of YAMAHA CORPORATION. THX and the THX logo are registered trademarks of THX Ltd. Surround EX is a jointly developed technology of THX and Dolby Laboratories, Inc. and is a trademark of Dolby Laboratories, Inc. All rights reserved. Used under authorization. We Want You Listening For A Lifetime YAMAHA and the Electronic Industries Association’s Consumer Electronics Group want you to get the most out of your equipment by playing it at a safe level. One that lets the sound come through loud and clear without annoying blaring or distortion – and, most importantly, without affecting your sensitive hearing. Since hearing damage from loud sounds is often undetectable until it is too late, YAMAHA and the Electronic Industries Association’s Consumer Electronics Group recommend you to avoid prolonged exposure from excessive volume levels. 2 GETTING STARTED GETTING STARTED INTRODUCTION Supplied accessories Please check that you received all of the following parts. Batteries (4) (AAA, R03, UM-4) Power Cord (U.S.A., Canada, U.K., Europe, Australia, China and Korea models) Indoor FM antenna (U.S.A., Canada, China, Korea, Asia and General models) Speaker terminal wrench Optimizer microphone (U.K., Europe and Australia models) Remote control SYSTEM POWER POWER TV AV A B INPUT MODE STANDBY POWER SLEEP PHONO TUNER CD MULTI CH IN V-AUX CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R DTV VCR 1 DVR/VCR2 DVD SELECT AMP + + + TV VOL CH VOL – – SOURCE – TV A/B/C/D/E TV MUTE TV INPUT MUTE LEVEL SET MENU TITLE MENU PURE DIRECT NIGHT AUDIO ENTER TEST ON SCREEN RETURN DISPLAY STRAIGHT EFFECT STEREO HALL JAZZ ROCK 1 2 3 4 ENTERTAIN MUSIC TV THTR MOVIE 5 6 7 8 THX STANDARD 9 0 FREQ/RDS EON 75-ohm/300-ohm antenna adapter (U.K. model only) EXTD. SUR +10 ENT. AM loop antenna MODE PTY SEEK START REC DISC SKIP OFF ON MACRO LEARN CLEAR RE–NAME Installing batteries in the remote control 2 1 3 1 Press the part and slide the battery compartment cover off. 2 Insert the four supplied batteries (AAA, R03, UM-4) according to the polarity markings on the inside of the battery compartment. 3 Slide the cover back until it snaps into place. Notes on batteries • Change all of the batteries if you notice conditions such as the operation range of the remote control decreases, the indicator does not flash, or its light or display window become dim. • Do not use old batteries together with new ones. • Do not use different types of batteries (such as alkaline and manganese batteries) together. Read the packaging carefully as these different types of batteries may have the same shape and color. • If the batteries have leaked, dispose of them immediately. Avoid touching the leaked material or letting it come into contact with clothing, etc. Clean the battery compartment thoroughly before installing new batteries. • Do not throw away batteries with general house waste; dispose of them correctly in accordance with your local regulations. If the remote control is without batteries for more than 2 minutes, or if exhausted batteries remain in the remote control, the contents of the memory may be cleared. When the memory is cleared, insert new batteries, set up the remote control code and program any acquired functions that may have been cleared. 3 CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS Front panel 1 2 4 5 67 8 3 9 0 (U.S.A. model) VOLUME INPUT PURE DIRECT STANDBY /ON A/B/C/D/E PRESET/ TUNING PRESET/ TUNING FM/AM MEMORY TUNING MODE PROGRAM TUNER SPEAKERS A B MULTI CH INPUT EDIT INPUT MODE MAN'L/AUTO FM SILENT CINEMA S VIDEO AUTO/MAN'L MONO TONE CONTROL VIDEO L AUDIO R STRAIGHT OPTICAL YPAO EFFECT OPTIMIZER MIC VIDEO AUX PHONES RDS MODE /FREQ A B C D E F G EON H PTY SEEK MODE L M START I J K N O (U.K. and Europe models only) 1 STANDBY/ON Turns on this unit or sets it to the standby mode. When you turn on this unit, you will hear a click and there will be a 6 to 7-second delay before this unit can reproduce sound. 6 FM/AM Switches the reception band between FM and AM. Note In standby mode, this unit consumes a small amount of power in order to receive infrared-signals from the remote control. 8 TUNING MODE (AUTO/MAN’L MONO) Switches the tuning mode between automatic (AUTO indicator on) and manual (AUTO indicator off). 2 INPUT selector Selects the input source you want to listen to or watch. 9 Remote control sensor Receives signals from the remote control. 3 PURE DIRECT Turns on or off the PURE DIRECT mode. Lights up when turned on (see page 37). 0 VOLUME Controls the output level of all audio channels. This does not affect the REC OUT level. 4 Front panel display Shows information about the operational status of this unit. A SPEAKERS A/B Turn on or off the set of front speakers connected to the A and/or B terminals on the rear panel each time the corresponding button is pressed. 5 PRESET/TUNING EDIT Switches the function of PRESET/TUNING l / h between selecting preset station numbers and tuning. 4 7 MEMORY (MAN’L/AUTO FM) Stores a station in the memory. Hold down this button for more than 3 seconds to start automatic preset tuning. CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS C INPUT MODE Sets the priority (AUTO, DTS, ANALOG) for the type of signals received when one component is connected to two or more of this unit’s input jacks (see page 40). D OPTIMIZER MIC jack Use to connect and input audio signals from the supplied microphone for use with the AUTO SETUP function (see page 26). E A/B/C/D/E Selects one of the 5 preset station groups (A to E). F PRESET/TUNING l / h Selects preset station number 1 through 8 when a colon (:) is displayed next to the band indication in the front panel display. Selects the tuning frequency when the colon (:) is not displayed. ■ U.K. and Europe models only L RDS MODE/FREQ Press this button when the unit is receiving an RDS station to cycle the display mode between the PS mode, PTY mode, RT mode, CT mode (if the station offers those RDS data services) and/or the frequency display mode. M EON Press this button to select a radio program type (NEWS, INFO, AFFAIRS, SPORT) to tune in automatically. INTRODUCTION B MULTI CH INPUT Selects the source connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks. When selected, the MULTI CH INPUT source takes priority over the source selected with INPUT (or the input selector buttons on the remote control). N PTY SEEK MODE Press this button to set the unit to the PTY SEEK mode. O PTY SEEK START Press this button to begin searching for a station after the desired program type has been selected in the PTY SEEK mode. ■ Opening and closing the front panel door When you want to use the controls behind the front panel door, open the door by gently pressing on the lower part of the panel. Keep the door closed when not using these controls. G PHONES (SILENT CINEMA) jack Outputs audio signals for listening with headphones. When you connect headphones, no signals are output to the PRE OUT jacks or to the speakers. All Dolby Digital and DTS audio signals are mixed down to the left and right headphone channels. H VIDEO AUX jacks Input audio and video signals from an external source such as a game console. To reproduce source signals from these jacks, select V-AUX as the input source. I TONE CONTROL Use to adjust the bass/treble balance for the front left/right and center channels (see page 35). To open, press gently on the lower part of the panel. J PROGRAM Use to select sound field programs or adjust bass/treble balance (in conjunction with TONE CONTROL). K STRAIGHT/EFFECT Switches the sound fields off or on. When STRAIGHT is selected, input signals (2-channel or multi-channel) are output directly from their respective speakers without effect processing. English 5 CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS Remote control This section describes the function of each control on the remote control used to control this unit. To operate other components, see “REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES” on page 65. 1 2 3 C POWER STANDBY POWER TV AV A B INPUT MODE SLEEP PHONO TUNER CD MULTI CH IN V-AUX CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R DTV VCR 1 DVR/VCR2 DVD 4 SELECT 5 PRESET + AMP + + SOURCE 6 7 TV VOL CH VOL – – – TV MUTE TITLE MENU 0 PURE DIRECT NIGHT AUDIO ENTER TEST ON SCREEN RETURN DISPLAY 6 A/B/C/D/E Selects preset groups when this unit is in tuner mode. G 7 LEVEL Selects the speaker channel to be adjusted and sets the level. 8 Cursor buttons k / n / l / h / ENTER Use to select and adjust DSP program parameters or SET MENU items. H I 9 TEST Outputs the test tone to adjust the speaker levels. J 0 Sound field program/Numeric buttons Use to select sound field programs or input numbers. Use numbers 1 through 8 to select preset stations when this unit is in tuner mode. K MUTE SET MENU 8 9 TV INPUT LEVEL D E F TV A/B/C/D/E STRAIGHT EFFECT L M N O P A MACRO ON/OFF Turns the macro function on and off. B MACRO Use to program a series of operations for control by a single button (see page 71). ROCK STEREO HALL JAZZ 1 2 3 4 ENTERTAIN MUSIC TV THTR MOVIE 5 6 7 8 THX STANDARD 9 0 FREQ/RDS EON EXTD. SUR +10 ENT. C STANDBY Sets this unit in the standby mode. Q U MODE PTY SEEK START REC DISC SKIP A B OFF ON MACRO LEARN CLEAR RE–NAME R S t 1 Infrared window Outputs infrared control signals. Aim this window at the component you want to operate. 2 Transmission indicator Flashes while the remote control is sending signals. 6 4 Display window Shows the name of the selected source component that you can control. 5 PRESET +/– Selects preset station numbers when this unit is in tuner mode. SYSTEM POWER 3 Input selector buttons Select the input source and change the control area. D SYSTEM POWER Turns on the power of this unit. E INPUT MODE Sets the priority (AUTO, DTS, ANALOG) for the type of signals received when one component is connected to two or more of this unit’s input jacks (see page 40). F SLEEP Sets the sleep timer. G MULTI CH IN Selects MULTI CH INPUT when using an external decoder (etc.). CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS H SELECT k/n Selects another component that you can control independently of the input component selected with the input selector buttons. ■ U.K. and Europe models only I VOL +/– Increases or decreases the volume level. FREQ/RDS Press this button when the unit is receiving an RDS station to cycle the display between the PS mode, PTY mode, RT mode, CT mode (if the station offers those RDS data services) and/or the frequency display. K MUTE Mutes the sound. Press again to restore the audio output to the previous volume level. EON Press this button to select a radio program type (NEWS, INFO, AFFAIRS, SPORT) to tune in automatically. INTRODUCTION J AMP/SOURCE/TV Selects the component you want to control with the remote control. AMP: Set to this position to operate this unit. SOURCE: Set to this position to operate the component selected with an input selector button. TV: Set to this position to operate the television. To set the remote control codes for components, see page 66. U RDS tuning buttons (Available when this unit is in tuner mode) PTY SEEK MODE Press this button to set the unit to the PTY SEEK mode. PTY SEEK START Press this button to begin searching for a station after the desired program type has been selected in the PTY SEEK mode. L PURE DIRECT Turns on or off PURE DIRECT mode (see page 37). M SET MENU Selects the SET MENU mode. N NIGHT Turns on or off the night listening modes (see page 38). O ON SCREEN Selects the display mode of the on-screen display (OSD) this unit sends to your monitor. P STRAIGHT/EFFECT Switches the sound fields off or on. When STRAIGHT is selected, input signals (2-channel or multi-channel) are output directly from their respective speakers without effect processing. Q EXTD. SUR Switches between 5.1 or 6.1/7.1 channel playback of multi-channel software. R RE-NAME Used to change the input source name in the display window (see page 70). S CLEAR Used to clear functions acquired when using the learn and rename features, or setting remote control codes (see page 73). T LEARN Used to set up the remote control code or program functions from other remote controls (see pages 66 and 68). English 7 CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS Using the remote control The remote control transmits a directional infrared beam. Be sure to aim the remote control directly at the remote control sensor on the main unit during operation. VOLUME INPUT PURE DIRECT STANDBY /ON A/B/C/D/E PRESET/ TUNING PRESET /TUNING FM/AM MEMORY TUNING MODE PROGRAM TUNER SPEAKERS A B MULTI CH INPUT EDIT INPUT MODE MAN'L/AUTO FM PHONES S VIDEO AUTO/MAN'L MONO VIDEO TONE CONTROL L AUDIO R STRAIGHT OPTICAL MIC YPAO EFFECT SILENT Approximately 6 m (20 ft) VIDEO AUX 30 30 ■ Handling the remote control • Do not spill water or other liquids on the remote control. • Do not drop the remote control. • Do not leave or store the remote control in the following types of conditions: – high humidity such as near a bath – high temperature such as near a heater or stove – extremely low temperature – dusty places 8 CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS Front panel display V–AUX DVR/VCR2 VCR 1 NIGHT VIRTUAL 96 MATRIX 24 DISCRETE THX PCM 3 4 CBL/SAT SP AB 5 DTV 6 DVD MD/TAPE 7 8 CD–R CD TUNER B ft mS dB C D E F G (U.S.A., Canada, U.K., Europe and P Australia models only) PHONO PS PTY RT CT EON AUTO STEREO YPAO PTY HOLD MEMORY TUNED HiFi DSP SILENT CINEMA DIGITAL ZONE2 PL ZONE3 PL ZONE4 EX PL x SLEEP 0 A 9 H dB MUTE VOLUME 96/24 L C R LFE SL SB SR I J K L M NO Q (U.K. and Europe models only) 1 Decoder indicators When any of this unit’s decoders function, the respective indicator lights up. A PCM indicator Lights up when this unit is reproducing PCM (pulse code modulation) digital audio signals. 2 Sound field indicators Light to indicate the active DSP sound fields. B SLEEP indicator Lights up while the sleep timer is on. Presence DSP sound field Listening position Left surround DSP sound field Right surround DSP sound field Surround back DSP sound field 3 NIGHT indicator Lights up when you select night listening mode. C VIRTUAL indicator Lights up when Virtual CINEMA DSP is active (see page 39). D Headphones indicator Lights up when headphones are connected. 4 Input source indicators A cursor lights to show the current input source. E SP A B indicators Light up according to the set of front speakers selected. Both indicators light up when both sets of speakers are selected, or when bi-wiring. 5 CINEMA DSP indicator Lights up when you select a CINEMA DSP sound field program. F SILENT CINEMA indicator Lights up when headphones are connected and a sound field program is selected (see page 35). 6 YPAO indicator Lights up during the auto setup procedure and when the auto setup speaker settings are used without any modifications. G Multi-information display Shows the current sound field program name and other information when adjusting or changing settings. 7 AUTO indicator Lights up when this unit is in the automatic tuning mode. 8 STEREO indicator Lights up when this unit is receiving a stereo signal for an FM stereo broadcast while the AUTO indicator is lit. 9 VOLUME level indicator Indicates the volume level. H HiFi DSP indicator Lights up when you select a HiFi DSP sound field program. I MEMORY indicator Blinks to show a station can be stored. J TUNED indicator Lights up when this unit is tuned into a station. K MUTE indicator Blinks while the MUTE function is on. English 0 THX indicator Lights up when a THX program is selected. INTRODUCTION 2 1 9 CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS L 96/24 indicator Lights up when a DTS 96/24 signal is input to this unit. M LFE indicator Lights up when the input signal contains an LFE signal. N Input channel indicators Indicate the channel components of current digital input signal. O Presence and surround back speaker indicators Indicate the connection of presence and/or surround back speakers when using the SPEAKERS setting (page 32) or SP LEVEL setting (page 57). P ZONE 2/ZONE 3 indicators (U.S.A., Canada, U.K., Europe and Australia models only) Light up when Zone 2 or Zone 3 power is on. Q RDS indicators (U.K. and Europe models only) The name(s) of the RDS data offered by the currently received RDS station light(s) up. EON lights up when an RDS station that offers the EON data service is being received. PTY HOLD lights up while searching for stations in the PTY SEEK mode. 10 CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS Rear panel 2 3 AUDIO DIGITAL OUTPUT OPTICAL AUDIO L R VIDEO VIDEO L R COMPONENT VIDEO PR PB Y S VIDEO MD/TAPE 5 6 REMOTE RS-232C IN DVD IN (PLAY) CD-R 4 7 8 INTRODUCTION 1 CONTROL OUT OUT DVD +12V 15mA MAX. MD/TAPE DTV OUT (REC) DTV IN (PLAY) CBL /SAT R + – A – + + – B – + L DIGITAL INPUT CD DVD FRONT CD-R MONITOR OUT OUT (REC) IN VCR 1 DTV CBL/SAT PHONO SURROUND FRONT IN COAXIAL AC OUTLETS R R FM ANT 75Ω UNBAL. DVR/ VCR 2 + – – + AC OUTLETS L L R L SURROUND CD OUT ZONE 2 SURROUND + CD-R SUB WOOFER DVD CENTER R DVR/ VCR 2 CENTER MULTI CH INPUT ZONE 3 R + – – + L SURROUND BACK /PRESENCE SUB WOOFER GND L R GND FRONT (6CH)/SB (8CH) + AM ANT OUT CD CENTER – TUNER L – SURROUND BACK PRE OUT SPEAKERS C D SINGLE PRESENCE/ZONE 2 MONITOR OUT OUTPUT (U.S.A. model) 9 0 A B E 1 DIGITAL OUTPUT jacks See page 21 for details. 9 DIGITAL INPUT jacks See pages 18, 20 and 21 for details. 2 Audio component jacks See page 21 for connection information. 0 MULTI CH INPUT jacks See page 19 for connection information. 3 Video component jacks See pages 18 and 20 for connection information. A ZONE 2/ZONE 3 OUTPUT jacks (U.S.A., Canada, U.K., Europe and Australia models only) See page 77 for connection information. 4 RS-232C terminal (U.S.A., Canada, U.K., Europe and Australia models only) This is a control expansion terminal for commercial use. Consult your dealer for details. 5 REMOTE IN/OUT jacks (U.S.A., Canada, U.K., Europe and Australia models only) See page 77 for connection information. 6 CONTROL OUT jack (U.S.A., Canada, U.K., Europe and Australia models only) See page 77 for connection information. 7 AC OUTLET(S) Use to supply power to your other A/V components (see page 24). C PRE OUT jacks See page 22 for connection information. D Speaker terminals See page 13 for connection information. E PRESENCE/ZONE 2 speaker terminals (U.S.A., Canada, U.K., Europe and Australia models) PRESENCE speaker terminals (other models) See page 14 for connection information. < Asia and General models only > FREQUENCY STEP switch See page 23. English 8 AC INLET (U.S.A., Canada, U.K., Europe, Australia, China and Korea models only) Use this inlet to plug in the supplied power cable (see page 24). B Antenna terminals See page 23 for connection information. VOLTAGE SELECTOR See page 24. 11 SPEAKER SETUP SPEAKER SETUP Surround speakers (SR and SL) Speaker placement For best results, place the speakers as illustrated below. PL PR C FR FL 30˚ SL SR The surround speakers are used for effect and surround sounds. Place these speakers behind your listening position, facing slightly inwards, about 1.8 m (6 ft) above the floor. Surround back speakers (SBR and SBL) The surround back speakers supplement the surround speakers and provide for more realistic front-to-back transitions. Place these speakers directly behind the listening position and at the same height as the surround speakers. They should be positioned at least 30 cm (12 in) apart. Ideally, they should be positioned at the same width as the front speakers. 60˚ SL 80˚ SBL SR The use of a subwoofer, such as the YAMAHA Active Servo Processing Subwoofer System, is effective not only for reinforcing bass frequencies from any or all channels, but also for high fidelity reproduction of the LFE (lowfrequency effect) channel included in Dolby Digital and DTS software. The position of the subwoofer is not so critical, because low bass sounds are not highly directional. But it is better to place the subwoofer near the front speakers. Turn it slightly toward the center of the room to reduce wall reflections. SBR More than 30 cm (12 in) . 1.8 m (6 ft) 1.8 m (6 ft) y The illustrations show the standard speaker setting recommended by the ITU-R (see page 93). You can use it to enjoy CINEMA DSP, multi-channel audio sources, and THX. Front speakers (FR and FL) The front speakers are used for the main source sound plus effect sounds. Place these speakers an equal distance from the ideal listening position. The distance of each speaker from each side of the video monitor should be the same. Center speaker (C) The center speaker is for the center channel sounds (dialog, vocals, etc.). If for some reason it is not practical to use a center speaker, you can do without it. Best results, however, are obtained with the full system. Align the front face of the center speaker with the front face of your video monitor. Place the speaker centrally between the front speakers and as close to the monitor as possible, such as directly over or under it. 12 Subwoofer Presence speakers (PR and PL) Presence speakers supplement the sound from the front speakers with extra ambient effects produced by CINEMA DSP (see page 46). These effects include sounds that filmmakers intend to locate a little farther back behind the screen in order to create more theater-like ambience. Place these speakers at the front of the room about 0.5 - 1 m (1 - 3 ft) outside the front speakers, facing slightly inwards, and about 1.8 m (6 ft) above the floor. Note Surround back and presence speakers do not output sound simultaneously. You can set to prioritize either set of speakers in SOUND MENU (see page 60). SPEAKER SETUP ■ Di-pole speaker layout Either di-pole or direct radiating speaker types can be used for THX surround. If you choose di-pole speakers, please place the surround and surround back speakers according to the speaker layout below. FL FR C SR 30˚ 30˚ SBL SBR : Di-pole speaker : Direction of di-pole speaker Be sure to connect the left channel (L), right channel (R), “+” (red) and “–” (black) properly. If the connections are faulty, no sound will be heard from the speakers, and if the polarity of the speaker connections is incorrect, the sound will be unnatural and lack bass. CAUTION • If you will use 6 ohm speakers, be sure to set this unit’s speaker impedance setting to 6 ohms before using (see page 25). • Before connecting the speakers, make sure that the power of this unit is off. • Do not let the bare speaker wires touch each other or do not let them touch any metal part of this unit. This could damage this unit and/or speakers. • Use magnetically shielded speakers. If this type of speakers still creates the interference with the monitor, place the speakers away from the monitor. A speaker cord is actually a pair of insulated cables running side by side. One cable is colored or shaped differently, perhaps with a stripe, groove or ridges. Connect the striped (grooved, etc.) cable to the “+” (red) terminals on this unit and your speaker. Connect the plain cable to the “–” (black) terminals. 10 mm (3/8 in) 1 2 1 Remove approximately 10 mm (3/8 in) of insulation from each of the speaker cables. 2 Twist the exposed wires of the cable together to prevent short circuits. 3 Loosen the knob. The supplied speaker terminal wrench is useful for loosening or tightening knobs. 4 Insert one bare wire into the hole in the side of each terminal. 13 PREPARATION SL Speaker connections SPEAKER SETUP 5 Tighten the knob to secure the wire. Speaker terminal wrench 5 4 3 Red: positive (+) Black: negative (–) ■ Connecting to PRESENCE/ZONE 2 or PRESENCE speaker terminals 1 3 2 1 Open the tab. 2 Insert one bare wire into the hole of each terminal. 3 Return the tab to secure the wire. ■ Banana plug connections (With the exception of U.K., Europe and Asia models) First, tighten the knob and then insert the banana plug connector into the end of the corresponding terminal. Banana plug (With the exception of U.K., Europe and Asia models) y You can also use banana plugs with the PRESENCE/ZONE 2 and PRESENCE speaker terminals. Open the tab, then insert one banana plug connector into the hole of each terminal. Do not attempt to close the tabs after connecting the banana plugs. 14 SPEAKER SETUP 9 10 4 2 1 8 Front speakers (A) Right Left 7 3 6 5 Subwoofer with built-in amplifier Center speaker Speaker layout 2 PREPARATION 1 Front speakers (B) 4 3 RC-232C R FRONT + – – + + – – + + – – + L CENTER – + SURROUND R L L R + SUB WOOFER R + – – + L – SURROUND BACK PRE OUT SINGLE PRESENCE/ZONE 2 SPEAKERS (U.S.A. model) 7 8 Right Left Surround speakers 5 6 Right Left Surround back speakers 9 10 Right Left Presence speakers • You can connect both surround back and presence speakers to this unit, but they do not output sound simultaneously.You can set to prioritize either set of speakers in SOUND MENU (see page 60). • The surround back speakers output the surround back channel included in Dolby Digital EX and DTS-ES software and only operate when the Dolby Digital EX, DTS-ES or Dolby Pro Logic IIx decoder is turned on. • The presence speakers output ambient effects created by the DSP sound fields. They do not output sound when other sound fields are selected. 15 SPEAKER SETUP ■ FRONT terminals ■ CENTER terminals Connect one or two speaker systems to these terminals. If you use only one speaker system, connect it to either the FRONT A or B terminals. Connect a center speaker to these terminals. Note ■ SUBWOOFER jack The Canada model cannot output to two separate speaker systems simultaneously. Bi-wired connection The unit also allows you to make bi-wired connections to one speaker system. Use two pairs of speaker cables for each speaker (one pair for the woofer and one pair for the tweeter/mid-range). To use the bi-wired connections, press SPEAKERS A and SPEAKERS B on the front panel so that both SP A and B light up in the front panel display. Bi-wired connection ■ SURROUND terminals Connect surround speakers to these terminals. Connect a subwoofer with a built-in amplifier, such as the YAMAHA Active Servo Processing Subwoofer System, to this jack. ■ SURROUND BACK terminals Connect surround back speakers to these terminals. If you only connect one surround back speaker, connect it to the left (L) terminals. ■ PRESENCE terminals Connect presence speakers to these terminals. Note (U.S.A., Canada, U.K., Europe and Australia models only) You can also use these terminals to connect Zone 2 speakers (see page 64). + – A – + FRONT + – B – + R This unit 16 L CONNECTIONS CONNECTIONS Before connecting components CAUTION Do not connect this unit or other components to the mains power until all connections between components are complete. Dust protection cap Pull out the cap from the optical jack before you connect the fiber optic cable. Do not discard the cap. When you are not using the optical jack, be sure to put the cap back in place. This cap protects the jack from dust. For analog signals ■ Video jacks left analog cables L right analog cables R For digital signals optical cables O coaxial cables C For video signals video cables V S-video cables S This unit has three types of video jacks. Connection depends on the availability of input jacks on your monitor. The signals input through the S VIDEO jacks on this unit are automatically converted for output through the VIDEO jacks. When V CONV. is set to “ON” (see page 63), signals input through the VIDEO jacks can be output through the S VIDEO and COMPONENT VIDEO jacks. Likewise, signals input through the S VIDEO jacks can also be output through the COMPONENT VIDEO jacks. S VIDEO VIDEO COMPONENT VIDEO PR PB Y V V ■ Analog jacks V You can input analog signals from audio components by connecting audio pin cables to the analog jacks on this unit. Connect red plugs to the right jacks and white plugs to the left jacks. ■ Digital jacks This unit has digital jacks for direct transmission of digital signals through either coaxial or fiber optic cables. You can use the digital jacks to input PCM, Dolby Digital and DTS bitstreams. When you connect components to both the COAXIAL and OPTICAL jacks, priority is given to the input signals from the COAXIAL jack. All digital input jacks are compatible with 96-kHz sampling digital signals. Note This unit handles digital and analog signals independently. Thus audio signals input to the analog jacks are only output to the analog OUT (REC) jacks. Likewise audio signals input to the digital (OPTICAL or COAXIAL) jacks are only output to the DIGITAL OUTPUT jacks. VIDEO jack For conventional composite video signals. S VIDEO jack For S-video signals, separated into luminance (Y) and color (C) video signals to achieve high-quality color reproduction. COMPONENT VIDEO jacks For component signals, separated into luminance (Y) and color difference (PB, PR) to provide the best quality in picture reproduction. Signal flow inside this unit Input Output (MONITOR OUT) COMPONENT VIDEO S VIDEO VIDEO Only when V CONV. is set to ON (see page 63) Note When signals are input through both the S VIDEO and VIDEO jacks, signals input through the S VIDEO jack have priority. 17 PREPARATION ■ Cable indications CONNECTIONS Connecting video components ■ Connections for DVD playback Coaxial out Optical out Video out DVD player Audio out C R O L AUDIO DIGITAL OUTPUT OPTICAL R AUDIO L VIDEO VIDEO L R DVD IN (PLAY) CD-R COMPONENT VIDEO PR PB Y S VIDEO MD/TAPE DVD MD/TAPE OUT (REC) DIGITAL INPUT Video in CD IN (PLAY) DVD CD-R MONITOR OUT OUT (REC) TUNER AM ANT CD COAXIAL M GND CBL/SAT PHONO FM ANT MAIN/SURROUND BACK SUR CD 75Ω UNBAL. ZONE 2 SURROUND SUB WOO DVD DTV SUB WOOFER GND CENTER MULCH CH INPUT ZONE 3 MONITOR OUT OUTPUT (U.S.A. model) 18 Video monitor CONNECTIONS ■ Connecting to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks This unit is equipped with 6 additional input jacks (left and right FRONT, CENTER, left and right SURROUND and SUBWOOFER) for discrete multi-channel input from a multi-format player, external decoder, sound processor or preamplifier. If you set MULTI CH INPUT 6ch/8ch to “8ch” (see page 62), you can use input jacks assigned as MULTI CH INPUT FRONT (page 62) together with the MULTI CH INPUT jacks to input 8 channels. Connect the output jacks on your multi-format player or external decoder to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks. Be sure to match the left and right outputs to the left and right input jacks for the front and surround channels. For 6-channel input For 8-channel input AUDIO R SURROUND SURROUND IN (PLAY) AUDIO L R L DVD MD/TAPE DTV SUB WOOFER SUB WOOFER CENTER IN (PLAY) CENTER CBL /SAT MULTI CH INPUT MULTI CH INPUT CD-R IN VCR 1 R L Subwoofer out R L R L Center out Center out Front out Multi-format player/ External decoder Surround out Subwoofer out Surround back out R L CD Surround out Multi-format player/ External decoder IN DVR/ VCR 2 R Front out L Notes • When you select MULTI CH INPUT as the input source, this unit automatically turns off the digital sound field processor, and you cannot select sound field programs. • This unit does not redirect signals input to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks to accommodate for missing speakers. We recommend that you connect at least a 5.1-channel speaker system before using this feature. • When headphones are used, only front L/R channels are output. 19 PREPARATION FRONT(6CH)/SB(8CH) FRONT(6CH)/SB(8CH) CONNECTIONS ■ Connections for other video components Optical out Video out Cable TV or satellite tuner Audio out R O L AUDIO DIGITAL OUTPUT OPTICAL AUDIO L R VIDEO VIDEO L R COMPONENT VIDEO PR PB Y S VIDEO MD/TAPE IN (PLAY) CD-R MD/TAPE DTV OUT (REC) DIGITAL INPUT CD CBL /SAT IN (PLAY) CD-R CD-R OUT (REC) IN TUNER VCR 1 DVD AM ANT OUT CD MA GND CBL/SAT PHONO IN COAXIAL DVR/ VCR 2 MAIN/SURROUND BACK FM ANT SURR CD OUT ZONE 2 SURROUND 75Ω UNBAL. CD-R SUB WOOF DVD DVR/ VCR2 SUB WOOFER GND Connect a YAMAHA CD recorder that outputs OSD signals. ZONE 3 CENTER MULCH CH INPUT OUTPUT (U.S.A. model) C R L R L Audio in Video in DVD recorder or VCR Audio out Video out Coaxial out ■ VIDEO AUX jacks (on the front panel) Use these jacks to connect any video source, such as a game console or camcorder, to this unit. S VIDEO VIDEO S V L AUDIO R OPTICAL VIDEO AUX L R O Optical out Audio out R Audio out L Video out S-video out 20 Game console or video camera CONNECTIONS Connecting audio components ■ Connections for audio components Optical in MD recorder or tape deck Audio out Audio in R O L R L R PREPARATION AUDIO DIGITAL OUTPUT OPTICAL AUDIO L L R MD/TAPE IN (PLAY) CD-R Optical in MD/TAPE OUT (REC) O DIGITAL INPUT Optical out Audio out CD IN (PLAY) O L CD-R R OUT (REC) Audio out DVD R CD Audio in L CD player R CBL/SAT PHONO COAXIAL CD recorder* L * MAIN/SURROUND BACK CD C Coaxial out Some CD recorders can be connected to the VIDEO CD-R jacks (see page 20). ZONE 2 SURROUND DVD Audio out DTV SUB WOOFER GND L CENTER MULCH CH INPUT ZONE 3 OUTPUT R (U.S.A. model) GND Turntable ■ Connecting a turntable y PHONO jacks are for connecting a turntable with an MM or high-output MC cartridge. If you have a turntable with a low-output MC cartridge, use an in-line boosting transformer or MC-head amplifier when connecting to these jacks. Connect your turntable to the GND terminal to reduce noise in the signal. However, you may hear less noise without the connection to the GND terminal for some record players. 21 CONNECTIONS ■ Connecting to an external amplifier If you want to increase the power output to the speakers, or want to use another amplifier, connect an external amplifier to the PRE OUT jacks as follows. Notes • When audio pin plugs are connected to the PRE OUT jacks for output to an external amplifier, it is not necessary to use the corresponding SPEAKERS terminals. Set the volume of the external amplifier connected to this unit to the maximum. • The signal output through the FRONT PRE OUT and CENTER PRE OUT jacks are affected by the TONE CONTROL settings. • If SPEAKERS A is turned off and SP B is set to ZONE B (see page 64), signals will only be output from the FRONT PRE OUT jacks. 1 L R FRONT 2 R L SURROUND 3 4 SUB WOOFER CENTER R 5 L SURROUND BACK /PRESENCE PRE OUT 1 FRONT PRE OUT jacks Front channel line output jacks. 2 SURROUND PRE OUT jacks Surround channel line output jacks. 3 SUBWOOFER PRE OUT jack Connect a subwoofer with built-in amplifier, such as the YAMAHA Active Servo Processing Subwoofer System, to this jack. 4 SURROUND BACK/PRESENCE PRE OUT jacks Surround back or presence channel line output jacks. 5 CENTER PRE OUT jack Center channel line output jack. Notes • Each PRE OUT jack outputs the same channel signal as the corresponding speaker terminals. However, when both surround back and presence speakers are setup in this unit, the signals output from SURROUND BACK/PRESENCE PRE OUT jacks may not correspond to the correct speakers. • Adjust the volume level of the subwoofer with the control on the subwoofer. It is also possible to adjust the volume level by using the remote control (see “Manually adjusting speaker levels” on page 51). • Some signals may not be output from the SUBWOOFER PRE OUT jack depending on the SPEAKER SET (see page 55) and LFE/BASS OUT (see page 56) settings. 22 CONNECTIONS Connecting the antennas Both AM and FM indoor antennas are included with this unit. In general, these antennas should provide sufficient signal strength. Connect each antenna correctly to the designated terminals. AM loop antenna (included) Indoor FM antenna (included) COMPONENT VIDEO PR PB Y VD Notes • The AM loop antenna should be placed away from this unit. • The AM loop antenna should always be connected, even if an outdoor AM antenna is connected to this unit. • A property installed outdoor antenna provides clearer reception than an indoor one. If you experience poor reception quality, an outdoor antenna may improve the quality. Consult the nearest authorized YAMAHA dealer or service center about outdoor antennas. TV PREPARATION ■ 75-ohm/300-ohm antenna adapter (U.K. model only) ONITOR OUT TUNER AM ANT MAIN GND 1 Open the cover of the included 75-ohm/300-ohm antenna adapter. 2 Cut the external sleeve of the 75-ohm coaxial cable and prepare it for connection. FM ANT 75Ω UNBAL. SURRO SUB WOOFE Ground (GND terminal) For maximum safety and minimum interference, connect the antenna GND terminal to a good earth ground. A good earth ground is a metal stake driven into moist earth. 3 Cut the lead wire and remove it. 4 Insert the cable wire into the slot, and clamp it with pliers. ■ Connecting the AM loop antenna 1 Set up the AM loop antenna, then connect it to the terminals on this unit. 11 (7/16) 8 (5/16) 6 (1/14) Unit: mm (in) Lead wire Clamp Clamp Insert wire into slot 5 2 Press and hold the tab to insert the AM loop antenna lead wires into the AM ANT and GND terminals. Snap the cover into place. ■ FREQUENCY STEP switch (Asia and General models only) Because the interstation frequency spacing differs in different areas, set FM AM the FREQUENCY STEP switch (locating on the rear panel) according to the frequency spacing in your area. • North, Central and South America: 100 kHz/10 kHz • Other areas: 50 kHz/9 kHz Before setting this switch, disconnect this unit’s AC power cord from the wall outlet. 100kHz/10kHz 50kHz/9kHz FREQUENCY STEP 3 Orient the AM loop antenna for the best reception. 23 CONNECTIONS Connecting the power supply cord ■ Connecting the AC power cord (U.S.A., Canada, U.K., Europe, Australia, China and Korea models) Plug the power cord into the AC inlet after all other connections are complete, then plug the power cord to an AC wall outlet. AC OUTLETS CAUTION Do not use other AC power cords. Use the one provided. Use of other power cords may result in fire hazard or electrical shock. (Other models) Plug the power cord into an AC wall outlet. ■ AC OUTLET(S) (SWITCHED) (U.S.A. model) VOLTAGE SELECTOR 2 VOLTAGE SELECTOR U.K. and Australia models.............................. 1 OUTLET Korea model .............................................................. None Other models.................................................. 2 OUTLETS Use these outlets to connect the power cords from your other components to this unit. Power to the AC OUTLET(S) is controlled by this unit’s STANDBY/ON (or SYSTEM POWER and STANDBY). These outlets will supply power to any connected component whenever this unit is turned on. The maximum power (total power consumption of components) that can be connected to the AC OUTLET(S) is: Asia and General models .......................................... 50 W Other models ........................................................... 100 W ■ VOLTAGE SELECTOR (Asia and General models only) The VOLTAGE SELECTOR on the rear panel of this unit must be set for your local main voltage BEFORE plugging into the AC main supply. Voltages are: General model........AC 110/120/220/230-240 V, 50/60 Hz Asia model ............................ AC 220/230-240V, 50/60 Hz ■ Memory back-up (General model) 24 The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data from being lost even if this unit is in the standby mode. However if the power cord is disconnected from the AC wall outlet, or the power supply is cut for more than one week, the stored data will be lost. CONNECTIONS Speaker impedance setting Turning on the power When all connections are complete, turn on the power of this unit. CAUTION If you are using 6 ohm speakers, set the impedance to 6 ohms as follows before turning on the power. 1 Be sure this unit is in the standby mode. VOLUME INPUT 1 On the front panel, while holding down SPEAKERS A, press STANDBY/ON. “SP IMP.SET” appears in the front panel display for a few seconds, then “Minimum 8ohms” appears. PURE DIRECT STANDBY /ON PRESET/ TUNING A/B/C/D/E PRESET /TUNING MEMORY FM/AM TUNING MODE PROGRAM TUNER B MULTI CH INPUT INPUT MODE MAN'L/AUTO FM EDIT PHONES AUTO/MAN'L MONO S VIDEO VIDEO TONE CONTROL L AUDIO R STRAIGHT OPTICAL YPAO EFFECT OPTIMIZER MIC SILENT VIDEO AUX SPEAKERS A (U.S.A. model) STANDBY /ON SYSTEM POWER POWER TV AV STANDBY POWER A B INPUT MODE SLEEP PHONO TUNER CD MULTI CH IN V-AUX CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R DTV VCR 1 DVR/VCR2 DVD 1 SP IMP.SET SELECT AMP + Minimum 8ohms 2 3 1 SYSTEM POWER STANDBY /ON Front panel y You can also use SP IMP.SET (see page 63) to set the speaker impedance. + Press STANDBY/ON (SYSTEM POWER on the remote control) to turn on the power of this unit. Press SPEAKERS A or SPEAKERS B to select the impedance of your speakers. You can select either 6 ohms or 8 ohms. Press STANDBY/ON to exit the setting. This unit will be set to the standby mode. + 2 or Remote control Turn on the video monitor connected to this unit. Note Press STANDBY/ON again (STANDBY on the remote control) to enter the standby mode. 25 PREPARATION SPEAKERS A AUTO SETUP AUTO SETUP Introduction This receiver employs YAMAHA Parametric Room Acoustic Optimizer (YPAO) technology which lets you avoid troublesome listening-based speaker setup and achieves highly accurate sound adjustments. The supplied optimizer microphone collects and analyzes the sound your speakers produce in your actual listening environment. Optimizer microphone setup 1 Connect the supplied optimizer microphone to the OPTIMIZER MIC jack on the front panel. (U.S.A. model) A/B/C/D/E PRESET/ TUNING PRESET /TUNING FM/AM MEMORY TUNING MODE TUNER y MAN'L/AUTO FM EDIT PHONES The basic setup feature (page 31) is useful if you want to set up your system quickly and with minimal effort. However, we recommend that you come back and perform auto setup later to take advantage of YPAO and enjoy even higher fidelity. S VIDEO AUTO/MAN'L MONO VIDEO L AUDIO R OPTICAL YPAO OPTIMIZER MIC SILENT VIDEO AUX Notes Notes • Please be advised that it is normal for loud test tones to be output during the auto setup procedure. • If auto setup stops and error messages appear on the screen, follow the troubleshooting on page 29. YPAO performs the following checks and makes appropriate adjustments to give you the best possible sound from your system. WIRING Checks which speakers are connected and the polarity of each speaker. DISTANCE Checks the distance of each speaker from the listening position and adjusts the timing of each channel. SIZE Checks the speaker’s frequency response and sets the appropriate low frequency crossover for each channel. EQUALIZING Adjusts frequency and levels of each channel’s parametric equalizer to reduce coloration across the channels and create a cohesive sound field. This is particularly important if you use different brands or sizes of speakers for some channels or have a room with unique sonic characteristics. YPAO equalizing calibration incorporates three parameters (frequency, level and Q factor) for each of the seven bands in its parametric equalizer to provide highly precise automatic adjustment of frequency characteristics. LEVEL Checks and adjusts the sound level (volume) of each speaker. 26 • After you have completed the auto setup procedure, be sure to disconnect the optimizer microphone. • The optimizer microphone is sensitive to heat. –Keep it away from direct sunlight. –Do not place it on top of this unit. 2 Place the optimizer microphone on a flat level surface with the omni-directional microphone head upward, at your normal listening position. If possible, use a tripod (etc.) to affix the optimizer mic at the same height as your ears would be when you are seated in your listening position. Optimizer microphone position AUTO SETUP Starting the setup 4 For best results, make sure the room is as quiet as possible during the auto setup procedure (YPAO). If there is too much ambient noise, the results may not be satisfactory. Press k / n repeatedly to select WIRING, DISTANCE, SIZE, EQUALIZING or LEVEL. 1 AUTO:MENU .WIRING;;;;;CHECK DISTANCE;;;CHECK SIZE;;;;;;;CHECK EQUALIZING;;FLAT LEVEL;;;;;;CHECK SETUP;;;;;;;AUTO START PUSH > y If your subwoofer can adjust the output volume and the crossover frequency, set the volume to about half way (or slightly less) and set the crossover frequency to the maximum. p /p : Up/Down < / > : Select CROSSOVER/ HIGH CUT VOLUME MIN MAX MIN CHECK To automatically check and adjust the selected MAX Subwoofer 1 2 SKIP Switch on this unit and video monitor. Make sure the OSD is displayed (see page 50). When using THX speakers, set SIZE to SKIP and make sure that “SMALL” or “SMLx2” is selected in SPEAKER SET (page 55) and that 80Hz (THX) is selected in CROSS OVER (page 57). SET MENU then When EQUALIZING is selected, press l / h to select: FRONT To adjust the frequency response of each speaker in accordance with the sound of your front speakers. Recommended if your front speakers are of much higher quality than your other speakers. FLAT To average the frequency response of all speakers. Recommended if all of your speakers are of similar quality. LOW To average the frequency response of all speakers, giving priority to the accuracy of bass frequencies. MID To average the frequency response of all speakers, giving priority to the accuracy of mid-range frequencies. HIGH To average the frequency response of all speakers, giving priority to the accuracy of high frequencies. SKIP To skip the selected item and perform no adjustments. MENU SOURCE TV 3 Press k / n to select AUTO SETUP, then press h once to enter the main menu. ENTER SET MENU . ;AUTO SETUP ;MANUAL SETUP p /p : Up/Down < / > : Enter 6 ENTER item. To skip the selected item and perform no adjustments. Note Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to AMP, then press SET MENU to enter the SET MENU. AMP When WIRING, DISTANCE, SIZE or LEVEL is selected, press l / h to select: Press n to select SETUP, then press l / h to select: AUTO To automatically perform the entire auto setup procedure. STEP To pause for confirmation between each check in the auto setup procedure. RELOAD To restore the last auto setup setting. 27 PREPARATION 5 AUTO SETUP y 7 Press n to select START PUSH i, then press h. Loud test tones will be output from each speaker and WAIT appears during the auto setup procedure. Notes Note If “E-10:OTHER ERROR” appears during testing, restart the procedure from step 3. If you selected “AUTO” in step 6 The RESULT display appears for a few seconds after each check, then settings of the next item will start. The RESULT:EXIT display appears after all items are set. y You can display each result by pressing k once and pressing h repeatedly before exiting. Pressing n returns to the RESULT:EXIT display. 8 To apply the changes, press l / h to select SET, then press n to exit. To cancel the auto setup procedure, press l / h to select CANCEL, then press n to exit. If you selected “STEP” in step 6 The RESULT display appears after each check. 8 Press l / h to display RESULT:EXIT, then press l / h to select: NEXT EXIT Then press n to proceed and check the next item. Then press n to exit the auto setup. RESULT:WIRING FRONT L;;;;;;;OK p p RESULT:DISTANCE1 RESULT:EQUALIZI. EQ;;;;;FRONT L 63Hz;;;-2.0dB 125Hz;;;-5.0dB 500Hz;;;;;;0dB 630Hz;;;;;;0dB 1.0kHz;;;;;;0dB 3.15kHz;;;+3.0dB 10.0kHz;;;+1.0dB / p p / : Up/Down </> : Back/Next : Up/Down RESULT:LEVEL 1 / : Up/Down </> : Back/Next / : Up/Down </> : Back/Next RESULT:SIZE 1 p p / : Up/Down </> : Back/Next p p . FRONT L;;;+5.0dB CENTER;;;;-4.5dB FRONT R;;;+5.5dB PRESENCE;;-3.0dB p p . FRONT L;;;;3.20m CENTER;;;;;3.30m FRONT R;;;;2.90m PRES L;;;;;1.70m PRES R;;;;;1.50m FRONT L;;;;;;LRG 28 • Press k / n repeatedly to move between each display. • If you are not satisfied with the result or want to manually adjust each setup parameter, use the manual setup parameters (see page 55). • If you change speakers, speaker positions, or the layout of your listening environment, perform AUTO SETUP again to recalibrate your system. • In the DISTANCE results, the distance displayed may be longer than the actual distance depending on the characteristics of your subwoofer. • In the EQUALIZING results, different values may be set for the same band to provide finer adjustments. If you selected “RELOAD” in step 6 The RESULT:EXIT display appears. y You can display each result by pressing k once and pressing h repeatedly before exiting. Pressing n returns to the RESULT:EXIT display. 8 Press l / h to select “SET”, then press n to exit. AUTO SETUP ■ Troubleshooting for auto setup procedure Before auto setup Error message Cause Remedy Connect MIC! Optimizer microphone is not connected. • Connect the supplied optimizer microphone to the OPTIMIZER MIC jack on the front panel. Unplug HP! Headphones are connected. • Unplug the headphones. Error message Cause Remedy E-1:NO FRONT SP Front L/R channel signal(s) is (are) not detected. • Select the front speakers with SPEAKER A or B. • Check the front L/R speaker connections. E-2:NO SURR.SP A surround channel signal is not detected. • Check the surround speaker connections. E-3:NO PRES. SP A presence channel signal is not detected. • Check the presence speaker connections. E-4:SBR->SBL Only right surround back channel signal is detected. • Connect the surround back speaker to the LEFT SURROUND BACK SPEAKERS terminal if you only have one surround back speaker. E-5:NOISY Background noise is too loud. • Try auto setup procedure in a quiet environment. • Turn off noisy electric equipment like air conditioners (etc.) or move them away from the optimizer microphone. E-6:CHECK SURR. Surround back speaker(s) is (are) connected, though surround L/R speakers are not. • Connect surround speakers when you use (a) surround back speaker(s). E-7:NO MIC The optimizer microphone was unplugged during the auto setup procedure. • Connect the supplied optimizer microphone to OPTIMIZER MIC jack on the front panel. E-8:NO SIGNAL The optimizer microphone does not detect test tones. • Check the microphone setting. • Check the speaker connections and placement. E-9:USER CANCEL The auto setup procedure was cancelled due to user activity. • Perform the auto setup procedure again. E-10:OTHER ERROR An internal error occurred. • Perform the auto setup procedure again. 29 PREPARATION During auto setup Press l / h to display the detailed information about individual errors. Select “RETRY” to try auto setup procedure again. AUTO SETUP After auto setup Press l / h to display the detailed information about individual warnings. Warning message • • • • Cause Remedy W-1:OUT OF PHASE Speaker polarity is not correct. This message may appear depending on the speakers even when the speakers are connected correctly. • Check the speaker connections for proper polarity (+ or –). W-2:OVER 24m (80ft) The distance between the speaker and the listening position is over 24 m (80 ft). • Bring the speaker closer to the listening position. W-3:LEVEL ERROR The difference of volume level among speakers is excessive. (No level correction is made.) • Readjust the speaker installation so that all speakers are set in locations with similar conditions. • Check the speaker connections. • Use speakers of similar quality. • Adjust the output volume of the subwoofer. W-4:SWFR PHASE The phase polarity of the subwoofer is not correct. • Select the opposite phase on the subwoofer if the subwoofer has a phase switch. W-5:VOL ERROR The result may not be correct because the volume was changed during the auto setup procedure. • Perform the auto setup procedure again. Do not change the volume during the auto setup procedure. If the ERROR or WARNING screens appears, check the cause of the problem, then perform the auto setup procedure again. If warning W-1, W-4 or W-5 appears, corrections are made, but they may not be optimal. If warning W-2 or W-3 appears, no corrections are made. If error E-10 occurs repeatedly, please contact a qualified YAMAHA service center. 30 BASIC SETUP BASIC SETUP The basic system parameters are set automatically when you run auto setup (page 26). Basic setup is useful if you want to quickly setup your speakers or to manually adjust some of the items set in auto setup. 3 Press l / h to enter BASIC MENU. 4 When ROOM is selected, press l / h to change the setting. Select the size of the room you have installed your speakers in. Roughly speaking, the room sizes are defined as follows: y If you wish to configure the unit manually using more precise adjustments, use the detailed parameters in SOUND MENU (page 55) instead of BASIC MENU. [U.S.A. and Canada models] S (small) 16 x 13 ft, 200 ft2 (4.8 x 4.0 m, 20 m2) M (medium) 20 x 16 ft, 300 ft2 (6.3 x 5.0 m, 30 m2) L (large) 26 x 19 ft, 450 ft2 (7.9 x 5.8 m, 45 m2) Altering any parameters in BASIC MENU will reset all parameters in SOUND MENU. Using BASIC MENU [Other models] S (small) 3.6 x 2.8 m, 10 m2 M (medium) 4.8 x 4.0 m, 20 m2 L (large) 6.3 x 5.0 m, 30 m2 SELECT AMP + + + TV VOL CH VOL SOURCE – – – TV A/B/C/D/E TV MUTE TV INPUT MUTE LEVEL SET MENU TITLE MENU 2-9 1 1 BASIC MENU 1/2 PURE DIRECT .ROOM: S[ML SWFR:[YESNONE PRESENCE;;;;NONE SPEAKERS;;;;7spk NIGHT AUDIO ENTER TEST ON SCREEN RETURN DISPLAY STRAIGHT EFFECT 1 Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to AMP, then press SET MENU to enter the SET MENU. AMP 5 SET MENU SOURCE then MENU YES NONE TV 2 Press k / n repeatedly to select MANUAL SETUP, then press l / h to enter the selected category. then ENTER Press n to select SWFR, then press l / h to select: 6 If you have a subwoofer in your system. If you do not have a subwoofer in your system. Press n to select PRESENCE, then press l / h to select: YES NONE If you have presence speakers in your system. If you do not have presence speakers in your system. ENTER SET MENU ;AUTO SETUP . ;MANUAL SETUP p /p : Up/Down < / > : Enter If k is pressed when AUTO SETUP is selected, or if n is pressed when MANUAL SETUP is selected, SET MENU will be closed. Press SET MENU to open SET MENU again. 31 PREPARATION Note BASIC SETUP 7 Press n to select SPEAKERS, then press l / h to select the number of speakers connected to the unit. The choices vary as follows depending on the PRESENCE setting: 9 Press n to select CHECK OK?, then press l / h to select: YES NO To exit the setup if the test tones were satisfactory. To adjust each speaker level (see page 57). PRESENCE setting Choices 1 BASIC MENU 2/2 NONE YES Front L/R 2 — — L C R SL SB SR 3 — — L C R SL SB SR Front L/R, Center L C R SL SB SR Front L/R, Surround L/R . CHECK OK?;;;;YES (when “NO” is selected) 4 L 5 L C R 6 7 8 L SL R R SR L C R SL SR L C R SL SB SR L C R SL SB SR 9 * Presence L/R, Front L/R Presence L/R, Front L/R, Center L C R SL SB SR Presence L/R, Front L/R, Surround L/R L C R SL SB SR Presence L/R, Front L/R, Center, Surround L/R L C R SL SB SR Front L/R, Center, Surround L/R Front L/R, Center, Surround L/R, Surround back L/R Presence L/R, Front L/R, Center, Surround L/R, Surround back* — — Presence L/R, Front L/R, Center, Surround L/R, Surround back L/R* — — After you have finished the settings, press n, then press l / h to select: SET CANCEL To apply the changes. To cancel the setup. 1 BASIC MENU 2/2 . [SET CANCEL ROOM SIZE=MEDIUM If you select “SET”, you will hear a test tone from each speaker. 32 FR C SL + Front L/R, Center, Surround L/R, Surround back Surround back and presence speakers do not output sound simultaneously. You can set to prioritize either set of speakers in SOUND MENU (see page 60). 8 B)SPEAKER LEVEL . Memory back-up The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data from being lost even if this unit is in the standby mode. However, if the power cord is disconnected from the AC outlet, or the power supply is cut for more than one week, the stored data will be lost. If so, adjust the items again. PLAYBACK PLAYBACK Basic operations 1 4 4 6 Select the input source. Use INPUT (or press one of the input selector buttons on the remote control) to select the input you desire. PHONO TUNER CD MULTI CH IN V-AUX CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R DTV VCR 1 DVR/VCR2 DVD INPUT VOLUME or INPUT PURE DIRECT STANDBY /ON PRESET/ TUNING A/B/C/D/E PRESET /TUNING FM/AM MEMORY TUNING MODE PROGRAM TUNER SPEAKERS A B MULTI CH INPUT INPUT MODE MAN'L/AUTO FM EDIT PHONES S VIDEO AUTO/MAN'L MONO TONE CONTROL VIDEO L AUDIO R STRAIGHT OPTICAL MIC YPAO EFFECT SILENT Front panel VIDEO AUX (U.S.A. model) 3 7 V–AUX 1 POWER TV AV STANDBY POWER A B INPUT MODE SLEEP PHONO TUNER CD MULTI CH IN DTV DVD MD/TAPE CD–R CD TUNER LEVEL SET MENU TITLE MENU DVD PURE DIRECT PHONO dB VOLUME AUTO L R NIGHT CBL/SAT MD/TAPE AUDIO TEST ON SCREEN RETURN DISPLAY Selected input source STRAIGHT Input mode CD-R STEREO VCR 1 DVR/VCR2 + + + TV VOL CH VOL – – – HALL JAZZ ROCK 1 2 3 4 ENTERTAIN MUSIC TV THTR MOVIE 5 6 7 8 THX STANDARD 9 0 FREQ/RDS EON DVD SELECT AMP REC SOURCE DISC SKIP OFF ON MACRO 7 TV MUTE TV INPUT SET MENU TITLE MENU Start playback or select a broadcast station on the source component. Refer to the operation instructions for the component. +10 6 Adjust the volume to the desired output level. ENT. MODE PTY SEEK START LEARN CLEAR RE–NAME TV MUTE LEVEL 5 EXTD. SUR A/B/C/D/E 1 CBL/SAT EFFECT V-AUX DTV 7 VCR 1 MUTE PURE DIRECT VOLUME + Press STANDBY/ON (SYSTEM POWER on the remote control) to turn on the power. or VOL – SYSTEM POWER STANDBY /ON or Front panel Front panel Remote control Remote control 2 Turn on the video monitor connected to this unit. 3 Press SPEAKERS A or B on the front panel. Each press turns the respective speakers on or off. SPEAKERS A B When bi-wiring, select both A and B. 33 BASIC OPERATION POWER TV INPUT ENTER 6 DVR/VCR2 SP A TV MUTE SYSTEM 4 Remote control The current input source name and input mode appear in the front panel display and video monitor for a few seconds. PLAYBACK 7 Select a sound field program if desired. Use PROGRAM (or set AMP/SOURCE/TV to AMP, then press one of the sound field program buttons repeatedly) to select a sound field program. See page 46 for details about sound field programs. Selecting sound field programs ■ Front panel operation VOLUME INPUT PURE DIRECT PROGRAM or ROCK STEREO HALL JAZZ 1 2 3 4 SOURCE ENTERTAIN MUSIC TY THTR MOVIE 5 6 7 TV THX STANDARD 9 0 AMP STANDBY /ON A/B/C/D/E 8 PRESET/ TUNING PRESET /TUNING FM/AM B MULTI CH INPUT INPUT M MODE MAN'L/AUTO FM EDIT PHONES Front panel MEMORY TUNING MODE PROGRAM TUNER SPEAKERS A S VIDEO AUTO/MAN'L MONO TONE CONTROL VIDEO L AUDIO R STRAIGHT OPTICAL MIC YPAO EXTD. SUR +10 EFFECT SILENT VIDEO AUX ENT. Remote control (U.S.A. model) PROGRAM Note When this unit detects Dolby Digital signals, the following display appears for a few seconds. This shows how the signal level is being corrected to become –27 dB (THX recommendation). Rotate PROGRAM to select the desired program. The name of the selected program appears in the front panel display and video monitor. PROGRAM DialNorm;;+4dB V–AUX DVR/VCR2 VCR 1 CBL/SAT SP A DTV DVD MD/TAPE CD–R HiFi DSP JAZZ CLUB Program name 34 CD TUNER PHONO dB VOLUME L R PLAYBACK ■ Remote control operation Additional operations AMP + + + AMP/SOURCE/TV SOURCE TV VOL – CH VOL – – ■ To adjust the tone TV A/B/C/D/E TV MUTE TV INPUT MUTE LEVEL SET MENU TITLE MENU NIGHT AUDIO ENTER TEST ON SCREEN RETURN DISPLAY STRAIGHT EFFECT STEREO HALL JAZZ 1 2 3 4 ENTERTAIN MUSIC TV THTR MOVIE 5 6 7 8 THX STANDARD 9 0 Sound field program buttons ROCK EXTD. SUR +10 PROGRAM ENT. Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to AMP, then press one of the sound field program buttons repeatedly to select the desired program. The name of the selected program appears in the front panel display and video monitor. AMP SOURCE DVR/VCR2 VCR 1 CBL/SAT SP A DTV STEREO HALL JAZZ 1 2 3 4 ENTERTAIN MUSIC TV THTR MOVIE 5 6 7 8 THX STANDARD 9 0 DVD MD/TAPE ROCK EXTD. SUR +10 CD–R HiFi DSP JAZZ CLUB Notes ENT. CD TUNER PHONO dB VOLUME L R Program name y Choose a sound field program based on your listening preference, and not on the name of the program. Notes • When you select an input source, this unit automatically selects the last sound field program used with that source. • Sound field programs cannot be selected when the MULTI CH INPUT is selected. • If you increase or decrease the high-frequency or the lowfrequency sound to an extreme level, the tonal quality of the surround speakers may not match that of the front left/right and center speakers. • TONE CONTROL is not effective when THX (page 46) or PURE DIRECT (page 37) is selected, or when MULTI CH INPUT is selected. • TONE CONTROL is not effective for headphones. Use HP TONE CTRL to adjust bass/treble balance for the headphones (page 59). ■ To mute the sound Press MUTE on the remote control. MUTE The MUTE indicator flashes in the front panel display. To resume the audio output, press MUTE again. (or press VOL –/+). The MUTE indicator disappears from the display. y You can adjust the muting level (see page 59). ■ To listen with headphones (“SILENT CINEMA”) “SILENT CINEMA” allows you to enjoy multi-channel music or movie sound, including Dolby Digital and DTS surround, through ordinary headphones. “SILENT CINEMA” activates automatically whenever you connect headphones to the PHONES jack while listening to CINEMA DSP or HiFi DSP sound field programs. When activated, the “SILENT CINEMA” indicator lights up in the front panel display. Notes • This unit will not be set to “SILENT CINEMA” when MULTI CH INPUT is selected as the input source. • “SILENT CINEMA” is not effective when PURE DIRECT or a 2ch stereo program is selected, or in STRAIGHT mode. 35 BASIC OPERATION TV V–AUX You can adjust the bass/treble balance for the front left/right and center channels. Press TONE CONTROL repeatedly on the front panel to select TREBLE or BASS. Select TREBLE, then rotate PROGRAM to the right or left to increase or decrease the highfrequency response. Select BASS, then rotate PROGRAM to the right or left to increase or decrease the low-frequency response. To cancel the tone control, press TONE CONTROL repeatedly to select BYPASS. TONE CONTROL PURE DIRECT PLAYBACK ■ Selecting the MULTI CH INPUT Press MULTI CH INPUT so that “MULTI CH INPUT” appears in the front panel display and video monitor. MULTI CH INPUT MULTI CH IN or Front panel Remote control Note When “MULTI CH INPUT” is shown in the front panel display and/or the video monitor, no other source can be played. To select another input source with INPUT (one of the input selector buttons), press MULTI CH INPUT to turn off “MULTI CH INPUT” from the front panel display and the video monitor. ■ Enjoying multi-channel software in 6.1/7.1 channel surround If you connected one or two surround back speakers, use this feature to enjoy 6.1/7.1-channel playback for multichannel sources using the Dolby Pro Logic IIx, Dolby Digital EX or DTS-ES decoders. Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to AMP, then press EXTD. SUR on the remote control to switch between 5.1and 6.1/7.1 channel playback. EXTD. SUR ENT. To select a decoder, press l / h repeatedly when PLIIxMovie (etc.) is displayed. AUTO (AUTO) When a signal (flag) that can be recognized by the unit is input, the unit selects the optimum decoder for playing back the signal in 6.1/7.1 channels. If the unit cannot recognize the flag or no flag is present in the input signal, it cannot automatically be played in 6.1/ 7.1 channels. 36 Decoders (select with l / h) You can select from the following modes depending on the format of the software you are playing. PLIIxMovie For playing back Dolby Digital or DTS signals in 7.1 channels using the Pro Logic IIx movie decoder. PLIIxMusic For playing back Dolby Digital or DTS signals in 6.1/7.1 channels using the Pro Logic IIx music decoder. EX/ES For playing back Dolby Digital signals in 6.1/7.1 channels using the Dolby Digital EX decoder. DTS signals are played back in 6.1/7.1 channels using the DTS-ES decoder. EX For playing back Dolby Digital or DTS signals in 6.1/7.1 channels using the Dolby Digital EX decoder. OFF (OFF) For playing back Dolby Digital or DTS signals in 5.1 channels. y When SURR B L/R SP is set to “LRGx1” or “SMLx1” (see page 56), the surround back channel will output from the left SURROUND BACK speaker terminals. Notes • Some 6.1-channel compatible discs do not have a signal (flag) which this unit can automatically detect. When playing these kinds of discs with 6.1-channel, select decoders (PLIIxMovie, PLIIx Music, EX/ES or EX) manually. • 6.1-channel playback is not possible even if EXTD. SUR is pressed in the following cases: – When SURR L/R SP or SURR B L/R SP is set to “NONE” (see page 56). – When the source connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jack is being played. – When the source being played does not contain surround L/R channel signals. – When a Dolby Digital KARAOKE source is being played. – When 2ch Stereo or PURE DIRECT is selected. • When the power of this unit is turned off, the input mode will be reset to AUTO. • When the DTS-ES decoder is applied to DTS 96/24 signals, this unit decodes the DTS 96/24 signals using DTS-ES Matrix decoder. • The Pro Logic IIx decoder is not available when SURR B L/R SP is set to “NONE” (see page 56). • “PLIIxMovie” cannot be selected when SURR B L/R SP is set to “LRGx1” or “SMLx1” (see page 56). PLAYBACK ■ Enjoying 2-channel software in surround Signals input from 2-channel sources can also be played back on multiple channels. Press STANDARD on the remote control to select the decoder. STANDARD 0 ■ Listening to high fidelity stereo sound with PURE DIRECT PURE DIRECT bypasses this unit’s decoders and DSP processors as well as shuts down the video circuitry, allowing you to enjoy the highest possible sound fidelity from analog and PCM sources. Press PURE DIRECT to activate pure direct. The button lights up and the front panel display automatically goes out. You can select from the following modes depending on the type of software you are playing and your personal preference. PURE DIRECT PURE DIRECT or PRO LOGIC SUR. STANDARD Standard processing for Dolby Surround sources. PRO LOGIC SUR. ENHANCED CINEMA DSP enhanced processing for Dolby Surround sources Movie* PRO LOGIC IIx Music* Dolby Pro Logic II/IIx processing for music software. PRO LOGIC IIx Game* Dolby Pro Logic II/IIx processing for game software. DTS Neo:6 Cinema DTS processing for movie software. DTS Neo:6 Music DTS processing for music software. * Use the PLII/PLIIx parameter to select the Pro Logic II or Pro Logic IIx decoders (see page 85). Note The Pro Logic IIx decoder is not available when SURR B L/R SP is set to “NONE” (see page 56). Remote control y The front panel display switches on momentarily when an operation is performed. To cancel, press PURE DIRECT again. The indicator around the front panel button goes out and the previous settings are restored. Notes • To avoid unexpected noise, do not play DTS-encoded CDs in this mode. • When a multi-channel signal (Dolby Digital or DTS) is input, this unit automatically switches to the corresponding analog input. (When DTS is selected as an input mode, no sound will be heard.) • No sound will be output from the subwoofer. • TONE CONTROL (page 35) and SET MENU (page 53) settings are not effective. • The following operations are not possible during PURE DIRECT operation: – switching the sound field program – displaying the OSD – adjusting SET MENU parameters – all video functions (video conversion etc.) • PURE DIRECT is automatically cancelled whenever this unit is set to the standby mode. 37 BASIC OPERATION PRO LOGIC IIx Dolby Pro Logic II/IIx processing for movie software. Front panel PLAYBACK ■ Listening to high fidelity stereo sound with Direct Stereo Direct Stereo bypasses this unit’s decoders and DSP processors, allowing you to enjoy high fidelity sound from 2-channel PCM and analog sources. y This operation is recommended for use when high fidelity stereo sound is desired with playback of a video source. Otherwise, PURE DIRECT is recommended for the highest possible sound fidelity (see page 37). ■ Night listening modes The night listening modes are designed to improve listenability at lower volumes or at night. Choose either NIGHT:CINEMA or NIGHT:MUSIC depending on the type of material you are playing. Press NIGHT on the remote control repeatedly to select cinema or music. When night listening is selected, the NIGHT indicator in the front panel display lights up. NIGHT Rotate PROGRAM (or press STEREO repeatedly) to select DIRECT STEREO. The front panel display automatically dims. STEREO PROGRAM or Front panel HALL JAZZ Remote control ROCK 1 2 3 4 ENTERTAIN MUSIC TV THTR MOVIE 5 6 7 8 THX STANDARD 9 0 EXTD. SUR +10 AUDIO ENT. Remote control Direct Stereo Notes • Select NIGHT:CINEMA when watching films to reduce the dynamic range of film soundtracks and make dialog easier to hear at lower volumes. • Select NIGHT:MUSIC when listening to music sources to preserve ease-of-listening for all sounds. • Select OFF if you do not want to use this function. Press l / h to adjust the effect level while NIGHT:CINEMA or NIGHT:MUSIC is displayed. This adjusts the level of compression. • To avoid unexpected noise, do not play DTS-encoded CDs in this mode. • When multi-channel signals (Dolby Digital and DTS) are input, this unit automatically selects an analog signal input. (When DTS is selected as an input mode, no sound will be heard.) • No sound will be output from the subwoofer. • TONE CONTROL (page 35) and SET MENU (page 53) settings are not effective. ENTER Remote control Effect.Lvl:MID • Select “MIN” for minimum compression. • Select “MID” for standard compression. • Select “MAX” for maximum compression. y NIGHT:CINEMA and NIGHT:MUSIC adjustments are stored independently. Notes • You cannot use the night listening modes with PURE DIRECT, MULTI CH INPUT, or when headphones are connected (even though the NIGHT indicator lights up when PURE DIRECT is selected). • The night listening modes may vary in effectiveness depending on the input source and surround sound settings you use. 38 PLAYBACK ■ Downmixing to 2 channels You can enjoy 2-channel stereo playback from multichannel sources. Rotate PROGRAM (or press STEREO on the remote control) to select 2ch Stereo. PROGRAM or Front panel STEREO HALL JAZZ 1 2 3 4 ENTERTAIN MUSIC TV THTR MOVIE 5 6 7 8 THX STANDARD 9 0 ■ Playing video sources in the background You can combine images from a video source with sound from an audio source. For example, you can enjoy listening to classical music while having beautiful scenery from the video source on the video monitor. ROCK Use the input selector buttons to select a video source, then select an audio source. EXTD. SUR +10 ENT. Audio sources Remote control 2ch Stereo PHONO TUNER CD MULTI CH IN V-AUX CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R DTV VCR 1 DVR/VCR2 DVD Video sources Note You can use a subwoofer with this program when “SWFR” or “BOTH” is selected in LFE/BASS OUT. ■ Listening to unprocessed input signals If you want to enjoy an audio source connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks together with a video source, first select the video source and then press MULTI CH INPUT. Press STRAIGHT/EFFECT to select STRAIGHT. STRAIGHT STRAIGHT or EFFECT EFFECT Front panel Remote control Press STRAIGHT/EFFECT again so that “STRAIGHT” disappears from the display when you want to turn the sound effect back on. ■ Virtual CINEMA DSP Virtual CINEMA DSP allows you to enjoy the CINEMA DSP programs without surround speakers. It creates virtual speakers to reproduce a natural sound field. If you set SURR L/R SP to “NONE”, Virtual CINEMA DSP activates automatically whenever you select a CINEMA DSP sound field program. Note Virtual CINEMA DSP will not activate, even when SURR L/R SP is set to “NONE” (see page 56) in the following cases: – When MULTI CH INPUT is selected as the input source. – When headphones are connected to the PHONES jack. 39 BASIC OPERATION In STRAIGHT mode, two channel stereo sources are output from only the front left and right speakers. Multichannel sources are decoded straight into the appropriate channels without any additional effect processing. Note PLAYBACK ■ Displaying information about the input source Selecting input modes You can display the type, format and sampling frequency of the current input signal. This unit comes with a variety of input jacks. Do the following to select the type of input signal you want to use. 1 1 Select the input source. INPUT or PHONO TUNER CD MULTI CH IN V-AUX CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R DTV VCR 1 DVR/VCR2 DVD 2 Front panel 2 Select the input source. Remote control PHONO TUNER CD MULTI CH IN V-AUX CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R DTV VCR 1 DVR/VCR2 DVD Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to AMP, then press STRAIGHT/EFFECT so that “STRAIGHT” appears in the display. Press INPUT MODE to select an input mode. In most cases, use AUTO. AMP STRAIGHT SOURCE then TRANSMIT or Front panel V–AUX DVR/VCR2 POWER POWER TV AV STANDBY POWER A B INPUT MODE SLEEP PHONO TUNER CD MULTI CH IN Remote control VCR 1 CBL/SAT DTV DVD MD/TAPE CD–R SP A DVD AUTO CD TUNER DTS ANALOG * 3 Press k / n to display the following information about the input signal. ENTER PHONO dB VOLUME L R Input mode AUTO Automatically selects input signals in the following order: 1) Digital signals* 2) Analog signals Selects only digital signals encoded in DTS. If no DTS signals are input, no sound is output. Selects only analog signals. If no analog signals are input, no sound is output. If this unit detects a Dolby Digital or DTS signal, the decoder automatically switches to the appropriate sound field program. (Format) in fs rate flg y • You can adjust the default input mode this unit selects when the power is turned on (see page 61). • DTS mode is recommended for playback of a CD or LD encoded in DTS. Note If the digital output data of the player has been processed in any way, you may not be able to perform DTS decoding even if you make a digital connection between this unit and the player. 40 EFFECT TV SYSTEM INPUT MODE Signal format display. When the unit cannot detect a digital signal it automatically switches to analog input. Number of source channels in the input signal. For example, a multi-channel soundtrack with 3 front channels, 2 surround channels and LFE, is displayed as “3/2/LFE”. Sampling frequency. When the unit is unable to detect the sampling frequency “Unknown” appears. Bit rate. When the unit is unable to detect the bit rate “Unknown” appears. Flag data encoded with DTS or Dolby Digital signals that cue this unit to automatically switch decoders. Note The display shows “3/2/LFE” even when you play DTS-ES Discrete 6.1 sources that include 3 surround channels. TUNING TUNING Automatic and manual tuning 4 There are 2 tuning methods; automatic and manual. Automatic tuning is effective when station signals are strong and there is no interference. ■ Automatic tuning Press PRESET/TUNING l / h once to begin automatic tuning. Press h to tune into a higher frequency, or press l to tune into a lower frequency. PRESET/ TUNING PURE DIRECT STANDBY /ON A/B/C/D/E PRESET/ TUNING PRESET /TUNING MEMORY FM/AM MULTI CH INPUT INPUT MODE MAN'L/AUTO FM EDIT PHONES MD/TAPE CD–R CD TU AUTO TUNED PROGRAM AUTO/MAN'L MONO S VIDEO VIDEO TONE CONTROL L AUDIO R STRAIGHT OPTICAL MIC YPAO EFFECT SILENT VIDEO AUX 3 (U.S.A. model) If the signal from the station you want to select is weak, you must tune into it manually. Manually tuning into an FM station will automatically change the reception mode to monaural to increase the signal quality. 1 Select TUNER and the reception band following steps 1 and 2 as described in “Automatic tuning”. 2 Press TUNING MODE (AUTO/MAN’L MONO) so that the AUTO indicator disappears from the front panel display. Rotate INPUT to select TUNER as the input source. BASIC OPERATION 4 32 1 DVD ■ Manual tuning TUNING MODE TUNER B DTV When tuned into a station, the TUNED indicator lights up and the frequency of the received station is shown in the front panel display. VOLUME INPUT SPEAKERS CBL/SAT SP A A~~AM~1530 kHz 1 A VCR 1 INPUT TUNING MODE Front panel AUTO Disappears AUTO/MAN'L MONO 2 Press FM/AM to select the reception band. “FM” or “AM” appears in the front panel display. If a colon (:) appears in the front panel display, this unit is in PRESET mode and tuning is not possible. Press PRESET/TUNING (EDIT) to turn it off. FM/AM or PRESET /TUNING 3 Press TUNING MODE (AUTO/MAN’L MONO) so that the AUTO indicator lights up in the front panel display. TUNING MODE EDIT 3 AUTO Lights up AUTO/MAN'L MONO If a colon (:) appears in the front panel display, this unit is in PRESET mode and tuning is not possible. Press PRESET/TUNING (EDIT) to turn it off. PRESET /TUNING EDIT VCR 1 CBL/SAT SP A DTV DVD MD/TAPE CD–R CD VCR 1 CBL/SAT DTV DVD MD/TAPE CD–R CD TU SP A A~~AM~1440 kHz Press PRESET/TUNING l / h to tune into the desired station manually. Hold down the button to PRESET/ TUNING continue searching. TU AUTO A~~AM~1440 kHz 41 TUNING Notes Presetting stations ■ Automatically presetting FM stations You can use the automatic preset tuning feature to store FM stations. This function enables this unit to automatically tune into FM stations with strong signals, and to store up to 40 (8 stations in 5 groups, A1 through E8) of those stations in order. You can then recall any preset station easily by selecting the preset station number. VOLUME Automatic preset tuning options INPUT PURE DIRECT STANDBY /ON PRESET/ TUNING A/B/C/D/E PRESET /TUNING FM/AM MEMORY TUNING MODE PROGRAM TUNER SPEAKERS A B MULTI CH INPUT INPUT MODE MAN'L/AUTO FM EDIT PHONES S VIDEO AUTO/MAN'L MONO VIDEO TONE CONTROL L AUDIO R STRAIGHT OPTICAL MIC YPAO EFFECT SILENT VIDEO AUX 1 32 1 (U.S.A. model) Press FM/AM to select the FM band. FM/AM 2 Press TUNING MODE (AUTO/MAN’L MONO) so that the AUTO indicator lights up in the front panel display. TUNING MODE AUTO Lights up AUTO/MAN'L MONO 3 Press and hold MEMORY (MAN’L/AUTO FM) for more than 3 seconds. The preset number, the MEMORY and AUTO indicators flash. After about 5 seconds, automatic presetting starts from the frequency currently displayed and proceeds toward the higher frequencies. MEMORY MAN'L/AUTO FM V–AUX DVR/VCR2 VCR 1 CBL/SAT SP A DTV DVD MD/TAPE CD–R CD TUNER AUTO MEMORY A1:FM 87.5 MHz PHONO dB VOLUME L R When automatic preset tuning is completed, the front panel display shows the frequency of the last preset station. 42 • Any stored station data existing under a preset number is cleared when you store a new station under that preset number. • If the number of the received stations does not reach 40 (E8), automatic preset tuning has automatically stopped after searching all stations. • Only FM stations with sufficient signal strength are stored automatically by automatic preset tuning. If the station you want to store is weak in signal strength, tune into it manually and store it by following the procedure in “Manually presetting stations”. You can select the preset number from which this unit will store FM stations and/or begin tuning toward lower frequencies. After pressing MEMORY in step 3: 1 Press A/B/C/D/E, then PRESET/TUNING l / h to select the preset number under which the first station will be stored. Automatic preset tuning will stop when stations have all been stored up to E8. 2 Press PRESET/TUNING (EDIT) to turn off the colon (:) and then press PRESET/TUNING l to begin tuning toward lower frequencies. Memory back-up The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data from being lost even if this unit is set in the standby mode, the power cord is disconnected from the AC outlet, or the power supply is temporarily cut due to power failure. However, if the power is cut for more than one week, the preset stations may be cleared. If so, store the stations again by using the presetting station methods. TUNING ■ Manually presetting stations You can also store up to 40 FM or AM stations (8 stations in 5 groups, A1 through E8) manually. 4 VOLUME INPUT PURE DIRECT Press PRESET/TUNING l / h to select a preset station number (1 through 8) while the MEMORY indicator is flashing. Press h to select a higher preset station number. Press l to select a lower preset station number. STANDBY /ON PRESET/ TUNING PRESET/ TUNING A/B/C/D/E PRESET /TUNING FM/AM MEMORY TUNING MODE PROGRAM TUNER SPEAKERS A B MULTI CH INPUT INPUT MODE MAN'L/AUTO FM EDIT PHONES AUTO/MAN'L MONO S VIDEO VIDEO TONE CONTROL L AUDIO R STRAIGHT OPTICAL MIC YPAO EFFECT SILENT 3 4 VIDEO AUX (U.S.A. model) 2,5 V–AUX DVR/VCR2 VCR 1 CBL/SAT DTV DVD MD/TAPE CD–R SP A 1 C3:AM Tune into a station. See page 41 for tuning instructions. V–AUX DVR/VCR2 VCR 1 CBL/SAT DTV DVD MD/TAPE CD–R CD SP A TUNER TUNED A :AM 630 kHz PHONO 5 dB VOLUME L R 2 Press MEMORY (MAN’L/AUTO FM). The MEMORY indicator flashes for about 5 seconds. V–AUX VCR 1 CBL/SAT DTV C3:AM MAN'L/AUTO FM A/B/C/D/E DVR/VCR2 VCR 1 CBL/SAT DTV SP A C :AM DVD MD/TAPE CD–R CD TUNER MEMORY TUNED 630 kHz dB VOLUME L R DVD MD/TAPE CD–R CD TUNER TUNED 630 kHz PHONO dB VOLUME L R Shows the displayed station has been stored as C3. Press A/B/C/D/E repeatedly to select a preset station group (A through E) while the MEMORY indicator is flashing. The group letter appears. Check that the colon (:) appears in the front panel display. V–AUX DVR/VCR2 SP A MEMORY 3 630 kHz PHONO Press MEMORY (MAN’L/AUTO FM) on the front panel while the MEMORY indicator is flashing. The station band and MEMORY frequency appear in the front MAN'L/AUTO FM panel display with the preset group and number you have selected. MEMORY Flashes TUNER 6 Repeat steps 1 through 5 to store other stations. Notes • Any stored station data existing under a preset number is cleared when you store a new station under that preset number. • The reception mode (stereo or monaural) is stored along with the station frequency. PHONO dB VOLUME L R 43 BASIC OPERATION When tuned into a station, the front panel display shows the frequency of the station received. CD MEMORY TUNED TUNING Selecting preset stations Exchanging preset stations You can tune any desired station simply by selecting the preset station number under which it was stored. You can exchange the assignment of two preset stations with each other. The example below describes the procedure for exchanging preset station “E1” with “A5”. VOLUME INPUT VOLUME PURE DIRECT STANDBY /ON INPUT PURE DIRECT STANDBY /ON A/B/C/D/E PRESET/ TUNING PRESET /TUNING FM/AM MEMORY TUNING MODE PROGRAM TUNER SPEAKERS A B MULTI CH INPUT INPUT MODE MAN'L/AUTO FM EDIT PHONES AUTO/MAN'L MONO S VIDEO VIDEO TONE CONTROL L AUDIO R STRAIGHT OPTICAL MIC YPAO EFFECT PRESET/ TUNING A/B/C/D/E PRESET /TUNING FM/AM TUNING MODE MEMORY PROGRAM TUNER SILENT VIDEO AUX SPEAKERS A B MULTI CH INPUT INPUT MODE MAN'L/AUTO FM EDIT PHONES AUTO/MAN'L MONO S VIDEO VIDEO TONE CONTROL L AUDIO R STRAIGHT OPTICAL MIC YPAO EFFECT SILENT VIDEO AUX (U.S.A. model) 1 2 (U.S.A. model) 1,3 1,3 2,4 2 AMP + + + TV VOL CH VOL SOURCE – – – TV 1 Select preset station “E1” using A/B/C/D/E and PRESET/TUNING l / h. See “Selecting preset stations”. 2 Press and hold PRESET/TUNING (EDIT) for more than 3 seconds. “E1” and the MEMORY indicator flash in the front panel display. A/B/C/D/E TV MUTE TV INPUT MUTE 1 When performing this operation with the remote control, first press TUNER to set the remote to tuner mode. 1 Press A/B/C/D/E to select the preset station group. The preset group letter appears in the front panel display and changes each time you press the button. A/B/C/D/E CR2 VCR 1 CBL/SAT DTV DVD MD/TAPE CD–R SP A CD TUNER MEMORY TUNED E1:FM 87.5 MHz EDIT A/B/C/D/E or TV INPUT Front panel 2 PRESET /TUNING 3 Remote control Press PRESET/TUNING l / h (PRESET +/– on the remote control) to select a preset station number (1 through 8). The preset group and number appear in the front panel display along with the station band, frequency and the TUNED indicator lights up. PRESET PRESET/ TUNING Select preset station “A5” by using A/B/C/D/E and PRESET/TUNING l / h. “A5” and the MEMORY indicator flash in the front panel display. V–AUX DVR/VCR2 VCR 1 CBL/SAT DVD MD/TAPE CD–R CD TUNER MEMORY TUNED A5:FM 90.6 MHz 4 PHONO dB VOLUME L R Press PRESET/TUNING (EDIT) again. The stations stored at the two preset assignments are exchanged. + or DTV SP A PRESET /TUNING CH – EDIT Front panel Remote control V–AUX VCR 1 CBL/SAT SP A DTV DVD MD/TAPE CD–R CD TUNER TUNED E1:FM 87.5 MHz 44 DVR/VCR2 VCR 1 CBL/SAT DTV DVD MD/TAPE CD–R SP A EDIT CD TUNER TUNED E1-A5 PHONO dB VOLUME L R RECORDING RECORDING Recording adjustments and other operations are performed from the recording components. Refer to the operation instructions for those components. 1 2 VOLUME INPUT PURE DIRECT STANDBY /ON PRESET/ TUNING A/B/C/D/E PRESET /TUNING MEMORY FM/AM TUNING MODE RDS MODE /FREQ EON PTY SEEK PROGRAM TUNER SPEAKERS A B MULTI CH INPUT INPUT MODE MAN'L/AUTO FM EDIT PHONES MODE AUTO/MAN'L MONO S VIDEO VIDEO L AUDIO R START TONE CONTROL STRAIGHT OPTICAL MIC YPAO EFFECT SILENT VIDEO AUX (U.S.A. model) SYSTEM 2 POWER TV AV A B STANDBY POWER INPUT MODE SLEEP PHONO TUNER CD MULTI CH IN V-AUX CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R DTV VCR 1 DVR/VCR2 DVD 1 2 Turn on the power of this unit and all connected components. Select the source component you want to record from. INPUT PHONO TUNER CD MULTI CH IN V-AUX CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R DTV VCR 1 DVR/VCR2 DVD or Front panel Remote control 3 Start playback (or select a broadcast station) on the source component. 4 Start recording on the recording component. • When this unit is set in the standby mode, you cannot record between other components connected to this unit. • The setting of TONE CONTROL, VOLUME, SPEAKER LEVEL (page 57) and programs does not affect recorded material. • A source connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks of this unit cannot be recorded. • S-video and composite video signals pass independently through this unit’s video circuits. Therefore, when recording or dubbing video signals, if your video source component is connected to provide only an S-video (or only a composite video) signal, you can record only an S-video (or only a composite video) signal to your VCR. • Digital signals input to the DIGITAL INPUT jacks are not output to the analog AUDIO OUT (L/R) jacks for recording. Likewise, analog signals input to the AUDIO IN (L/R) jacks are not output to the DIGITAL OUTPUT jack. Therefore, if your source component is connected to provide only digital (or analog) signals, you can only record digital (or analog) signals. • A given input source is not output on the same REC OUT channel. (For example, the signal input from VCR 1 IN is not output on VCR 1 OUT.) • Check the copyright laws in your country to record from records, CDs, radio, etc. Recording of copyrighted material may infringe copyright laws. If you playback a video source that uses scrambled or encoded signals to prevent it from being dubbed, the picture itself may be disturbed due to those signals. ■ Special considerations when recording DTS software The DTS signal is a digital bitstream. Attempting to digitally record the DTS bitstream will result in noise being recorded. Therefore, if you want to use this unit to record sources that have DTS signals recorded on them, the following considerations and adjustments need to be made. For DVDs and CDs encoded with DTS, when your player is compatible with the DTS format, follow its operation instruction to make a setting so that the analog signal will be output from the player. y Always do a test recording before you start an actual recording. 45 BASIC OPERATION 1 POWER Notes SOUND FIELD PROGRAM DESCRIPTIONS SOUND FIELD PROGRAM DESCRIPTIONS This unit is equipped with a variety of precise digital decoders that allow you to enjoy multi-channel playback from almost any sound source (stereo or multi-channel). This unit is also equipped with a YAMAHA digital sound field processing (DSP) chip containing several sound field programs which you can use to enhance your playback experience. Most of these sound field programs are precise digital recreations of actual acoustic environments found in famous concert halls, music venues, and movie theaters. y The YAMAHA CINEMA DSP modes are compatible with all Dolby Digital, DTS, and Dolby Surround sources. Set the input mode to AUTO (see page 40) to enable this unit to automatically switch to the appropriate digital decoder according to the input signal. Notes • This unit’s DSP sound field programs are recreations of real-world acoustic environments made from precise measurements taken in actual halls, etc. Thus you may notice variations in the strength of the reflections coming from the front, back, left and right. • Feel free to choose a sound field program based on your listening preference, and not purely on the name of the program itself. For movie/video sources You can select from the following sound fields when playing movie or video sources. The sound fields marked “MULTI” can be used with multi-channel sources, like DVD, digital TV, etc. Those marked “2-CH” can be used with 2-channel (stereo) sources like TV programs, video tapes, etc. Program Features STEREO: 2ch Stereo Downmixes multi-channel sources to 2 (left and right) channels or plays back 2-channel sources as is. MUSIC VIDEO This program lends an enthusiastic atmosphere to the sound, giving you the feeling that you are at an actual jazz or rock concert. ENTERTAINMENT: Game This program adds a deep and spatial feeling to video game sounds. TV THEATER: Mono Movie This program is provided for reproducing monaural video sources (such as old movies). The program produces the optimum reverberation to create sound depth using only the presence sound field. TV THEATER: Variety/Sports Though the presence sound field is relatively narrow, the surround sound field employs the sound environment of a large concert hall. This effect enhances the experience of watching various TV programs such as news, variety shows, music programs or sports programs. MOVIE THEATER: Spectacle CINEMA DSP processing. This program creates the extremely wide sound field of a 70-mm movie theater. It precisely reproduces the source sound in detail, making both the video and the sound field incredibly real. This is ideal for any kind of video source encoded with Dolby Surround, Dolby Digital or DTS (especially large-scale movie productions). MOVIE THEATER: Sci-Fi CINEMA DSP processing. This program clearly reproduces dialog and sound effects in the latest sound form for science fiction films, thus creating a broad and expansive cinematic space amid silence. You can enjoy science fiction films in a virtual-space sound field that includes Dolby Surround, Dolby Digital and DTS-encoded software employing the most advanced techniques. MOVIE THEATER: Adventure CINEMA DSP processing. This program is ideal for precisely reproducing the sound design of the newest 70-mm and multi-channel soundtrack films. The sound field is made to be similar to that of the newest movie theaters, so the reverberations of the sound field itself are restrained as much as possible. MOVIE THEATER: General CINEMA DSP processing. This program is for reproducing sounds from 70-mm and multichannel soundtrack films, and is characterized by soft and extensive sound field. The presence sound field is relatively narrow. It spatially spreads all around and toward the screen, restraining the echo effect of conversations without losing clarity. THX: THX Cinema THX processing for any multi-channel source. 2-channel sources are decoded by the PRO LOGIC, PRO LOGIC II, PRO LOGIC IIx or DTS Neo: 6 decoder before THX processing. 46 Sources MULTI 2-CH SOUND FIELD PROGRAM DESCRIPTIONS Program Features THX: THX Surr. EX THX processing for Dolby Digital and Dolby Digital EX sources. This program is available only when surround back L/R speakers are connected to this unit and when the input source contains surround back channel signals. THX: dts ES + THX THX processing for DTS-ES sources. DOLBY DIGITAL: SUR. STANDARD Standard 5.1 channel processing for Dolby Digital sources. DOLBY DIGITAL: SUR. ENHANCED CINEMA DSP enhanced processing for Dolby Digital sources. q D+PLIIxMovie: SUR. STANDARD Standard 7.1 channel processing for Dolby Digital sources. q D+PLIIxMovie: SUR. ENHANCED CINEMA DSP enhanced 7.1 channel processing for Dolby Digital sources. DOLBY D EX: SUR. STANDARD Standard 6.1 channel processing for Dolby Digital sources. DOLBY D EX: SUR. ENHANCED CINEMA DSP enhanced 6.1 channel processing (Dolby Digital EX) for Dolby Digital sources. DTS: SUR. STANDARD Standard 5.1 channel processing for DTS sources. DTS: SUR. ENHANCED CINEMA DSP enhanced processing for DTS and 96kHz/24-bit DTS sources. DTS 96/24: SUR. STANDARD Standard 5.1 channel processing for 96kHz/24-bit DTS sources. DTS+PLIIx Movie: SUR. STANDARD Standard 7.1 channel processing (Dolby Pro Logic IIx) for DTS sources. DTS+PLIIx Movie: SUR. ENHANCED CINEMA DSP enhanced 7.1 channel processing (Dolby Pro Logic IIx) for DTS sources. DTS+DOLBY EX: SUR. STANDARD Standard 6.1 channel processing (Dolby Digital EX) for DTS sources. DTS+DOLBY EX: SUR. ENHANCED CINEMA DSP enhanced 6.1 channel processing (Dolby Digital EX) for DTS sources. DTS ES Mtrx6.1: SUR. STANDARD Standard 6.1 channel processing (DTS-ES Matrix) for DTS sources. DTS ES Mtrx6.1: SUR. ENHANCED CINEMA DSP enhanced processing (DTS-ES Matrix) for DTS and 96kHz/24-bit DTS sources. DTS ES Disc6.1: SUR. STANDARD Standard 6.1 channel processing (DTS-ES Discrete) for DTS sources. DTS ES Disc6.1: SUR. ENHANCED CINEMA DSP enhanced processing (DTS-ES Discrete) for DTS sources. DTS 96/24 ES: SUR. STANDARD Standard 6.1 channel processing (DTS-ES Matrix) for 96kHz/24-bit DTS sources. Sources MULTI SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS 47 SOUND FIELD PROGRAM DESCRIPTIONS Program Features PRO LOGIC: SUR. STANDARD Standard processing for Dolby Surround sources. PRO LOGIC: SUR. ENHANCED CINEMA DSP enhanced precessing for Dolby Surround sources. PRO LOGIC IIx: PLIIx Movie Dolby Pro Logic IIx processing for movie software.* PRO LOGIC II: PLII Movie Dolby Pro Logic II processing for movie software.* PRO LOGIC IIx: PLIIx Game Dolby Pro Logic IIx processing for game software.* PRO LOGIC II: PLII Game Dolby Pro Logic II processing for game software.* DTS: Neo:6 Cinema DTS processing for movie software. * You can select either Pro Logic IIx or Pro 48 Logic II processing using the PLII/PLIIx parameter on page 85. Sources 2-CH SOUND FIELD PROGRAM DESCRIPTIONS For music sources You can select from the following sound fields when playing music sources, like CD, FM/AM broadcasting, tapes, etc. Program Features CONCERT HALL HiFi DSP processing. A classic shoe-box type concert hall with approximately 1700 seats. Pillars and ornate carvings create extremely complex reflections which produce a very full, rich sound. JAZZ CLUB HiFi DSP processing. This is the sound field at stage front in “The Bottom Line”, a famous New York jazz club. The floor can seat 300 people to the left and right in a sound field offering a real and vibrant sound. ROCK CONCERT HiFi DSP processing. The ideal program for lively, dynamic rock music. The data for this program was recorded at LA’s “hottest” rock venue. The listener’s virtual seat is at the centerleft of the hall. ENTERTAINMENT: Disco HiFi DSP processing. This program recreates the acoustic environment of a lively disco in the heart of a big city. The sound is dense and highly concentrated. It is also characterized by a high-energy, “immediate” sound. q D+PLIIxMusic: SUR. STANDARD Standard Dolby Digital and Dolby Pro Logic IIx processing for music sources. q D+PLIIxMusic: SUR. ENHANCED DSP enhanced Dolby Digital and Dolby Pro Logic IIx processing for music sources. DTS+PLIIx Music: SUR. STANDARD Standard DTS and Dolby Pro Logic IIx processing for music sources. DTS+PLIIx Music: SUR. ENHANCED DSP enhanced DTS and Dolby Pro Logic IIx processing for music sources. STEREO: 2ch Stereo 2 (left and right) channel playback. STEREO: Direct Stereo Use to output stereo sources to only the front left and right speakers without any processing. STEREO: 7ch Stereo Use to increase the output stereo sources (in stereo) from all speakers. This provides a larger sound field and is ideal for background music at parties, etc. PRO LOGIC IIx: PLIIx Music Dolby Pro Logic IIx processing for music software.* PRO LOGIC II: PLII Music Dolby Pro Logic II processing for music software.* DTS: Neo:6 Music DTS processing for music software. Sources MULTI 2-CH MULTI SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS 2-CH * You can select either Pro Logic IIx or Pro Logic II processing using the PLII/PLIIx parameter on page 85. 49 ADVANCED OPERATIONS ADVANCED OPERATIONS Selecting the OSD mode Using the sleep timer You can display this unit’s operating information on a video monitor. If you display the SET MENU and sound field program parameter settings on a monitor, it is much easier to see the available options and parameters than it is by reading this information in the front panel display. 1 Turn on the video monitor connected to this unit. 2 Press ON SCREEN repeatedly to change the OSD mode. The OSD mode changes in the following order: full display, short DISPLAY display, and display off. Use this feature to automatically set this unit in the standby mode after a certain amount of time. The sleep timer is useful when you are going to sleep while this unit is playing or recording a source. The sleep timer also automatically turns off any external components connected to the AC OUTLET(S). ■ Setting the sleep timer TRANSMIT SYSTEM POWER POWER TV AV A B INPUT MODE STANDBY POWER SLEEP PHONO TUNER CD MULTI CH IN V-AUX CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R DTV VCR 1 DVR/VCR2 DVD 2 ON SCREEN SELECT Full display Always shows the sound field program parameter settings as well as the contents of the front panel display. Short display Briefly shows the contents of the front panel display at the bottom of the screen each time you operate this unit. Display off Only operations performed using ON SCREEN are displayed. The OSD is displayed when using SET MENU or the test tone feature, even if the OSD mode is set to “Display off”. P08 1 Select a source and start playback on the source component. 2 Press SLEEP repeatedly to set the amount of time. Each time you press SLEEP, the front panel display changes as shown below. The SLEEP indicator flashes while switching the amount of time for the sleep timer. SLEEP 120 min. SLEEP OFF Sci-Fi .DSPLEVEL;;;;0dB P.INITDLY;;16ms P.ROOMSIZE;;1.0 S.INITDLY;;20ms S.ROOMSIZE;;1.0 V–AUX Short display Notes SLEEP SLEEP 30 min. SLEEP 60 min. VCR 1 CBL/SAT DTV DVD MD/TAPE CD–R CD TUNER PHONO dB VOLUME SLEEP 120min L R The SLEEP indicator lights up in the front panel display, and the display returns to the selected sound field program. V–AUX • The OSD signal is not output to the REC OUT jack, and will not be recorded. • When the component video signals are input, short display is not output to the COMPONENT VIDEO MONITOR OUT jacks. • You can set the OSD to turn on (gray background) or off when a video source is not being reproduced (or the source component is turned off) by using DISPLAY SET (see page 62). 50 SLEEP 90 min. SP A P08MOVIE THEATER Sci-Fi Full display DVR/VCR2 SLEEP DVR/VCR2 VCR 1 CBL/SAT DTV DVD MD/TAPE CD–R CD SP A SLEEP CONCERT HALL TUNER PHONO dB VOLUME L R ADVANCED OPERATIONS ■ Canceling the sleep timer Press SLEEP repeatedly until “SLEEP OFF” appears in the front panel display. After a few seconds, “SLEEP OFF” disappears, and the SLEEP indicator goes off. SLEEP y The sleep timer setting can also be canceled by pressing STANDBY on the remote control (or STANDBY/ON on the front panel) to set this unit to the standby mode. Manually adjusting speaker levels You can adjust the output level of each speaker while listening to a music source. This is also possible when playing sources through the MULTI CH INPUT jacks. Please note that this operation will override the level adjustments made in “AUTO SETUP” (page 26), “Speaker level” (page 57) and “Using the test tone” (page 52). AMP + + + TV VOL CH VOL SOURCE – – – TV 1 A/B/C/D/E TV MUTE 2 TV INPUT MUTE LEVEL SET MENU TITLE MENU PURE DIRECT NIGHT AUDIO ENTER TEST ON SCREEN RETURN DISPLAY STRAIGHT EFFECT 3 1 Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to AMP. 2 Press LEVEL repeatedly to select the speaker you want to adjust. FRONT L CENTER FRONT R SUR.R SUR.B.R SUR.B.L SUR.L SWFR PRES Front left speaker level Center speaker level Front right speaker level Surround right speaker level Surround back right speaker level Surround back left speaker level Surround left speaker level Subwoofer level Presence speaker level y Once you press LEVEL, you can also select the speaker by pressing k / n. ADVANCED OPERATION 3 Press l / h to adjust the speaker output level. The control range is from +10 dB to –10 dB. 51 ADVANCED OPERATIONS Using the test tone 6 You can use the test tone feature to manually balance your speaker levels. Please note that this operation will override the level adjustments made in “AUTO SETUP” (page 26), “Speaker level” (page 57) and “Manually adjusting speaker levels” (page 51). Use the test tone to set speaker levels so that the volume from each speaker is identical when heard from your listening position. TEST TEST TEST TEST + + CH VOL SOURCE – – – TV 1 A/B/C/D/E TV MUTE MUTE LEVEL SET MENU TITLE MENU 4,7 2,5,8 TV INPUT PURE DIRECT NIGHT AUDIO ENTER TEST ON SCREEN RETURN DISPLAY STRAIGHT 3,6 EFFECT 1 Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to AMP. 2 Press TEST. The unit outputs a test tone. 3 Press k / n repeatedly to select the speaker you want to adjust. TEST TEST TEST TEST TEST TEST TEST TEST LEFT CENTER RIGHT SUR. R SUR. B. R SUR. B. L SUR. L SUBWOOFER Front left speaker Center speaker Front right speaker Surround right speaker Surround back right speaker Surround back left speaker Surround left speaker Subwoofer 4 Press l / h to adjust speaker volumes. 5 Press TEST when you have completed your adjustment. If PRESENCE SP in SPEAKER SET is set to “YES” (see page 56), proceed to step 6 to adjust the presence speaker volumes. If PRESENCE SP in SPEAKER SET is set to “NONE”, the test tone stops. 52 Front speakers Presence speakers Presence left speaker Presence right speaker Press l / h to adjust the presence speaker volumes. 8 Press TEST when you have completed your adjustment. The test tone stops. AMP + TV VOL FRONT PRESENCE PRES L PRES R 7 Note You cannot activate the test tone if headphones are connected to the PHONES jack. Remove the headphones from the PHONES jack. Press k / n repeatedly to select the speaker(s) you want to output the test tone. y • If you use a handheld SPL meter, hold at arms length and point upwards so that the meter is in the listening position. With the meter set to the 70 dB scale and to C SLOW, calibrate each speaker to 75 dB. • Before outputting the test tone, we recommend that you set the output volume to 0 dB. SET MENU SET MENU You can use the following parameters in SET MENU to adjust a variety of system settings and customize the way this unit operates. Change the initial settings (indicated in bold under each parameter) to reflect the needs of your listening environment. ■ AUTO SETUP Use to specify which speaker parameters auto setup will adjust, and to activate the auto setup procedure (see page 26). ■ MANUAL SETUP Use to manually adjust speaker and system settings. BASIC MENU Use to quickly setup basic system parameters (see page 31). SOUND MENU Use to manually adjust any speaker setting, alter the quality and tone of the sound output by the system or compensate for video signal processing delays when using LCD monitors or projectors. y Most of the parameters described in SOUND MENU are set automatically when you run auto setup (see page 26). You can use SOUND MENU to make further adjustments, but we recommend running auto setup first. Item Features Page Selects the size of each speaker, the speakers for low-frequency signal output, and the cross over frequency. 55 B)SPEAKER LEVEL Adjusts the output level of each speaker. 57 C)SP DISTANCE Adjusts the delay time of each speaker. 57 D)GRAPHIC EQ Adjusts the tonal quality of each speaker. 58 E)LFE LEVEL Adjusts the output level of the LFE channel for Dolby Digital or DTS signals. 58 F)DYNAMIC RANGE Adjusts the dynamic range for Dolby Digital or DTS signals. 58 G)LOW FRQ. TEST Matches the subwoofer level with the level of the other speakers. 59 H)HP TONE CTRL Adjusts the tonal balance of the headphones. 59 I)AUDIO SET Customizes overall audio settings of this unit. 59 Selects priority to either surround back or presence speakers when both sets of speakers are J)PR/SBch SELECT connected to this unit. ADVANCED OPERATION A)SPEAKER SET 60 INPUT MENU Use to reassign digital input/outputs, select the input mode, rename your inputs, or specify external input settings. Item Features Page A)I/O ASSIGNMENT Assigns jacks according to the component to be used. 60 B)INPUT MODE Selects the initial input mode of the source. 61 C)INPUT RENAME Changes the name of the inputs. 61 Sets the direction of the signals input into the center, subwoofer and surround channels for the D)MULTI CH INPUT source component connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks. 62 53 SET MENU OPTION MENU Use to adjust the optional system settings. Item * Features Page A)DISPLAY SET Adjusts the settings of the OSD and the front panel display and converts video signals. 62 B)MEMORY GUARD Locks sound field program parameters and other SET MENU settings. 63 C)PARAM. INI Initializes the parameters of a group of sound field programs. 63 D)SP IMP. SET Selects the impedance of your speakers. 63 E)ZONE SET Specifies the location of the speakers connected to the SPEAKERS B terminals. 64 F)ZONE2 SET* Selects the Zone 2 mode. 64 G)ZONE3 SET* Selects the Zone 3 mode. 64 (U.S.A., Canada, U.K., Europe and Australia models only) Using SET MENU 1 Use the remote control to access and adjust each parameter. Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to AMP, then press SET MENU to enter the SET MENU. AMP SET MENU SOURCE then AMP + + + TV VOL CH VOL SOURCE – – – TV 1 A/B/C/D/E TV MUTE TV INPUT MUTE LEVEL SET MENU TITLE MENU 2,3,4 PURE DIRECT NIGHT AUDIO ENTER TEST ON SCREEN RETURN DISPLAY STRAIGHT 2,3,5 2 EFFECT STEREO 5 HALL JAZZ MENU TV ROCK 1 2 3 4 ENTERTAIN MUSIC TV THTR MOVIE 5 6 7 8 THX SURROUND 9 0 Press k / n to select AUTO SETUP or MANUAL SETUP, then press l / h to enter the selected category. SUR. BACK +10 ENT. y You can change SET MENU parameters while the unit is reproducing sound. then ENTER ENTER Note You cannot change some SET MENU parameters while the unit is in either cinema or music night listening mode. SET MENU . ;AUTO SETUP ;MANUAL SETUP p p / : Up/Down < / > : Enter Note If k is pressed when AUTO SETUP is selected, or if n is pressed when MANUAL SETUP is selected, SET MENU will be closed. Press SET MENU to open SET MENU again. 3 54 Press k / n repeatedly to select a menu, then press l / h to enter the menu item. Repeat this operation to navigate to and enter the setup mode of the item you want to adjust. SET MENU 4 5 Press l / h repeatedly to change the setting of the item you want to adjust. To exit, press k / n repeatedly until the menu disappears or just press one of the sound field program group buttons. Using SOUND MENU Use to manually adjust any speaker setting or compensate for video signal processing delays when using LCD monitors or projectors. Most of the SOUND parameters are set automatically when you run auto setup (see page 26). 2 SOUND MENU 1/3 ENTER or HALL JAZZ ROCK 1 2 3 4 ENTERTAIN MUSIC TY THTR MOVIE 5 6 7 THX STANDARD 9 0 8 EXTD. SUR +10 ENT. Memory back-up The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data from being lost even if this unit is in the standby mode. However, if the power cord is disconnected from the AC outlet, or the power supply is cut for more than one week, the stored data will be lost. If so, adjust the items again. . A)SPEAKERSET B)SPEAKERLEVEL C)SPDISTANCE D)GRAPHICEQ /p : Up/Down < / > : Enter p STEREO ■ Speaker set A)SPEAKER SET Use to manually adjust any speaker setting. y If you are not satisfied with the bass sounds from your speakers, you can change these settings according to your preference. Note Set any THX speakers to SMALL (SML). Center speaker CENTER SP Choices: NONE, SML, LRG CENTER SP NONE [SML LRG Front speakers FRONT SP Choices: SMALL, LARGE FRONT SP [SMALL LARGE • Select “SMALL” if you have small front speakers. The unit directs the low-frequency signals of the front channel to the speakers selected in LFE/BASS OUT. • Select “LARGE” if you have large front speakers. The unit directs the entire range of the front left and right channel signals to the front left and right speakers. 55 ADVANCED OPERATION • Select “NONE” if you do not have a center speaker. The unit directs all of the center channel signal to the front left and right speakers. • Select “SML” if you have a small center speaker. The unit directs the low-frequency signals of the center channel to the speakers selected in LFE/BASS OUT. • Select “LRG” if you have a large center speaker. The unit directs the entire range of the center channel signal to the center speaker. SET MENU Surround left/right speakers Choices: NONE, SML, LRG SURR L/R SP SURR L/R SP NONE [SML LRG • Select “NONE” if you do not have surround speakers. This will set the unit to the Virtual CINEMA DSP mode (see page 39) and automatically set the surround back speaker setting (SURR B L/R SP) to “NONE”. • Select “SML” if you have small surround left and right speakers. The low-frequency signals of the surround channel are directed to the speakers selected in LFE/ BASS OUT. • Select “LRG” if you have large surround left and right speakers or if a rear subwoofer is connected to the surround speakers. The entire range of the surround channel signal is directed to the surround left and right speakers. Surround back speakers SURR B L/R SP Choices: LRGx2, LRGx1, SMLx2, SMLx1, NONE SURR B L/R SP SMLx1 [SMLx2 • Select “LRGx2” if you have 2 large surround back speakers. The unit directs the entire range of the surround back channel signal to the surround back speakers. • Select “LRGx1” if you have a large surround back speaker. The unit directs the entire range of the surround back channel signal to the left surround back speaker. • Select “SMLx2” if you have 2 small surround back speakers. The low-frequency signals of the surround back channels are directed to the speakers selected in LFE/BASS OUT. • Select “SMLx1” if you have a small surround back speaker. The low-frequency signals of the surround back channel are directed to the speakers selected in LFE/BASS OUT, and the rest of the frequency signals are directed to the left surround back speaker. • Select “NONE” if you do not have a surround back speaker. The unit directs all of the surround back channel signal to the surround left and right speakers. Note If you select “LRGx1” or “SMLx1”, connect the speaker to the left SURROUND BACK speaker terminals. 56 Presence speakers Choices: NONE, YES PRESENCE SP PRESENCE SP [NONE YES • Select “YES” if you have presence speakers. • Select “NONE” if you do not have presence speakers. LFE/bass out LFE/BASS OUT Low-frequency (bass) signals can be directed to the subwoofer and/or the front left and right speakers according to the characteristics of your system. This setting also determines the routing of the LFE (lowfrequency effect) signals found in Dolby Digital or DTS sources. Choices: SWFR (subwoofer), FRNT, BOTH THX recommendation: SWFR LFE/BASS OUT [SWFR FRNT BOTH • Select “SWFR” if you connect a subwoofer. LFE and low-frequency signals from other channels are directed to the subwoofer according to the speaker settings. • Select “FRNT” if you do not use a subwoofer. LFE and low frequency signals from other channels are directed to the front speakers according to the speaker settings (even if you have previously set front speakers to SML). • Select “BOTH” if you connect a subwoofer and you want to output low-frequency signals from front channels to both the front speakers and subwoofer. LFE and low-frequency signals from other channels are also directed to the subwoofer according to the speaker settings. Use this function to reinforce lowfrequency signals using the subwoofer when playing back sources such as CDs. SET MENU Cross over CROSS OVER Use this feature to select a cross-over (cut-off) frequency for all low-frequency signals. All frequencies below the selected frequency will be sent to the subwoofer. Choices: 40Hz, 60Hz, 80Hz (THX), 90Hz, 100Hz, 110Hz, 120Hz, 160Hz, 200Hz THX recommendation: “80Hz” ■ Speaker distance C)SP DISTANCE Use this feature to manually input the distance of each speaker and adjust the delay applied to respective channel. Ideally, each speaker should be the same distance from the main listening position. However, this is not possible in most home situations. Thus, a certain amount of delay must be applied to the sound from each speaker so that all sounds arrive at the listening position at the same time. CROSS OVER C)SP DISTANCE . UNIT;;;;;;meters FRONTL;;;;3.00m FRONTR;;;;3.00m CENTER;;;;;3.00m FREQ;;;80Hz(THX) p /p : Up/Down < / > : Adjust ■ Speaker level B)SPEAKER LEVEL Use these settings to manually balance the speaker levels between the front left (or surround left) speaker and each speaker selected in SPEAKER SET (page 55). Choices: –10.0 dB to +10.0 dB B)SPEAKER LEVEL . FR C SL + * SB will be displayed if you selected only one surround back speaker in SURR B L/R SP (page 56). y If you use a handheld SPL meter, hold at arms length and point upwards so that the meter is in the listening position. With the meter set to the 70 dB scale and to C SLOW, calibrate each speaker to 75 dB. Speaker distances Choices: 0.3 to 24.00 m (1 to 80 ft) • FRONT L adjusts the distance of the front left speaker. Initial setting: 3.0 m (10.0 ft) • FRONT R adjusts the distance of the front right speaker. Initial setting: 3.0 m (10.0 ft) • CENTER adjusts the distance of the center speaker. Initial setting: 3.0 m (10.0 ft) • SURR L adjusts the distance of the surround left speaker. Initial setting: 3.0 m (10.0 ft) • SURR R adjusts the distance of the surround right speaker. Initial setting: 3.0 m (10.0 ft) • SB L* adjusts the distance of the surround back left speaker. Initial setting: 2.10 m (7.0 ft) • SB R* adjusts the distance of the surround back right speaker. Initial setting: 2.10 m (7.0 ft) • SWFR adjusts the distance of the subwoofer. Initial setting: 3.0 m (10.0 ft) • PRES L adjusts the distance of the presence left speaker. Initial setting: 3.0 m (10.0 ft) • PRES R adjusts the distance of the presence right speaker. Initial setting: 3.0 m (10.0 ft) * “SURR B” will be displayed if you selected only one surround back speaker in SURR B L/R SP (page 56). 57 ADVANCED OPERATION • FR adjusts the balance of the front left and front right speakers. • C adjusts the balance of the front left and center speakers. • SL adjusts the balance of the front left and surround left speakers. • SBL* adjusts the balance of the surround left and surround back left speakers. • SBR* adjusts the balance of the surround left and surround back right speakers. • SR adjusts the balance of the surround left and surround right speakers. • SWFR adjusts the balance of the front left speaker and subwoofer. • PRES adjusts the balance of the front and presence speakers. Unit UNIT Choices: meters (m), feet (ft) Initial setting: U.S.A. and Canada models: feet (ft) Other models: meters (m) • Select “meters” to input speaker distances in meters. • Select “feet” to input speaker distances in feet. SET MENU ■ Graphic equalizer D)GRAPHIC EQ Use this feature to select parametric (PEQ) or graphic equalizer (GEQ). Equalizer select EQ SELECT Choices: PEQ, GEQ D) GRAPHIC EQ . EQ SELECT....PEQ p p / : Up/Down </> : Select ■ Dynamic range F)DYNAMIC RANGE Use to select the amount of dynamic range compression to be applied to your speakers or headphones. This setting is effective only when the unit is decoding Dolby Digital and DTS signals. Choices: MIN (minimum), STD (standard), MAX (maximum) F)DYNAMIC RANGE . SP: MIN STD[MAX HP: MIN STD[MAX / : Up/Down </> : Select p p • Select “PEQ” to use the equalizer adjusted in auto setup. • Select “GEQ” to adjust the built-in 7-band graphic equalizer (see “Equalizer” below). Equalizer Use to match the tonal quality of the center, surround L/R and surround back L/R speakers with that of the front L/R speakers. Choices: –6 to +6 (dB) D)GRAPHIC EQ . CHANNEL;;FRONT L + 63Hz 0dB 160Hz 0dB 400Hz 0dB 1kHz 0dB 2.5kHz 0dB 6.3kHz 0dB 16kHz 0dB You can adjust 7 frequency bands: 63Hz, 160Hz, 400Hz, 1kHz, 2.5kHz, 6.3kHz, 16kHz ■ Low-frequency effect level E)LFE LEVEL Use to adjust the output level of the LFE (low-frequency effect) channel according to the capacity of your subwoofer or headphones. The LFE channel carries lowfrequency special effects which are only added to certain scenes. This setting is effective only when this unit decodes Dolby Digital or DTS signals. Choices: –20 to 0 (dB) E)LFE LEVEL . SPEAKER;;;;;;0dB HEADPHONE;;;;0dB p p / : Up/Down </> : Adjust Speaker SPEAKER Select to adjust the speaker LFE level. Headphone HEADPHONE Select to adjust the headphone LFE level. Note Depending on the settings of LFE LEVEL, some signals may not be output from the SUBWOOFER PRE OUT jack. 58 Speaker SP Select to adjust the speaker compression. Headphone HP Select to adjust the headphone compression. • Select “MIN” if you regularly listen at low volume levels. • Select “STD” for general use. • Select “MAX” to preserve the greatest amount of dynamic range. SET MENU ■ Low frequency test G)LOW FRQ. TEST ■ Headphone tone control H)HP TONE CTRL Use this feature to adjust the output level of the subwoofer so it matches your other speakers. Use to adjust the amount of bass and treble output to your headphones. Choices: –6 to +6 (dB) G)LOW FRQ.TEST H)HP TONE CTRL . TEST TONE;;;;OFF OUTPUT;FRONT L/R FRQ;;;;;;;;;88Hz . BASS TRBL + 0dB / : Up/Down </> : Adjust 1 Press n to go to OUTPUT and press l / h to select the speaker you want to compare with the subwoofer. Choices: FRONT L/R, FRONT L, CENTER, FRONT R, SUR.R, SBR*, SBL*, SUR.L, SWFR, PRESENCE * “SB” will be displayed if you selected only one surround back speaker in SURR B L/R SP (page 56). Press n to go to FRQ and press l / h to select the frequency you want to use. Choices: 35 to 250 (Hz), WIDE Initial: 88 Hz 4 Adjust the volume of the subwoofer with the controls on the subwoofer so it matches that of the speaker you are comparing it to. y You can use the test tone not only for adjusting the subwoofer level, but also for checking the low-frequency characteristics of your listening room. Low-frequency sounds are especially affected by the listener’s position, speaker placement, subwoofer polarity and other conditions. ■ Audio set I)AUDIO SET Use to customize this unit’s overall audio settings. I)AUDIO SET . AUDIO MUTE;;MUTE AUDIO DELAY;;0ms DIALG.LIFT;;;OFF / : Exit </> : Select Mute MUTE Use to adjust how much the mute function reduces the output volume. Choices: MUTE, –20 dB • Select “MUTE” to completely halt all output of sound. • Select “–20 dB” to reduce the current volume by 20 dB. Audio Delay AUDIO DELAY Use to delay the sound output and synchronize it with the video image. This may be necessary when using certain LCD monitors or projectors. Choices: 0 to 240 (ms) Dialog lift DIALG.LIFT Use to turn on/off the DIALG.LIFT parameter (see page 85). This parameter adjusts the height of the front and center channel sounds (dialog, vocals, etc.) by assigning some of the front and center channel elements to the presence speakers. Choices: ON, OFF • Select “ON” to turn on DIALG.LIFT effect. • Select “OFF” to turn off DIALG.LIFT effect. Note DIALG.LIFT appears only when PRESENCE is set to “YES” (see page 31). 59 ADVANCED OPERATION 3 • Use BASS to adjust the headphone bass level. • Use TRBL to adjust the headphone treble level. p p 2 Press l / h to set TEST TONE to ON, and adjust the volume with VOL –/+ so you can hear the tone. Do not turn up the volume too high. If no test tone is heard, turn down the volume, set this unit in the standby mode and make sure all the necessary connections are correct. The tone generator produces a narrow-band noise centered on a specified frequency by the band pass filter, as well as a wide-band noise. SET MENU ■ Presence/surround back channel select J)PR/SBch SELECT Surround back and presence speakers do not output sound simultaneously. You can select to prioritize either speaker set when playing sources that contain surround back channel signals using CINEMA DSP sound field programs. Choices: PRch, SBch Using INPUT MENU Use to reassign digital input/outputs, select the input mode or rename your inputs. 3 INPUT MENU . A)I/OASSIGNMENT B)INPUTMODE C)INPUTRENAME D)MULTI CH INPUT p /p : Up/Down < / > : Enter J)PR/SBch SELECT PRch [SBch p p / : Exit </> : Select • Select “PRch” to use presence speakers even when surround back channel signals are input. The signals for the surround back channel will be output from surround speakers. • Select “SBch” to use surround back speakers when a surround back channel signal is detected in a CINEMA DSP program. Presence channel signals will be output from front speakers. ■ Input/output assignment A)I/O ASSIGNMENT You can assign jacks according to the component to be used if this unit’s initial settings do not correspond to your needs. Change the following parameters to reassign the respective jacks and effectively connect more components. Once the inputs have been reassigned, you can select the corresponding component by using INPUT on the front panel or the input selector buttons on the remote control. Note The default settings are displayed with parentheses on the OSD. CMPNT-V IN for COMPONENT VIDEO INPUT jacks [A] and [B] Choices: DVD, V-AUX, DVR/VCR 2, VCR 1, CBL/SAT, DTV, CD-R CMPNT-V INPUT . [A];;;;; DVD ( DVD ) [B];;;;; DTV (DTV) OPTICAL OUT for OPTICAL OUTPUT jacks (1) and (2) Choices: MD/TAPE, CD-R, CD, PHONO, V-AUX, DVR/VCR 2, VCR 1, CBL/SAT, DTV, DVD OPTICAL OUT . (1);;;;;MD/TAPE (MD/TAPE ) (2);;;;; CD-R (CD-R) 60 SET MENU OPTICAL IN for OPTICAL INPUT jacks (3), (4), (5) and (6) Choices: CD, PHONO, DVR/VCR 2, VCR 1, CBL/SAT, DTV, DVD, MD/TAPE, CD-R ■ Input rename C)INPUT RENAME Use this feature to change the name of the inputs on the OSD and front panel display. C)INPUT RENAME OPTICAL IN DVD . (3);;;;; CD ( CD ) (4);;;;; DVD (DVD ) (5);;;;; DTV (DTV ) COAXIAL IN . (7);;;;; CD ( CD ) (8);;;;; DVD (DVD ) (9);;;;;DVR/VCR2 (DVR/VCR2) </> : Position / : Character 1 Press an input selector button to select the input you want to change the name of. 2 Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to AMP. 3 Press l / h to place the _ (under-bar) under the space or the character you want to edit. 4 Press k / n to select the character you want to use and l / h to move to the next one. • You can use up to 8 characters for each input. • Press n to change the character in the following order, or press k to go in the reverse order: A to Z, space, 0 to 9, space, a to z, space, #, *, +, etc. 5 Repeat steps 1 through 4 to rename each input. 6 Press h repeatedly to exit from INPUT RENAME. Notes • You cannot select a specific item more than once for the same type of jack. • When you connect a component to both the COAXIAL and OPTICAL jacks, priority is given to the input signals from the COAXIAL jack. ■ Input mode B)INPUT MODE Use this feature to designate the input mode for sources connected to the DIGITAL INPUT jacks when you turn on this unit (see page 40 for details about the input mode). Choices: AUTO, LAST DVD p p COAXIAL IN for COAXIAL INPUT jacks (7), (8) and (9) Choices: CD, PHONO, V-AUX, DVR/VCR 2, VCR 1, CBL/SAT, DTV, DVD, MD/TAPE, CD-R -> ADVANCED OPERATION B)INPUT MODE [AUTO LAST p p / : Exit </> : Select • Select “AUTO” to allow this unit to automatically detect the type of input signal and select the appropriate input mode. • Select “LAST” to set this unit to automatically select the last input mode used for that source. Note The last setting for the EXTD. SUR button will not be recalled, even when “LAST” is selected. 61 SET MENU ■ Multi Channel Input D)MULTI CH INPUT Use this feature to set the direction of the signals input into the center, subwoofer and surround channels when a source component is connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks. If you are inputting 8-channel signals from an external decoder, use this feature to select jacks for the additional front signals. Using OPTION MENU 4 OPTION MENU1/2 . A)DISPLAYSET B)MEMORYGUARD C)PARAM.INI D)SP IMP. SET p /p : Up/Down < / > : Enter D)MULTI CH INPUT ■ Display set A)DISPLAY SET A)DISPLAY SET p p . [6CH 8CH (FRNT/SB-> FRNT) CENTER ->CENTER SWFR -> SWFR SL/SR -> SL/SR ( ---> SB ) </> : Select / : Up/Down Note If ZONE2 AMP (page 64) is set to “ON”, no sound is output from the surround back speakers even if you select “8ch”. In this case select “6ch” and set the output setting of the external decoder to 6 channels. FRNT If you selected “8ch”, you can select analog audio jacks to which front signals from an external decoder will be input. Choices: DVD, DTV, CBL/SAT, VCR 1, DVR/VCR 2, MD/TAPE, CD-R, CD, V-AUX CENTER Use to select where the signals input to the CENTER jack will be output. Choices: CENTER, FRONT • Select “CENTER” to output the signals from the center speaker. • Select “FRONT” to output the signals from the front left and right speakers. SWFR Use to select where the signals input to the SUBWOOFER jack will be output. Choices: SWFR, FRONT • Select “SWFR” to output the signals from the subwoofer. • Select “FRONT” to output the signals from the front left and right speakers. SL/SR Use to select where the signals input to the SURROUND jacks will be output. Choices: SL/SR, FRONT • Select “SL/SR” to output the signals from the surround speakers. • Select “FRONT” to output the signals from the front left and right speakers. 62 / : Up/Down </> : Select p p 6ch/8ch This setting is used to select the number of channels input from an external decoder. Choices: 6ch, 8ch . DIMMER;;;;;;;;;0 OSD SHIFT;;;;;;0 GRAY BACK;;;AUTO V CONV.;;;;;;;ON CMPNT OSD;;;;;ON Dimmer DIMMER Use to adjust the brightness of the front panel display. Choices: –4 to 0 OSD shift OSD SHIFT Use to adjust the vertical position of the OSD. Choices: +5 (downward) to –5 (upward) • Press h to lower the position of the OSD. • Press l to raise the position of the OSD. Gray back GRAY BACK Selecting “AUTO” for the on-screen display setting displays a gray background when there’s no video signal input. If “OFF” is selected, information can only be displayed on the screen when a video signal is being input. Choices: AUTO, OFF Note If GRAY BACK is set to “OFF”, information cannot be displayed when only component signals are being input. SET MENU Video conversion V CONV. Use this feature to turn on/off conversion of composite (VIDEO) signals to both S-video and component signals. This allows you to output converted video signals from the S VIDEO or COMPONENT VIDEO jacks when no S-video or component signals are input. This feature also converts S-video signals to component signals when no component signals are input. Choices: ON, OFF • Select “OFF” not to convert any signals. • Select “ON” to convert composite signals to S-video and component signals, and to convert S-video signals to component signals. ■ Parameter initialization C)PARAM. INI Use this feature to initialize the parameters for each sound field program within a sound field program group. When you initialize a sound field program group, all of the parameter values within that group revert to their initial settings. Press the corresponding numeric button for the sound field program that you want to initialize. An asterisk (*) next to a program number means that the parameter values have been changed from their initial settings. C)PARAM. INI Notes • Converted video signals are only output to the MONITOR OUT jacks. When recording you must make the same type of video connections (composite or S-video) between each component. • When converting composite video or S-video signals from a VCR to component video signals, the picture quality may suffer depending on your VCR. Component OSD CMPNT OSD Use this feature to turn on/off OSD output to the COMPONENT VIDEO MONITOR OUT jacks when using SET MENU, the test tone or the parameter functions. Choices: ON, OFF • Select “ON” to output the OSD signals from COMPONENT VIDEO MONITOR OUT jacks. • Select “OFF” if you do not want to output the OSD signals from COMPONENT VIDEO MONITOR OUT jacks. Note 1 2 3 *4 *5 6 7 8 9 *0 Notes • You cannot automatically revert to the previous parameter settings once you initialize a sound field program group. • You cannot separately initialize individual sound field programs. • You cannot initialize any program groups when MEMORY GUARD is set to ON. ■ Speaker impedance setting D)SP IMP.SET Use to select the impedance of your speakers. Choices: 6ohms, 8ohms D)SP IMP.SET Minimum 8ohms SET MENU functions even when “OFF” is selected. / : Exit </> : Select p p ■ Memory guard B)MEMORY GUARD ADVANCED OPERATION Use this feature to prevent accidental changes to DSP program parameter values and other system settings. Choices: OFF, ON B)MEMORY GUARD [OFF ON p p / : Exit </> : Select Select “ON” to protect: • DSP program parameters • All SET MENU items • All speaker levels • The on-screen display (OSD) mode Note When MEMORY GUARD is set to “ON”, you cannot use the test tone or select any other SET MENU items. 63 SET MENU ■ Zone set E)ZONE SET E)ZONE SET SP B;;;;;;MAIN p p / : Exit </> : Main Notes • If you select “ZONE B” and connect headphones to the PHONES jack on the unit, the sound is output from both headphones and SPEAKERS B. • When a DSP program is selected, the unit automatically enters the Virtual CINEMA DSP mode. ■ Zone 2 set F)ZONE2 SET (U.S.A., Canada, U.K., Europe and Australia models only) F)ZONE2 SET OUTPUT VOL;;VAR. ZONE2 AMP....OFF p p / : Up/Down </> : Select Output volume OUTPUT VOL Use to select how the volume control will operate with regard to the ZONE 2 OUTPUT jacks. Choices: VAR., FIX • Select “VAR.” to adjust the ZONE 2 OUTPUT volume simultaneously with VOL –/+ on the remote control. • Select “FIX” to fix the ZONE 2 OUTPUT volume level to a standard line level. 64 ■ Zone 3 set G)ZONE3 SET (U.S.A., Canada, U.K., Europe and Australia models only) G)ZONE3 SET OUTPUT VOL;;VAR. / : Exit </> : Select p p Speakers B SP B Use to specify the location of speakers connected the SPEAKERS B terminals. Choices: MAIN, ZONE B • Select “MAIN” to turn on/off SPEAKERS A and B when the speakers connected to the SPEAKERS B terminals are set in the main room. • Select “ZONE B” if the speakers connected to the SPEAKERS B terminals are set in another room. If SPEAKERS A is turned OFF and SPEAKERS B is turned ON, all the speakers including the subwoofer in the main room are muted and the unit outputs sound from SPEAKERS B only. Zone 2 amplifier ZONE2 AMP Use to select how the ZONE 2 speakers will be amplified. Choices: ON, OFF • Select “OFF” if you do not use Zone 2 speakers or if you connect your Zone 2 speakers through an external amplifier connected to this unit’s ZONE 2 OUTPUT jacks. • Select “ON” to use this unit’s internal amplifier if you connect your Zone 2 speakers directly to this unit’s PRESENCE/ZONE 2 speaker terminals. Output volume OUTPUT VOL Use to select how the volume control will operate with regard to the ZONE 3 OUT jacks. Choices: VAR., FIX • Select “VAR.” to adjust the ZONE 3 OUT volume simultaneously with VOL –/+ on the remote control. • Select “FIX” to fix the ZONE 3 OUT volume level to a standard line level. REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES In addition to controlling this unit, the remote control can also operate other audio and video components made by YAMAHA and other manufacturers. To control these other components, you must set up the remote control with the appropriate remote control codes. This remote control also has a Learn feature which allows the remote to acquire functions from other remote controls equipped with an infrared remote control transmitter. Control area ■ Controlling this unit ■ Controlling other components The shaded areas below can be used to control this unit after setting AMP/SOURCE/TV to AMP to activate the AMP mode. The shaded areas below can be used to control other components. Each button has a different function depending on the selected components. Select the component you want to control by pressing an input selector button or SELECT k/n. The name of the selected component appears in the display window. SYSTEM POWER POWER TV AV STANDBY POWER A B INPUT MODE SLEEP PHONO TUNER CD MULTI CH IN V-AUX CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R DTV VCR 1 DVR/VCR2 DVD Display window SELECT PRESET AMP/SOURCE/ TV Set to AMP to operate this unit. Set to SOURCE to operate the component selected with an input selector button. Set to TV to operate the television. AMP + + + TV VOL CH VOL – – – SOURCE TV A/B/C/D/E TV MUTE TV INPUT MUTE LEVEL SET MENU TITLE MENU PURE DIRECT NIGHT ON SCREEN RETURN DISPLAY EFFECT HALL JAZZ ROCK 1 2 3 4 ENTERTAIN MUSIC TV THTR MOVIE 6 7 STANDARD 9 0 FREQ/RDS EON B POWER INPUT MODE SLEEP POWER POWER PHONO TUNER V-AUX CBL/SAT MD/TAPE TVCD CD-R DTV VCR 1 DVR/VCR2 DVD MULTI AV CH IN SELECT PRESET AMP + + + TV VOL CH VOL SOURCE – – – A/B/C/D/E TV MUTE TV INPUT TV PRESET + + MUTE TV VOL LEVEL SET MENU TITLE MENU – CH PURE DIRECT – TV MUTE Display window ENTER TVNIGHT INPUT AUDIO LEVEL TITLE CLEAR RE–NAME SET MENU MENU TEST ON SCREEN RETURN DISPLAY STRAIGHT NIGHT EFFECT ENTER STEREO HALL 1 2 Component control area You can control up to 14 different components by setting appropriate remote control codes (see page 76). ENTERTAIN JAZZ ROCK 3 4 TEST ENT. MODE PTY SEEK START LEARN A STANDBY A/B/C/D/E EXTD. SUR +10 DISC SKIP MACRO AV 8 REC ON POWER TV RETURN TV THTR MUSIC 5 6 THX SURROUND 9 0 MOVIE 7 1 +10 ENTERTAIN EON REC HALL SUR. BACK 2 MUSIC 5 6 THX STANDARD 9 0 MODE PTY SEEK START FREQ/RDS ON MACRO LEARN JAZZ ROCK 3 4 TV THTR MOVIE ENT. DISC SKIP OFF DISPLAY 8 STEREO FREQ/RDS AUDIO ON SCREEN ADVANCED OPERATION THX SYSTEM POWER STRAIGHT STEREO OFF A/B buttons and the input selector buttons switch the function of the component control area below. * Use the A/B buttons to control other components regardless of whether they are connected to this unit. Factory setting: A...LD player B...Tape deck SELECT k/n switches control to another component without changing the input source on this unit. AUDIO ENTER TEST 5 The buttons inside the dotted lines control this unit in any mode (SYSTEM POWER, STANDBY, SLEEP, INPUT MODE, VOLUME +/–, MUTE, PURE DIRECT and STRAIGHT/ EFFECT). CLEAR CHP/INDEX EON 7 8 EXTD. SUR +10 ENT. MODE PTY SEEK START RE–NAME REC DISC SKIP English 65 REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES ■ Controlling optional components (OPTN area) OPTN is an additional component control area that can be programmed with remote control functions independently from any input source. This area is useful for programming commands that are to be used only as a part of a macro function or for components that do not have a valid remote control code. To select the OPTN control area, press n repeatedly until OPTN appears in the display window. Setting remote control codes You can control other components by setting the appropriate remote control codes. Codes can be set up for each input area. The following table shows the default component (Library: component category) and the remote control code for each input area. Remote Control Code Default Settings Notes • You cannot set a remote control code for this area. See page 68 to program buttons operated within this component control area. • The OPTN area cannot be used when AMP1Z or NO is selected in the amplifier library (see page 67). * Input area Library (Component category) Default YAMAHA code* A LD 2200 B TAPE 2700, (2701) PHONO TV – TUNER TUNER 2600, (0203, 1203, 1358, 2601) CD CD 2300, (2301) MULTI CH INPUT DVD 2102, (0517, 0566, 0572, 2100, 2101) V-AUX VCR – CBL/SAT CABLE – MD/TAPE MD 2500, (2501, 2502) CD-R CD-R 2400 DTV TV – VCR 1 VCR – DVR/VCR2 DVR 2807 DVD DVD 2102, (0517, 0566, 0572, 2100, 2101) Additional YAMAHA codes available are given in parentheses. Note You may not be able to operate your YAMAHA component even if a YAMAHA remote control code is preset as listed above. In this case, try setting another YAMAHA remote control code. 1 Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to SOURCE. AMP SOURCE TV 66 REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES 2 Press an input selector button to select the source component you want to set up. A B INPUT MODE SLEEP PHONO TUNER CD MULTI CH IN V-AUX CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R DTV VCR 1 DVR/VCR2 DVD 4 Note “0000” appears in the display window if no code has been set. 5 3 Press ENTER. The four-digit code set for the selected component appears in the display window. Press and hold LEARN for about 3 seconds using a ballpoint pen or similar object. The library name (ex. “L:DVD”) and the selected component name (ex. “DVD”) appear alternately in the display window. Press the numeric buttons to enter the fourdigit remote control code for the component you want to use. For a complete list of available remote control codes, refer to “LIST OF REMOTE CONTROL CODES” at the end of this manual. STEREO LEARN 6 y If you want to setup for another component, press the input selector button or SELECT k/n to select the component. Notes ROCK 3 4 TY THTR MOVIE 7 5 6 THX STANDARD 9 0 8 EXTD. SUR +10 ENT. Press ENTER to set the number. “OK” appears in the display window if setting was successful. “NG” appears in the display window if the setting was unsuccessful. In this case, start over from step 3. If you continuously want to set up another code for another component, press the input selector button or SELECT k/n to select the component, then repeat steps 4 through 6. 7 Press LEARN again to exit from the setup mode. LEARN ADVANCED OPERATION * JAZZ 2 MUSIC y • Be sure to press and hold LEARN for at least 3 seconds, otherwise the learning process will start. • If you do not complete each of the following steps within 30 seconds, the setting mode will be automatically canceled. In this case, press LEARN again. If you want to change a library (component category), press l / h. You can set a different type of component. Library choices: L:DVD, L:DVR, L:LD, L:CD, L:CDR, L:MD, L:TAP (tape), L:TUN (tuner), L:AMP*, L:TV, L:CAB (cable), L:SAT (satellite), L:VCR HALL 1 ENTERTAIN The amplifier library (L:AMP) code is preset to “AMP1” (2000) in order to operate this unit. However, you can switch by entering one of the following five codes if necessary. AMP1 AMP1Z NO Function Code To operate this unit. 2000 To operate ZONE 2 or ZONE 3 features. (U.S.A., Canada, U.K., Europe and Australia models only) 2001 To operate other manufacturers’ receivers / amplifiers using this unit’s remote control 2004 67 REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES 8 Press one of the buttons shaded below to see if you can control your component. If you can, the remote control code is correct. TRANSMIT SYSTEM POWER POWER TV AV STANDBY POWER A B INPUT MODE SLEEP PHONO TUNER CD MULTI CH IN V-AUX CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R DTV VCR 1 DVR/VCR2 DVD THX STANDARD 9 0 FREQ/RDS EON EXTD. SUR +10 ENT. MODE PTY SEEK START REC DISC SKIP OFF ON MACRO LEARN CLEAR RE–NAME y If the manufacturer of your component has more than one code, try each of them until you find the correct one. Programming codes from other remote controls (Learn) Use the Learn feature if you want to program functions not included in the basic operations covered by remote control codes, or an appropriate remote control code is not available. You can program any of the buttons available in the component control area (see page 65). The buttons can be programmed independently for each component. Note This remote control transmits infrared beams. If the other remote control also uses infrared beams, this remote control can learn most of its functions. However, you may not be able to program some special signals or extremely long transmissions. (Refer to the operating instructions for the other remote control.) Notes • “ERROR” appears in the display window if you press a button not indicated in the respective step, or when you press more than one button simultaneously. • The supplied remote control does not contain all possible codes for commercially available audio and video components (including YAMAHA components). If operation is not possible with any of the remote control codes, program the new remote control function using the Learn feature (see “Programming codes from other remote controls (Learn)”) or use the remote control supplied with the component. • Function programmed using the learn feature take priority over remote control code functions. 1 Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to SOURCE. AMP SOURCE TV 2 3 Press an input selector button to select a source component. A B INPUT MODE SLEEP PHONO TUNER CD MULTI CH IN V-AUX CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R DTV VCR 1 DVR/VCR2 DVD Place this remote control about 5 to 10 cm (2 to 4 in) apart from the other remote control on a flat surface so that their infrared transmitters are aimed at each other. MULTI CH IN SLEEP SYSTEM AV CD INPUT MODE TRANSMIT B DVD CD-R POWER TV TUNER MD/TAPE STANDBY A DVR/VCR2 POWER PHONO VCR 1 CBL/SAT POWER DTV V-AUX SELECT 5 to 10 cm (2 to 4 in) 68 REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES 4 Press LEARN using a ballpoint pen or similar object. “LEARN” and the selected component name (ex. “DVD”) appear alternately in the display window. 7 Press LEARN again to exit the learning mode. LEARN Notes LEARN Notes • Do not press and hold LEARN. If you hold it down for more than 3 seconds, the remote enters the remote control code setting mode. • If you do not complete each of the following steps within 30 seconds, the learning mode will be automatically canceled. In this case, press LEARN again. 5 Press the button for which you want to program the new function. “LEARN” appears in the display window. STANDBY MULTI CH IN SLEEP POWER TRANSMIT CD INPUT MODE SYSTEM B AV TUNER CD-R POWER A MD/TAPE TV PHONO CBL/SAT POWER V-AUX SELECT TV AMP SOURCE DVD + DVR/VCR2 – VOL VCR 1 + PURE DIRECT AUDIO NIGHT STRAIGHT DTV – CH PRESET – MUTE MENU SET MENU DISPLAY ON SCREEN + TV INPUT A/B/C/D/E ENTER TV VOL TV MUTE TITLE LEVEL TEST RETURN 6 • “ERROR” appears in the display window if you press a button not indicated in the respective step, or when you press more than one button simultaneously. • This remote control can learn approximately 200 functions. However, depending on the signals learned, “FULL” may appear in the display before you program 200 functions. In this case, clear unnecessary programmed functions to make room for further learning. • Learning may not be possible in the following cases: – When the batteries in the remote control for this unit or other components are weak. – When the distance between the two remote controls is too great or too small. – When the remote control infrared windows are not facing each other at the appropriate angle. – When the remote control is exposed to direct sunlight. – When the function to be programmed is continuous or uncommon. STANDBY MULTI CH IN SLEEP POWER TRANSMIT CD INPUT MODE SYSTEM B DVD CD-R AV TUNER MD/TAPE POWER A DVR/VCR2 TV PHONO VCR 1 CBL/SAT POWER DTV SELECT V-AUX ADVANCED OPERATION Press and hold the button you want to program on the other remote control until “OK” appears in the display window. “NG” appears in the display window if learning was unsuccessful. In this case, start over from step 5. y • If you want to program another function, repeat steps 5 and 6. • If you continuously want to program another function for another component, press the input selector button or SELECT k/n to select the component, then repeat steps 3 through 6. 69 REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES Changing source names in the display window 5 Press l / h to move the cursor to the next position. You can change the name that appears in the display window on the remote control if you want to use a different name than the factory preset. This is useful when you have set the input selector to control a different component. 1 Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to AMP or SOURCE. ENTER 6 AMP SOURCE TV Press ENTER to set the new name. “OK” appears in the display window if renaming was successful. “NG” appears in the display window if renaming was unsuccessful. In this case, start over from step 4. y 2 Press an input selector button to select the source component you want to rename. The selected component name appears in the display window. A B INPUT MODE SLEEP PHONO TUNER CD MULTI CH IN V-AUX CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R DTV VCR 1 DVR/VCR2 DVD If you continuously want to rename another component, press the input selector button or SELECT k/n to select the component, then repeat steps 4 through 6. 7 Press RE-NAME again to exit the renaming mode. RE-NAME Note 3 Press RE-NAME using a ballpoint pen or similar object. RE-NAME Note If you do not complete each of the following steps within 30 seconds, the renaming mode will be automatically canceled. In this case, press RE-NAME again. 4 Press k / n to select and enter a character. Pressing n changes the character as follows: A to Z, 1 to 9, 0, + (plus), – (hyphen), ; (semicolon), / (slash), and space. (Pressing k changes the characters in reverse order.) ENTER 70 “ERROR” appears in the display window if you press a button not indicated in the respective step, or when you press more than one button simultaneously. REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES Using the Macro feature The Macro feature makes it possible to perform a series of operations with the press of a single button. For example, when you want to play a CD, normally you would turn on the components, select the CD input, and press the play button to start playback. The Macro feature lets you perform all of these operations simply by pressing the CD macro button. The buttons listed as macro buttons below are factory set with macro programs. You can also program your own macros (see page 72). Press a macro button CD To automatically transmit these signals in order SYSTEM POWER CD Macro buttons First Second Third STANDBY STANDBY — — (CD area) SYSTEM SYSTEM POWER POWER — — — — — — — — A B PHONO PHONO TUNER TUNER CD CD MULTI CH IN MULTI CH IN — V-AUX V-AUX — CBL/SAT — CBL/SAT — (*3) — (CD area) (*2) SYSTEM POWER MD/TAPE MD/TAPE (MD/TAPE area) (*2) (*1) CD-R DTV DTV VCR 1 DVR/VCR2 DVD VCR 1 DVR/VCR2 DVD ADVANCED OPERATION CD-R (CD-R area) (*2) — (VCR 1 area) (*2) (DVR/VCR 2 area) (*2) (DVD area) (*2) *1 You can turn on some components (including YAMAHA components) connected to this unit by connecting them to the AC OUTLET(S) on the rear panel of this unit. (Power control may not be synchronized with this unit depending on the component. For details, refer to the operating instructions for the connected component.) *2 Playback can be started for any YAMAHA remote control-compatible MD recorder, CD player, CD recorder, DVD player, or DVD recorder. When using macros to operate other components, you will need to program the play button on the control area of that component (see page 68) or set a remote control code (see page 66). *3 When TUNER is selected as the input source, this unit plays the last station received before the unit was set in the standby mode. 71 REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES ■ Macro operations ■ Programming macro operations Macro buttons TRANSMIT SYSTEM POWER POWER TV AV A B STANDBY POWER INPUT MODE SLEEP FREQ/RDS EON MODE PTY SEEK START REC PHONO TUNER CD MULTI CH IN V-AUX CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R DTV VCR 1 DVR/VCR2 DVD DISC SKIP OFF ON MACRO LEARN CLEAR RE–NAME You can program your own macros and use the macro feature to transmit several remote control commands in sequence at the press of a button. Be sure to set up remote control codes or perform learning operations before programming the macro. We do not recommend programming continuous operations such as volume control in a macro. Notes MACRO ON/OFF 1 Set MACRO ON/OFF to ON. 2 Press a macro button. MACRO • The default macro is not cleared when a new macro is programmed for a button. The default macro can be used again when the programmed macro is cleared. • It is not possible to add a new signal (macro step) to the default macro. Programming a macro changes all macro contents. 1 Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to AMP or SOURCE. Notes • When you have finished using the Macro feature, set MACRO ON/OFF to OFF. • While the remote is carrying out a Macro program, it will not accept any other button’s function until the macro operation is complete (the transmission indicator stops flashing). • Continue to aim the remote control at the component the macro is operating until the macro operation is complete. AMP SOURCE TV 2 Press MACRO using a ballpoint pen or similar object. “MCR ?” appears in the display window. MACRO Note If you do not complete each of the following steps within 30 seconds, the macro programming mode will be automatically canceled. In this case, press MACRO again. 3 Press the macro button you want to use to operate the macro. The macro button name (ex. “M:DVD”) and the selected component name (ex. “DVD”) appear alternately in the display window. A B INPUT MODE SLEEP PHONO TUNER CD MULTI CH IN V-AUX CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R DTV VCR 1 DVR/VCR2 DVD Note “AGAIN” appears in the display window if you press a button other than a macro button. 72 REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES 4 Press the buttons for the functions you want to include in the macro operation in sequence. You can set up to 10 steps (10 functions). After you have set 10 steps, “FULL” appears and the remote control automatically exits the macro mode. Clearing function sets You can clear all changes made in each function set, such as learned functions, renamed source names and setup remote control codes. 1 Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to AMP or SOURCE. AMP SYSTEM POWER POWER TV AV A B PHONO TUNER V-AUX DTV STANDBY 2 POWER MCR 2: AV POWER INPUT MODE SLEEP CD MULTI CH IN CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R VCR 1 DVR/VCR2 DVD SOURCE TV 2 MCR 1: DVD 1 FREQ/RDS EON Press CLEAR by using a ballpoint pen or similar object. “CLEAR” appears in the display window. MODE PTY SEEK START CLEAR REC 3 DISC SKIP OFF ON MACRO LEARN CLEAR MCR 3: h RE–NAME Note If you do not complete each of the following steps within 30 seconds, the clearing mode will be automatically canceled. In this case, press CLEAR again. Indicates the number of macro steps entered 3 L:DVD Note 5 Press MACRO again when the operation sequence you want to program is complete. Note “ERROR” appears in the display window if you press a button not indicated in the respective step, or if you press more than one button simultaneously. Memory back-up If the remote control is without batteries for more than 2 minutes, or if exhausted batteries remain in the remote control, the contents of the memory may be cleared. If the memory is cleared, insert new batteries, set up the remote control code(s) and program any acquired functions that may have been cleared. 4 Press and hold CLEAR again for about 3 seconds. “WAIT” appears in the display window. If clearing was successful, “C:OK” appears in the display window. CLEAR y Once you have cleared a learned function for a button, the button reverts to the factory setting (or to the manufacturer setting, if you have set remote control codes). Note “L:ALL” and “FCTRY” may take about 30 seconds to complete. 73 ADVANCED OPERATION (L: name of a component) Clears all learned functions in the respective component control area. Press an input selector button to select the component. L:AMP Clears all learned functions for this unit’s control area. L:ALL Clears all learned functions. M:ALL Clears all programmed macros RNAME Clears all renamed source names. FCTRY Clears all remote functions and returns the remote to the factory settings. Flashes alternately so you can set the next step To change the selected source component, press SELECT k/n. Pressing the input selector buttons will program a macro step, whereas SELECT k/n only changes the selected component and corresponding component control area. Press k / n to select the clear mode. REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES 5 Press CLEAR to exit from the clearing mode. CLEAR Notes • “C:NG” appears in the display window if clearing was unsuccessful. In this case, start over from step 3. • “ERROR” appears in the display window if you press a button not indicated in the respective step, or if you press more than one button simultaneously. Clearing individual functions ■ Clearing a learned function You can clear the function learned for a certain button in each control area. 1 Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to SOURCE. AMP SOURCE TV 2 3 Press an input selector button to select the source component containing the function you want to clear. The selected component name appears in the display window. A B INPUT MODE SLEEP PHONO TUNER CD MULTI CH IN V-AUX CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R DTV VCR 1 DVR/VCR2 DVD Press LEARN using a ballpoint pen or similar object. “LEARN” and the selected component name (ex. “DVD”) appear alternately in the display window. LEARN Notes • Do not press and hold LEARN. If you hold it down for more than 3 seconds, the remote control enters the remote control code setting mode. • If you do not complete each of the following steps within 30 seconds, the learning mode will be automatically canceled. In this case, press LEARN again. 74 REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES ■ Clearing a macro function 4 Press and hold CLEAR using a ballpoint pen or similar object, then press the button you want to clear for about 3 seconds. “C:OK” appears in the display window if clearing was successful. DTV VCR 1 DVR/VCR2 You can clear the function programmed for a certain macro button. 1 Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to AMP or SOURCE. AMP DVD SOURCE TV REC DISC SKIP OFF ON MACRO LEARN CLEAR RE–NAME 2 Press MACRO using a ballpoint pen or similar object. “MCR ?” appears in the display window. y MACRO • If you continuously want to clear another function, repeat step 4. • Once you clear a learned function, the button reverts to the factory setting (or to the manufacturer setting if you have set remote control codes). 5 Press CLEAR to exit the clearing mode. The remote control returns to the learning mode. 6 Press LEARN again to exit. Note If you do not complete each of the following steps within 30 seconds, the macro programming mode will be automatically canceled. In this case, press MACRO again. 3 Notes • “C:NG” appears in the display window if clearing was unsuccessful. In this case, start over from step 4. • “ERROR” appears in the display window if you press a button not indicated in the respective step, or if you press more than one button simultaneously. Press and hold CLEAR using a ballpoint pen or similar object, then press the macro button you want to clear for about 3 seconds. “C:OK” appears in the display window if clearing was successful. DTV VCR 1 DVR/VCR2 DVD REC DISC SKIP OFF ON MACRO LEARN CLEAR RE–NAME • If you continuously want to clear another function, repeat step 3. • Once you clear a programmed function, the button reverts to the factory setting (or to the manufacturer setting if you have set remote control codes). 4 Press CLEAR to exit the clearing mode. The remote control returns to the macro programming mode. 5 Press MACRO again to exit. Notes • “C:NG” appears in the display window if clearing was unsuccessful. In this case, start over from step 3. • “ERROR” appears in the display window if you press a button not indicated in the respective step, or if you press more than one button simultaneously. 75 ADVANCED OPERATION y REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES Controlling each component Once you set the appropriate remote control codes, you can use this remote to control your other components. Note that some buttons may not correctly operate the selected component. Use the input selector buttons to select the component you want to operate. The remote control automatically switches to the appropriate control mode for that component. 1 2 SOURCE TRANSMIT POWER TV AV STANDBY CH VOL – – – POWER TV A/B/C/D/E TV MUTE A B INPUT MODE SLEEP PHONO TUNER CD MULTI CH IN V-AUX CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R DTV VCR 1 DVR/VCR2 DVD 7 8 + + TV VOL CH VOL – – – SOURCE 9 TV MUTE LEVEL SET MENU TITLE MENU PURE DIRECT NIGHT AUDIO ENTER TEST ON SCREEN RETURN DISPLAY STRAIGHT EFFECT STEREO HALL JAZZ ROCK 1 2 3 4 ENTERTAIN MUSIC TV THTR 5 6 7 THX STANDARD 9 0 FREQ/RDS EON AMP + TV INPUT 6 SELECT PRESET 3 TV VOL SYSTEM POWER 0 A MOVIE 8 EXTD. SUR +10 ENT. B MODE PTY SEEK START REC A/B/C/D/E TV MUTE 4 TV INPUT MUTE LEVEL SET MENU TITLE MENU DISC SKIP PURE DIRECT 5 OFF ON MACRO LEARN CLEAR RE–NAME NIGHT AUDIO ENTER 1 2 3 7 8 9 0 A B *1 *2 *3 *4 ON SCREEN RETURN DISPLAY STRAIGHT DVD player/ VCR DVD recorder Cable TV/ TV Satellite tuner LD player CD player MD recorder/ CD recorder Tape deck Tuner AV POWER Power *1 Power *1 Power *1 VCR power *3 Power *1 Power *1 Power *1 Power *1 Power *1 TV POWER TV power *2 TV power *2 TV power *2 Power *1 TV power *2 TV power *2 TV power *2 TV power *2 TV power *2 TV VOL + TV volume + *2 TV volume + *2 TV volume + *2 Volume + TV volume + *2 TV volume + *2 TV volume + *2 TV volume + *2 TV volume + *2 TV VOL – TV volume – *2 TV volume – *2 TV volume – *2 Volume – TV volume – *2 TV volume – *2 TV volume – *2 TV volume – *2 TV volume – *2 CH + TV channel + *2 Channel + Channel + Channel + TV channel + *2 TV channel + *2 TV channel + *2 TV channel + *2 PRESET + CH – TV channel – *2 Channel – Channel – Channel – TV channel – *2 TV channel – *2 TV channel – *2 TV channel – *2 PRESET – TV INPUT/ A/B/C/D/E TV input *2 TV input *2 TV input *2 Input TV input *2 TV input *2 TV input *2 Direction A/B A/B/C/D/E *2 *2 *2 Mute *2 *2 *2 TV MUTE 4 5 6 TEST TV mute TV mute TV mute TV mute TV mute TV mute TV mute *2 TITLE MENU Menu Menu Menu ENTER Menu enter Menu select Menu select k Menu up Menu up Menu up n Menu down Menu down Menu down l Menu left Menu left Menu left h Menu right Menu right Menu right RETURN Return Return Return Return 1-9, 0, +10 Numeric buttons Numeric buttons Numeric buttons Numeric buttons Numeric buttons Numeric buttons Numeric buttons ll Search backward Search backward VCR search backward *3 VCR search backward *3 Search backward Search backward Search backward hh Search forward Search forward VCR search backward *3 VCR search backward *3 Search forward Search forward Search forward Search forward EON *4 b Skip backward Chapter/Skip backward a Skip forward Chapter/Skip forward REC/ DISC SKIP Disc skip (player) Rec (recorder) Rec VCR rec *3 VCR rec *3 s Stop Stop VCR stop *3 VCR stop *3 Stop Stop Stop Stop e Pause Pause VCR pause *3 VCR pause *3 Pause Pause Pause Pause Play VCR play *3 VCR play *3 Play Play Play Play Display Display Index Index h Play Audio DISPLAY Display ENTER Title/Index Title TV mute Title AUDIO Title *2 Title Preset stations (1-8) Search backward FREQ *4 Skip backward Direction back PTY MODE *4 Skip forward Skip forward Direction forward PTY START *4 Disc skip Rec Rec Skip backward Audio Enter Display Display Enter/recall Enter/ Chapter/Time numeric button Display This button functions only when the original remote control of the component has a POWER button. These buttons can operate your TV without switching the input if the remote control code is set in DTV or PHONO. When the remote control code for your TV is set up in both the DTV and PHONO areas, priority is given to the signal in the DTV area. These buttons can operate your VCR without switching the input to VCR 1 if the remote control code is set in VCR 1. These buttons function for U.K. and Europe models only. 76 ZONE 2/ZONE 3 (U.S.A., CANADA, U.K., EUROPE AND AUSTRALIA MODELS ONLY) ZONE 2/ZONE 3 (U.S.A., CANADA, U.K., EUROPE AND AUSTRALIA MODELS ONLY) This unit allows you to configure a multi-room audio system. The Zone 2 and Zone 3 features enable you to set this unit to reproduce separate input sources in the main room, second room (Zone 2) and third room (Zone 3). You can control this unit from the second or third room using the supplied remote control. Only analog signals are sent to the second and third rooms. Any source you want to listen to in the second or third room must be connected using the analog (AUDIO L/R) input jacks on this unit. Zone 2/Zone 3 connections You need the following additional equipment to use the multi-room functions of this unit: • An infrared signal receiver in the second and/or third room. • An infrared emitter in the main room. This emitter transmits the infrared signals from the remote control in the second and/or third room to the main room (to a CD player or DVD player, for example). • An amplifier and speakers for the second and/or third room. y • Since there are many possible ways to connect and use this unit in a multi-room configuration, we recommend that you consult with your nearest authorized YAMAHA dealer or service center for the Zone 2/Zone 3 connections that best meet your requirements. • Some YAMAHA models are able to connect directly to the CONTROL OUT jack on this unit. If you own these products, you may not need to use an infrared emitter. Up to six YAMAHA components can be connected as shown. IN OUT IN OUT CONTROL OUT This unit ■ System configuration and connection example Using external amplifiers To use an external amplifier in Zone 2, set ZONE2 AMP to “OFF” in SET MENU. ZONE 3 AUDIO OUT ZONE 2 AUDIO OUT ADVANCED OPERATION SP OUT Amplifier Amplifier Remote control Remote control Infrared signal receiver Infrared signal receiver MONITOR OUT CD player (or other component) This unit MAIN SYSTEM AUDIO IN ZONE 2 ZONE 3 Infrared emitter Main room REMOTE OUT Second room Third room ZONE 2 REMOTE IN ZONE 3 REMOTE IN Notes 77 English • When not using the main room, turn down the volume of this unit in the main room. Adjust the Zone 2/Zone 3 volume by using the amplifier in the second/third room. • To avoid unexpected noise, DO NOT USE the Zone 2/Zone 3 feature with CDs encoded in DTS. 01EN06_Advns_RXV1500U.fm Page 78 Wednesday, March 9, 2005 7:20 PM ZONE 2/ZONE 3 (U.S.A., CANADA, U.K., EUROPE AND AUSTRALIA MODELS ONLY) Using this unit’s internal amplifier To use this unit’s internal amplifier, set ZONE2 AMP to ON in SET MENU (see page 64). R L + – PRESENCE/ ZONE 2 Second room This unit Remote controlling Zone 2/Zone 3 The supplied remote control can be used to control Zone 2/Zone 3. You can even select the input source and control components located in the main room directly from the second/third room regardless of the listening condition in the main room. ■ To control Zone 2/Zone 3 1 Press SELECT k repeatedly to display “ZONE 2” or “ZONE 3” in the display window. SELECT ■ To enable Zone mode on the remote control You will be able to switch the remote control mode from one room to another, and use the input selector, STANDBY, SYSTEM POWER, MUTE and VOLUME +/ – to control the selected room. or 1 Repeat steps 1 through 3 of the procedure in “Setting remote control codes” on page 66. 2 Press SYSTEM POWER to turn Zone 2 or Zone 3 power on. 2 Press l / h to select “L:AMP”. 3 Press an input selector button to select the input source you want to listen to in the second/third room. The display window shows “2: name of selected input” or “3: name of selected input” if the remote control is in the Zone 2/Zone 3 mode. ENTER A 3 Press ENTER. “2000” appears in the display window. 4 Enter the code number “2001”. 5 Press ENTER to set the number. “OK” appears in the display window if setting was successful. 6 Press LEARN to complete the Zone setup. The remote control will be able to operate this unit from Zone 2 or Zone 3. LEARN 78 B INPUT MODE SLEEP PHONO TUNER CD MULTI CH IN V-AUX CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R DTV VCR 1 DVR/VCR2 DVD Note Signals input to V-AUX and PHONO jacks cannot be sent to Zone 2/Zone 3. ZONE 2/ZONE 3 (U.S.A., CANADA, U.K., EUROPE AND AUSTRALIA MODELS ONLY) ■ Turning this unit to either on or standby 4 You can control the unit from Zone 2 or Zone 3 by using the input selector, STANDBY, SYSTEM POWER, MUTE and VOLUME +/– buttons. SYSTEM POWER POWER STANDBY POWER TV AV A B INPUT MODE SLEEP PHONO TUNER CD MULTI CH IN SELECT AMP V-AUX CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R DTV VCR 1 DVR/VCR2 DVD + + + TV VOL CH VOL SOURCE – – – TV * A/B/C/D/E TV MUTE TV INPUT MUTE LEVEL SET MENU TITLE MENU SYSTEM POWER and STANDBY work differently depending on the selected mode that appears on the display window. • When normal, Zone 2 or Zone 3 mode is selected, you can turn the main unit, Zone 2 or Zone 3 to on/standby individually. • When System mode is selected, or when “AMP1” is selected as the amplifier library (L:AMP) code, you can turn the main unit, Zone 2 and Zone 3 to on/ standby simultaneously. PURE DIRECT LCD display * 5 VOLUME +/– can be used only when OUTPUT VOL is set to VAR. in SET MENU (see page 64). Normal mode* Name of component Press SELECT k/n to exit from the Zone 2/ Zone 3 mode. Notes • The source in Zone 2 and the source available for recording are always the same. • “ZONE2” or “ZONE3” will appear in the display window only when k is pressed, and “SYSTM” only when n is pressed. Turns the main unit on/standby Zone 2 mode “ZONE2” or “2:name of component” Turns Zone 2 to on/ standby Zone 3 mode “ZONE3” or “3:name of component” Turns Zone 3 to on/ standby System mode “SYSTM” * SYSTEM POWER/ STANDBY Turns everything (the main unit, Zone 2, Zone 3) on/standby “MAIN” appears for a few seconds when SYSTEM POWER or STANDBY is pressed. ■ Special considerations for DTS software The DTS signal is a digital bitstream. If you attempt to send the DTS signal to the second/third room you will only hear digital noise (that may damage your speakers). Thus, the following considerations and adjustments need to be made when playing DTS encoded discs. For CDs encoded in DTS To avoid unexpected noise, DO NOT USE the Zone 2/ Zone 3 feature with CDs encoded in DTS. 79 ADVANCED OPERATION For DVDs encoded with DTS Only 2 channel analog audio signals may be sent to the second/third room. Use the disc menu to set the DVD player’s mixed 2channel left and right audio outputs to the PCM or Dolby Digital soundtrack. EDITING SOUND FIELD PARAMETERS EDITING SOUND FIELD PARAMETERS What is a sound field? A significant factor that creates the rich, full tones of a live instrument are the multiple reflections from the walls of the room. In addition to making the sound “live”, these reflections enable us to tell where the player is situated, and the size and shape of the room in which we are sitting. Changing parameter settings You can enjoy good quality sound with the factory preset parameters. Although you do not have to change the initial settings, you can change some of the parameters to better suit the input source or your listening room. TV MUTE SYSTEM ■ Elements of a sound field Reverberations These are caused by reflections from more than one surface — walls, ceiling, the back of the room — so numerous that they merge together to form a continuous sonic “afterglow”. They are non-directional, and lessen the clarity of the direct sound. AV STANDBY POWER A B INPUT MODE SLEEP PHONO TUNER CD MULTI CH IN V-AUX CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R TV INPUT MUTE LEVEL SET MENU TITLE MENU PURE DIRECT NIGHT AUDIO TEST ON SCREEN RETURN DTV VCR 1 DVR/VCR2 + JAZZ 1 2 3 4 ENTERTAIN MUSIC TV THTR MOVIE 5 6 7 – THX STANDARD 9 0 FREQ/RDS EON VOL – – 8 3 EXTD. SUR +10 ENT. MODE PTY SEEK START REC + CH ROCK DVD 1 SOURCE TV VOL 4,5 2 EFFECT HALL AMP + STRAIGHT DISPLAY STEREO SELECT TV DISC SKIP OFF ON MACRO LEARN CLEAR RE–NAME A/B/C/D/E 1 Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to AMP. AMP SOURCE TV 2 Direct sound, early reflections and subsequent reverberation taken together help us to determine the subjective size and shape of the room, and it is this information that the digital sound field processor reproduces in order to create sound fields. If you could create the appropriate early reflections and subsequent reverberations in your listening room, you would be able to create your own listening environment. The acoustics in your room could be changed to those of a concert hall, a dance floor, or virtually any size room at all. This ability to create sound fields at will is exactly what YAMAHA has done with the digital sound field processor. POWER TV ENTER In any environment, in addition to the direct sound coming straight to our ears from the player’s instrument, there are two distinct types of sound reflections that combine to make up the sound field: Early reflections Reflected sounds reach our ears extremely rapidly (50 ms – 100 ms after the direct sound), after reflecting from one surface only — for example, from the ceiling or a wall. Early reflections help add clarity to the direct sound. POWER Turn on the video monitor and press ON SCREEN repeatedly to select the full display mode. ON SCREEN DISPLAY 3 Select the sound field program you want to adjust. ROCK STEREO HALL JAZZ 1 2 3 4 ENTERTAIN MUSIC TV THTR MOVIE 5 6 7 THX STANDARD 9 0 Program No. 8 EXTD. SUR +10 ENT. Program name P04 ROCK CONCERT Cursor DSP LEVEL;;;;0dB > INIT.DLY;;;;15ms ROOM SIZE;;;;1.0 LIVENESS;;;;;;;5 REV.TIME;;;;1.6s REV.DELAY;;120ms Parameters 80 Parameter values EDITING SOUND FIELD PARAMETERS 4 Press k / n to select the parameters. ENTER 5 6 Press l / h to change the parameter value. When you set a parameter to a value other than the factory preset, an asterisk mark (*) appears by the parameter name on the video monitor. ENTER Repeat steps 3 through 5 as necessary to change other program parameters. Notes • The available parameters may be displayed on more than one OSD page for some of the programs. To scroll through pages, press k / n. • You cannot change parameter values when MEMORY GUARD is set to “ON”. If you want to change the parameter values, set MEMORY GUARD to “OFF” (see page 63). Memory back-up The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data from being lost even if this unit is set in the standby mode, the power cord is disconnected from the AC outlet, or the power supply is temporarily cut due to power failure. However, if the power is cut for more than one week, the parameter values will return to the factory settings. If this happens, edit the parameter value again. ■ Resetting parameters to the factory values To reset a certain parameter Select the parameter you want to reset, then press l / h repeatedly until the asterisk mark (*) next to the parameter name disappears from the video monitor. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION To reset all parameters Use PARAM.INI (see page 63). 81 SOUND FIELD PARAMETER DESCRIPTIONS SOUND FIELD PARAMETER DESCRIPTIONS You can adjust the values of certain digital sound field parameters so the sound fields are recreated accurately in your listening room. Not all of the following parameters are found in every program. ■ DSP LEVEL Function: Description: Control range: This parameter adjusts the level of all the DSP effect sounds within a narrow range. Depending on the acoustics of you listening room, you may want to increase or decrease the DSP effect level relative to the level of the direct sound. –6 dB – +3 dB ■ INIT. DLY/P. INIT. DLY (Initial delay) Function: Description: Control range: This parameter changes the apparent distance the sound source is from the reflection face by adjusting the delay between the direct sound and the first reflection heard by the listener. The smaller the value, the closer the reflection face seems to the sound source. The larger the value, the farther it seems. For a small room, set to a small value. For a large room, set to a large value. 1 – 99 msec Source Sound Level Level Level Early Reflections Time Time INIT. DLY INIT. DLY Time INIT. DLY Sound Source Reflection Face Small value = 1 ms Large value = 99 ms ■ ROOM SIZE/P. ROOM SIZE (Room size) Function: Description: Control range: This parameter adjusts the apparent size of the surround sound field. The larger the value, the larger the surround sound field becomes. As the sound is repeatedly reflected around a room, the larger the hall is, the longer the time between the original reflected sound and the subsequent reflections. By controlling the time between the reflected sounds, you can change the apparent size of the virtual venue. Changing this parameter from one to two, doubles the apparent length of the room. 0.1 – 2.0 Time Early Reflections Time Level Level Level Source Sound Time Sound Source Small value = 0.1 82 Large value = 2.0 SOUND FIELD PARAMETER DESCRIPTIONS ■ LIVENESS Function: Description: Control range: This parameter adjusts the reflectivity of the virtual walls in the hall by changing the rate at which the early reflections decay. The early reflections of a source sound decay much faster in a room with acoustically absorbent wall surfaces than in one which has highly reflective surfaces. A room with acoustically absorbent surfaces is referred to as “dead”, while a room with highly reflective surfaces is referred to as “live”. The LIVENESS parameter lets you adjust the early reflection decay rate, and thus the “liveness” of the room. 0 – 10 Source Sound Time Small Reflected Sound Small value = 0 Level Dead Level Level Live Time Time Large Reflected Sound Large value = 10 ■ S. INIT. DLY (Surround initial delay) Function: This parameter adjusts the delay between the direct sound and the first reflection on the surround side of the sound field. You can only adjust this parameter when at least two front channels and two surround channels are used. Control Range: 1 – 49 msec ■ S. ROOM SIZE (Surround room size) Function: This parameter adjusts the apparent size of the surround sound field. Control Range: 0.1 – 2.0 ■ S. LIVENESS (Surround liveness) Function: This parameter adjusts the apparent reflectivity of the virtual walls in the surround sound field. Control Range: 0 – 10 ■ SB INI. DLY (Surround back initial delay) Function: This parameter adjusts the delay between the direct sound and the first reflection in the surround back sound field. Control Range: 1 – 49 msec ■ SB ROOM SIZE (Surround back room size) Function: This parameter adjusts the apparent size of the surround back sound field. Control Range: 0.1 – 2.0 ADDITIONAL INFORMATION ■ SB LIVENESS (Surround back liveness) Function: This parameter adjusts the apparent reflectivity of the virtual wall in the surround back sound field. Control Range: 0 – 10 83 SOUND FIELD PARAMETER DESCRIPTIONS ■ REV.TIME (Reverberation time) Function: This parameter adjusts the amount of time it takes for the dense, subsequent reverberation sound to decay by 60 dB (at 1 kHz). This changes the apparent size of the acoustic environment over an extremely wide range. Description: The longer the reverberation time, the more “live” the listening room environment seems. The shorter the reverberation time, the more “dead” the listening room environment seems. Control Range: 1.0 – 5.0 sec Source Sound Reverberation Reverberation Early Reflections 60 dB 60 dB REV.TIME Sound Source REV.TIME Short Reverberation 60 dB REV.TIME Long Reverberation Small value = 1.0 s Large value = 5.0 s ■ REV.DELAY (Reverberation delay) This parameter adjusts the time difference between the beginning of the direct sound and the beginning of the reverberation sound. Description: The larger the value, the later the reverberation sound begins. A later reverberation sound makes you feel like you are in a larger acoustic environment. Control Range: 0 – 250 msec Level Function: Source Sound (dB) 60 dB Reverberation Time REV.DELAY REV.TIME ■ REV. LEVEL (Reverberation level) Function: This parameter adjusts the volume of the reverberation sound. Description: The larger the value, the stronger the reverberation becomes. Control Range: 0 – 100% Level Source Sound REV. LEVEL Time 84 SOUND FIELD PARAMETER DESCRIPTIONS ■ DIALG.LIFT (Dialog lift) Function: Description: Choices: This parameter adjusts the height of the front and center channel sounds by assigning some of the front and center channel elements to the presence speakers. The larger the parameter, the higher the position of the front and center channel sound. 0/1/2/3/4/5, initial setting is 3. For 7ch Stereo Function: These parameters adjust the volume level for each channel in 7-channel stereo mode. Control Range: 0 – 100% ■ CT LEVEL (Center level) ■ SL LEVEL (Surround left level) ■ SR LEVEL (Surround right level) ■ SB LEVEL (Surround back level) ■ PL LEVEL (Presence left level) ■ PR LEVEL (Presence right level) For PRO LOGIC IIx Music and PRO LOGIC II Music ■ PANORAMA Function: Choices: Extends the front stereo image to include the surround speakers for a wraparound effect. OFF/ON, initial setting is OFF. ■ DIMENSION Function: Control range: Gradually adjusts the sound field either towards the front or towards the rear. –3 (towards the rear) to +3 (towards the front), initial setting is STD (standard). ■ CENTER WIDTH Function: Control range: Adjusts the center image from all three front speakers to varying degrees. A larger value adjusts the center image towards the front left and right speakers. 0 (center channel sound is output only from center speaker) to 7 (center channel sound is output only from front left and right speakers), initial setting is 3. For PRO LOGIC IIx Music, Movie and Game ■ PLII/PLIIx (Pro Logic II/Pro Logic IIx) Function: Choices: Switches the type of Pro Logic decoding to be used. PLII decoding creates 5.1-channel sound from 2channel sources. PLIIx decoding creates 6.1/7.1-channel sound from 2-channel sources. PLII, PLIIx ADDITIONAL INFORMATION For DTS Neo:6 Music ■ C. IMAGE (Center image) Function: Control range: This parameter adjusts the center image from all three front speakers to varying degrees. 0 – 1.0 For THX Cinema ■ DEC (2ch Decoder Select) Function: Choices: Selects the decoder used to playback 2-channel sources using THX Cinema. PRO LOGIC / PLII Movie / Neo:6 Cinema 85 TROUBLESHOOTING TROUBLESHOOTING Refer to the chart below when this unit does not function properly. If the problem you are experiencing is not listed below or if the instruction below does not help, set this unit to the standby mode, disconnect the power cord, and contact the nearest authorized YAMAHA dealer or service center. ■ General Problem This unit fails to turn on when STANDBY/ ON (or SYSTEM POWER) is pressed, or enters in the standby mode soon after the power has been turned on. On-screen display does not appear. No sound No picture 86 Cause Remedy Refer to page The power cord is not connected or the plug is not completely inserted. Connect the power cord firmly. — The impedance setting is incorrect. Set the impedance to match your speakers. 25 The protection circuitry has been activated. Make sure all speaker wire connections on this unit and on all speakers are secure and that the wire for each connection does not touch anything other than its respective connection. This unit has been exposed to a strong external electric shock (such as lightning and strong static electricity). Set this unit in the standby mode, disconnect the power cord, plug it back in after 30 seconds, then use it normally. — The setting for the on-screen display is set to “DISPLAY OFF”. Select the full or short display mode. 50 GRAY BACK in the SET MENU is set to “OFF”, and no video signal is currently being received. Set GRAY BACK to “AUTO” to always show the OSD. 62 Incorrect input or output cable connections. Connect the cables properly. If the problem persists, the cables may be defective. The optimizer microphone is connected. Disconnect the optimizer microphone. — The input mode is set to “DTS” or “ANALOG”. Set the input mode to “AUTO”. 40 No appropriate input source has been selected. Select an appropriate input source with INPUT, MULTI CH INPUT or the input selector buttons. 33 Speaker connections are not secure. Secure the connections. 13 The front speakers to be used have not been selected properly. Select the front speakers with SPEAKERS A and/or B. 33 The volume is turned down. Turn up the volume. — The sound is muted. Press MUTE or any operation buttons of this unit to cancel a mute and adjust the volume. 35 The input mode is set to “ANALOG” while playing a source encoded with a DTS signal. Set the input mode to “AUTO” or “DTS”. 40 The signals this unit cannot reproduce are being received from a source component e.g.: a CD-ROM. Play a source whose signals this unit can reproduce. — The output and input for the picture are connected to different types of video jacks. Turn on the video conversion function. 63 13–16 18–21 TROUBLESHOOTING Problem The sound suddenly goes off. Cause Refer to page 25 Check the speaker wires are not touching each other and then turn this unit back on. — The sleep timer has turned the unit off. Turn on the power, and play the source again. — The sound is muted. Press MUTE to cancel a mute. 35 Only the speaker on one side can be heard. Incorrect cable connections. Connect the cables properly. If the problem persists, the cables may be defective. 13 Incorrect balance settings in the SET MENU. Adjust the SPEAKER LEVEL settings. 57 Only the center speaker outputs substantial sound. When playing a monaural source with a CINEMA DSP program, the source signal is directed to the center channel, and the front and surround speakers output effect sounds. No sound from the effect speakers. The sound field programs are turned off. Press STRAIGHT/EFFECT to turn them on. 39 You are using a source or program combination that does not output sound from all channels. Try another sound field program. 34 The output level of the center speaker is set to minimum. Raise the level of the center speaker. 57 CENTER SP in the SET MENU is set to “NONE”. Select the appropriate setting for the center speaker. 55 One of the HiFi DSP programs (except for 7ch Stereo) has been selected. Try another sound field program. 34 The output level of the surround speakers is set to minimum. Raise the output level of the surround speakers. 57 SURR L/R SP in the SET MENU is set to “NONE”. Select the appropriate setting for the surround left and right speakers. 56 A monaural or stereo source is being played with STRAIGHT. Press STRAIGHT/EFFECT to turn on the sound fields. — Presence speakers are selected. Select surround back speakers in PR/SBch SELECT. 60 SURR L/R SP in the SET MENU is set to “NONE”. If the surround left and right speakers are set to “NONE”, surround back speakers are automatically set to “NONE”. Select the appropriate setting for the surround left and right speakers. 56 SURR B L/R SP in the SET MENU is set to “NONE”. Select “SMLx1”, “SMLx2”, “LRGx1” or “LRGx2”. 56 LFE/BASS OUT in the SET MENU is set to “FRNT” when a Dolby Digital or DTS signal is being played. Select “SWFR” or “BOTH”. 56 LFE/BASS OUT in the SET MENU is set to “SWFR” or “FRNT” when a 2-channel source is being played. Select “BOTH”. 56 No sound from the surround speakers. No sound from the surround back speakers. No sound from the subwoofer. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Check that the impedance selector setting is correct. No sound from the center speaker. The protection circuitry has been activated because of a short circuit, etc. Remedy The source does not contain low bass signals. 87 TROUBLESHOOTING Problem Cause Remedy Refer to page Dolby Digital or DTS sources cannot be played. (Dolby Digital or DTS indicator in the front panel display does not light up.) The connected component is not set to output Dolby Digital or DTS digital signals. Make an appropriate setting following the operations instructions for your component. — The input mode is set to “ANALOG”. Set the input mode to “AUTO” or “DTS”. 40 A “humming” sound can be heard. Incorrect cable connections. Firmly connect the audio plugs. If the problem persists, the cables may be defective. — No connection from the turntable to the GND terminal. Connect the grounding cord of your turnable to the GND terminal of this unit. 21 The volume level is low while playing a record. The record is being played on a turntable with an MC cartridge. The turntable should be connected to this unit through an MC-head amplifier. 21 The volume level cannot be increased, or the sound is distorted. The component connected to the OUT (REC) jacks of this unit is turned off. Turn on the power to the component. — The sound effect cannot be recorded. It is not possible to record the sound effect with a recording component. A source cannot be recorded by a digital recording component connected to this DIGITAL OUTPUT jack. The source component is not connected to this unit’s DIGITAL INPUT jacks. A source cannot be recorded by an analog component connected to the AUDIO OUT jacks. Connect the source component to the DIGITAL INPUT jacks. 18–21 The source component is not connected to this unit’s analog AUDIO IN jacks. Connect the source component to the analog AUDIO IN jacks. 18–21 The sound field parameters and some other settings on this unit cannot be changed. MEMORY GUARD in the SET MENU is set to “ON”. Select “OFF”. 63 This unit does not operate properly. The internal microcomputer has been frozen by an external electric shock (such as lightning or excessive static electricity) or by a power supply with low voltage. Disconnect the AC power cord from the outlet and then plug it in again after about 30 seconds. — “CHECK SP WIRES” appears in the front panel display. Speaker cables are short circuited. Make sure all speaker cables are connected correctly. 13 88 Some components cannot record Dolby Digital or DTS sources. TROUBLESHOOTING Problem Cause Remedy There is noise interference from digital or radiofrequency equipment, or this unit. This unit is too close to the digital or radio-frequency equipment. The picture is disturbed. The video source uses scrambled or encoded signals to prevent dubbing. There is noise when the OSD is displayed. This unit suddenly turns into the standby mode. Refer to page Move this unit further away from such equipment. — The OSD may be disturbed when displaying OSD through component video connections. Select OFF in CMPNT OSD. 63 The internal temperature becomes too high and the overheat protection circuitry has been activated. Wait for about 1 hour until this unit cools down and then turn it back on. — ■ Tuner Problem FM stereo reception is noisy. FM AM Cause Remedy Refer to page Check the antenna connections. Try using a high-quality directional FM antenna. 23 Use the manual tuning method. 41 There is distortion, and clear reception cannot be obtained even with a good FM antenna. There is multipath interference. Adjust the antenna position to eliminate multipath interference. — The desired station cannot be tuned in with the automatic tuning method. The signal is too weak. Use a high-quality directional FM antenna. 23 Use the manual tuning method. 41 Previously preset stations can no longer be tuned in. This unit has been disconnected for a long period. Preset the stations again. 42 The desired station cannot be tuned in with the automatic tuning method. The signal is weak or the antenna connections are loose. Tighten the AM loop antenna connections and orient it for best reception. — Use the manual tuning method. 41 There are continuous crackling and hissing noises. Noises result from lightning, fluorescent lamps, motors, thermostats and other electrical equipment. Use an outdoor antenna and a ground wire. This will help somewhat, but it is difficult to eliminate all noise. — There are buzzing and whining noises. A TV set is being used nearby. Move this unit away from the TV. — ADDITIONAL INFORMATION The characteristics of FM stereo broadcasts may cause this problem when the transmitter is too far away or the antenna input is poor. 89 TROUBLESHOOTING ■ Remote control Problem The remote control does not work nor function properly. The remote control does not “learn” new functions. 90 Cause Remedy Refer to page Wrong distance or angle. The remote control will function within a maximum range of 6 m (20 ft) and no more than 30 degrees offaxis from the front panel. 8 Direct sunlight or lighting (from an inverter type of fluorescent lamp, etc.) is striking the remote control sensor of this unit. Reposition this unit. — The batteries are weak. Replace all batteries. 3 AMP/SOURCE/TV is set incorrectly Set AMP/SOURCE/TV correctly. When operating this unit, set it to the AMP position. When operating the component selected by the input selector button, set it to the SOURCE position. When operating the TV set in the DTV or PHONO area, set it to the TV position. — The remote control code was not correctly set. Set the remote control code correctly. 66 Try setting another code of the same manufacturer. 66 Even if the remote control code is correctly set, there are some models that do not respond to the remote control. Program the necessary functions independently into the programmable buttons using the Learn feature. 68 The batteries of this remote control and/or the other remote control are too weak. Replace the batteries. 3 The distance between the two remote controls is too much or too little. Place the remote controls at the proper distance. 68 The signal coding or modulation of the other remote control is not compatible with this remote control. Learning is not possible. — Memory capacity is full. Delete other unnecessary functions to make room for the new functions. 73 GLOSSARY GLOSSARY Audio formats ■ Dolby Digital Dolby Digital is a digital surround sound system that gives you completely independent multi-channel audio. It provides 5 full-range audio channels; 3 front channels (left, center, and right), and 2 surround stereo channels. An additional channel especially for bass effects, called LFE (low frequency effect) is also provided giving the system a total of 5.1-channels (LFE is counted as a 0.1 channel). By using 2-channel stereo for the surround speakers, more accurate moving sound effects and surround sound environment are possible than with Dolby Surround. The wide dynamic range (maximum to minimum volume) reproduced by the 5 full-range channels and the precise sound orientation generated using digital sound processing provide listeners with a previously unheard of excitement and realism. ■ Dolby Digital EX Dolby Digital EX creates 6 full-bandwidth output channels from 5.1-channel sources. This is done by using a matrix decoder that derives 3 surround channels from the 2 in the original recording. For best results, Dolby Digital EX should be used with movie sound tracks recorded with Dolby Digital Surround EX. With this additional channel, you can experience more dynamic and realistic moving sound especially with scenes that have “flyover” and “flyaround” effects. ■ Dolby Surround Dolby Surround uses a 4 channel analog recording system to reproduce realistic and dynamic sound effects: 2 front left and right channels (stereo), a center channel for dialog (monaural), and a surround channel for special sound effects (monaural). The surround channel reproduces sound within a narrow frequency range. Dolby Surround is widely used with nearly all video tapes and laser discs, and in many TV and cable broadcasts as well. The Dolby Pro Logic decoder built into this unit employs a digital signal processing system that automatically stabilizes the volume on each channel to enhance moving sound effects and directionality. ■ DTS 96/24 DTS 96/24 offers an unprecedented level of audio quality for multi-channel sound on DVD-Video, and is fully backward-compatible with all DTS decoders. “96” refers to a 96 kHz sampling rate (compared to the typical 48 kHz sampling rate). “24” refers to 24-bit word length. DTS 96/ 24 offers sound quality transparent to the original 96/24 master, and 96/24 5.1-channel sound with full-quality fullmotion video for music programs and motion picture soundtracks on DVD-video. ■ DTS (Digital Theater Systems) Digital Surround Dolby Pro Logic II is an improved technique used to decode vast numbers of existing Dolby Surround software. This new technology enables a 5-channel playback with 2 front left and right channels, 1 center channel, and 2 surround left and right channels (instead of only 1 surround channel for conventional Pro Logic technology). Music and Game modes are also available for 2-channel sources in addition to the Movie mode. DTS digital surround was developed to replace the analog soundtracks of movies with a 6-channel digital sound track, and is now rapidly gaining popularity in movie theaters around the world. Digital Theater Systems Inc. has developed a home theater system so that you can enjoy the depth of sound and natural spatial representation of DTS digital surround in your home. This system produces practically distortion-free 6-channel sound (technically, left, right and center channels, 2 surround channels, plus an LFE 0.1 channel as a subwoofer, for a total of 5.1channels). This unit incorporates a DTS-ES decoder that enables 6.1- channel reproduction by adding a surround back channel to the existing 5.1-channel format. ■ Dolby Pro Logic IIx ■ Neo:6 ■ Dolby Pro Logic II Neo:6 decodes conventional 2-channel sources for 6 channel playback by. It enables playback with the fullrange channels with higher separation comparable to digital discrete signal playback. Two modes are available; “Music mode” for playing music sources and “Cinema mode” for movies. 91 ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Dolby Pro Logic IIx is a new technology enabling 6.1 or 7.1 multi-channel playback from 2-channel or multichannel sources. There is a Music mode for music, a Movie mode for movies and a Game mode for games. GLOSSARY ■ PCM (Linear PCM) Linear PCM is a signal format under which an analog audio signal is digitized, recorded and transmitted without using any compression. This is used as a method of recording CDs and DVD audio. The PCM system uses a technique for sampling the size of the analog signal per very small unit of time. Standing for “pulse code modulation”, the analog signal is encoded as pulses and then modulated for recording. Sound field programs ■ CINEMA DSP Since the Dolby Surround and DTS systems were originally designed for use in movie theaters, their effect is best felt in a theater having many speakers and designed for acoustic effects. Since home conditions, such as room size, wall material, number of speakers, and so on, can differ so widely, it’s inevitable that there are differences in the sound heard. Based on a wealth of actually measured data, YAMAHA CINEMA DSP uses YAMAHA original sound field technology to combine Dolby Pro Logic, Dolby Digital and DTS systems to provide the visual and audio experience of a movie theater in the listening room of your own home. ■ SILENT CINEMA YAMAHA has developed a natural, realistic sound effect DSP algorithm for headphones. Parameters for headphones have been set for each sound field so that accurate representations of all the sound field programs can be enjoyed on headphones. ■ Virtual CINEMA DSP YAMAHA has developed a Virtual CINEMA DSP algorithm that allows you to enjoy DSP sound field surround effects without any surround speakers by using virtual surround speakers. It is even possible to enjoy Virtual CINEMA DSP using a minimal two-speaker system that does not include a center speaker. 92 GLOSSARY Audio information ■ ITU-R ITU-R is the radio communication sector of the ITU (International Telecommunication Union). ITU-R recommends a standard speaker placement which is used in many critical listening rooms, such as mastering studios. ■ LFE 0.1 channel This channel is for the reproduction of low bass signals. The frequency range for this channel is 20 Hz to 120 Hz. This channel is counted as 0.1 because it only enforces a low frequency range compared to the full-range reproduced by the other 5/6 channels in Dolby Digital or DTS 5.1/6.1-channel systems. ■ Sampling frequency and number of quantized bits When digitizing an analog audio signal, the number of times the signal is sampled per second is called the sampling frequency, while the degree of fineness when converting the sound level into a numeric value is called the number of quantized bits. The range of rates that can be played back is determined based on the sampling rate, while the dynamic range representing the sound level difference is determined by the number of quantized bits. In principle, the higher the sampling frequency, the wider the range of frequencies that can be played back, and the higher the number of quantized bits, the more finely the sound level can be reproduced. ■ THX Cinema processing THX is an exclusive set of standards and technologies established by the world-renowned film production company, Lucasfilm Ltd. THX grew from George Lucas’ personal desire to make your experience of the film soundtrack, in both movie theatres and in your home theatre, as faithful as possible to what the director intended. Movie soundtracks are mixed in special movie theatres called dubbing stages and are designed to be played back in movie theatres with similar equipment and conditions. This same soundtrack is then transferred directly onto Laserdisc, VHS tape, DVD, etc., and is not changed for playback in a small home theatre environment. THX engineers developed patented technologies to accurately translate the sound from the movie theatre environment into the home, correcting the tonal and spatial errors that occur. On this product, when the THX indicator is on, THX features are automatically added in Cinema modes (e.g. THX Cinema, THX Surround EX). Adaptive decorrelation In a movie theatre, a large number of surround speakers help create an enveloping surround sound experience, but in a home theatre there are usually only two speakers. This can make the surround speakers sound like headphones that lack spaciousness and envelopment. The surround sounds will also collapse into the closest speaker as you move away from the middle seating position. Adaptive decorrelation slightly changes one surround channel's time and phase relationship with respect to the other surround channel. This expands the listening position and creates – with only two speakers – the same spacious surround experience as in a movie theatre. Re-equalization The tonal balance of a film soundtrack will be excessively bright and harsh when played back over audio equipment in the home because film soundtracks were designed to be played back in large movie theatres using very different professional equipment. Re-equalization restores the correct tonal balance for watching a movie soundtrack in a small home environment. 93 ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Timbre matching The human ear changes our perception of sound depending on the direction from which it is coming. In a movie theatre, there is an array of surround speakers so that the surround information is all around you. In a home theatre, you use only two speakers located to the side of your head. The timbre matching feature filters the information going to the surround speakers so that they more closely match the tonal characteristics of the sound coming from the front speakers. This ensures seamless panning between the front and surround speakers. GLOSSARY ■ THX Select Before any home theatre component can be THX Select certified, it must incorporate pass a rigorous series of quality and performance tests. Only then can a product feature the THX Select logo, which is your guarantee that the Home Theatre products you purchase will give you superb performance for many years to come. THX Select requirements cover every aspect of the product including power amplifier and pre-amplifier performance and operation, and hundreds of other parameters in both the digital and analog domain. ■ THX Surround EX THX Surround EX - Dolby Digital Surround EX is a joint development of Dolby Laboratories and the THX Ltd. In a movie theater, film soundtracks that have been encoded with Dolby Digital Surround EX technology are able to reproduce an extra channel which has been added during the mixing of the program. This channel, called Surround Back, places sounds behind the listener in addition to the currently available front left, front center, front right, surround right, surround left and subwoofer channels. This additional channel provides the opportunity for more detailed imaging behind the listener and brings more depth, spacious ambience and sound localization than ever before. Movies that were created using the Dolby Digital Surround EX technology, when released into the home consumer market may exhibit wording to that effect on the packaging. A list of movies created using this technology can be found on the Dolby web site at www.dolby.com. A list of available DVD software titles encoded with this technology can be found at www.thx.com. Only receiver and controller products bearing the THX Surround EX logo, when in the THX Surround EX mode, faithfully reproduce this new technology in the home. This product may also engage the THX Surround EX mode during the playback of 5.1 channel material that is not Dolby Digital Surround EX encoded. In such cases the information delivered to the Surround Back channel will be program dependent and may or may not be pleasing depending on the particular soundtrack and the tastes of the individual listener. 94 Video signal information ■ Component video signal With the component video signal system, the video signal is separated into the Y signal for the luminance and the PB and PR signals for the chrominance. Color can be reproduced more faithfully with this system because each of these signals is independent. The component signal is also called the “color difference signal” because the luminance signal is subtracted from the color signal. A monitor with component input jacks is required in order to use the component signal for output. ■ Composite video signal With the composite video signal system, the video signal is composed of three basic elements of a video picture; color, brightness and synchronization data. A composite video jack on a video component transmits these three elements combined. ■ S-video signal With the S-video signal system, the video signal normally transmitted using a pin cable is separated and transmitted as the Y signal for the luminance and the C signal for the chrominance through the S-video cable. Using the S VIDEO jack eliminates video signal transmission loss and allows recording and playback of even more beautiful images. SPECIFICATIONS SPECIFICATIONS AUDIO SECTION VIDEO SECTION • Minimum RMS Output Power for Front, Center, Surround, Surround back 20 Hz to 20 kHz, 0.04% THD, 8 Ω ..................................... 120 W • Video Signal Type ............................................................PAL/NTSC • Maximum Power (EIAJ) [Australia, China, Korea, Asia and General models] 1 kHz, 10% THD, 8 Ω ..........................................................170 W • Dynamic Power (IHF) [U.S.A., Canada, China, Australia, Asia, Korea and General models] 8/6/4/2 Ω .........................................................155/195/250/330 W • DIN Standard Output Power [U.K. and Europe models] 1 kHz, 0.7% THD, 4 Ω .........................................................170 W • Signal to Noise Ratio .............................................................. 60 dB • Frequency Response (MONITOR OUT) Composite, S-video ................................... 5 Hz to 10 MHz, –3 dB Component ............................................... 5 Hz to 60 MHz, –3 dB FM SECTION • Tuning Range [U.S.A. and Canada models] ........................... 87.5 to 107.9 MHz [Asia and General models] ........ 87.5/87.50 to 108.0/108.00 MHz [Other models] ............................................ 87.50 to 108.00 MHz • Usable Sensitivity (IHF)........................................ 1.0 µV (11.2 dBf) • IEC Output Power [U.K. and Europe models] 1 kHz, 0.04% THD, 8 Ω .......................................................125 W • Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF) Mono/Stereo .............................................................. 76 dB/70 dB • Damping Factor (IHF) 20 Hz to 20 kHz, 8 Ω................................................... 140 or more • Harmonic Distortion (1 kHz) Mono/Stereo ................................................................ 0.2%/0.3% • Frequency Response CD to Front L/R ..................................... 10 Hz to 100 kHz, –3 dB • Stereo Separation (1 kHz) ....................................................... 42 dB • Total Harmonic Distortion PHONO to REC OUT (20 Hz to 20 kHz, 1 V) .................. 0.02% CD, etc. to Front L/R (20 Hz to 20 kHz, 60 W, 8 Ω) .......... 0.04% AM SECTION • Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF-A Network) PHONO (5 mV) to Front L/R [U.K., Europe and Australia models] .................................... 81 dB [Other models] ....................................................................... 86 dB CD (250 mV) to Front L/R, Effect Off ................................ 100 dB • Residual Noise (IHF-A Network) Front L/R ............................................................... 150 µV or less • Channel Separation (1 kHz/10 kHz) PHONO (terminated) to Front L/R ........................... 60 dB/55 dB CD (5.1 kΩ terminated) to Front L/R ....................... 60 dB/45 dB • Tone Control (Front L/R) BASS Boost/Cut ....................................................... ±6 dB/50 Hz BASS Turnover Frequency .................................................. 350 Hz TREBLE Boost/Cut ................................................ ±6 dB/20 kHz TREBLE Turnover Frequency........................................... 3.5 kHz • Phones Output .......................................................... 150 mV/100 Ω • Input Sensitivity/Input Impedance PHONO .................................................................. 3.5 mV/47 kΩ CD, etc. ................................................................. 200 mV/47 kΩ MULTI CH INPUT ............................................... 200 mV/47 kΩ • Tuning Range [U.S.A. and Canada models] .............................. 530 to 1710 kHz [Asia and General models] ................. 530/531 to 1710/1611 kHz [Other models] ................................................... 531 to 1611 kHz • Usable Sensitivity ............................................................. 300 µV/m GENERAL • Power Supply [U.S.A. and Canada models] .............................. AC 120 V/60 Hz [Australia model] ............................................... AC 240 V/50 Hz [China model] ..................................................... AC 220 V/50 Hz [Korea model] .................................................... AC 220 V/60 Hz [U.K. and Europe models] ................................. AC 230 V/50 Hz [General model] ............... AC 110/120/220/230-240 V, 50/60 Hz [Asia model] ................................... AC 220/230-240 V, 50/60 Hz • Power Consumption [U.S.A. and Canada models] ................................. 500 W/630 VA [Other models] ................................................................... 500 W • Standby Power Consumption [Asia and General models] (AC 240 V/50 Hz) ......... 0.8 W or less [Other models] ......................................................... 0.5 W or less • AC Outlets [U.S.A. and Canada models]..... 2 (Total 100 W/0.8 A maximum) [U.K. and Australia models] .............. 1 (Total 100 W maximum) [China and Europe models] ................ 2 (Total 100 W maximum) [Asia and General models] ................... 2 (Total 50 W maximum) • Dimensions (W x H x D) .............................. 435 x 171 x 433.5 mm (17-1/8” x 6-3/4” x 17-1/16”) • Weight .................................................................. 15.5 kg (34.2 lbs) 95 ADDITIONAL INFORMATION • Output Level/Output Impedance REC OUT ............................................................. 200 mV/1.2 kΩ PRE OUT ................................................................... 1.0 V/500 Ω SUBWOOFER ........................................................... 2.0 V/500 Ω ZONE 2 OUTPUT [U.S.A., Canada, U.K., Europe and Australia models] ............................................. 1.0 V/1.2 kΩ ZONE 3 OUTPUT [U.S.A., Canada, U.K., Europe and Australia models] ............................................. 1.0 V/1.2 kΩ • Frequency Response ........................... 20 Hz to 15 kHz +0.5, –2 dB LIST OF REMOTE CONTROL CODES AMPLIFIER AMSTRAD 0105 ARCAM 0296 AUDIOLAB 0296 CARVER 0296 GE 0105 GENEXXA 0422 GRUNDIG 0296 HARMAN/KARDON 0919 JVC 0358 LEFT COAST 0919 LINN 0296 MAGNAVOX 0296 MARANTZ 0296, 0919 MICROMEGA 0296 MYRYAD 0296 OPTIMUS 0422 PANASONIC 0335 PHILIPS 0296, 0919 PIONEER 0040 POLK AUDIO 0296, 0919 REALISTIC 0422 REVOX 0296 SONY 0247 SOUNDESIGN 0105 TECHNICS 0335 THORENS 0296 VICTOR 0358 WARDS 0040, 0105 YAMAHA 0381 CABLE ABC 0030, 0035 AMERICAST 0926 BELL SOUTH 0926 BIRMINGHAM CABLE COMMUNICATIONS 0303 BRITISH TELECOM 0030 CABLE & WIRELESS 1095 DAERYUNG 0035, 0504, 0904, 1904 DIRECTOR 0503 FILMNET 0470 GENERAL INSTRUMENT 0030, 0303, 0503, 0837, GOLDSTAR 0171 HAMLIN 0036, 0300 JERROLD 0030, 0303, 0503, 0837 LG 0171 MNET 0470 MEMOREX 0027 MOTOROLA 0303, 0503, 0837, 1133 NTL 1095 NOOS 0844 ONO 1095 PVP STEREO VISUAL MATRIX 0030 PACE 0264, 1087, 1095 PANASONIC 0027, 0035, 0134 PARAGON 0027 PHILIPS 0332, 0344 PIONEER 0171, 0560, 0904, 1904 i PULSAR 0027 QUASAR 0027 REGAL 0300, 0306 RUNCO 0027 SAGEM 0844 SAMSUNG 0027, 0171 SCIENTIFIC ATLANTA 0035, 0504, 0904, 1904 SONY 1033 STARCOM 0030 SUPERCABLE 0303 TS 0030 TELE+1 0470 TELEWEST 1095 TORX 0030 TOSHIBA 0027 TRANS PX 0303 UNITED CABLE 0030 ZENITH 0027, 0552, 0926 CD PLAYER AIWA 0184 ARCAM 0184 AUDIO RESEARCH 0184 AUDIO TON 0184 AUDIOLAB 0184 AUDIOMECA 0184 CAIRN 0184 CALIFORNIA AUDIO LABS 0056 CARVER 0184, 0206 CYRUS 0184 DKK 0027 DMX ELECTRONICS 0184 DENON 0900 DYNAMIC BASS 0206 EMERSON 0332 FISHER 0206 GENEXXA 0059, 0332 GOODMANS 0332 GRUNDIG 0184 HARMAN/KARDON 0184, 0200 HITACHI 0059 JVC 0099 KENWOOD 0055, 0064 KRELL 0184 LXI 0332 LINN 0184 MCS 0056 MAGNAVOX 0184, 0332 MARANTZ 0056, 0184 MATSUI 0184 MEMOREX 0332 MERIDIAN 0184 MICROMEGA 0184 MIRO 0027 MISSION 0184 MYRYAD 0184 NAD 0027 NSM 0184 NAIM 0184 OPTIMUS 0027, 0059, 0064, 0206, 0332 PANASONIC 0056 PHILIPS 0184 PIONEER 0059, 0332 POLK AUDIO 0184 PROTON 0184 QED 0184 QUAD 0184 QUASAR 0056 RCA 0059, 0206, 0332 REALISTIC 0206 REVOX 0184 ROTEL 0184 SAE 0184 SANSUI 0184, 0332 SANYO 0206 SCOTT 0332 SEARS 0332 SHARP 0064 SIMAUDIO 0184 SONIC FRONTIERS 0184 SONY 0027 SYMPHONIC 0332 TAG MCLAREN 0184 TANDY 0059 TECHNICS 0056 THORENS 0184 THULE 0184 UNIVERSUM 0184 VICTOR 0099 WARDS 0184 YAMAHA 2300, 2301 CD RECORDER KENWOOD MARANTZ PHILIPS YAMAHA 0653 0653 0653 2400 DVD PLAYER ACOUSTIC SOLUTIONS 0757 ALBA 0744 AMSTRAD 0740 APEX DIGITAL 0699, 0744, 0782, 0821, 0823, 0857, 1127 BLAUPINKT 0744 BLUE PARADE 0598 BUSH 0740 CENTREX 0699 CLATRONIC 0815 CYBERHOME 0741 DVD2000 0548 DAEWOO 0811, 0797 DANSAI 0797 DECCA 0797 DENON 0517 DIAMOND 0795 DIGITREX 0699 EMERSON 0618 ENTERPRISE 0618 FISHER 0697 GE 0549, 0744 GO VIDEO 0742 GOLDSTAR 0768 GRADIENTE 0678 GREENHILL 0744 GRUNDIG 0566 HITACHI 0600, 0691 HITEKER 0699 JVC 0585, 0650 KLH 0744 KENWOOD 0517, 0561 KOSS LG LIMIT MAGNAVOX MARANTZ MEMOREX MICO MICROSOFT MINTEK MITSUBISHI MUSTEK NESA ONKYO ORITRON PALSONIC PANASONIC PHILIPS 0678 0768 0795 0530, 0702 0566 0858 0750 0549 0744 0548 0757 0744 0530 0678 0699 0517, 0659, 1389 0530, 0566, 0673, 0881 PIONEER 0552, 0598, 0658, 0659 POLK AUDIO 0566 PROSCAN 0549 QWESTAR 0678 RCA 0549, 0598, 0744 ROTEL 0650 SM ELECTRONIC 0757 SAMSUNG 0600 SANYO 0697 SHARP 0657 SHERWOOD 0797 SHINSONIC 0560 SLIM ART 0811 SONY 0560, 0891 SYLVANIA 0702 TATUNG 0797 TEAC 0598, 0744 TECHNICS 0517 THETA DIGITAL 0598 THOMSON 0549 TOSHIBA 0530 URBAN CONCEPTS 0530 XBOX 0549 YAMAHA 0517, 0566, 0572, 2100, 2101, 2102 ZENITH 0530, 0618, 0768 ZEUS 0811 DVD RECORDER PANASONIC PHILIPS PIONEER TOSHIBA YAMAHA 2800, 2801, 2802 2808 2804, 2805, 2806 2803 2807 LD PLAYER CARVER DENON MARANTZ MITSUBISHI NAD NAGSMI OPTIMUS PHILIPS PIONEER SALORA SONY TELEFUNKEN YAMAHA 0091 0086 0091 0086 0086 0086 0086 0091 0086 0091 0228 0086 2200 MD RECORDER KENWOOD ONKYO SHARP SONY YAMAHA 0708 0895 0888 0517 2500, 2501, 2502 RECEIVER (TUNER) ADC AIWA 0558 0185, 1116, 1415, 1432, 1668 ALCO 1417 ANAM 1636 APEX DIGITAL 1284 AUDIOLAB 1216 AUDIOTRONIC 1216 AUDIOVOX 1417 BOSE 1256 CAMBRIDGE SOUNDWORKS 1397 CAPETRONIC 0558 CARVER 1116, 1216 CENTREX 1284 DENON 1387 FERGUSON 0558 FINE ARTS 1216 GRUNDIG 1216 HARMAN/KARDON 0137, 1331 INTEGRA 0162, 1325 JBL 0137, 1333 JVC 0101, 0558, 1401, 1522 KLH 1417, 1439 KENWOOD 1054, 1340 MCS 0066 MAGNAVOX 0558, 1116, 1216, 1296, MARANTZ 0066, 1116, 1216, 1316 MICROMEGA 1216 MUSICMAGIC 1116 MYRYAD 1216 NAD 0347 NORCENT 1416 ONKYO 0162, 0869, 1325 OPTIMUS 0558, 1050 PANASONIC 0066, 1315, 1545, 1790 PHILIPS 1116, 1216, 1293, 1295, 1296, 1310, 1316 PIONEER 0041, 0558, 1050, 1411 POLK AUDIO 1316 PROSCAN 1281 QUASAR 0066 RCA 0558, 1050, 1281, 1417, 1636, SABA 0558 SANSUI 1116 SCHNEIDER 0558 SONY 0185, 1085, 1185, 1685, 1785 STEREOPHONICS 1050 SUNFIRE 1340 TEAC 1417 TECHNICS 0066, 1335, 1336, 1545 TELEFUNKEN 0558 THOMSON 1281 THORENS 1216 UHER 0558 VENTURER VICTOR WARDS YAMAHA 1417 0101 0041, 0185 0203, 1203, 1358, 2600, 2601 SATELLITE TUNER @SAT 1327 ABSAT 0150 ALBA 0482 ALPHASTAR 0799 AMSTRAD 0874 ASTON 0169, 1156 ASTRO 0200 ATSAT 1327 AVALON 0423 BLAUPUNKT 0200 BRITISH SKY BROADCASTING 0874, 1202 CANAL DIGITAL 0880 CANAL SATELLITE 0880 CANAL+ 0880 CHAPARRAL 0243 CITYCOM 1203 CONNEXIONS 0423 CROSSDIGITAL 1136 CYRUS 0227 D-BOX 0750, 1154 DMT 1102 DNT 0227, 0423 DAERYUNG 0423 DAEWOO 1323 DIGENIUS 0326 DIRECTV 0274, 0419, 0593, 0666, 0751, 0776, 0846, 1103, 1136, 1169, 1776, 1883 DISH NETWORK SYSTEM 0802, 1032 DISHPRO 0802, 1032 DISTRATEL 0111 DREAM MULTIMEDIA 1264 ECHOSTAR 0194, 0423, 0637, 0802, 0880, 0898, 1032, 1113 ENGEL 1044 EXPRESSVU 0802 FTE 0890 FINLUX 0482 FRACARRO 0898 FUBA 0423 GE 0593 GOI 0802 GALAXIS 0890, 1138 GENERAL INSTRUMENT 0896 GOLD BOX 0880 GRUNDIG 0200, 0874 HTS 0802 HIRSCHMANN 0200, 0423 HITACHI 0482, 0846 HUGHES NETWORK SYSTEM 0776, 1169, 1776 HUMAX 0890, 1203 INVIDEO 0898 JVC 0802 KATHREIN 0150, 0200, 0227, 0276, 0685, 1248 KREISELMEYER 0200 LABGEAR 1323 LOGIX 1044 LORENZEN 0326 MAGNAVOX 0749, 0751 MANHATTAN 0482, 1044, 1110 MARANTZ 0227 MEDIASAT 0880 MEMOREX 0751 METRONIC 0111 MITSUBISHI 0776 MOTOROLA 0896 MYRYAD 0227 NEXT LEVEL 0896 NOKIA 0482, 0750, 0778, 1154, 1250, 1750 OCTALTV 1032 ORBITECH 1127 PACE 0482, 0874, 1202, 1350 PANASONIC 0274, 0728, 0874, 1347 PANDA 0482 PAYSAT 0751 PHILIPS 0160, 0227, 0482, 0749, 0751, 0776, 0880, 1103, 1169, 1776 PIONEER 0880 PROMAX 0482 PROSCAN 0419, 0593 RCA 0170, 0419, 0593, 0882 RFT 0227 RADIOSHACK 0896 RADIOLA 0227 RADIX 0423 SKY 0874, 0883, 1202 SM ELECTRONIC 1227 SABRE 0482 SAGEM 0847, 1141, 1280 SAMSUNG 1044, 1136, 1303, 1319 SAT CONTROL 1327 SATSTATION 1110 SCHWAIGER 1138 SEEMANN 0423 SIEMENS 0200 SONY 0666, 0874, 1666 STAR CHOICE 0896 STRONG 1327 TPS 0847, 1280 TANTEC 0482 TECHNISAT 1126, 1127 TELESTAR 1127 THOMSON 0482, 0880, 1073, 1318 TOPFIELD 1233 TOSHIBA 0776, 0817, 1776 ULTIMATETV 0419, 0666 UNIDEN 0749, 0751 UNIVERSUM 0200 VENTANA 0227 WISI 0200, 0423, 0482 XSAT 0150 ZEHNDER 1102 ZENITH 0883, 1883 TAPE DECK AIWA 0056 CARVER 0056 GRUNDIG 0056 HARMAN/KARDON 0056 MAGNAVOX 0056 MARANTZ 0056 MYRYAD 0056 OPTIMUS 0054 PHILIPS PIONEER POLK AUDIO RCA REVOX SANSUI SONY THORENS WARDS YAMAHA 0056 0054 0056 0054 0056 0056 0270 0056 0054 2700,2701 TV AGB AOC 0543 0036, 0057, 0087, 0119, 0120, 0135, 0205, 0207, 0478 ASA 0131 AWA 0036 ACURA 0036 ADDISON 0119, 0135, 0680 ADMIRAL 0120, 0190, 0490 ADVENT 0788 AIKO 0119 AKAI 0036, 0057, 0235, 0388, 0543, 0729, 0839 AKURA 0291 ALBA 0036, 0064, 0398, 0695 AMERICA ACTION 0207 AMPRO 0778 AMSTRAD 0036, 0064, 0198, 0398, 0439, 0460, 0543 ANAM 0036, 0207, 0277 ANAM NATIONAL 0277, 0677 ANITECH 0036 APEX DIGITAL 0775, 0792, 0794 AUDIOSONIC 0064, 0136 BANG & OLUFSEN 0592 BASIC 0036 BAUR 0064, 0388, 0539 BAYSONIC 0207 BEAUMARK 0205 BEKO 0397, 0513, 0741, 0742 BELL & HOWELL 0181 BEON 0064 BLAUPUNKT 0222 BLUE SKY 0695, 1064 BONDSTEC 0274 BRADFORD 0207 BRANDT 0136, 0362 BROKSONIC 0263, 0490 BUSH 0036, 0064, 0398, 0401, 0695, 1064 CCE 0064 CGE 0274 CTC 0274 CXC 0207 CANDLE 0057 CARNIVALE 0057 CARVER 0081, 0197 CASCADE 0036 CATHAY 0064 CELEBRITY 0027 CELERA 0792 CENTURION 0064 CHANGHONG 0792 CHING TAI 0036, 0119 CHUN YUN 0027, 0036, 0119, 0207 CHUNG HSIN 0080, 0135, 0207 ii CIMLINE CINERAL CITIZEN CLARION CLARIVOX CLATRONIC CONDOR CONRAC CONTEC CRAIG CROSLEY CROWN 0036 0119, 0478 0057, 0087, 0119 0207 0064 0274, 0397 0347, 0397 0835 0036, 0207 0207 0081 0036, 0064, 0207, 0397, 0445 CURTIS MATHES 0057, 0074, 0081, 0087, 0120, 0172, 0181, 0193, 0478, 0729, 1174, 1374 DAEWOO 0036, 0057, 0064, 0119, 0135, 0181, 0197, 0205, 0207, 0401, 0478, 0650, 0661, 1688 DANSAI 0064 DAYTON 0036 DE GRAAF 0235, 0575 DECCA 0064, 0543 DENON 0172 DIGATRON 0064 DIXI 0036, 0064 DUMONT 0044 DWIN 0747, 0801 ECE 0064 ELBE 0286 ELECTROBAND 0027 ELIN 0064, 0575 ELITE 0347 ELTA 0036 EMERSON 0181, 0205, 0207, 0263, 0388, 0490, 0650 ENVISION 0057,0840 EPSON 0860 ERRES 0064 ETHER 0036, 0057 ETRON 0036 EUROPHON 0543 FERGUSON 0064, 0100, 0136, 0265, 0314, 0362, 0587 FIDELITY 0388 FINLANDIA 0235, 0373 FINLUX 0064, 0131, 0132, 0373, 0543 FIRSTAR 0036, 0263 FIRSTLINE 0036, 0274, 0695 FISHER 0131, 0181, 0235, 0397 FLINT 0482 FORMENTI 0064, 0347 FORTRESS 0120 FRONTECH 0190, 0274, 0291 FUJITSU 0710, 0836 FUNAI 0207, 0198, 0291 FUTURETECH 0207 GE 0057, 0074, 0078, 0119, 0205, 0207, 0478, 0587, 1174, 1374, 1481 GEC 0064, 0543 GATEWAY 1782, 1783 GELOSO 0036 GENEXXA 0190 GIBRALTER 0044, 0057 iii GOLDSTAR 0057, 0064, 0136, 0181, 0205, 0404 GOODMANS 0064, 0398, 0401, 0661 GOREMJE 0397 GRADIENTE 0080, 0197 GRAETZ 0190, 0388 GRANADA 0064, 0235, 0366, 0543 GRANDIN 0637 GRUNDIG 0064, 0222, 0514, 0583, 0614 GRUNPY 0207 HCM 0036, 0439 HALLMARK 0205 HANKOOK 0057, 0205, 0207 HANSEATIC 0064, 0347, 0388, 0455, 0583 HANTAREX 0543 HARMAN/KARDON 0081 HARVARD 0207 HAVERMY 0120 HELLO KITTY 0478 HINARI 0036, 0064 HISAWA 0482 HITACHI 0036, 0057, 0119, 0132, 0136, 0172, 0190, 0205, 0252, 0383, 0508, 0575, 0605, 1172, 1283 HUA TUN 0036 HUANYU 0401 HYPSON 0064, 0291 ICE 0291, 0398 ITS 0398 ITT 0190, 0388, 0575 IMPERIAL 0274, 0397, 0445 INDIANA 0064 INFINITY 0081 INGELEN 0190 INNO HIT 0543 INNOVA 0064 INTEQ 0044 INTERFUNK 0064, 0190, 0274, 0388, 0539 INTERVISION 0064, 0291, 0404 JBL 0081 JCB 0027 JVC 0080, 0398, 0490, 0680, 0710 JEAN 0036, 0078, 0119, 0183, 0263 JENSEN 0788 KEC 0207 KTV 0057, 0207 KAISUI 0036 KAPSCH 0190 KARCHER 0637 KATHREIN 0583 KENDO 0064 KENWOOD 0057 KNEISSEL 0286, 0462 KOLIN 0080, 0135, 0207 KORPEL 0064 KOYODA 0036 L&S ELECTRONIC 0835 LG 0057, 0064, 0087, 0135, 0205, 0741 LXI 0074, 0081, 0181, 0183, 0205 LEYCO 0064, 0291 LIESENK & TTER 0064 LOEWE 0539 LUXOR 0383, 0388 M ELECTRONIC 0036, 0064, 0131, 0132, 0136, 0190, 0314, 0373, 0401, 0507 MGA 0057, 0177, 0205 MTC 0057, 0087, 0539 MAGNADYNE 0274, 0543 MAGNAFON 0543 MAGNAVOX 0057, 0081, 1281, 1481 MANESTH 0291, 0347 MARANTZ 0057, 0064, 0081, 0583 MARK 0064 MATSUI 0036, 0064, 0235, 0398, 0514, 0543 MATSUSHITA 0277, 0677 MEDIATOR 0064 MEDION 0695, 0835, 1064 MEGATRON 0172, 0205 MEMOREX 0036, 0177, 0181, 0205, 0277, 0490, 1064 METZ 0474 MICROMAXX 0835 MICROSTAR 0835 MIDLAND 0044, 0074, 0078 MINERVA 0514 MINOKA 0439 MITSUBISHI 0057, 0120, 0135, 0177, 0181, 0205, 0207, 0263, 0277, 0539, 0863, 1277 MIVAR 0318,0319, 0543, 0636 MOTOROLA 0120 MULTITECH 0036, 0207 MYRYAD 0583 NAD 0183, 0205, 0388, 0893 NEC 0036, 0057, 0078, 0181, 0183, 0197, 0205, 0482, 0524, 1731 NEI 0064 NTC 0119 NECKERMANN 0064, 0583 NETSAT 0064 NEWAVE 0036, 0119, 0120, 0205 NIKKAI 0064, 0291 NIKKO 0057, 0119, 0205 NOKIA 0388, 0500, 0507, 0575, 0658 NORCENT 0775, 0851 NORDMENDE 0136, 0314, 0587 OCEANIC 0190, 0388 ONWA 0207, 0460 OPTIMUS 0181, 0193, 0277, 0677 OPTONICA 0120 ORION 0064, 0263, 0347, 0490, 0543 OSAKI 0291, 0439 OTTO VERSAND 0064, 0347, 0539, 0583 PALLADIUM 0397, 0445 PANAMA 0291 PANASONIC 0064, 0078, 0081, 0190, 0277, 0677, 1437 PATHE CINEMA 0265, 0347 PAUSA 0036 PENNEY 0057, 0074, 0078, 0087, 0183, 0205, 1374 PERDIO 0347 PHILCO 0057, 0064, 0081, 0172, 0205, 0207, 0274, 0490, 1688 PHILIPS 0027, 0057, 0064, 0078, 0081, 0119, 0135, 0205, 0401, 0583, 0717, 1481 PHONOLA 0064 PILOT 0057 PIONEER 0136, 0190, 0193, 0314, 0706, 0787, 0893 PORTLAND 0119 PRANDONI-PRINCE 0543 PRIMA 0788 PRISM 0078 PROFEX 0036, 0388 PROSCAN 0074 PROTECH 0036, 0064, 0274, 0291, 0445, 0695 PROTON 0036, 0057, 0205 PULSAR 0044 QUASAR 0078, 0277, 0677 QUELLE 0064, 0131, 0388, 0539 R-LINE 0064 RCA 0027, 0057, 0074, 0117, 0119, 0205, 0706, 1074, 1174, 1274, 1374, 1474, 1481, 1574 RFT 0455 RADIOSHACK 0057, 0074, 0181, 0205, 0207 RADIOLA 0064 RADIOMARELLI 0543 REALISTIC 0057, 0181, 0205, 0207 REDIFFUSION 0388 REOC 0741 REVOX 0064 REX 0190, 0286, 0291 ROADSTAR 0036, 0291, 0445 RUNCO 0044, 0057, 0524, 0630 SBR 0064 SEG 0291, 0695 SEI 0543 SKY 0064 SSS 0207 SABA 0136, 0190, 0314, 0362 SACCS 0265 SAGEM 0637 SAISHO 0036, 0291, 0543 SALORA 0190, 0380, 0388, 0575 SAMBERS 0543 SAMPO 0036, 0057, 0119, 0120, 0181, 0198, 0205, 0677, 1782 SAMSUNG 0036, 0057, 0064, 0087, 0117, 0119, 0181, 0205, 0291, 0397, 0583, 0614, 0645, 0729, 0793, 0839, 0841 SANSEI 0478 SANSUI 0490 SANYO 0131, 0181, 0207, 0235, 0366, 0826 SCHAUB LORENZ 0388 SCHNEIDER 0064, 0274, 0398, 0695 SCOTCH 0205 SCOTT 0205, 0207, 0263 SEARS 0074, 0081, 0181, 0183, 0198, 0205 SELECO 0190, 0286 SEMIVOX 0207 SEMP 0183 SHARP 0057, 0120, 0677 SHEN YING 0036, 0119 SHENG CHIA 0036, 0120, 0263 SIAREM 0543 SIEMENS 0064, 0222 SINUDYNE 0543 SKANTIC 0383 SKYGIANT 0207 SKYWORTH 0064 SOLAVOX 0190 SONITRON 0235 SONOKO 0036, 0064 SONOLOR 0190, 0235 SONTEC 0064 SONY 0027, 0677, 0861, 1127, 1532, 1678 SOUNDESIGN 0205, 0207 SOUNDWAVE 0064, 0445 SOWA 0078, 0087, 0119, 0183, 0205 SQUAREVIEW 0198 STANDARD 0036 STARLITE 0207 STERN 0190, 0286 SUPREME 0027 SYLVANIA 0057, 0081, 0198 SYMPHONIC 0198, 0207 SYNCO 0027, 0087, 0119, 0120, 0205, 0478 SYSLINE 0064 T+A 0474 TCM 0835 TMK 0205 TNCI 0044 TVS 0490 TACICO 0036, 0119, 0205 TAI YI 0036 TANDY 0120, 0190 TASHIKO 0119, 0677 TATUNG 0036, 0064, 0078, 0081, 0087, 0181, 0183, 0543 TEAC 0036, 0064, 0291, 0439, 0445, 0482, 0695, 1064 TEC 0274 TECHNEMA 0347 TECHNICS 0078, 0277, 0677 TECHWOOD 0078 TECO 0036, 0078, 0119, 0120, 0205, 0291, 0680 TEKNIKA 0081, 0087, 0119, 0177, 0207 TELEFUNKEN 0136, 0289, 0362, 0652, 0729 TELEMEISTER 0347 TELETECH 0036 TENSAI 0347 TERA 0057 THOMSON 0136, 0314, 0587, 0652, 1474 THORN 0064, 0131, 0388, 0539 TOSHIBA 0087, 0181, 0183, 0535, 0645, 0677, 0859, 1283, 1383, 1683, 1731 TRIUMPH 0543 TUNTEX 0036, 0057, 0119 UHER 0347 UNIVERSUM 0064, 0131, 0132, 0291, 0373, 0397, 0519 VECTOR RESEARCH 0057 VESTEL 0064 VICTOR 0080, 0277, 0677, 0680 VIDEOSAT 0274 VIDIKRON 0081 VIDTECH 0205 VIEWSONIC 1782 VISION 0347 VOXSON 0190 WALTHAM 0383 WARDS 0057, 0081, 0205, 0893 WATSON 0064, 0347 WAYCON 0183 WHITE WESTINGHOUSE 0064, 0347, 0490, 0650 YAMAHA 0057, 0796, 0860, 2900, 2901, 2902 YAPSHE 0277 YOKO 0064, 0291 ZENITH 0044, 0119, 0205, 0490 VCR ASA ADMIRAL ADVENTURA AIKO AIWA 0064, 0108 0075 0027 0305 0027, 0064, 0334, 0375, 0379 AKAI 0068, 0342 AKIBA 0099 ALBA 0099, 0305, 0342, 0379 AMERICA ACTION 0305 AMERICAN HIGH 0062 AMSTRAD 0027 ANAM 0064, 0253, 0267, 0305, 0507 ANAM NATIONAL 0253, 1589 ANITECH 0099 ASHA 0267 ASUKA 0064 AUDIOVOX 0064, 0305 BAIRD 0027, 0068, 0131 BASIC LINE 0099, 0305 BEAUMARK 0267 BELL & HOWELL 0131 BLAUPUNKT 0253 BRANDT 0347 BRANDT ELECTRONIC 0068 BROKSONIC 0211, 0375, 1506 BUSH 0099, 0305, 0379 CCE 0099, 0305 CGE 0027 CALIX 0064 CANON 0062 CARVER 0108 CIMLINE CINERAL CITIZEN COLT COMBITECH CRAIG 0099 0305 0064, 0305, 1305 0099 0379 0064, 0074, 0099, 0267 CROWN 0099, 0305 CURTIS MATHES 0062, 0068, 0087, 1062 CYBERNEX 0267 CYRUS 0108 DAEWOO 0072, 0131, 0305, 0669, 1305 DANSAI 0099 DE GRAAF 0069 DECCA 0027, 0108 DENON 0069 DUAL 0068 DUMONT 0027, 0108, 0131 DYNATECH 0027 ESC 0267, 0305 ELCATECH 0099 ELECTROHOME 0064 ELECTROPHONIC 0064 EMEREX 0059 EMERSON 0027, 0062, 0064, 0070, 0072, 0211, 0267, 0305, 1305, 1506 FERGUSON 0068, 0347 FIDELITY 0027 FINLANDIA 0108, 0131 FINLUX 0027, 0069, 0108, 0131 FIRSTLINE 0064, 0070, 0072, 0099 FISHER 0074, 0131 FUJI 0060, 0062 FUJITSU 0027, 0072 FUNAI 0027 GE 0062, 0087, 0267, 0834, 1062, 1087 GEC 0108 GARRARD 0027 GENERAL 0072 GO VIDEO 0459 GOLDHAND 0099 GOLDSTAR 0064, 0252, 0507, 1264 GOODMANS 0027, 0064, 0099, 0305 GRADIENTE 0027 GRAETZ 0068, 0131, 0267 GRANADA 0108, 0131 GRANDIN 0027, 0064, 0099 GRUNDIG 0099, 0108, 0253, 0374 HCM 0099 HI-Q 0074 HANSEATIC 0064 HARLEY DAVIDSON 0027 HARMAN/KARDON 0108 HARWOOD 0099 HINARI 0099, 0267, 0379 HITACHI 0027, 0064, 0068, 0069, 0267 HUGHES NETWORK SYSTEMS 0069 HYPSON 0099 ITT 0068, 0131, 0267 ITV 0064, 0305 IMPERIAL 0027 INTERFUNK 0108 JVC JENSEN KEC KLH KAISUI KENWOOD KODAK KOLIN KORPEL LG 0068, 0072, 0094 0068 0064, 0305 0099 0099 0068, 0094 0062, 0064 0068, 0070 0099 0064, 0069, 0072, 0507 LXI 0064 LENCO 0305 LEYCO 0099 LLOYD’S 0027 LOEWE 0064, 0108, 1589 LOGIK 0099, 0267 LUXOR 0070, 0075, 0131 M ELECTRONIC 0027 MEI 0062 MGA 0070, 0267 MGN TECHNOLOGY 0267 MTC 0027, 0267 MAGNASONIC 1305 MAGNAVOX 0027, 0062, 0066, 0108, 1808 MAGNIN 0267 MANESTH 0072, 0099 MARANTZ 0062, 0108 MARTA 0064 MATSUI 0375, 0379 MATSUSHITA 0062 MEDION 0375 MEMOREX 0027, 0062, 0064, 0066, 0074, 0075, 0131, 0267, 0334, 0375, 1264 MEMPHIS 0099 METZ 0064, 0374, 1589 MINOLTA 0069 MITSUBISHI 0068, 0070, 0094, 0108, 0834 MOTOROLA 0062, 0075 MULTITECH 0027, 0099 MURPHY 0027 MYRYAD 0108 NAD 0131 NEC 0062, 0064, 0068, 0075, 0094, 0131 NATIONAL 0253 NECKERMANN 0108 NESCO 0099 NEWAVE 0064 NIKKO 0064 NOBLEX 0267 NOKIA 0068, 0131, 0267 NORDMENDE 0068, 0347 OCEANIC 0027, 0068 OKANO 0342, 0375 OLYMPUS 0062, 0253 OPTIMUS 0064, 0075, 0131, 0459 ORION 0211, 0375, 0379, 1506 OSAKI 0027, 0064, 0099 OTTO VERSAND 0108 PALLADIUM 0064, 0068, 0099 PANASONIC 0062, 0252, 0253, 0643, 1062, 1589 PATHE MARCONI 0068 PENNEY 0062, 0064, 0069, 0267, 1062, 1264 PENTAX 0069 PERDIO 0027 iv 1500_U-cv.fm Page 1 Wednesday, March 9, 2005 3:47 PM U PHILCO PHILIPS 0062 0062, 0108, 0645, 1108, 1208 PHONOLA 0108 PILOT 0064 PIONEER 0069, 0094, 0108 POLK AUDIO 0108 PROFITRONIC 0267 PROLINE 0027 PROSCAN 0087, 1087 PROTEC 0099 PULSAR 0066 PYE 0108 QUASAR 0062, 1062 QUELLE 0108 RCA 0062, 0069, 0087, 0267, 0834, 1062, 1087 RADIOSHACK 0027 RADIOLA 0108 RADIX 0064 RANDEX 0064 REALISTIC 0027, 0062, 0064, 0074, 0075, 0131 REOC 0375 REPLAYTV 0641, 0643 REX 0068 ROADSTAR 0064, 0099, 0267, 0305 RUNCO 0066 SBR 0108 SEG 0267 SEI 0108 STS 0069 SABA 0068, 0347 SALORA 0070 SAMPO 0064, 0075 SAMSUNG 0072, 0267, 0459 SANKY 0066, 0075 SANSUI 0027, 0068, 0094, 1506 SANYO 0074, 0131, 0267 SAVILLE 0379 SCHAUB LORENZ 0027, 0068, 0131 SCHNEIDER 0027, 0099, 0108 SCOTT 0070, 0072, 0211 SEARS 0027, 0062, 0064, 0069, 0074, 0131, 1264 SELECO 0068 SEMP 0072 SHARP 0075, 0834 SHINTOM 0099, 0131 SIEMENS 0064, 0108, 0131 SILVA 0064 SINGER 0072, 0099 SINUDYNE 0108 SONIC BLUE 0641, 0643 SONTEC 0064 SONY 0027, 0059, 0060, 0062, 0663, 1259 SUNKAI 0375 SUNSTAR 0027 SUNTRONIC 0027 SYLVANIA 0027, 0062, 0108, 0070, 1808 SYMPHONIC 0027 TMK 0267 TANDY 0027, 0131 TASHIKO 0027, 0064 TATUNG 0027, 0068, 0072, 0094, 0108 TEAC 0027, 0068, 0305, 0334, 0669 TECHNICS 0062, 0253 TECO 0062, 0064, 0068, 0075 TEKNIKA 0027, 0062, 0064 TELEAVIA 0068 TELEFUNKEN 0068, 0347 TENOSAL 0099 TENSAI 0027 THOMAS 0027 THOMSON 0068, 0087, 0094, 0347 THORN 0068, 0131 TIVO 0645, 0663 TOSHIBA 0068, 0070, 0072, 0094, 0108, 0872 TOTEVISION 0064, 0267 UHER 0267 UNITECH 0267 UNIVERSUM 0027, 0064, 0108, 0267 VECTOR 0072 VICTOR 0068, 0094 VIDEO CONCEPTS 0072 VIDEOMAGIC 0064 VIDEOSONIC 0267 VILLAIN 0027 WARDS 0027, 0062, 0069, 0074, 0075, 0087, 0099, 0108, 0267 WHITE WESTINGHOUSE 0099 XR-1000 0027, 0062, 0099 YAMAHA 0068 YAMISHI 0099 YOKAN 0099 YOKO 0267 ZENITH 0027, 0060, 0066, 1506 RX-V1500 AV Receiver © 2004 YAMAHA ELECTRONICS CORPORATION, USA 6660 ORANGETHORPE AVE., BUENA PARK, CALIF. 90620, U.S.A. YAMAHA CANADA MUSIC LTD. 135 MILNER AVE., SCARBOROUGH, ONTARIO M1S 3R1, CANADA YAMAHA ELECTRONIK EUROPA G.m.b.H. SIEMENSSTR. 22-34, 25462 RELLINGEN BEI HAMBURG, GERMANY YAMAHA ELECTRONIQUE FRANCE S.A. RUE AMBROISE CROIZAT BP70 CROISSY-BEAUBOURG 77312 MARNE-LA-VALLEE CEDEX02, FRANCE YAMAHA ELECTRONICS (UK) LTD. YAMAHA HOUSE, 200 RICKMANSWORTH ROAD WATFORD, HERTS WD18 7GQ, ENGLAND YAMAHA SCANDINAVIA A.B. J A WETTERGRENS GATA 1, BOX 30053, 400 43 VÄSTRA FRÖLUNDA, SWEDEN YAMAHA MUSIC AUSTRALIA PTY, LTD. 17-33 MARKET ST., SOUTH MELBOURNE, 3205 VIC., AUSTRALIA All rights reserved. OWNER'S MANUAL Printed in Malaysia WD64170-1-
1
-
2
-
3
-
4
-
5
-
6
-
7
-
8
-
9
-
10
-
11
-
12
-
13
-
14
-
15
-
16
-
17
-
18
-
19
-
20
-
21
-
22
-
23
-
24
-
25
-
26
-
27
-
28
-
29
-
30
-
31
-
32
-
33
-
34
-
35
-
36
-
37
-
38
-
39
-
40
-
41
-
42
-
43
-
44
-
45
-
46
-
47
-
48
-
49
-
50
-
51
-
52
-
53
-
54
-
55
-
56
-
57
-
58
-
59
-
60
-
61
-
62
-
63
-
64
-
65
-
66
-
67
-
68
-
69
-
70
-
71
-
72
-
73
-
74
-
75
-
76
-
77
-
78
-
79
-
80
-
81
-
82
-
83
-
84
-
85
-
86
-
87
-
88
-
89
-
90
-
91
-
92
-
93
-
94
-
95
-
96
-
97
-
98
-
99
-
100
-
101
-
102
-
103
-
104
Yamaha RX-V1500 El manual del propietario
- Categoría
- Receptor
- Tipo
- El manual del propietario
- Este manual también es adecuado para
En otros idiomas
- français: Yamaha RX-V1500 Le manuel du propriétaire
- italiano: Yamaha RX-V1500 Manuale del proprietario
- English: Yamaha RX-V1500 Owner's manual
- Deutsch: Yamaha RX-V1500 Bedienungsanleitung
- русский: Yamaha RX-V1500 Инструкция по применению
- Nederlands: Yamaha RX-V1500 de handleiding
- português: Yamaha RX-V1500 Manual do proprietário
- dansk: Yamaha RX-V1500 Brugervejledning
- polski: Yamaha RX-V1500 Instrukcja obsługi
- čeština: Yamaha RX-V1500 Návod k obsluze
- svenska: Yamaha RX-V1500 Bruksanvisning
- Türkçe: Yamaha RX-V1500 El kitabı
- suomi: Yamaha RX-V1500 Omistajan opas
- română: Yamaha RX-V1500 Manualul proprietarului
Documentos relacionados
-
Yamaha RX-497 El manual del propietario
-
Yamaha RX-V2600 El manual del propietario
-
-
Yamaha A-S201 El manual del propietario
-
-
-
-
-
-
Otros documentos
-
Philips 30PF9946/98 Manual de usuario
-
-
Sony SA-VA10 Manual de usuario
-
-
Kenwood KRF-X9070D El manual del propietario
-
Denon Professional DN-A300M Manual de usuario
-
-
Rotel RA-1062 Manual de usuario
-
Eden WT500 Guía de inicio rápido